[Title 49 CFR ]
[Code of Federal Regulations (annual edition) - October 1, 2009 Edition]
[From the U.S. Government Printing Office]



[[Page 1]]

          

          49


          Parts 572 to 999

                         Revised as of October 1, 2009


          Transportation
          



________________________

          Containing a codification of documents of general 
          applicability and future effect

          As of October 1, 2009
          With Ancillaries
                    Published by
                    Office of the Federal Register
                    National Archives and Records
                    Administration
                    A Special Edition of the Federal Register

[[Page ii]]

          U.S. GOVERNMENT OFFICIAL EDITION NOTICE

          Legal Status and Use of Seals and Logos
          
          
          The seal of the National Archives and Records Administration 
              (NARA) authenticates the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) as 
              the official codification of Federal regulations established 
              under the Federal Register Act. Under the provisions of 44 
              U.S.C. 1507, the contents of the CFR, a special edition of the 
              Federal Register, shall be judicially noticed. The CFR is 
              prima facie evidence of the original documents published in 
              the Federal Register (44 U.S.C. 1510).

          It is prohibited to use NARA's official seal and the stylized Code 
              of Federal Regulations logo on any republication of this 
              material without the express, written permission of the 
              Archivist of the United States or the Archivist's designee. 
              Any person using NARA's official seals and logos in a manner 
              inconsistent with the provisions of 36 CFR part 1200 is 
              subject to the penalties specified in 18 U.S.C. 506, 701, and 
              1017.

          Use of ISBN Prefix

          This is the Official U.S. Government edition of this publication 
              and is herein identified to certify its authenticity. Use of 
              the 0-16 ISBN prefix is for U.S. Government Printing Office 
              Official Editions only. The Superintendent of Documents of the 
              U.S. Government Printing Office requests that any reprinted 
              edition clearly be labeled as a copy of the authentic work 
              with a new ISBN.

              
              
          U . S . G O V E R N M E N T P R I N T I N G O F F I C E

          ------------------------------------------------------------------

          U.S. Superintendent of Documents  Washington, DC 
              20402-0001

          http://bookstore.gpo.gov

          Phone: toll-free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

[[Page iii]]







As of Oct. 1, 2009

Title 49, Parts 400 to 599

and

Title 49, Parts 600 to 999

Revised as of Oct. 1, 2008

Are Replaced by

Title 49, Parts 400 to 571

and

Title 49, Parts 572 to 999



[[Page v]]





                            Table of Contents



                                                                    Page
  Explanation.................................................     vii

  Title 49:
    SUBTITLE B--Other Regulations Relating to Transportation 
      (Continued)
          Chapter V--National Highway Traffic Safety 
          Administration, Department of Transportation, 
          (Continued)                                                5
          Chapter VI--Federal Transit Administration, 
          Department of Transportation                             399
          Chapter VII--National Railroad Passenger Corporation 
          (AMTRAK)                                                 511
          Chapter VIII--National Transportation Safety Board       527
  Finding Aids:
      Table of CFR Titles and Chapters........................     619
      Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR......     639
      List of CFR Sections Affected...........................     649

[[Page vi]]





                     ----------------------------

                     Cite this Code: CFR
                     To cite the regulations in 
                       this volume use title, 
                       part and section number. 
                       Thus, 49 CFR 572.1 refers 
                       to title 49, part 572, 
                       section 1.

                     ----------------------------

[[Page vii]]



                               EXPLANATION

    The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and 
permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive 
departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided 
into 50 titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal 
regulation. Each title is divided into chapters which usually bear the 
name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into 
parts covering specific regulatory areas.
    Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year 
and issued on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:

Title 1 through Title 16.................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27..................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41...................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50................................as of October 1

    The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each 
volume.

LEGAL STATUS

    The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially 
noticed (44 U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie 
evidence of the text of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).

HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS

    The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual 
issues of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used 
together to determine the latest version of any given rule.
    To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its 
revision date (in this case, October 1, 2009), consult the ``List of CFR 
Sections Affected (LSA),'' which is issued monthly, and the ``Cumulative 
List of Parts Affected,'' which appears in the Reader Aids section of 
the daily Federal Register. These two lists will identify the Federal 
Register page number of the latest amendment of any given rule.

EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES

    Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal 
Register since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source 
citations for the regulations are referred to by volume number and page 
number of the Federal Register and date of publication. Publication 
dates and effective dates are usually not the same and care must be 
exercised by the user in determining the actual effective date. In 
instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-off date for the 
Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective date. In 
those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register 
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be 
inserted following the text.

OMB CONTROL NUMBERS

    The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96-511) requires 
Federal agencies to display an OMB control number with their information 
collection request.

[[Page viii]]

Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as 
amendments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are 
placed as close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting 
requirements.

OBSOLETE PROVISIONS

    Provisions that become obsolete before the revision date stated on 
the cover of each volume are not carried. Code users may find the text 
of provisions in effect on a given date in the past by using the 
appropriate numerical list of sections affected. For the period before 
January 1, 2001, consult either the List of CFR Sections Affected, 1949-
1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, or 1986-2000, published in eleven separate 
volumes. For the period beginning January 1, 2001, a ``List of CFR 
Sections Affected'' is published at the end of each CFR volume.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

    What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was 
established by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the 
requirement to publish regulations in the Federal Register by referring 
to materials already published elsewhere. For an incorporation to be 
valid, the Director of the Federal Register must approve it. The legal 
effect of incorporation by reference is that the material is treated as 
if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C. 552(a)). 
This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force 
of law.
    What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the 
Federal Register will approve an incorporation by reference only when 
the requirements of 1 CFR part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which 
approval is based are:
    (a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of 
material published in the Federal Register.
    (b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent 
necessary to afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative 
process.
    (c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for 
publication in accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
    What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If 
you have any problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed as 
an approved incorporation by reference, please contact the agency that 
issued the regulation containing that incorporation. If, after 
contacting the agency, you find the material is not available, please 
notify the Director of the Federal Register, National Archives and 
Records Administration, Washington DC 20408, or call 202-741-6010.

CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES

    A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a 
separate volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR Index 
and Finding Aids. This volume contains the Parallel Table of Authorities 
and Rules. A list of CFR titles, chapters, subchapters, and parts and an 
alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are also included in 
this volume.
    An index to the text of ``Title 3--The President'' is carried within 
that volume.
    The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. 
This index is based on a consolidation of the ``Contents'' entries in 
the daily Federal Register.
    A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to 
the revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.




[[Page ix]]



REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL

    There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing 
in the Code of Federal Regulations.

INQUIRIES

    For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this 
volume, contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency's name appears at 
the top of odd-numbered pages.
    For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202-741-6000 
or write to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National 
Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC 20408 or e-mail 
fedreg.info@nara.gov.

SALES

    The Government Printing Office (GPO) processes all sales and 
distribution of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call toll-free, 
866-512-1800, or DC area, 202-512-1800, M-F 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or 
fax your order to 202-512-2250, 24 hours a day. For payment by check, 
write to: US Government Printing Office - New Orders, P.O. Box 979050, 
St. Louis, MO 63197-9000. For GPO Customer Service call 202-512-1803.

ELECTRONIC SERVICES

    The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, the LSA (List of 
CFR Sections Affected), The United States Government Manual, the Federal 
Register, Public Laws, Public Papers, Daily Compilation of Presidential 
Documents and the Privacy Act Compilation are available in electronic 
format via Federalregister.gov. For more information, contact Electronic 
Information Dissemination Services, U.S. Government Printing Office. 
Phone 202-512-1530, or 888-293-6498 (toll-free). E-mail, 
gpoaccess@gpo.gov.
    The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the 
National Archives and Records Administration's (NARA) World Wide Web 
site for public law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related 
information. Connect to NARA's web site at www.archives.gov/federal-
register. The NARA site also contains links to GPO Access.

    Raymond A. Mosley,
    Director,
    Office of the Federal Register.
    October 1, 2009.







[[Page xi]]



                               THIS TITLE

    Title 49--Transportation is composed of nine volumes. The parts in 
these volumes are arranged in the following order: Parts 1-99, parts 
100-185, parts 186-199, parts 200-299, parts 300-399, parts 400-571, 
parts 572-999, parts 1000-1199, and part 1200 to end. The first volume 
(parts 1-99) contains current regulations issued under subtitle A--
Office of the Secretary of Transportation; the second volume (parts 100-
185) and the third volume (parts 186-199) contain the current 
regulations issued under chapter I--Pipeline and Hazardous Materials 
Safety Administration (DOT); the fourth volume (parts 200-299) contains 
the current regulations issued under chapter II--Federal Railroad 
Administration (DOT); the fifth volume (parts 300-399) contains the 
current regulations issued under chapter III--Federal Motor Carrier 
Safety Administration (DOT); the sixth volume (parts 400-571) contains 
the current regulations issued under chapter IV--Coast Guard (DHS), and 
some of chapter V--National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (DOT); 
the seventh volume (parts 572-999) contains the rest of the regulations 
issued under chapter IV, and the current regulations issued under 
chapter VI--Federal Transit Administration (DOT), chapter VII--National 
Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK), and chapter VIII--National 
Transportation Safety Board; the eighth volume (parts 1000-1199) 
contains the current regulations issued under chapter X--Surface 
Transportation Board and the ninth volume (part 1200 to end) contains 
the current regulations issued under chapter X--Surface Transportation 
Board, chapter XI--Research and Innovative Technology Administration, 
and chapter XII--Transportation Security Administration, Department of 
Transportation. The contents of these volumes represent all current 
regulations codified under this title of the CFR as of October 1, 2009.

    In the volume containing parts 100-185, see Sec.  172.101 for the 
Hazardous Materials Table. The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 
appear in part 571.

    Redesignation tables for chapter III--Federal Motor Carrier Safety 
Administration, Department of Transportation and chapter XII--
Transportation Security Administration, Department of Transportation 
appear in the Finding Aids section of the fifth and ninth volumes.

    For this volume, Susannah C. Hurley was Chief Editor. The Code of 
Federal Regulations publication program is under the direction of 
Michael L. White, assisted by Ann Worley.

[[Page 1]]



                        TITLE 49--TRANSPORTATION




                  (This book contains parts 572 to 999)

  --------------------------------------------------------------------

  SUBTITLE B--Other Regulations Relating to Transportation (Continued)

                                                                    Part

chapter v--National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 
  Department of Transportation (Continued)..................         572

chapter vi--Federal Transit Administration, Department of 
  Transportation............................................         601

chapter vii--National Railroad Passenger Corporation 
  (AMTRAK)..................................................         700

chapter viii--National Transportation Safety Board..........         800

[[Page 3]]

  Subtitle B--Other Regulations Relating to Transportation (Continued)

[[Page 5]]



CHAPTER V--NATIONAL HIGHWAY TRAFFIC SAFETY ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF 
                       TRANSPORTATION, (Continued)




  --------------------------------------------------------------------
Part                                                                Page
572             Anthropomorphic test devices................           7
573             Defect and noncompliance responsibility and 
                    reports.................................         160
574             Tire identification and recordkeeping.......         174
575             Consumer information........................         183
576             Record retention............................         216
577             Defect and noncompliance notification.......         217
578             Civil and criminal penalties................         227
579             Reporting of information and communications 
                    about potential defects.................         230
580             Odometer disclosure requirements............         255
581             Bumper standard.............................         264
582             Insurance cost information regulation.......         268
583             Automobile parts content labeling...........         269
585             Phase-in reporting requirements.............         281
586

[Reserved]

587             Deformable barriers.........................         296
588             Child restraint systems recordkeeping 
                    requirements............................         305
589-590

[Reserved]

591             Importation of vehicles and equipment 
                    subject to Federal safety, bumper and 
                    theft prevention standards..............         306
592             Registered importers of vehicles not 
                    originally manufactured to conform to 
                    the Federal motor vehicle safety 
                    standards...............................         317
593             Determinations that a vehicle not originally 
                    manufactured to conform to the Federal 
                    motor vehicle safety standards is 
                    eligible for importation................         330
594             Schedule of fees authorized by 49 U.S.C. 
                    30141...................................         344
595             Make inoperative exemptions.................         349
596-598

 [Reserved]

[[Page 6]]

599             Requirements and Procedures for Consumer 
                    Assistance to Recycle and Save Act 
                    program.................................         366

[[Page 7]]



PART 572_ANTHROPOMORPHIC TEST DEVICES--Table of Contents




                            Subpart A_General

Sec.
572.1 Scope.
572.2 Purpose.
572.3 Application.
572.4 Terminology.

                     Subpart B_50th Percentile Male

572.5 General description.
572.6 Head.
572.7 Neck.
572.8 Thorax.
572.9 Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis.
572.10 Limbs.
572.11 Test conditions and instrumentation.

                       Subpart C_3-Year-Old Child

572.15 General description.
572.16 Head.
572.17 Neck.
572.18 Thorax.
572.19 Lumbar spine, abdomen and pelvis.
572.20 Limbs.
572.21 Test conditions and instrumentation.

                      Subpart D_6-Month-Old Infant

572.25 General description.

                     Subpart E_Hybrid III Test Dummy

572.30 Incorporated materials.
572.31 General description.
572.32 Head.
572.33 Neck.
572.34 Thorax.
572.35 Limbs.
572.36 Test conditions and instrumentation.

            Subpart F_Side Impact Dummy 50th Percentile Male

572.40 Incorporated materials.
572.41 General description.
572.42 Thorax.
572.43 Lumbar spine and pelvis.
572.44 Instrumentation and test conditions.

Appendix A to Subpart F

Subparts G-H [Reserved]

                       Subpart I_6-Year-Old Child

572.70 Incorporation by reference.
572.71 General description.
572.72 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.73 Neck assembly and test procedure.
572.74 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.75 Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly and test procedure.
572.76 Limbs assembly and test procedure.
572.77 Instrumentation.
572.78 Performance test conditions.

Figures to Subpart I

                       Subpart J_9-Month Old Child

572.80 Incorporated materials.
572.81 General description.
572.82 Head.
572.83 Head-neck.
572.84 Thorax.
572.85 Lumbar spine flexure.
572.86 Test conditions and dummy adjustment.

                        Subpart K_Newborn Infant

572.90 Incorporation by reference.
572.91 General description.

                     Subpart L_Free Motion Headform

572.100 Incorporation by reference.
572.101 General description.
572.102 Drop test.
572.103 Test conditions and instrumentation.

        Subpart M_Side Impact Hybrid Dummy 50th Percentile Male.

572.110 Materials incorporated by reference.
572.111 General description.
572.112 Head assembly.
572.113 Neck assembly.
572.114 Thorax.
572.115 Lumbar spine and pelvis.
572.116 Instrumentation and test conditions.

          Subpart N_Six-year-old Child Test Dummy, Beta Version

572.120 Incorporation by reference.
572.121 General description.
572.122 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.123 Neck assembly and test procedure.
572.124 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.125 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test 
          procedure.
572.126 Knees and knee impact test procedure.
572.127 Test conditions and instrumentation.

Figures to Subpart N

  Subpart O_Hybrid III 5th Percentile Female Test Dummy, Alpha Version

572.130 Incorporation by reference.
572.131 General description.
572.132 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.133 Neck assembly and test procedure.
572.134 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.135 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test 
          procedure.
572.136 Knees and knee impact test procedure.

[[Page 8]]

572.137 Test conditions and instrumentation.

Figures to Subpart O

  Subpart P_Hybrid III 3-Year-Old Child Crash Test Dummy, Alpha Version

572.140 Incorporation by reference.
572.141 General description.
572.142 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.143 Neck-headform assembly and test procedure.
572.144 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.145 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test 
          procedure.
572.146 Test condition and instrumentation.

Figures to Subpart P

   Subpart R_CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant Crash Test Dummy, Alpha Version

572.150 Incorporation by reference.
572.151 General description.
572.152 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.153 Neck-headform assembly and test procedure.
572.154 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.155 Test condition and instrumentation.

Figures to Subpart R

       Subpart S_Hybrid III Six-Year-Old Weighted Child Test Dummy

572.160 Incorporation by reference.
572.161 General description.
572.162 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.163 Neck assembly and test procedure.
572.164 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.165 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test 
          procedure.
572.166 Knees and knee impact test procedure.
572.167 Test conditions and instrumentation.

Figures to Subpart S

Subpart T [Reserved]

 Subpart U_ ES	2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 50th Percentile Adult 
                                  Male

572.180 Incorporated materials.
572.181 General description.
572.182 Head assembly.
572.183 Neck assembly.
572.184 Shoulder assembly.
572.185 Thorax (upper torso) assembly.
572.186 Abdomen assembly.
572.187 Lumbar spine.
572.188 Pelvis.
572.189 Instrumentation and test conditions.

Appendix A to Subpart U of Part 572--Figures

  Subpart V, SID IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, Small Adult Female

572.190 Incorporated materials.
572.191 General description.
572.192 Head assembly.
572.193 Neck assembly.
572.194 Shoulder.
572.195 Thorax with arm.
572.196 Thorax without arm.
572.197 Abdomen.
572.198 Pelvis acetabulum.
572.199 Pelvis iliac.
572.200 Instrumentation and test conditions.

Appendix A to Subpart V of Part 572--Figures

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30117 and 30166; delegation 
of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.

    Editorial Notes: 1. For compliance provisions relating to a 
vehicle's conformance with the performance requirements of Standard No. 
208 (Sec.  571.208) relating to the part 572 test dummy, see the 
``Effective Date Note'' at subpart E of this part.

    2. Nomenclature changes to part 572 appear at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 
2004.



                            Subpart A_General



Sec.  572.1  Scope.

    This part describes the anthropomorphic test devices that are to be 
used for compliance testing of motor vehicles and motor vehicle 
equipment with motor vehicle safety standards.

[60 FR 43058, Aug. 18, 1995]



Sec.  572.2  Purpose.

    The design and performance criteria specified in this part are 
intended to describe measuring tools with sufficient precision to give 
repetitive and correlative results under similar test conditions and to 
reflect adequately the protective performance of a vehicle or item of 
motor vehicle equipment with respect to human occupants.

[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7151, Feb. 7, 1977]



Sec.  572.3  Application.

    This part does not in itself impose duties or liabilities on any 
person. It is a description of tools that measure the performance of 
occupant protection systems required by the safety standards that 
incorporate it. It is designed to be referenced by, and become a part

[[Page 9]]

of, the test procedures specified in motor vehicle safety standards such 
as Standard No. 208, Occupant Crash Protection.

[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]



Sec.  572.4  Terminology.

    (a) The term dummy, when used in this subpart A, refers to any test 
device described by this part. The term dummy, when used in any other 
subpart of this part, refers to the particular dummy described in that 
part.
    (b) Terms describing parts of the dummy, such as head, are the same 
as names for corresponding parts of the human body.
    (c) The term unimodal, when used in subparts C and I, refers to an 
acceleration-time curve which has only one prominent peak.

[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977; 44 
FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979; 56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991]



                     Subpart B_50th Percentile Male



Sec.  572.5  General description.

    (a) The dummy consists of the component assemblies specified in 
Figure 1, which are described in their entirety by means of 
approximately 250 drawings and specifications that are grouped by 
component assemblies under the following nine headings:

SA 150 M070--Right arm assembly
SA 150 M071--Left arm assembly
SA 150 M050--Lumbar spine assembly
SA 150 M060--Pelvis and abdomen assembly
SA 150 M080--Right leg assembly
SA 150 M081--Left leg assembly
SA 150 M010--Head assembly
SA 150 M020--Neck assembly
SA 150 M030--Shoulder-thorax assembly.

    (b) The drawings and specifications referred to in this regulation 
that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by 
reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The 
Director of the Federal Register has approved the materials incorporated 
by reference. For materials subject to change, only the specific version 
approved by the Director of the Federal Register and specified in the 
regulation are incorporated. A notice of any change will be published in 
the Federal Register. As a convenience to the reader, the materials 
incorporated by reference are listed in the Finding Aid Table found at 
the end of this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations.
    (c) The materials incorporated by reference are available for 
examination in Docket 73-08, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration, Room 5109, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, 
DC, 20590. Copies may be obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc., 
1216 K Street NW., Washington, DC 20005 ((202) 628-6667). The drawings 
and specifications are also on file in the reference library of the 
Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records 
Administration, Washington, DC.
    (d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that throughout 
the range of motion and also under crash impact conditions there is no 
contact between metallic elements except for contacts that exist under 
static conditions.
    (e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used 
in vehicle tests specified in Standard No. 208 of this chapter 
(571.208).
    (f) A specimen of the dummy is available for surface measurements 
and access can be arranged by contacting: Office of Vehicle Safety 
Standards, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh 
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.

[50 FR 25423, June 19, 1985]



Sec.  572.6  Head.

    (a) The head consists of the assembly shown as number SA 150 M010 in 
Figure 1 and conforms to each of the drawings subtended by number SA 150 
M010.
    (b) When the head is dropped from a height of 10 inches in 
accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant 
accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the head 
form in accordance with Sec.  572.11(b) shall be not less than 210g, and 
not more than 260g. The acceleration/time curve for the test shall be 
unimodal and shall lie at or above the 100g level

[[Page 10]]

for an interval not less than 0.9 milliseconds and not more than 1.5 
milliseconds. The lateral acceleration vector shall not exceed 10g.
    (c) Test procedure:
    (1) Suspend the head as shown in Figure 2, so that the lowest point 
on the forehead is 0.5 inches below the lowest point on the dummy's nose 
when the midsagittal plane is vertical.
    (2) Drop the head from the specified height by means that ensures 
instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate, 2 
inches thick and 2 feet square, which has a clean, dry surface and any 
microfinish of not less than 8 microinches (rms) and not more than 80 
microinches (rms).
    (3) Allow a time period of at least 2 hours between successive tests 
on the same head.

[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]



Sec.  572.7  Neck.

    (a) The neck consists of the assembly shown as number SA 150 M020 in 
Figure 1 and conforms to each of the drawings subtended by number SA 150 
M020.
    (b) When the neck is tested with the head in accordance with 
paragraph (c) of this section, the head shall rotate in reference to the 
pendulum's longitudinal centerline a total of 68[deg] 5[deg] about its center of gravity, rotating to the 
extent specified in the following table at each indicated point in time, 
measured from impact, with a chordal displacement measured at its center 
of gravity that is within the limits specified. The chordal displacement 
at time T is defined as the straight line distance between (1) the 
position relative to the pendulum arm of the head center of gravity at 
time zero, and (2) the position relative to the pendulum arm of the head 
center of gravity at time T as illustrated by Figure 3. The peak 
resultant acceleration recorded at the location of the accelerometers 
mounted in the head form in accordance with Sec.  572.11(b) shall not 
exceed 26g. The pendulum shall not reverse direction until the head's 
center of gravity returns to the original zero time position relative to 
the pendulum arm.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                            Chordal Displacement
                       Rotation (degrees)                         Time (ms) (2+.08T)      minus0.5)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0...............................................................                   0                     0.0
30..............................................................                  30                     2.6
60..............................................................                  46                     4.8
Maximum.........................................................                  60                     5.5
60..............................................................                  75                     4.8
30..............................................................                  95                     2.6
0...............................................................                 112                     0.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Test procedure: (1) Mount the head and neck on a rigid pendulum 
as specified in Figure 4, so that the head's midsagittal plane is 
vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum's 
longitudinal centerline. Mount the neck directly to the pendulum as 
shown in Figure 4.
    (2) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height 
such that the velocity at impact is 23.5 2.0 feet 
per second (fps), measured at the center of the accelerometer specified 
in Figure 4.
    (3) Decelerate the pendulum to a stop with an acceleration-time 
pulse described as follows:
    (i) Establish 5g and 20g levels on the a-t curve.
    (ii) Establish t1 at the point where the rising a-t curve 
first crosses the 5g level, t2 at the point where the rising 
a-t curve first crosses the 20g level, t2 at the point where 
the decaying a-t curve last crosses the 20g level, and t4 at 
the point where the decaying a-t curve first crosses the 5g level.
    (iii) t2-t1 shall be not more than 3 
milliseconds.
    (iv) t3-t2 shall be not less than 25 
milliseconds and not more than 30 milliseconds.
    (v) t4-t3 shall be not more than 10 
milliseconds.
    (vi) The average deceleration between t2 and 
t3 shall be not less than 20g and not more than 24g.
    (4) Allow the neck to flex without impact of the head or neck with 
any object other than the pendulum arm.

[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977; 42 
FR 12176, Mar. 3, 1977; 45 FR 40596, June 16, 1980]



Sec.  572.8  Thorax.

    (a) The thorax consists of the assembly shown as number SA 150 M030 
in Figure 1, and conforms to each of the

[[Page 11]]

drawings subtended by number SA 150 M030.
    (b) The thorax contains enough unobstructed interior space behind 
the rib cage to permit the midpoint of the sternum to be depressed 2 
inches without contact between the rib cage and other parts of the dummy 
or its instrumentation, except for instruments specified in paragraph 
(d)(7) of this section.
    (c) When impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec.  572.11(a) at 
14 fps and at 22 fps in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section, 
the thorax shall resist with forces measured by the test probe of not 
more than 1450 pounds and 2250 pounds, respectively, and shall deflect 
by amounts not greater than 1.1 inches and 1.7 inches, respectively. The 
internal hysteresis in each impact shall not be less than 50 percent and 
not more than 70 percent.
    (d) Test procedure: (1) With the dummy seated without back support 
on a surface as specified in Sec.  572.11(i) and in the orientation 
specified in Sec.  572.11(i), adjust the dummy arms and legs until they 
are extended horizontally forward parallel to the midsagittal plane.
    (2) Place the longitudinal center line of the test probe so that it 
is 17.7 0.1 inches above the seating surface at 
impact.
    (3) Align the test probe specified in Sec.  572.11(a) so that at 
impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within 2 degrees of a 
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (4) Adjust the dummy so that the surface area on the thorax 
immediately adjacent to the projected longitudinal center line of the 
test probe is vertical. Limb support, as needed to achieve and maintain 
this orientation, may be provided by placement of a steel rod of any 
diameter not less than one-quarter of an inch and not more than three-
eighths of an inch, with hemispherical ends, vertically under the limb 
at its projected geometric center.
    (5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that its longitudinal 
centerline falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy's 
midsagittal plane at the moment of impact.
    (6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no 
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
    (7) Measure the horizontal deflection of the sternum relative to the 
thoracic spine along the line established by the longitudinal centerline 
of the probe at the moment of impact, using a potentiometer mounted 
inside the sternum.
    (8) Measure hysteresis by determining the ratio of the area between 
the loading and unloading portions of the force deflection curve to the 
area under the loading portion of the curve.

[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]



Sec.  572.9  Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis.

    (a) The lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis consist of the assemblies 
designated as numbers SA 150 M050 and SA 150 M060 in Figure 1 and 
conform to the drawings subtended by these numbers.
    (b) When subjected to continuously applied force in accordance with 
paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar spine assembly shall flex by 
an amount that permits the rigid thoracic spine to rotate from its 
initial position in accordance with Figure 11 by the number of degrees 
shown below at each specified force level, and straighten upon removal 
of the force to within 12 degrees of its initial position in accordance 
with Figure 11.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         Force ( 6
                                                            pounds)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0....................................................               0
20...................................................              28
30...................................................              40
40...................................................              52
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Test procedure: (1) Assemble the thorax, lumbar spine, pelvic, 
and upper leg assemblies (above the femur force transducers), ensuring 
that all component surfaces are clean, dry, and untreated unless 
otherwise specified, and attach them to the horizontal fixture shown in 
Figure 5 at the two link rod pins and with the mounting brackets for the 
lumbar test fixtures illustrated in Figures 6 to 9.
    (2) Attach the rear mounting of the pelvis to the pelvic instrument 
cavity rear face at the four \1/4\ cap screw holes and attach 
the front mounting at the femur axial rotation joint. Tighten the

[[Page 12]]

mountings so that the pelvic-lumbar adapter is horizontal and adjust the 
femur friction plungers at each hip socket joint to 240 inch-pounds 
torque.
    (3) Flex the thorax forward 50[deg] and then rearward as necessary 
to return it to its initial position in accordance with Figure 11 
unsupported by external means.
    (4) Apply a forward force perpendicular to the thorax instrument 
cavity rear face in the midsagittal plane 15 inches above the top 
surface of the pelvic-lumbar adapter. Apply the force at any torso 
deflection rate between .5 and 1.5 degrees per second up to 40[deg] of 
flexion but no further, continue to apply for 10 seconds that force 
necessary to maintain 40[deg] of flexion, and record the force with an 
instrument mounted to the thorax as shown in Figure 5. Release all force 
as rapidly as possible and measure the return angle 3 minutes after the 
release.
    (d) When the abdomen is subjected to continuously applied force in 
accordance with paragraph (e) of this section, the abdominal force-
deflection curve shall be within the two curves plotted in Figure 10.
    (e) Test procedure: (1) Place the assembled thorax, lumbar spine and 
pelvic assemblies in a supine position on a flat, rigid, smooth, dry, 
clean horizontal surface, ensuring that all component surfaces are 
clean, dry, and untreated unless otherwise specified.
    (2) Place a rigid cylinder 6 inches in diameter and 18 inches long 
transversely across the abdomen, so that the cylinder is symmetrical 
about the midsagittal plane, with its longitudinal centerline horizontal 
and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane at a point 9.2 inches above 
the bottom line of the buttocks, measured with the dummy positioned in 
accordance with Figure 11.
    (3) Establish the zero deflection point as the point at which a 
force of 10 pounds has been reached.
    (4) Apply a vertical downward force through the cylinder at any rate 
between 0.25 and 0.35 inches per second.
    (5) Guide the cylinder so that it moves without significant lateral 
or rotational movement.

[42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]



Sec.  572.10  Limbs.

    (a) The limbs consist of the assemblies shown as numbers SA 150 
M070, SA 150 M071, SA 150 M080, and SA 150 M081 in Figure 1 and conform 
to the drawings subtended by these numbers.
    (b) When each knee is impacted at 6.9 ft/sec. in accordance with 
paragraph (c) of this section, the maximum force on the femur shall be 
not more than 2500 pounds and not less than 1850 pounds, with a duration 
above 1000 pounds of not less than 1.7 milliseconds.
    (c) Test procedure: (1) Seat the dummy without back support on a 
surface as specified in Sec.  572.11(i) that is 17.3 0.2 inches above a horizontal surface, oriented as 
specified in Sec.  572.11(i), and with the hip joint adjustment at any 
setting between 1g and 2g. Place the dummy legs in planes parallel to 
its midsagittal plane (knee pivot centerline perpendicular to the 
midsagittal plane) and with the feet flat on the horizontal surface. 
Adjust the feet and lower legs until the lines between the midpoints of 
the knee pivots and the ankle pivots are at any angle not less than 2 
degrees and not more than 4 degrees rear of the vertical, measured at 
the centerline of the knee pivots.
    (2) Reposition the dummy if necessary so that the rearmost point of 
the lower legs at the level one inch below the seating surface remains 
at any distance not less than 5 inches and not more than 6 inches 
forward of the forward edge of the seat.
    (3) Align the test probe specified in Sec.  572.11(a) so that at 
impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within 2[deg] with the longitudinal centerline of the femur.
    (4) Impact the knee with the test probe moving horizontally and 
parallel to the midsagittal plane at the specified velocity.
    (5) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no 
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.

[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7153, Feb. 7, 1977]



Sec.  572.11  Test conditions and instrumentation.

    (a) The test probe used for thoracic and knee impact tests is a 
cylinder 6 inches in diameter that weighs 51.5

[[Page 13]]

pounds including instrumentation. Its impacting end has a flat right 
face that is rigid and that has an edge radius of 0.5 inches.
    (b) Accelerometers are mounted in the head on the horizontal 
transverse bulkhead shown in the drawings subreferenced under assembly 
No. SA 150 M010 in Figure 1, so that their sensitive axes intersect at a 
point in the midsagittal plane 0.5 inches above the horizontal bulkhead 
and 1.9 inches ventral of the vertical mating surface of the skull with 
the skull cover. One accelerometer is aligned with its sensitive axis 
perpendicular to the horizontal bulkhead in the midsagittal plane and 
with its seismic mass center at any distance up to 0.3 inches superior 
to the axial intersection point. Another accelerometer is aligned with 
its sensitive axis parallel to the horizontal bulkhead and perpendicular 
to the midsagittal plane, and with its seismic mass center at any 
distance up to 1.3 inches to the left of the axial intersection point 
(left side of dummy is the same as that of man). A third accelerometer 
is aligned with its sensitive axis parallel to the horizontal bulkhead 
in the midsagittal plane, and with its seismic mass center at any 
distance up to 1.3 inches dorsal to the axial intersection point.
    (c) Accelerometers are mounted in the thorax by means of a bracket 
attached to the rear vertical surface (hereafter ``attachment surface'') 
of the thoracic spine so that their sensitive axes intersect at a point 
in the midsagittal plane 0.8 inches below the upper surface of the plate 
to which the neck mounting bracket is attached and 3.2 inches 
perpendicularly forward of the surface to which the accelerometer 
bracket is attached. One accelerometer has its sensitive axis oriented 
parallel to the attachment surface in the midsagittal plane, with its 
seismic mass center at any distance up to 1.3 inches inferior to the 
intersection of the sensitive axes specified above. Another 
accelerometer has its sensitive axis oriented parallel to the attachment 
surface and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with its seismic 
mass center at any distance up to 0.2 inches to the right of the 
intersection of the sensitive axes specified above. A third 
accelerometer has its sensitive axis oriented perpendicular to the 
attachment surface in the midsagittal plane, with its seismic mass 
center at any distance up to 1.3 inches dorsal to the intersection of 
the sensitive axes specified above. Accelerometers are oriented with the 
dummy in the position specified in Sec.  572.11(i).
    (d) A force-sensing device is mounted axially in each femur shaft so 
that the transverse centerline of the sensing element is 4.25 inches 
from the knee's center of rotation.
    (e) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed 
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part are 
recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of 
SAE Recommended Practice J211a, December 1971, with channel classes as 
follows:
    (1) Head acceleration--Class 1000.
    (2) Pendulum acceleration--Class 60.
    (3) Thorax acceleration--Class 180.
    (4) Thorax compression--Class 180.
    (5) Femur force--Class 600.
    (f) The mountings for sensing devices have no resonance frequency 
within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel 
class.
    (g) Limb joints are set at 1g, barely restraining the weight of the 
limb when it is extended horizontally. The force required to move a limb 
segment does not exceed 2g throughout the range of limb motion.
    (h) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 
[deg]F to 78 [deg]F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 
percent after exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of 
not less than 4 hours.
    (i) For the performance tests specified in Sec. Sec.  572.8, 572.9, 
and 572.10, the dummy is positioned in accordance with Figure 11 as 
follows:
    (1) The dummy is placed on a flat, rigid, smooth, clean, dry, 
horizontal, steel test surface whose length and width dimensions are not 
less than 16 inches, so that the dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical 
and centered on the test surface and the rearmost points on its lower 
legs at the level of the test surface are at any distance not less than 
5 inches and not more than 6 inches forward of the forward edge of the 
test surface.

[[Page 14]]

    (2) The pelvis is adjusted so that the upper surface of the lumbar-
pelvic adapter is horizontal.
    (3) The shoulder yokes are adjusted so that they are at the midpoint 
of their anterior-posterior travel with their upper surfaces horizontal.
    (4) The dummy is adjusted so that the rear surfaces of the shoulders 
and buttocks are tangent to a transverse vertical plane.
    (5) The upper legs are positioned symmetrically about the 
midsagittal plane so that the distance between the knee pivot bolt heads 
is 11.6 inches.
    (6) The lower legs are positioned in planes parallel to the 
midsagittal plane so that the lines between the midpoint of the knee 
pivots and the ankle pivots are vertical.
    (j) The dummy's dimensions, as specified in drawing number SA 150 
M002, are determined as follows:
    (1) With the dummy seated as specified in paragraph (i) of this 
section, the head is adjusted and secured so that its occiput is 1.7 
inches forward of the transverse vertical plane with the vertical mating 
surface of the skull with its cover parallel to the transverse vertical 
plane.
    (2) The thorax is adjusted and secured so that the rear surface of 
the chest accelerometer mounting cavity is inclined 3[deg] forward of 
vertical.
    (3) Chest and waist circumference and chest depth measurements are 
taken with the dummy positioned in accordance with paragraphs (j) (1) 
and (2) of this section.
    (4) The chest skin and abdominal sac are removed and all following 
measurements are made without them.
    (5) Seated height is measured from the seating surface to the 
uppermost point on the head-skin surface.
    (6) Shoulder pivot height is measured from the seating surface to 
the center of the arm elevation pivot.
    (7) H-point locations are measured from the seating surface to the 
center of the holes in the pelvis flesh covering in line with the hip 
motion ball.
    (8) Knee pivot distance from the backline is measured to the center 
of the knee pivot bolt head.
    (9) Knee pivot distance from floor is measured from the center of 
the knee pivot bolt head to the bottom of the heel when the foot is 
horizontal and pointing forward.
    (10) Shoulder width measurement is taken at arm elevation pivot 
center height with the centerlines between the elbow pivots and the 
shoulder pivots vertical.
    (11) Hip width measurement is taken at widest point of pelvic 
section.
    (k) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or 
fully assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than 
30 minutes unless otherwise noted.
    (l) Surfaces of dummy components are not painted except as specified 
in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.

[[Page 15]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.152


[[Page 16]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.153


[[Page 17]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.154


[[Page 18]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.155


[[Page 19]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.156


[[Page 20]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.157


[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7153, Feb. 7, 1977]



                       Subpart C_3-Year-Old Child

    Source: 44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.15  General description.

    (a) The dummy consists of the component assemblies specified in 
drawing SA 103C 001, which are described in their entirety by means of 
approximately 122 drawings and specifications

[[Page 21]]

and an Operation and Maintenance Manual, dated May 28, 1976. The 
drawings and specifications are grouped by component assemblies under 
the following thirteen headings:

SA 103C 010 Head Assembly
SA 103C 020 Neck Assembly
SA 103C 030 Torso Assembly
SA 103C 041 Upper Arm Assembly Left
SA 103C 042 Upper Arm Assembly Right
SA 103C 051 Forearm Hand Assembly Left
SA 103C 052 Forearm Hand Assembly Right
SA 103C 061Upper Leg Assembly Left
SA 103C 062 Upper Leg Assembly Right
SA 103C 071 Lower Leg Assembly Left
SA 103C 072 Lower Leg Assembly Right
SA 103C 081 Foot Assembly left
SA 103C 082 Foot Assembly Right.

    (b) The drawings, specifications, and operation and maintenance 
manual referred to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are 
hereby incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are 
thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal 
Register has approved the materials incorporated by reference. For 
materials subject to change, only the specific version approved by the 
Director of the Federal Register and specified in the regulation are 
incorporated. A notice of any change will be published in the Federal 
Register. As a convenience to the reader, the materials incorporated by 
reference are listed in the Finding Aid Table found at the end of this 
volume of the Code of Federal Regulations.
    (c) The materials incorporated by reference are available for 
examination in Docket 78-09, Room 5109, Docket Section, National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC 
20590. Copies may be obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc., 
1216 K Street NW., Washington, DC 20005 ((202) 628-6667). The materials 
are also on file in the reference library of the Office of the Federal 
Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC.
    (d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that throughout 
the range of motion and also under simulated crash-impact conditions 
there is no contact between metallic elements except for contacts that 
exist under static conditions.
    (e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used 
in vehicle tests specified in Standard No. 213 of this chapter (Sec.  
571.213).
    (f) The patterns of all cast and molded parts for reproduction of 
the molds needed in manufacturing of the dummies can be obtained on a 
loan basis by manufacturers of the testes dummies, or others if need is 
shown, from: Office of Vehicle Safety Standards, National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC 
20590.

[50 FR 25423, June 19, 1985]



Sec.  572.16  Head.

    (a) The head consists of the assembly designated as SA 103C 010 on 
drawing No. SA 103C 001, and conforms to either--
    (1) Each item specified on drawing SA 103C 002(B), sheet 8; or
    (2) Each item specified on drawing SA 103C 002, sheet 8.
    (b) When the head is impacted by a test probe specified in Sec.  
572.21(a)(1) at 7 fps, then the peak resultant acceleration measured at 
the location of the accelerometer mounted in the headform according to 
Sec.  572.21(b) is not less than 95g and not more than 118g.
    (1) The recorded acceleration-time curve for this test is unimodal 
at or above the 50g level, and lies at or above that level for 
intervals:
    (i) In the case of the head assembly specified in paragraph (a)(1) 
of this section, not less than 1.3 milliseconds and not more than 2.0 
milliseconds;
    (ii) In the case of the head assembly specified in paragraph (a)(2) 
of this section, not less than 2.0 milliseconds and not more than 3.0 
milliseconds.
    (2) The lateral acceleration vector does not exceed 7g.
    (c) Test procedure. (1) Seat the dummy on a seating surface having a 
back support as specified in Sec.  572.21(h) and orient the dummy in 
accordance with Sec.  572.21(h) and adjust the joints of the limbs at 
any setting between 1g and 2g, which just supports the limbs' weight 
when the limbs are extended horizontally forward.

[[Page 22]]

    (2) Adjust the test probe so that its longitudinal centerline is at 
the forehead at the point of orthogonal intersection of the head 
midsagittal plane and the transverse plane which is perpendicular to the 
``Z'' axis of the head (longitudinal centerline of the skull anchor) and 
is located 0.6 0.1 inches above the centers of the 
head center of gravity reference pins and coincides within 2 degrees 
with the line made by the intersection of horizontal and midsagittal 
planes passing through this point.
    (3) Adjust the dummy so that the surface area on the forehead 
immediately adjacent to the projected longitudinal centerline of the 
test probe is vertical.
    (4) Impact the head with the test probe so that at the moment of 
impact the probe's longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of a 
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (5) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no 
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
    (6) Allow a time period of at least 20 minutes between successive 
tests of the head.

[44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979; 45 FR 43353, June 26, 1980, as amended at 
45 FR 82267, Dec. 15, 1980; 55 FR 30468, July 26, 1990]



Sec.  572.17  Neck.

    (a)(1) The neck for use with the head assembly described in Sec.  
572.16(a)(1) consists of the assembly designated as SA 103C 020 on 
drawing No. SA 103C 001, conforms to each item specified on drawing No. 
SA 103C 002(B), sheet 9.
    (2) The neck for use with the head assembly described in Sec.  
572.16(a)(2) consists of the assembly designated as SA 103C 020 on 
drawing No. SA 103C 001, and conforms to each item specified on drawing 
No. SA 103C 002, sheet 9.
    (b) When the head-neck assembly is tested in accordance with 
paragraph (c) of this section, the head shall rotate in reference to the 
pendulum's longitudinal centerline a total of 84 degrees  8 degrees about its center of gravity, rotating to the 
extent specified in the following table at each indicated point in time, 
measured from impact, with the chordal displacement measured at its 
center of gravity. The chordal displacement at time T is defined as the 
straight line distance between (1) the position relative to the pendulum 
arm of the head center of gravity at time zero, and (2) the position 
relative to the pendulum arm of the head center of gravity at time T as 
illustrated by figure 3. The peak resultant acceleration recorded at the 
location of the accelerometers mounted in the headform in accordance 
with Sec.  572.21(b) shall not exceed 30g. The pendulum shall not 
reverse direction until the head's center of gravity returns to the 
original zero time position relative to the pendulum arm.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                            Chordal displacement
                       Rotation (degrees)                         Time (ms) (2+.08T)      minus0.8)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0...............................................................                  0                       0
30..............................................................                 21                     2.2
60..............................................................                 36                     4.3
Maximum.........................................................                 62                     5.8
60..............................................................                 91                     4.3
30..............................................................                108                     2.2
0...............................................................                123                       0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Test procedure. (1) Mount the head and neck on a rigid pendulum 
as specified in Figure 4, so that the head's midsagittal plane is 
vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum's 
longitudinal centerline. Mount the neck directly to the pendulum as 
shown in Figure 15.
    (2) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height 
such that the velocity at impact is 17.00 1.0 feet 
per second (fps), measured at the center of the accelerometer specified 
in figure 4.
    (3) Decelerate the pendulum to a stop with an acceleration-time 
pulse described as follows:
    (i) Establish 5g and 20g levels on the a-t curve.
    (ii) Establish t1 at the point where the a-t curve first 
crosses the 5g level, t2 at the point where the rising a-t 
curve first crosses the 20g level, t3 at the point where the 
decaying a-t curve last crosses the 20g level, and t4 at the 
point where the decaying a-t curve first crosses the 5g level.
    (iii) t2-t1, shall be not more than 4 
milliseconds.
    (iv) t3-t2, shall be not less than 18 and not 
more than 21 milliseconds.
    (v) t4-t3, shall be not more than 5 
milliseconds.

[[Page 23]]

    (vi) The average deceleration between t2 and 
t3 shall be not less than 20g and not more then 34g.
    (4) Allow the neck to flex without contact of the head or neck with 
any object other than the pendulum arm.
    (5) Allow a time period of at least 1 hour between successive tests 
of the head and neck.

[44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979; 45 FR 43353, June 26, 1980, as amended at 
55 FR 30468, July 26, 1990]



Sec.  572.18  Thorax.

    (a) The thorax consists of the part of the torso shown in assembly 
drawing SA 103C 001 by number SA 103C 030 and conforms to each of the 
applicable drawings listed under this number on drawing SA 103C 002, 
sheets 10 and 11.
    (b) When impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec.  572.21(a) at 
13 fps in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak 
resultant accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted in 
the chest cavity in accordance with Sec.  572.21(c) shall be not less 
than 50g and not more than 70g. The acceleration-time curve for the test 
shall be unimodal at or above the 30g level and shall lie at or above 
the 30g level for an interval not less than 2.5 milliseconds and not 
more than 4.0 milliseconds. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 
5g.
    (c) Test procedure. (1) With the dummy seated without back support 
on a surface as specified in Sec.  572.21(h) and oriented as specified 
in Sec.  572.21(h), adjust the dummy arms and legs until they are 
extended horizontally forward parallel to the midsagittal plane. The 
joints of the limbs are adjusted at any setting between 1g and 2g, which 
just supports the limbs' weight when the limbs are extended horizontally 
forward.
    (2) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so 
that it is 1.5 inches below the longitudinal centerline of the bolt that 
attaches the top of the ribcage sternum to the thoracic spine box.
    (3) Adjust the dummy so that the tangent plane at the surface on the 
thorax immediately adjacent to the designated impact point is vertical 
and parallel to the face of the test probe.
    (4) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe to coincide 
with the designated impact point and align the test probe so that at 
impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within 2 degrees with the 
line formed by intersection of the horizontal and midsagittal planes 
passing through the designated impact point.
    (5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of 
impact the probe's longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of a 
horizontal line in the dummy midsagittal plane.
    (6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no 
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
    (7) Allow a time period of at least 20 minutes between successive 
tests of the chest.



Sec.  572.19  Lumbar spine, abdomen and pelvis.

    (a) The lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis consist of the part of the 
torso assembly shown by number SA 103C 030 on drawing SA 103C 001 and 
conform to each of the applicable drawings listed under this number on 
drawing SA 103C 002, sheets 10 and 11.
    (b) When subjected to continuously applied force in accordance with 
paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar spine assembly shall flex by 
an amount that permits the rigid thoracic spine to rotate from its 
initial position in accordance with Figure 18 of this subpart by 40 
degrees at a force level of not less than 34 pounds and not more than 47 
pounds, and straighten upon removal of the force to within 5 degrees of 
its initial position.
    (c) Test procedure. (1) The dummy with lower legs removed is 
positioned in an upright seated position on a seat as indicated in 
Figure 18, ensuring that all dummy component surfaces are clean, dry and 
untreated unless otherwise specified.
    (2) Attach the pelvis to the seating surface by a bolt C/328, 
modified as shown in Figure 18, and the upper legs at the knee axial 
rotation joints by the attachments shown in Figure 18. Tighten the 
mountings so that the pelvis-lumbar joining surface is horizontal and 
adjust the femur ball-flange screws at each hip socket joint to 50 inch 
pounds torque. Remove the head and

[[Page 24]]

the neck and install a cylindrical aluminum adapter 2.0 inches in 
diameter and 2.80 inches long in place of the neck.
    (3) Flex the thorax forward 50 degrees and then rearward as 
necessary to return to its initial position in accordance with Figure 18 
unsupported by external means.
    (4) Apply a forward pull force in the midsagittal plane at the top 
of the neck adapter, so that at 40 degrees of the lumbar spine flexion 
the applied force is perpendicular to the thoracic spine box. Apply the 
force at any torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per 
second up to 40 degrees of flexion but no further; continue to apply for 
10 seconds the force necessary to maintain 40 degrees of flexion, and 
record the highest applied force at that time. Release all force as 
rapidly as possible and measure the return angle 3 minutes after the 
release.



Sec.  572.20  Limbs.

    The limbs consist of the assemblies shown on drawing SA 103C 001 as 
Nos. SA 103C 041, SA 103C 042, SA 103C 051, SA 103C 052, SA 103C 061, SA 
103C 062, SA 103C 071, SA 103C 072, SA 103C 081, SA 103C 082, and 
conform to each of the applicable drawings listed under their respective 
numbers of the drawing SA 103C 002, sheets 12 through 21.



Sec.  572.21  Test conditions and instrumentation.

    (a)(1) The test probe used for head and thoracic impact tests is a 
cylinder 3 inches in diameter, 13.8 inches long, and weighing 10 lbs., 6 
ozs. Its impacting end has a flat right face that is rigid and that has 
an edge radius of 0.5 inches.
    (2) The head and thorax assembly may be instrumented with a Type A 
or Type C accelerometer.
    (i) Type A accelerometer is defined in drawing SA-572 S1.
    (ii) Type C accelerometer is defined in drawing SA-572 S2.
    (b) Head accelerometers. Install one of the triaxial accelerometers 
specified in Sec.  572.21(a)(2) on a mounting block located on the 
horizontal transverse bulkhead as shown in the drawings subreferenced 
under assembly SA 103C 010 so that the seismic mass centers of each 
sensing element are positioned as specified in this paragraph, relative 
to the head accelerometer reference point located at the intersection of 
a line connecting the longitudinal centerlines of the transfer pins in 
the side of the dummy head with the midsagittal plane of the dummy head.
    (1) The sensing elements of the Type C triaxial accelerometer are 
aligned as follows:
    (i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and 
coincident with the midsagittal plane, with the seismic mass center 
located 0.2 inches dorsal to, and 0.1 inches inferior to the head 
accelerometer reference point.
    (ii) Align the second sensitive axis with the horizontal plane, 
perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with the seismic mass center 
located 0.1 inches inferior, 0.4 inches to the right of, and 0.9 inches 
dorsal to the head accelerometer reference point.
    (iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the 
midsagittal and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located 
0.1 inches inferior to, 0.6 inches dorsal to, and 0.4 inches to the 
right of the head accelerometer reference point.
    (iv) All seismic mass centers are positioned with 0.05 inches of the specified locations.
    (2) The sensing elements of the Type A triaxial accelerometer are 
aligned as follows:
    (i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and 
coincident with midsagittal planes, with the seismic mass center located 
from 0.2 to 0.47 inches dorsal to, from 0.01 inches inferior to 0.21 
inches superior, and from 0.0 to 0.17 inches left of the head 
accelerometer reference point.
    (ii) Align the second sensitive axis with the horizontal plane, 
perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with the seismic mass center 
located 0.1 to 0.13 inches inferior to, 0.17 to 0.4 inches to the right 
of, and 0.47 to 0.9 inches dorsal of the head accelerometer reference 
point.
    (iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the 
midsagittal and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located 
0.1 to 0.13 inches inferior to, 0.6 to 0.81 inches dorsal to, and from 
0.17 inches left to 0.4 inches

[[Page 25]]

right of the head accelerometer reference point.
    (c) Thorax accelerometers. Install one of the triaxial 
accelerometers specified in Sec.  572.21(a)(2) on a mounting plate 
attached to the vertical transverse bulkhead shown in the drawing 
subreferenced under assembly No. SA 103C 030 in drawing SA 103C 001, so 
that the seismic mass centers of each sensing element are positioned as 
specified in this paragraph, relative to the thorax accelerometer 
reference point located in the midsagital plane 3 inches above the top 
surface of the lumbar spine, and 0.3 inches dorsal to the accelerometer 
mounting plate surface.
    (1) The sensing elements of the Type C triaxial accelerometer are 
aligned as follows:
    (i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and 
midsagittal planes, with the seismic mass center located 0.2 inches to 
the left of, 0.1 inches inferior to, and 0.2 inches ventral to the 
thorax accelerometer reference point.
    (ii) Align the second sensitive axis so that it is in the horizontal 
transverse plane, and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with the 
seismic mass center located 0.2 inches to the right of, 0.1 inches 
inferior to, and 0.2 inches ventral to the thorax accelerometer 
reference point.
    (iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the 
midsagittal and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located 
0.2 inches superior to, 0.5 inches to the right of, and 0.1 inches 
ventral to the thorax accelerometer reference points.
    (iv) All seismic mass centers shall be positioned within 0.05 inches of the specified locations.
    (2) The sensing elements of the Type A triaxial accelerometer are 
aligned as follows:
    (i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and 
midsagittal planes, with the seismic mass center located from 0.2 inches 
left to 0.28 inches right, from 0.5 to 0.15 inches inferior to, and from 
0.15 to 0.25 inches ventral of the thorax accelerometer reference point.
    (ii) Align the second sensitive axis so that it is in the horizontal 
transverse plane and perpendicular to the midsagital plane, with the 
seismic mass center located from 0.06 inches left to 0.2 inches right 
of, from 0.1 inches inferior to 0.24 inches superior, and 0.15 to 0.25 
inches ventral to the thorax accelerometer reference point.
    (iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the 
midsagital and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located 
0.15 to 0.25 inches superior to, 0.28 to 0.5 inches to the right of, and 
from 0.1 inches ventral to 0.19 inches dorsal to the thorax 
accelerometer reference point.
    (d) The outputs of accelerometers installed in the dummy, and of 
test apparatus specified by this part, are recorded in individual data 
channels that conform to the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice 
J211a, December 1971, with channel classes as follows:
    (1) Head acceleration--Class 1000.
    (2) Pendulum acceleration--Class 60.
    (3) Thorax acceleration--Class 180.
    (e) The mountings for accelerometers have no resonance frequency 
less than cut-off 3 times the cut-off frequency of the applicable 
channel class.
    (f) Limb joints are set at the force between 1-2g, which just 
supports the limbs' weight when the limbs are extended horizontally 
forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not exceed 2g 
throughout the range of limb motion.
    (g) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 
[deg]F to 78 [deg]F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 
percent after exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of 
not less than 4 hours.
    (h) For the performance tests specified in Sec. Sec.  572.16, 
572.18, and 572.19, the dummy is positioned in accordance with Figures 
16, 17, and 18 as follows:
    (1) The dummy is placed on a flat, rigid, clean, dry, horizontal 
surface of teflon sheeting with a smoothness of 40 microinches and whose 
length and width dimensions are not less than 16 inches, so that the 
dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical and centered on the test surface. 
For head tests, the seat has a vertical back support whose top is 12.4 
0.2 inches above the seating surface. The rear 
surfaces of the dummy's shoulders and buttocks are touching the back 
support as

[[Page 26]]

shown in Figure 16. For thorax and lumbar spine tests, the seating 
surface is without the back support as shown in Figures 17 and 18, 
respectively.
    (2) The shoulder yokes are adjusted so that they are at the midpoint 
of their anterior-posterior travel with their upper surfaces horizontal.
    (3) The dummy is adjusted for head impact and lumbar flexion tests 
so that the rear surfaces of the shoulders and buttocks are tangent to a 
transverse vertical plane.
    (4) The arms and legs are positioned so that their centerlines are 
in planes parallel to the midsagittal plane.
    (i) The dummy's dimensions are specified in drawings No. SA 103C 
002, sheets 22 through 26.
    (j) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly or 
fully assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than 
20 minutes unless otherwise specified.
    (k) Surfaces of the dummy components are not painted except as 
specified in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.

[[Page 27]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.158


[[Page 28]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.159


[[Page 29]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.160


[[Page 30]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.161


[44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979, as amended at 45 FR 82267, Dec. 15, 1980; 
55 FR 30468, July 26, 1990]



                      Subpart D_6-Month-Old Infant



Sec.  572.25  General description.

    (a) The infant dummy is specified in its entirety by means of 5 
drawings (No. SA 1001) and a construction manual, dated July 2, 1974, 
which describe in detail the materials and the procedures involved in 
the manufacturing of this dummy.
    (b) The drawings, specifications, and construction manual referred 
to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are hereby 
incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are thereby

[[Page 31]]

made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register has 
approved the materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject 
to change, only the specific version approved by the Director of the 
Federal Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A 
notice of any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a 
convenience to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are 
listed in the Finding Aid Table found at the end of this volume of the 
Code of Federal Regulations.
    (c) The materials incorporated by reference are available for 
examination in Docket 78-09, Room 5109, Docket Section, National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC, 
20590. Copies may be obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc., 
1216 K Street NW., Washington, DC 20005 ((202) 628-6667). The materials 
are also on file in the reference library of the Office of the Federal 
Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC.
    (d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used 
in vehicle tests specified in Standard No. 213 of this chapter (Sec.  
571.213).

[50 FR 25424, June 19, 1985]



                     Subpart E_Hybrid III Test Dummy

    Source: 51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.30  Incorporated materials.

    (a) The drawings and specifications referred to in this regulation 
that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by 
reference. The Director of the Federal Register has approved the 
materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject to change, 
only the specific version approved by the Director of the Federal 
Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A notice of 
any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a convenience 
to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are listed in the 
Finding Aid Table found at the end of this volume of the Code of Federal 
Regulations.
    (b) The materials incorporated by reference are available for 
examination in the general reference section of docket 74-14, Docket 
Section, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Room 5109, 400 
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. Copies may be obtained from 
Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Road, Beltsville, MD 
20705, Telephone (301) 210-5600, Facsimile (301) 419-5069, Attn. Mr. Jay 
Wall. Drawings and specifications are also on file at the National 
Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the 
availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: 
http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--
regulations/ibr--locations.html.

[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 67955, Dec. 26, 1996]



Sec.  572.31  General description.

    (a) The Hybrid III 50th percentile size dummy consists of components 
and assemblies specified in the Anthropomorphic Test Dummy drawing and 
specifications package which consists of the following six items:
    (1) The Anthropomorphic Test Dummy Parts List, dated June 26, 1998, 
and containing 16 pages, and a Parts List Index, dated June 26, 1998, 
containing 8 pages.
    (2) A listing of Hybrid III Dummy Transducers-reference document 
AGARD-AR-330, ``Anthropomorphic Dummies for Crash and Escape System 
Testing'', Chapter 6, Table 6-2, North Atlantic Treaty Organization, 
July, 1996.
    (3) A General Motors Drawing Package identified by GM Drawing No. 
78051-218, revision U, titled ``Hybrid III Anthropomorphic Test Dummy,'' 
dated August 30, 1998, the following component assemblies, and 
subordinate drawings:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                          Drawing No.                           Revision
------------------------------------------------------------------------
78051-61X head assembly-complete, (May 20, 1978)..............       (T)
78051-90 neck assembly-complete, dated May 20, 1978...........       (A)

[[Page 32]]

 
78051-89 upper torso assembly-complete, dated May 20, 1978....       (K)
78051-70 lower torso assembly-complete, dated June 30, 1998,         (F)
 except for drawing No. 78051-55, ``Instrumentation Assembly-
 Pelvic Accelerometer,'' dated August 2, 1979.................
86-5001-001 leg assembly-complete (LH), dated March 26, 1996..       (A)
86-5001-002 leg assembly-complete (RH), dated March 26, 1996..       (A)
78051-123 arm assembly-complete (LH), dated May 20, 1996......       (D)
78051-124 arm assembly-complete (RH), dated May 20, 1978......       (D)
78051-59 pelvic assembly-complete, dated June 30, 1998........       (G)
78051-60 pelvic structure-molded, dated June 30, 1998.........       (E)
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Disassembly, Inspection, Assembly and Limbs Adjustment 
Procedures for the Hybrid III dummy, dated June 1998.
    (5) Sign Convention for signal outputs--reference document SAE J1733 
Information Report, titled ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash 
Testing'', dated 1994-12.
    (6) Exterior dimensions of the Hybrid III dummy, dated July 15, 
1986.
    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that throughout 
the range of motion and also under crash-impact conditions, there is no 
contact between metallic elements except for contacts that exist under 
static conditions.
    (d) The weights, inertial properties and centers of gravity location 
of component assemblies shall conform to those listed in drawing 78051-
338, revision S, titled ``Segment Weights, Inertial Properties, Center 
of Gravity Location--Hybrid III,'' dated May 20, 1978 of drawing No. 
78051-218.
    (e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used 
in vehicle test specified in Standard No. 208 of this chapter (Sec.  
571.208).

[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8764, Mar. 17, 1988; 57 
FR 47010, Oct. 14, 1992; 61 FR 67955, Dec. 26, 1996; 62 FR 27514, May 
20, 1997; 63 FR 5747, Feb. 4, 1998; 63 FR 53851, Oct. 7, 1998]



Sec.  572.32  Head.

    (a) The head consists of the assembly shown in drawing 78051-61X, 
revision C, and conforms to each of the drawings subtended therein.
    (b) When the head (Drawing number 78051-61X, titled ``head 
assembly--complete,'' dated March 28, 1997 (Revision C) with six axis 
neck transducer structural replacement (Drawing number 78051-383X, 
Revision P, titled ``Neck Transducer Structural Replacement,'' dated 
November 1, 1995) is dropped from a height of 14.8 inches in accordance 
with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant accelerations at 
the location of the accelerometers mounted in the head in accordance 
with Sec.  572.36(c) shall not be less than 225g, and not more than 
275g. The acceleration/time curve for the test shall be unimodal to the 
extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse are 
less than ten percent (zero to peak) of the main pulse. The lateral 
acceleration vector shall not exceed 15g (zero to peak).
    (c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the head assembly in a test environment 
at any temperature between 66 degrees F to 78 degrees F and at a 
relative humidity from 10% to 70% for a period of at least four hours 
prior to its application in a test.
    (2) Clean the head's skin surface and the surface of the impact 
plate with 1,1,1 Trichlorethane or equivalent.
    (3) Suspend the head, as shown in Figure 19, so that the lowest 
point on the forehead is 0.5 inches below the lowest point on the 
dummy's nose when the midsagittal plane is vertical.

[[Page 33]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.162

    (4) Drop the head from the specified height by means that ensure 
instant release into a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate, 
which is 2 inches thick and 2 feet square. The plate shall have a clean, 
dry surface and any microfinish of not less than 8 microinches (rms) and 
not more than 80 microinches (rms).
    (5) Allow at least 3 hours between successive tests on the same 
head.

[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 62 FR 27514, May 20, 1997]

[[Page 34]]



Sec.  572.33  Neck.

    (a) The neck consists of the assembly shown in drawing 78051-90, 
revision A and conforms to each of the drawings subtended therein.
    (b) When the head and neck assembly (consisting of the parts 78051-
61X, revision C; -90, revision A; -84; -94; -98; -104, revision F; -303, 
revision E; -305; -306; -307, revision X) which has a six axis neck 
transducer (Drawing number C-1709, Revision D, titled ``Neck 
transducer,'' dated February 1, 1993.) installed in conformance with 
Sec.  572.36(d), is tested in accordance with paragraph (c) of this 
section, it shall have the following characteristics:
    (1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure 20, shall rotate 
between 64 degrees and 78 degrees, which shall occur between 57 
milliseconds (ms) and 64 ms from time zero. In first rebound, the 
rotation of Plane D shall cross 0 degrees between 113 ms and 128 ms.
    (ii) The moment measured by the six axis neck transducer (drawing C-
1709, revision D) about the occipital condyles, referenced in Figure 20, 
shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (lbs-ft) = My-0.058 
x Fx, where My is the moment measured in lbs-ft by the ``Y'' axis moment 
sensor of the six axis neck transducer and Fx is the force measured in 
lbs by the ``X'' axis force sensor (Channel Class 600) of the six axis 
neck transducer. The moment shall have a maximum value between 65 lbs-ft 
and 80 lbs-ft occurring between 47ms and 58 ms, and the positive moment 
shall decay for the first time to 0 lb-ft between 97 ms and 107 ms.
    (2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure 21, shall rotate 
between 81 degrees and 106 degrees, which shall occur between 72 ms and 
82 ms from time zero. In first rebound, rotation of Plane D shall cross 
0 degrees between 147 ms and 174 ms.
    (ii) The moment measured by the six axis neck transducer (drawing C-
1709, revision D) about the occipital condyles, referenced in Figure 21, 
shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (lbs-ft) = My-0.058 
x Fx, where My is the moment measured in lbs-ft by the ``Y'' axis moment 
sensor of the six axis neck transducer and Fx is the force measured in 
lbs by the ``X'' axis force sensor (Channel Class 600) of the six axis 
neck transducer. The moment shall have a maximum value between--39 lbs-
ft and -59 lbs-ft, occurring between 65 ms and 79 ms, and the negative 
moment shall decay for the first time to 0 lb-ft between 120 ms and 148 
ms.

[[Page 35]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20MY97.000


[[Page 36]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20MY97.001

    (c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the test material in a test environment 
at any temperature between 69 degrees F to 72 degrees F and at a 
relative humidity from 10% to 70% for a period of at least four hours 
prior to its application in a test.
    (2) Torque the jamnut (78051-64) on the neck cable (78051-301, 
revision E) to 1.0 lbs-ft .2 lbs-ft.
    (3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of this 
section, on a rigid pendulum as shown in Figure 22 so that the head's 
midsagittal plane is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of 
the pendulum's longitudinal axis.

[[Page 37]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.165

    (4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height 
such that the tangential velocity at the pendulum accelerometer 
centerline at the instance of contact with the honeycomb is 23.0 ft/sec 
0.4 ft/sec. for flexion testing and 19.9 ft/sec. 
0.4 ft/sec. for extension testing. The pendulum 
deceleration vs. time pulse for flexion testing shall conform to the 
characteristics shown in Table A and the decaying deceleration-time 
curve shall first cross 5g between 34 ms and 42 ms. The 
pendulum deceleration vs. time pulse for extension testing shall conform 
to the characteristics shown in Table B and the decaying deceleration-
time curve shall cross 5g between 38 ms and 46 ms.

[[Page 38]]



          Table A--Flexion Pendulum Deceleration vs. Time Pulse
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Flexion
                         Time (ms)                          deceleration
                                                              level (g)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10........................................................   22.50-27.50
20........................................................   17.60-22.60
30........................................................   12.50-18.50
Any other time above 30 ms................................   29 maximum.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


         Table B--Extension Pendulum Deceleration vs. Time Pulse
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Extension
                         Time (ms)                          deceleration
                                                              level (g)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10........................................................   17.20-21.20
20........................................................   14.00-19.00
30........................................................   11.00-16.00
Any other time above 30 ms................................   22 maximum.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (5) Allow the neck to flex without impact of the head or neck with 
any object during the test.

[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 62 
FR 27514, May 20, 1997]



Sec.  572.34  Thorax.

    (a) The thorax consists of the upper torso assembly in drawing 
78051-89, revision K and shall conform to each of the drawings subtended 
therein.
    (b) When impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec.  572.36(a) at 
22 fps 0.40 fps in accordance with paragraph (c) 
of this section, the thorax of a complete dummy assembly (78051-218, 
revision U, without shoes, shall resist with a force of 1242.5 pounds 
82.5 pounds measured by the test probe and shall 
have a sternum displacement measured relative to spine of 2.68 inches 
0.18 inches. The internal hysteresis in each 
impact shall be more than 69% but less than 85%. The force measured is 
the product of pendulum mass and deceleration.
    (c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the test dummy in an environment with a 
relative humidity from 10% to 70% until the temperature of the ribs of 
the test dummy have stabilized at a temperature between 69 degrees F and 
72 degrees F.
    (2) Seat the dummy without back and arm supports on a surface as 
shown in Figure 23, and set the angle of the pelvic bone at 13 degrees 
plus or minus 2 degrees, using the procedure described in S11.4.3.2 of 
Standard No. 208 (Sec.  571.208 of this chapter).

[[Page 39]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.166

    (3) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe so that it 
is .5 .04 in. below the horizontal centerline of 
the No. 3 Rib (reference drawing number 79051-64, revision A-M) as shown 
in Figure 23.

[[Page 40]]

    (4) Align the test probe specified in Sec.  572.36(a) so that at 
impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within .5 degree of a 
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that the longitudinal 
centerline of the test probe falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line 
in the dummy midsagittal plane at the moment of impact.
    (6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no 
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
    (7) Measure the horizontal deflection of the sternum relative to the 
thoracic spine along the line established by the longitudinal centerline 
of the probe at the moment of impact, using a potentiometer (ref. 
drawing 78051-317, revision A) mounted inside the sternum as shown in 
drawing 78051-89, revision I.
    (8) Measure hysteresis by determining the ratio of the area between 
the loading and unloading portions of the force deflection curve to the 
area under the loading portion of the curve.

[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 62 
FR 27518, May 20, 1997; 63 FR 53851, Oct. 7, 1998]



Sec.  572.35  Limbs.

    (a) The limbs consist of the following assemblies: leg assemblies 
86-5001-001, revision A and -002, revision A, and arm assemblies 78051-
123, revision D and -124, revision D, and shall conform to the drawings 
subtended therein.
    (b) Femur impact response. (1) When each knee of the leg assemblies 
is impacted in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, at 6.9 
ft/sec 0.10 ft/sec by the pendulum defined in 
Sec.  572.36(b), the peak knee impact force, which is a product of 
pendulum mass and acceleration, shall have a minimum value of not less 
than 1060 pounds and a maximum value of not more than 1300 pounds.
    (2) Test procedure. (i) The test material consists of leg assemblies 
(86-5001-001, revision A) left and (-002, revision A) right with upper 
leg assemblies (78051-46) left and (78051-47) right removed. The load 
cell simulator (78051-319, revision A) is used to secure the knee cap 
assemblies (79051-16, revision B) as shown in Figure 24.
    (ii) Soak the test material in a test environment at any temperature 
between 66 degrees F to 78 degrees F and at a relative humidity from 10% 
to 70% for a period of at least four hours prior to its application in a 
test.
    (iii) Mount the test material with the leg assembly secured through 
the load cell simulator to a rigid surface as shown in Figure 24. No 
contact is permitted between the foot and any other exterior surfaces.
    (iv) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe so that at 
contact with the knee it is collinear within 2 degrees with the 
longitudinal centerline of the femur load cell simulator.
    (v) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral, 
vertical or rotational movement at time zero.
    (vi) Impact the knee with the test probe so that the longitudinal 
centerline of the test probe at the instant of impact falls within .5 
degrees of a horizontal line parallel to the femur load cell simulator 
at time zero.
    (vii) Time zero is defined as the time of contact between the test 
probe and the knee.
    (c) Hip joint-femur flexion. (1) When each femur is rotated in the 
flexion direction in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this section, 
the femur torque at 30 deg. rotation from its initial horizontal 
orientation will not be more than 70 ft-lbf, and at 150 ft-lbf of torque 
will not be less than 40 deg. or more than 50 deg.
    (2) Test procedure. (i) The test material consists of the assembled 
dummy, part No. 78051-218 (revision S) except that (1) leg assemblies 
(86-5001-001 and 002) are separated from the dummy by removing the 3/8-
16 Socket Head Cap Screw (SHCS) (78051-99) but retaining the structural 
assembly of the upper legs (78051-43 and -44), (2) the abdominal insert 
(78051-52) is removed and (3) the instrument cover plate (78051-13) in 
the pelvic bone is replaced by a rigid pelvic bone stabilizer insert 
(Figure 25a) and firmly secured.
    (ii) Seat the dummy on a rigid seat fixture (Figure 25) and firmly 
secure it to the seat back by bolting the stabilizer insert and the 
rigid support device (Figure 25b) to the seat back of the test fixture 
(Figures 26 and 27) while

[[Page 41]]

maintaining the pelvis (78051-58) ``B'' plane horizontal.
    (iii) Insert a lever arm into the femur shaft opening of the upper 
leg structure assembly (78051-43/44) and firmly secure it using the 3/8-
16 socket head cap screws.
    (iv) Lift the lever arm parallel to the midsagittal plane at a 
rotation rate of 5 to 10 deg. per second while maintaining the 1/2 in. 
shoulder bolt longitudinal centerline horizontal throughout the range of 
motion until the 150 ft-lbf torque level is reached. Record the torque 
and angle of rotation of the femur.
    (v) Operating environment and temperature are the same as specified 
in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.167


[[Page 42]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26DE96.004


[[Page 43]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26DE96.005

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26DE96.006


[[Page 44]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26DE96.007


[[Page 45]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26DE96.008


[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 61 
FR 67955, Dec. 26, 1997; 63 FR 5748, Feb. 4, 1998]



Sec.  572.36  Test conditions and instrumentation.

    (a) The test probe used for thoracic impact tests is a 6 inch 
diameter cylinder that weighs 51.5 pounds including instrumentation. Its 
impacting end has a flat right angle face that is rigid and has an edge 
radius of 0.5 inches. The test probe has an accelerometer mounted on the 
end opposite from impact with its sensitive axis colinear to the 
longitudinal centerline of the cylinder.
    (b) Test probe used for the knee impact tests is a 3 inch diameter 
cylinder that weights 11 pounds including instrumentation. Its impacting 
end has a flat right angle face that is rigid and has an edge radius of 
0.02 inches. The test probe has an accelerometer mounted on the end 
opposite from impact with its sensitive axis colinear to

[[Page 46]]

the longitudinal centerline of the cylinder.
    (c) Head accelerometers shall have dimensions and response 
characteristics specified in drawing 78051-136, revision A, or its 
equivalent, and the location of their seismic mass as mounted in the 
skull are shown in drawing C-1709, revision D.
    (d) The six axis neck transducer shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing C-
1709, revision D and be mounted for testing as shown in Figures 20 and 
21 of Sec.  572.33, and in the assembly drawing 78051-218, revision T.
    (e) The chest accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 
78051-136, revision A or its equivalent and be mounted as shown with 
adaptor assembly 78051-116, revision D for assembly into 78051-218, 
revision T.
    (f) The chest deflection transducer shall have the dimensions and 
response characteristics specified in drawing 78051-342, revision A or 
its equivalent and be mounted in the chest deflection transducer 
assembly 78051-317, revision A for assembly into 78051-218, revision T.
    (g) The thorax and knee impactor accelerometers shall have the 
dimensions and characteristics of Endevco Model 7231c or equivalent. 
Each accelerometer shall be mounted with its sensitive axis colinear 
with the pendulum's longitudinal centerline.
    (h) The femur load cell shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing 
78051-265 or its equivalent and be mounted in assemblies 78051-46 and -
47 for assembly into 78051-218, revision T.
    (i) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed 
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part are 
recorded in individual data channels that conform to requirements of 
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J211 Mar95, 
Instrumentation for Impact Tests, Parts 1 and 2. SAE J211 Mar95 sets 
forth the following channel classes:
    (1) Head acceleration--Class 1000
    (2) Neck forces--Class 1000
    (3) Neck moments--Class 600
    (4) Neck pendulum acceleration--Class 60
    (5) Thorax and thorax pendulum acceleration--Class 180
    (6) Thorax deflection--Class 180
    (7) Knee pendulum acceleration--Class 600
    (8) Femur force--Class 600
    (j) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity conform to the 
sign convention shown in the document incorporated by Sec.  
572.31(a)(5).
    (k) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance 
frequency within range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable 
channel class.
    (l) Limb joints are set at lg, barely restraining the weight of the 
limb when it is extended horizontally. The force required to move a limb 
segment shall not exceed 2g throughout the range of limb motion.
    (m) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or 
fully assembled dummy are separated in time by period of not less than 
30 minutes unless otherwise noted.
    (n) Surfaces of dummy components are not painted except as specified 
in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.

[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 62 
FR 27518, May 20, 1997; 63 FR 45965, Aug. 28, 1998]



            Subpart F_Side Impact Dummy 50th Percentile Male

    Source: 55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.40  Incorporated materials.

    (a) The drawings, specifications, manual, and computer program 
referred to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are hereby 
incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are thereby made 
part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register has 
approved the materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject 
to change, only the specific version approved by the Director of the 
Federal Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A 
notice of any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a 
convenience

[[Page 47]]

to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are listed in the 
Finding Aids Table found at the end of this volume of the Code of 
Federal Regulations.
    (b) The materials incorporated in this part by reference are 
available for examination in the general reference section of Docket 79-
04, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, room 
5109, 400 Seventh St., S.W., Washington, D.C., 20590, telephone (202) 
366-4949. Copies may be obtained from Reprographic Technologies, 9000 
Virginia Manor Rd., Suite 210, Beltsville, MD, 20705, Telephone (301) 
419-5070, Fax (301) 419-5069.

[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 16140, Apr. 2, 1998]



Sec.  572.41  General description.

    (a) The dummy consists of component parts and component assemblies 
(SA-SID-M001, revision C, dated September 12, 1996, and SA-SID-M001A, 
revision B, dated September 12, 1996), which are described in 
approximately 250 drawings and specifications that are set forth in 
Sec.  572.5(a) of this chapter with the following changes and additions 
which are described in approximately 85 drawings and specifications 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.40):
    (1) The head assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart 
B (Sec.  572.6(a)) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under 
drawing SA 150 M010 and drawings specified in SA-SID-M010, dated August 
13, 1987.
    (2) The neck assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart 
B (Sec.  572.7(a)) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under 
drawing SA 150 M020 and drawings shown in SA-SID-M010, dated August 13, 
1987.
    (3) The thorax assembly consists of the assembly shown as number 
SID-053 and conforms to each applicable drawing subtended by number SA-
SID-M030 revision A, dated May 18, 1994.
    (4) The lumbar spine consists of the assembly specified in subpart B 
(Sec.  572.9(a)) and conforms to drawing SA 150 M050 and drawings 
subtended by SA-SID-M050 revision B, dated September 12, 1996, including 
the addition of Lumbar Spacers-Lower SID-SM-001 and Lumbar Spacers-Upper 
SID-SM-002 (both dated May 12, 1994), and Washer 78051-243.
    (5) The abdomen and pelvis consist of the assembly specified in 
subpart B of this part (Sec.  572.9) and conform to the drawings 
subtended by SA 150 M060, the drawings subtended by SA-SID-M060 revision 
A, dated May 18, 1994, and the drawings subtended by SA-SID-087 sheet 1 
revision H, dated May 18, 1994, and SA-SID-087 sheet 2 revision H.
    (6) The lower limbs consist of the assemblies specified in subpart B 
(Sec.  572.10) shown as SA 150 M080 and SA 150 M081 in Figure 1 and SA-
SID-M080 and SA-SID-M081, both dated August 13, 1987, and conform to the 
drawings subtended by those numbers.
    (b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to the requirements of this subpart in every respect both 
before and after being used in vehicle tests specified in Standard No 
214 Sec.  571.214 of this chapter.
    (c) Disassembly, inspection, and assembly procedures; external 
dimensions and weight; and a dummy drawing list are set forth in the 
Side Impact Dummy (SID) User's Manual, dated May 1994 except for pages 
7, 20 and 23, and appendix A (consisting of replacement pages 7, 20 and 
23) dated January 20, 1998 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  
572.40).

[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994; 
63 FR 16140, Apr. 2, 1998]



Sec.  572.42  Thorax.

    (a) When the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (SA-SID-M001A 
revision A, dated May 18, 1994, incorporated by reference; see Sec.  
572.40), appropriately assembled for right or left side impact, is 
impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec.  572.44(a) at 14 fps in 
accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, the peak accelerations at 
the location of the accelerometers mounted on the thorax in accordance 
with Sec.  572.44(b) shall be:
    (1) For the accelerometer at the top of the Rib Bar on the struck 
side (LUR or RUR) not less than 37 g's and not more than 46 g's.
    (2) For the accelerometer at the bottom of the Rib Bar on the struck 
side

[[Page 48]]

(LLR or RLR) not less than 37 g's and not more than 46 g's.
    (3) For the lower thoracic spine (T12) not less than 15 g's and not 
more than 22 g's.
    (b) Test Procedure. (1) Adjust the dummy legs as specified in Sec.  
572.44(f). Seat the dummy on a seating surface as specified in Sec.  
572.44(h) with the limbs extended horizontally forward.
    (2) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe at the 
lateral side of the chest at the intersection of the centerlines of the 
third rib and the Rib Bar on the desired side of impact. This is the 
left side if the dummy is to be used on the driver's side of the vehicle 
and the right side if the dummy is to be used on the passenger side of 
the vehicle. The probe's centerline is perpendicular to thorax's 
midsagittal plane.
    (3) Align the test probe so that its longitudinal centerline 
coincides with the line formed by the intersection of the transverse and 
frontal planes perpendicular to the chest's midsagittal plane passing 
through the designated impact point.
    (4) Position the dummy as specified in Sec.  572.44(h), so that the 
thorax's midsagittal plane and tangential plane to the Hinge Mounting 
Block (Drawing SID-034) are vertical.
    (5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of 
impact at the designated impact point, the probe's longitudinal 
centerline falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line perpendicular to 
the dummy's midsagittal plane and passing through the designated impact 
point.
    (6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no 
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
    (7) Allow a time period of at least 20 minutes between successive 
tests of the chest.

[59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994, as amended at 59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994]



Sec.  572.43  Lumbar spine and pelvis.

    (a) When the pelvis of a fully assembled dummy (SA-SID-M001A 
revision B, dated September 12, 1996, (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec.  572.40) is impacted laterally by a test probe conforming to Sec.  
572.44(a) at 14 fps in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, 
the peak acceleration at the location of the accelerometer mounted in 
the pelvis cavity in accordance with Sec.  572.44(c) shall be not less 
than 40g and not more than 60g. The acceleration-time curve for the test 
shall be unimodal and shall lie at or above the +20g level for an 
interval not less than 3 milliseconds and not more than 7 milliseconds.
    (b) Test Procedure. (1) Adjust the dummy legs as specified in Sec.  
572.44(f). Seat the dummy on a seating surface as specified in Sec.  
572.44(h) with the limbs extended horizontally forward.
    (2) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe at the 
lateral side of the pelvis at a point 3.9 inches vertical from the 
seating surface and 4.8 inches ventral to a transverse vertical plane 
which is tangent to the back of the dummy's buttocks.
    (3) Align the test probe so that at impact its longitudinal 
centerline coincides with the line formed by intersection of the 
horizontal and vertical planes perpendicular to the midsagittal plane 
passing through the designated impact point.
    (4) Adjust the dummy so that its midsagittal plane is vertical and 
the rear surfaces of the thorax and buttocks are tangent to a transverse 
vertical plane.
    (5) Impact the pelvis with the test probe so that at the moment of 
impact the probe's longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of the 
line specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
    (6) Guide the test probe during impact so that it moves with no 
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
    (7) Allow a time period of at least 2 hours between successive tests 
of the pelvis.

[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994; 
63 FR 16140, Apr. 2, 1998]



Sec.  572.44  Instrumentation and test conditions.

    (a) The test probe used for lateral thoracic and pelvis impact tests 
is a 6 inch diameter cylinder that weighs 51.5 pounds including 
instrumentation. Its impacting end has a flat right angle face that is 
rigid and has an edge radius of 0.5 inches.
    (b) Three accelerometers are mounted in the thorax for measurement 
of

[[Page 49]]

lateral accelerations with each accelerometer's sensitive axis aligned 
to be closely perpendicular to the thorax's midsagittal plane. The 
accelerometers are mounted in the following locations:
    (1) One accelerometer is mounted on the thorax to lumbar adaptor 
(SID-005 revision F, dated May 18, 1994, incorporated by reference; see 
Sec.  572.40) with seismic mass center located 0.5 inches toward the 
impact side, 0.1 inches upward and 1.86 inches rearward from the 
reference point shown in Figure 30 in appendix A to subpart F of part 
572. Maximum permissible variation of the seismic location must not 
exceed 0.2 inches spherical radius.
    (2) Two accelerometers are mounted, one on the top and the other at 
the bottom part of the Rib Bar (SID-024) on the struck side. Their 
seismic mass centers are at any distance up to .4 inches from a point on 
the Rib Bar surface located on its longitudinal center line .75 inches 
from the top for the top accelerometer and .75 inches from the bottom, 
for the bottom accelerometer.
    (c) One accelerometer is mounted in the pelvis for measurement of 
the lateral acceleration with its sensitive axis perpendicular to the 
pelvic midsagittal plane. The accelerometer is mounted on the rear wall 
of the instrumentation cavity of the pelvis (SID-087 revision H, dated 
May 18, 1994, incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.40). The 
accelerometer's seismic mass with respect to the mounting bolt center 
line is 0.9 inches up, 0.7 inches to the left for left side impact and 
0.03 inches to the left for right side impact, and 0.5 inches rearward 
from the rear wall mounting surface as shown in Figure 31 in appendix A 
to subpart F of part 572. Maximum permissible variation of the seismic 
location must not exceed 0.2 inches spherical radius.
    (d) Instrumentation and sensors used must conform to the SAE J-211 
(1980) recommended practice requirements (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec.  572.40). The outputs of the accelerometers installed in the dummy 
are then processed with the software for the Finite Impulse Response 
(FIR) filter (FIR 100 software). The FORTRAN program for this FIR 100 
software (FIR100 Filter Program, Version 1.0, July 16, 1990) is 
incorporated by reference in this part (see Sec.  572.40). The data are 
processed in the following manner:
    (1) Analog data recorded in accordance with SAE J-211 (1980) 
recommended practice channel class 1000 specification.
    (2) Filter the data with a 300 Hz, SAE Class 180 filter;
    (3) Subsample the data to a 1600 Hz sampling rate;
    (4) Remove the bias from the subsampled data, and
    (5) Filter the data with the FIR100 Filter Program (Version 1.0, 
July 16, 1990), which has the following characteristics--
    (i) Passband frequency, 100 Hz.
    (ii) Stopband frequency, 189 Hz.
    (iii) Stopband gain, -50 db.
    (iv) Passband ripple, 0.0225 db.
    (e) The mountings for the spine, rib and pelvis accelerometers shall 
have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency 
range of the applicable channel class.
    (f) Limb joints of the test dummy are set at the force between 1-2 
g's, which just supports the limbs' weight when the limbs are extended 
horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not 
exceed 2 g's throughout the range of limb motion.
    (g) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 
[deg]F to 78 [deg]F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 
percent after exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of 
not less than 4 hours.
    (h) For the performance of tests specified in Sec. Sec.  572.42 and 
572.43, the dummy is positioned as follows:
    (1) The dummy is placed on a flat, rigid, clean, dry, horizontal 
smooth aluminum surface whose length and width dimensions are not less 
than 16 inches, so that the dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical and 
centered on the test surface. The dummy's torso is positioned to meet 
the requirements of Sec.  572.42 and Sec.  572.43. The seating surface 
is without the back support and the test dummy is positioned so that the 
dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical and centered on the seat surface.
    (2) The legs are positioned so that their centerlines are in planes 
parallel to the midsagittal plane.

[[Page 50]]

    (3) Performance pre-tests of the assembled dummy are separated in 
time by a period of not less than 20 minutes unless otherwise specified.
    (4) Surfaces of the dummy components are not painted except as 
specified in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.

[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 47011, Sept. 17, 1991; 
59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994]

[[Page 51]]



            Sec. Appendix A to Subpart F of Part 572--Figures
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.168


[[Page 52]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14OC94.001


[59 FR 52092, Oct. 14, 1994]

[[Page 53]]

Subparts G-H [Reserved]



                       Subpart I_6-Year-Old Child

    Source: 56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.70  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) The drawings and specifications referred to in Sec. Sec.  
572.71(a) and 572.71(b) are hereby incorporated in subpart I by 
reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The 
Director of the Federal Register approved the materials incorporated by 
reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies 
of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Docket Section, 400 Seventh 
Street, SW., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and 
Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of 
this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://
www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--
locations.html.
    (b) The incorporated material is available as follows:
    (1) Drawing number SA 106 C001 sheets 1 through 18, and the drawings 
listed in the parts lists described on sheets 8 through 17, are 
available from Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Rd., 
Beltsville, MD 20705, Telephone (301) 210-5600, Fax (301) 210-5607.
    (2) A User's Manual entitled, ``Six-Year-Old Size Child Test Dummy 
SA106C,'' October 28, 1991, is available from Reprographic Technologies 
at the address in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
    (3) SAE Recommended Practice J211, Instrumentation for Impact Test, 
June 1988, is available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 
400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096-0001.

[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 62 FR 44226, Aug. 20, 1997]



Sec.  572.71  General description.

    (a) The representative 6-year-old dummy consists of a drawings and 
specifications package that contains the following materials:
    (1) Technical drawings, specifications, and the parts list package 
shown in SA 106C 001, sheets 1 through 18, rereleased July 11, 1997;
    (2) A user's manual entitled, ``Six-Year-Old Size Child Test Dummy 
SA106C,'' October 28, 1991.
    (b) The dummy is made up of the component assemblies set out in 
Table A:

                                                     Table A
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
        Assembly drawing No.              Drawing title       Listed on drawing No.            Revision
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SA 106C 010........................  Head Assembly.........  SA 106C 001, sheet 8..  A
SA 106C 020........................  Neck Assembly.........  SA 106C 001, sheet 9..  A
SA 106C 030........................  Thorax Assembly.......  SA 106C 001, sheet 10.  C
SA 106C 030........................  Thorax Assembly.......  SA 106C 001, sheet 11.  D
SA 106C 041........................  Arm Assembly (right)..  SA 106C 001, sheet 14.  A
SA 106C 042........................  Arm Assembly (left)...  SA 106C 001, sheet 15.  A
SA 106C 050........................  Lumbar Spine Assembly.  SA 106C 001, sheet 12.  A
SA 106C 060........................  Pelvis Assembly.......  SA 106C 001, sheet 13.  A
SA 106C 071........................  Leg Assembly (right)..  SA 106C 001, sheet 16.  A
SA 106C 072........................  Leg Assembly (left)...  SA 106C 001, sheet 17.  A
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for 
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between 
metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated 
crash-impact conditions.
    (d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after its use in 
any test similar to those specified in Standard 213, Child Restraint 
Systems.

[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 62 FR 44226, Aug. 20, 1997]



Sec.  572.72  Head assembly and test procedure.

    (a) Head assembly. The head consists of the assembly designated as 
SA 106

[[Page 54]]

010 on drawing No. SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conforms to each drawing 
listed on SA 106C 001, sheet 8.
    (b) Head assembly impact response requirements. When the head is 
impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec.  572.77(a)(1) at 7 feet per 
second (fps) according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this 
section, then the resultant head acceleration measured at the location 
of the accelerometer installed in the headform according to Sec.  
577.77(b) is not less than 130g and not more than 160g.
    (1) The recorded acceleration-time curve for this test is unimodal 
at or above the 50g level, and lies at or above that level for an 
interval not less than 1.0 and not more than 2.0 milliseconds.
    (2) The lateral acceleration vector does not exceed 5g.
    (c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as 
follows:
    (1) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface having a back 
support as specified in Sec.  572.78(c), and adjust the joints of the 
limbs at any setting (between 1g and 2g) which just supports the limbs' 
weight when the limbs are extended horizontally and forward.
    (2) Adjust the test probe so that its longitudinal center line is--
    (i) At the forehead at the point of orthogonal intersection of the 
head midsagittal plane and the transverse plane which is perpendicular 
to the Z axis of the head as shown in Figure 40;
    (ii) Located 2.7 0.1 inches below the top of 
the head measured along the Z axis, and;
    (iii) Coincides within 2 degrees with the line made by the 
intersection of the horizontal and midsagittal planes passing through 
this point.
    (3) Impact the head with the test probe so that at the moment of 
contact the probe's longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a 
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (4) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no 
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
    (5) Allow at least 60 minutes between successive head tests.



Sec.  572.73  Neck assembly and test procedure.

    (a) Neck assembly. The neck consists of the assembly designated as 
SA 106C 020 on drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conforms to each 
drawing listed on SA 106C 001, sheet 9.
    (b) Neck assembly impact response requirements. When the head-neck 
assembly (SA 106C 010 and SA 106C 020) is tested according to the test 
procedure in Sec.  572.73(c), the head:
    (1) Shall rotate, while translating in the direction of the pendulum 
preimpact flight, in reference to the pendulum's longitudinal center 
line a total of 78 degrees 6 degrees about the 
head's center of gravity; and
    (2) Shall rotate to the extent specified in Table B at each 
indicated point in time, measured from time of impact, with the chordal 
displacement measured at the head's center of gravity.
    (i) Chordal displacement at time ``T'' is defined as the straight 
line distance between the position relative to the pendulum arm of the 
head's center of gravity at time ``zero;'' and the position relative to 
the pendulum arm of the head's center of gravity at time T as 
illustrated by Figure 3 in Sec.  572.11.
    (ii) The peak resultant acceleration recorded at the location of the 
accelerometers mounted in the headform according to Sec.  572.77(b) 
shall not exceed 30g.

                                                     Table B
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                   Chordal
                                                                   Time (ms) (2+.08T)        (inches) 0.8
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0................................................................                    0                       0
30...............................................................                   26                     2.7
60...............................................................                   44                     4.3
Maximum..........................................................                   68                     5.8
60...............................................................                  101                     4.4
30...............................................................                  121                     2.4
0................................................................                  140                       0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) The pendulum shall not reverse direction until the head's center 
of gravity returns to the original ``zero'' time position relative to 
the pendulum arm.
    (c) Neck test procedure. The test procedure for the neck is as 
follows:
    (1) Mount the head and neck assembly on a rigid pendulum as 
specified in Sec.  572.21, Figure 15, so that the head's midsagittal 
plane is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the 
pendulum's longitudinal center line. Attach the neck directly to the 
pendulum as shown in Sec.  572.21, Figure 15.

[[Page 55]]

    (2) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height 
such that the velocity at impact is 17.00 1.0 fps, 
measured at the center of the accelerometer specified in Sec.  572.21, 
Figure 15.
    (3) Decelerate the pendulum to a stop with an acceleration-time 
pulse described as follows:
    (i) Establish 5g and 20g levels on the a-t curve.
    (ii) Establish t1 at the point where the rising a-t curve 
first crosses the 5g level; t2 at the point where the rising 
a-t curve first crosses the 20g level; t3 at the point where 
the decaying a-t curve last crosses the 20g level; and t4 at 
the point where the decaying a-t curve first crosses the 5g level.
    (iii) t2-t1 shall not be more than 3 
milliseconds.
    (iv) t3-t2 shall not be more than 22 
milliseconds, and not less than 19 milliseconds.
    (v) t4-t3 shall not be more than 6 
milliseconds.
    (vi) The average deceleration between t2 and 
t3 shall not be more than 26g, or less than 22g.
    (4) Allow the neck to flex without the head or neck contacting any 
object other than the pendulum arm.
    (5) Allow at least 60 minutes between successive tests.

[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 4086, Feb. 3, 1992]



Sec.  572.74  Thorax assembly and test procedure.

    (a) Thorax assembly. The thorax consists of the part of the torso 
assembly designated as SA 106C 030 on drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 2, 
Revision A, and conforms to each applicable drawing on SA 106C 001 sheet 
10, Revision C (including Drawing number 6C-1610-1 thru -4, Revision A, 
titled ``Screw Button Head Socket'', dated September 30, 1996, and 
Drawing number 6C-1021, Revision B, titled ``Ballast, 6 Yr. Thoraxc (for 
7267A)'', dated September 24, 1996), and sheet 11, Revision D (including 
Drawing number SA 6C-909, Revision A, titled ``Cover-chest 
Accelerometer'', dated September 21, 1996, and Drawing number 6C-1000-1, 
Revision C, titled ``Sternum Thoracic Weld Ass'y.'', dated September 24, 
1996).
    (b) Thorax assembly requirements. When the thorax is impacted by a 
test probe conforming to Sec.  572.77(a) to 20 0.3 
fps according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, 
the peak resultant accelerations at the accelerometers mounted in the 
chest cavity according to Sec.  572.77(c) shall not be less than 43g and 
not more than 53g.
    (1) The recorded acceleration-time curve for this test shall be 
unimodal at or above the 30g level, and shall lie at or above that level 
for an interval not less than 4 milliseconds and not more than 6 
milliseconds.
    (2) The lateral accelerations shall not exceed 5g.
    (c) Thorax test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax is as 
follows:
    (1) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back 
support as specified in Sec.  572.78(c), and adjust the joints of the 
limbs at any setting (between 1g and 2g) which just supports the limbs' 
weight when the limbs are extended horizontally and forward, parallel to 
the midsagittal plane.
    (2) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so 
that the impact point is 2.25 inches below the longitudinal center of 
the clavicle retainer screw, and adjust the dummy so that the plane that 
bisects the No. 3 rib into upper and lower halves is horizontal 1 degree.
    (3) Place the longitudinal center line of the test probe so that it 
coincides with the designated impact point, and align the test probe so 
that at impact, the probe's longitudinal center line coincides (within 2 
degrees) with the line formed at the intersection of the horizontal and 
midsagittal planes and passing through the designated impact point.
    (4) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of 
contact the probe's longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a 
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (5) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no 
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
    (6) Allow at least 30 minutes between successive tests.

[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 60 FR 2897, Jan. 12, 1995; 62 
FR 44227, Aug. 20, 1997]

[[Page 56]]



Sec.  572.75  Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly and test
procedure.

    (a) Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly. The lumbar spine, 
abdomen, and pelvis consist of the part of the torso assembly designated 
as SA 106C 50 and 60 on drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conform to 
each applicable drawing listed on SA 106C 001, sheets 12 and 13.
    (b) Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly response 
requirements. When the lumbar spine is subjected to a force continuously 
applied according to the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this 
section, the lumbar spine assembly shall--
    (1) Flex by an amount that permits the rigid thoracic spine to 
rotate from the torso's initial position, as defined in (c)(3), by 40 
degrees at a force level of not less that 46 pounds and not more than 52 
pounds, and
    (2) Straighten upon removal of the force to within 5 degrees of its 
initial position when the force is removed.
    (c) Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis test procedure. The test 
procedure for the lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis is as follows:
    (1) Remove the dummy's head-neck assembly, arms, and lower legs, 
clean and dry all component surfaces, and seat the dummy upright on a 
seat as specified in Figure 42.
    (2) Adjust the dummy by--
    (i) Tightening the femur ballflange screws at each hip socket joint 
to 50 inch-pounds torque;
    (ii) Attaching the pelvis to the seating surface by a bolt D/605 as 
shown in Figure 42.
    (iii) Attaching the upper legs at the knee joints by the attachments 
shown in drawing Figure 42.
    (iv) Tightening the mountings so that the pelvis-lumbar joining 
surface is horizontal; and
    (v) Removing the head and neck, and installing a cylindrical 
aluminum adapter (neck adapter) of 2.0 inches diameter and 2.60 inches 
length as shown in Figure 42.
    (3) The initial position of the dummy's torso is defined by the 
plane formed by the rear surfaces of the shoulders and buttocks which is 
three to seven degrees forward of the transverse vertical plane.
    (4) Flex the thorax forward 50 degrees and then rearward as 
necessary to return the dummy to its initial torso position, unsupported 
by external means.
    (5) Apply a forward pull force in the midsagittal plane at the top 
of the neck adapter so that when the lumbar spine flexion is 40 degrees, 
the applied force is perpendicular to the thoracic spine box.
    (i) Apply the force at any torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 
degrees per second, up to 40 degrees of flexion.
    (ii) For 10 seconds, continue to apply a force sufficient to 
maintain 40 degrees of flexion, and record the highest applied force 
during the 10 second period.
    (iii) Release all force as rapidly as possible, and measure the 
return angle 3 minutes after the release.



Sec.  572.76  Limbs assembly and test procedure.

    (a) Limbs assembly. The limbs consist of the assemblies designated 
as SA 106C 041, SA 106C 042, SA 106C 071, and SA 106C 072, on drawing 
No. SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conform to each applicable drawing listed 
on SA 106C 001, sheets 14 through 17.
    (b) Limbs assembly impact response requirement. When each knee is 
impacted at 7.0 0.1 fps, according to paragraph 
(c) of this section, the maximum force on the femur shall not be more 
than 1060 pounds and not less than 780 pounds, with a duration above 400 
pounds of not less than 0.8 milliseconds.
    (c) Limbs test procedure. The test procedure for the limbs is as 
follows:
    (1) Seat and orient the dummy without back support on a seating 
surface that is 11 0.2 inches above a horizontal 
(floor) surface as specified in Sec.  572.78(c).
    (i) Orient the dummy as specified in Figure 43 with the hip joint 
adjustment at any setting between 1g and 2g.
    (ii) Place the dummy legs in a plane parallel to the dummy's 
midsagittal plane with the knee pivot center line perpendicular to the 
dummy's midsagittal plane, and with the feet flat on the horizontal 
(floor) surface.
    (iii) Adjust the feet and lower legs until the line between the 
midpoint of

[[Page 57]]

each knee pivot and each ankle pivot is within 2 degrees of the 
vertical.
    (2) If necessary, reposition the dummy so that at the level one inch 
below the seating surface, the rearmost point of the dummy's lower legs 
remains not less than 3 inches and not more than 6 inches forward of the 
forward edge of the seat.
    (3) Align the test probe specified in Sec.  572.77(a) with the 
longitudinal center line of the femur force gauge, so that at impact, 
the probe's longitudinal center line coincides with the sensor's 
longitudinal center line within 2 degrees.
    (4) Impact the knee with the test probe moving horizontally and 
parallel to the midsagittal plane at the specified velocity.
    (5) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no 
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.



Sec.  572.77  Instrumentation.

    (a)(1) Test probe. For the head, thorax, and knee impact test, use a 
test probe that is rigid, of uniform density and weighs 10 pounds and 6 
ounces, with a diameter of 3 inches; a length of 13.8 inches; and an 
impacting end that has a rigid flat right face and edge radius of 0.5 
inches.
    (2) The head and thorax assembly may be instrumented either with a 
Type A or Type B accelerometer.
    (i) Type A accelerometer is defined in drawing SA 572 S1.
    (ii) Type B accelerometer is defined in drawing SA 572 S2.
    (b) Head accelerometers. (1) Install accelerometers in the head as 
shown in drawing SA 106C 001 sheet 1 using suitable spacers or adaptors 
as needed to affix them to the horizontal transverse bulkhead so that 
the sensitive axes of the three accelerometers intersect at the point in 
the midsagittal plane located 0.4 inches below the intersection of a 
line connecting the longitudinal center lines of the roll pins in either 
side of the dummy's head with the head's midsagittal plane.
    (2) The head has three orthogonally mounted accelerometers aligned 
as follows:
    (i) Align one accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is 
perpendicular to the horizontal bulkhead in the midsagittal plane.
    (ii) Align the second accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is 
parallel to the horizontal bulkhead, and perpendicular to the 
midsagittal plane.
    (iii) Align the third accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is 
parallel to the horizontal bulkhead in the midsagittal plane.
    (iv) The seismic mass center for any of these accelerometers may be 
at any distance up to 0.4 inches from the axial intersection point.
    (c) Thoracic accelerometers. (1) Install accelerometers in the 
thoracic assembly as shown in drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 1, using 
suitable spacers and adaptors to affix them to the frontal surface of 
the spine assembly so that the sensitive axes of the three 
accelerometers intersect at a point in the midsagittal plane located 
0.95 inches posterior of the spine mounting surface, and 0.55 inches 
below the horizontal centerline of the two upper accelerometer mount 
attachment hole centers.
    (2) The sternum-thoracic assembly has three orthogonally mounted 
accelerometers aligned as follows:
    (i) Align one accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is parallel 
to the attachment surface in the midsagittal plane.
    (ii) Align the second accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is 
parallel to the attachment surface, and perpendicular to the midsagittal 
plane.
    (iii) Align the third accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is 
perpendicular to the attachment surface in the midsagittal plane.
    (iv) The seismic mass center for any of these accelerometers may be 
at any distance up to 0.4 inches of the axial intersection point.
    (d) Femur-sensing device. Install a force-sensing device SA 572-S10 
axially in each femur shaft as shown in drawing SA 106C 072 and secure 
it to the femur assembly so that the distance measured between the 
center lines of two attachment bolts is 3.00 inches.
    (e) Limb joints. Set the limb joints at lg, barely restraining the 
limb's weight when the limb is extended horizontally, and ensure that 
the force required to move the limb segment does not exceed 2g 
throughout the limb's range of motion.

[[Page 58]]

    (f) Recording outputs. Record the outputs of acceleration and force-
sensing devices installed in the dummy and in the test apparatus 
specified in this part, in individual channels that conform to the 
requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J211, October 1988, with 
channel classes as set out in the following table C.

                                 Table C
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Device                               Channel
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head acceleration.........................  Class 1000
Pendulum acceleration.....................  Class 60
Thorax acceleration.......................  Class 180
Femur-force...............................  Class 600
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance frequency 
within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel 
class.



Sec.  572.78  Performance test conditions.

    (a) Conduct performance tests at any temperature from 66 [deg]F to 
78 [deg]F, and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent, 
but only after having first exposed the dummy to these conditions for a 
period of not less than 4 hours.
    (b) For the performance tests specified in Sec.  572.72 (head), 
Sec.  572.74 (thorax), Sec.  572.75 (lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis), 
and Sec.  572.76 (limbs), position the dummy as set out in paragraph (c) 
of this section.
    (c) Place the dummy on a horizontal seating surface covered by 
teflon sheeting so that the dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical and 
centered on the test surface.
    (1) The seating surface is flat, rigid, clean, and dry, with a 
smoothness not exceeding 40 microinches, a length of at least 16 inches, 
and a width of at least 16 inches.
    (2) For head impact tests, the seating surface has a vertical back 
support whose top is 12.4 0.2 inches above the 
horizontal surface, and the rear surfaces of the dummy's back and 
buttocks touch the back support as shown in Figure 40.
    (3) For the thorax, lumbar spine, and knee tests, the horizontal 
surface is without a back support as shown in Figure 41 (for the 
thorax); Figure 42 (for the lumbar spine); and Figure 43 (for the knee).
    (4) Position the dummy's arms and legs so that their center lines 
are in planes parallel to the midsagittal plane.
    (5) Adjust each shoulder yoke so that with its upper surface 
horizontal, a yoke is at the midpoint of its anterior-posterior travel.
    (6) Adjust the dummy for head and knee impact tests so that the rear 
surfaces of the shoulders and buttocks are tangent to a transverse 
vertical plane.
    (d) The dummy's dimensions are specified in drawings SA 106C 001, 
sheet 3, Revision A, July 11, 1997, and sheets 4 through 6.
    (e) Unless otherwise specified in this regulation, performance tests 
of the same component, segment, assembly or fully assembled dummy are 
separated in time by a period of not less than 20 minutes.
    (f) Unless otherwise specified in this regulation, the surfaces of 
the dummy components are not painted.

[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 62 FR 44227, Aug. 20, 1997]



                  Sec. Figures to Subpart I of Part 572

[[Page 59]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.169


[[Page 60]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.170


[60 FR 2898, Jan. 12, 1995]

[[Page 61]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.171


[[Page 62]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.172



                       Subpart J_9-Month Old Child

    Source: 56 FR 41080, Aug. 19, 1991, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.80  Incorporated materials.

    The drawings and specifications referred to in Sec.  572.81(a) that 
are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in

[[Page 63]]

this part by reference. These materials are thereby made part of this 
regulation. The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials 
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR 
part 51. Copies of the materials may be obtained from Rowley-Scher 
Reprographics, Inc., 1216 K Street, NW., Washington, DC 20002, telephone 
(202) 628-6667. Copies are available for inspection in the general 
reference section of Docket 89-11, Docket Section, National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration, room 5109, 400 Seventh Street, SW., 
Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration 
(NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, 
call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/
code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.



Sec.  572.81  General description.

    (a) The dummy consists of: (1) The assembly specified in drawing LP 
1049/A, March 1979, which is described in its entirety by means of 
approximately 54 separate drawings and specifications, 1049/1 through 
1049/54; and (2) a parts list LP 1049/0 (5 sheets); and (3) a report 
entitled, ``The TNO P3/4 Child Dummy Users Manual,'' January 1979, 
published by Instituut voor Wegtransportmiddelen TNO.
    (b) Adjacent dummy segments are joined in a manner such that 
throughout the range of motion and also under simulated crash-impact 
conditions there is no contact between metallic elements except for 
contacts that exist under static conditions.
    (c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used 
in dynamic tests such as that specified in Standard No. 213 of this 
chapter (Sec.  571.213).



Sec.  572.82  Head.

    The head consists of the assembly shown in drawing LP 1049/A and 
conforms to each of the applicable drawings listed under LP 1049/0 
through 54.



Sec.  572.83  Head-neck.

    The head-neck assembly shown in drawing 1049/A consists of parts 
specified as items 1 through 16 and in item 56.



Sec.  572.84  Thorax.

    The thorax consists of the part of the torso shown in assembly 
drawing LP 1049/A and conforms to each of the applicable drawings listed 
under LP 1049/0 through 54.



Sec.  572.85  Lumbar spine flexure.

    (a) When subjected to continuously applied force in accordance with 
paragraph (b) of this section, the lumbar spine assembly shall flex by 
an amount that permits the thoracic spine to rotate from its initial 
position in accordance with Figure No. 18 of Sec.  572.21 (49 CFR part 
572) by 40 degrees at a force level of not less than 18 pounds and not 
more than 22 pounds, and straighten upon removal of the force to within 
5 degrees of its initial position.
    (b) Test procedure. (1) The lumbar spine flexure test is conducted 
on a dummy assembly as shown in drawing LP 1049/A, but with the arms 
(which consist of parts identified as items 17 through 30) and all head-
neck parts (identified as items 1 through 13 and 59 through 63), 
removed.
    (2) With the torso assembled in an upright position, adjust the 
lumbar cable by tightening the adjustment nut for the lumbar vertebrae 
until the spring is compressed to \2/3\ of its unloaded length.
    (3) Position the dummy in an upright seated position on a seat as 
indicated in Figure No. 18 of Sec.  572.21 (lower legs do not need to be 
removed, but must be clamped firmly to the seating surface), ensuring 
that all dummy component surfaces are clean, dry and untreated unless 
otherwise specified.
    (4) Firmly affix the dummy to the seating surface through the pelvis 
at the hip joints by suitable clamps that also prevent any relative 
motion with respect to the upper legs during the test in Sec.  
572.65(c)(3) of this part. Install a pull attachment at the neck to 
torso juncture as shown in Figure 18 of Sec.  572.21.
    (5) Flex the thorax forward 50 degrees and then rearward as 
necessary to return it to its initial position.
    (6) Apply a forward pull force in the midsagittal plane at the top 
of the

[[Page 64]]

neck adapter so that at 40 degrees of the lumbar spine flexion the 
applied force is perpendicular to the thoracic spine box. Apply the 
force at any torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per 
second up to 40 degrees of flexion but no further; maintain 40 degrees 
of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force during 
that time. Release all force as rapidly as possible and measure the 
return angle three minutes after release.



Sec.  572.86  Test conditions and dummy adjustment.

    (a) With the complete torso on its back lying on a horizontal 
surface and the neck assembly mounted and shoulders on the edge of the 
surface, adjust the neck such that the head bolt is lowered 0.40 0.05 inches (10 1 mm) after a 
vertically applied load of 11.25 pounds (50 N) applied to the head bolt 
is released.
    (b) With the complete torso on its back with the adjusted neck 
assembly as specified in Sec.  572.66(a), and lying on a horizontal 
surface with the shoulders on the edge of the surface, mount the head 
and tighten the head bolt and nut firmly, with the head in horizontal 
position. Adjust the head joint at the force between 1-2g, which just 
supports the head's weight.
    (c) Using the procedures described below, limb joints are set at the 
force between 1-2g, which just supports the limbs' weight when the limbs 
are extended horizontally forward:
    (1) With the complete torso lying with its front down on a 
horizontal surface, with the hip joint just over the edge of the 
surface, mount the upper leg and tighten hip joint nut firmly. Adjust 
the hip joint by releasing the hip joint nut until the upper leg just 
starts moving.
    (2) With the complete torso and upper leg lying with its front up on 
a horizontal surface, with the knee joint just over the edge of the 
surface, mount the lower leg and tighten knee joint firmly. Adjust the 
knee joint by releasing the knee joint nut until the lower leg just 
starts moving.
    (3) With the torso in an upright position, mount the upper arm and 
tighten firmly the adjustment bolts for the shoulder joint with the 
upper arm placed in a horizontal position. Adjust the shoulder joint by 
releasing the shoulder joint nut until the upper arm just starts moving.
    (4) With the complete torso in an upright position and upper arm in 
a vertical position, mount the forearm in a horizontal position and 
tighten the elbow hinge bolt and nut firmly. Adjust the elbow joint nut 
until the forearm just starts moving.
    (d) With the torso assembled in an upright position, the adjustment 
nut for the lumbar vertebrae is tightened until the spring is compressed 
to \2/3\ of its unloaded length.
    (e) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 to 78 
degrees F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent 
after exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of not less 
than four hours.
    (f) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly or 
fully assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than 
20 minutes unless otherwise specified.
    (g) Surfaces of the dummy components are not painted except as 
specified in the part or in drawings incorporated by this part.



                        Subpart K_Newborn Infant

    Source: 58 FR 3232, Jan. 8, 1993, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.90  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) The drawings and specifications referred to in Sec.  572.91(a) 
are hereby incorporated in subpart K by reference. These materials are 
thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal 
Register approved that materials incorporated by reference in accordance 
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be 
inspected at NHTSA's Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street, SW., room 5109, 
Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration 
(NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, 
call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/
code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.

[[Page 65]]

    (b) The incorporated material is available as follows:
    (1) Drawing numbers 126-0000 through 126-0015 (sheets 1 through 3), 
126-0017 through 126-0027, and a parts list entitled ``Parts List for 
CAMI Newborn Dummy,'' are available from Reprographic Technologies, 1111 
14th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20005. (202) 628-6667.
    (2) A construction manual entitled, ``Construction of the Newborn 
Infant Dummy'' (July 1992) is available from Reprographic Technologies 
at the address in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.



Sec.  572.91  General description.

    (a) The representative newborn infant dummy consists of a drawings 
and specifications package that contains the following materials:
    (1) Drawing numbers 126-0000 through 126-0015 (sheets 1 through 3), 
126-0017 through 126-0027, and a parts list entitled ``Parts List for 
CAMI Newborn Dummy''; and,
    (2) A construction manual entitled, ``Construction of the Newborn 
Infant Dummy'' (July 1992).
    (b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used 
in dynamic tests specified in Standard No. 213 of this chapter (Sec.  
571.213).



                     Subpart L_Free Motion Headform

    Source: 60 FR 43058, Aug. 18, 1995, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.100  Incorporation by Reference.

    (a) The drawings and specifications referred to in Sec.  572.101 are 
hereby incorporated in subpart L by reference. These materials are 
thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal 
Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in accordance 
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be 
inspected at NHTSA's Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., room 
5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records 
Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this 
material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/
federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (b) The incorporated material is available as follows:
    (1) Drawing number 92041-001, ``Head Form Assembly,'' (November 30, 
1992); drawing number 92041-002, ``Skull Assembly,'' (November 30, 
1992); drawing number 92041-003, ``Skull Cap Plate Assembly,'' (November 
30, 1992); drawing number 92041-004, ``Skull Cap Plate,'' (November 30, 
1992); drawing number 92041-005, ``Threaded Pin,'' (November 30, 1992); 
drawing number 92041-006, ``Hex Nut,'' (November 30, 1992); drawing 
number 92041-008, ``Head Skin without Nose,'' (November 30, 1992, as 
amended March 6, 1995); drawing number 92041-009, ``Six-Axis Load Cell 
Simulator Assembly,'' (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-011, 
``Head Ballast Weight,'' (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-018, 
``Head Form Bill of Materials,'' (November 30, 1992); drawing number 
78051-148, ``Skull-Head (cast) Hybrid III,'' (May 20, 1978, as amended 
August 17, 1978); drawing number 78051-228/78051-229, ``Skin- Hybrid 
III,'' (May 20, 1978, as amended through September 24, 1979); drawing 
number 78051-339, ``Pivot Pin-Neck Transducer,'' (May 20, 1978, as 
amended May 14, 1986); drawing number 78051-372, ``Vinyl Skin 
Formulation Hybrid III,'' (May 20, 1978); and drawing number C-1797, 
``Neck Blank, (August 1, 1989); drawing number SA572-S4, ``Accelerometer 
Specification,'' (November 30, 1992), are available from Reprographic 
Technologies, 1111 14th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005.
    (2) A user's manual entitled ``Free-Motion Headform User's Manual,'' 
version 2, March 1995, is available from NHTSA's Docket Section at the 
address in paragraph (a) of this section.
    (3) SAE Recommended Practice J211, OCT 1988, ``Instrumentation for 
Impact Tests,'' Class 1000, is available from The Society of Automotive 
Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.



Sec.  572.101  General description.

    (a) The free motion headform consists of the component assembly 
which is shown in drawings 92041-001 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec.  572.100), 92041-002 (incorporated by reference;

[[Page 66]]

see Sec.  572.100), 92041-003 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  
572.100), 92041-004 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100), 
92041-005 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100), 92041-006 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100), 92041-008 (incorporated 
by reference; see Sec.  572.100), 92041-009 (incorporated by reference; 
see Sec.  572.100), 92041-011 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  
572.100), 78051-148 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100), 
78051-228/78051-229 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100), 
78051-339 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100), 78051-372 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100), C-1797 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec.  572.100), and SA572-S4 (incorporated by reference; 
see Sec.  572.100).
    (b) Disassembly, inspection, and assembly procedures, and sign 
convention for the signal outputs of the free motion headform 
accelerometers, are set forth in the Free-Motion Headform User's Manual 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100).
    (c) The structural properties of the headform are such that it 
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used 
in the test specified in Standard No. 201 of this chapter (Sec.  
571.201).
    (d) The outputs of accelerometers installed in the headform are 
recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of 
SAE Recommended Practice J211, OCT 1988, ``Instrumentation for Impact 
Tests,'' Class 1000 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100).



Sec.  572.102  Drop test.

    (a) When the headform is dropped from a height of 14.8 inches in 
accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, the peak resultant 
accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the 
headform as shown in drawing 92041-001 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec.  572.100) shall not be less than 225g, and not more than 275g. The 
acceleration/time curve for the test shall be unimodal to the extent 
that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse are less 
than ten percent (zero to peak) of the main pulse. The lateral 
acceleration vector shall not exceed 15g (zero to peak).
    (b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the headform in a test environment at 
any temperature between 19 degrees C. to 26 degrees C. and at a relative 
humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent for a period of at least four 
hours prior to its use in a test.
    (2) Clean the headform's skin surface and the surface of the impact 
plate with 1,1,1 Trichloroethane or equivalent.
    (3) Suspend the headform, as shown in Figure 50. Position the 
forehead below the chin such that the skull cap plate is at an angle of 
28.5 0.5 degrees with the impact surface when the 
midsagittal plane is vertical.
    (4) Drop the headform from the specified height by means that ensure 
instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate, 
which is 2 inches thick and 2 feet square. The plate shall have a clean, 
dry surface and any microfinish of not less than 8 microinches 
203.2x10-6 mm (rms) and not more than 80 microinches 
2032x10-6 mm (rms).
    (5) Allow at least 3 hours between successive tests on the same 
headform.



Sec.  572.103  Test conditions and instrumentation.

    (a) Headform accelerometers shall have dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 
SA572-S4 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100) and be mounted 
in the headform as shown in drawing 92041-001 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec.  572.100).
    (b) The outputs of accelerometers installed in the headform are 
recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of 
SAE Recommended Practice J211, OCT 1988, ``Instrumentation for Impact 
Tests,'' Class 1000 (incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100).
    (c) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity conform to the 
sign convention shown in the Free-Motion Headform User's Manual 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec.  572.100).
    (d) The mountings for accelerometers shall have no resonant 
frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the 
applicable channel class.

[[Page 67]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.173


[60 FR 43060, Aug. 18, 1995]

[[Page 68]]



         Subpart M_Side Impact Hybrid Dummy 50th Percentile Male

    Source: 63 FR 41470, Aug. 4, 1998, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.110  Materials incorporated by reference.

    (a) The following materials are hereby incorporated by reference in 
Subpart M:
    (1) The Anthropomorphic Test Dummy Parts List, SID/Hybrid III part 
572, subpart M, dated May 10, 1997.
    (2) The SID/Hybrid III Part 572 Subpart M User's Manual, dated May 
1997.
    (3) Drawing number 96-SIDH3-001, titled, ``Head-Neck Bracket,'' 
dated August 30, 1996.
    (4) Drawing number 96-SIDH3-006, titled, ``Upper and Middle Shoulder 
Foam,'' dated May 10, 1997.
    (5) Drawing number SA-SIDH3-M001, titled, ``Complete Assembly 
SIDH3,'' dated April 19, 1997.
    (6) Drawing number 78051-61X, Revision C, titled ``Head Assembly--
complete,'' dated March 28, 1997
    (7) Drawing number 78051-90, Revision A, titled ``Neck Assembly--
complete,'' dated May 20, 1978.
    (8) Dummy assembly drawing number SA-SID-M030, Revision A, titled 
``Thorax Assembly--complete,'' dated May 18, 1994.
    (9) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-M050, revision A, titled ``Lumbar 
Spine Assembly,'' dated May 18, 1994.
    (10) Dummy assembly drawing SA-150 M060, revision A, titled ``Pelvis 
and Abdomen Assembly,'' dated May 18, 1994.
    (11) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-053, revision A, titled ``Lumbar 
Spine Assembly,'' dated May 18, 1994.
    (12) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-M080, titled ``Leg Assembly, 
Right,'' dated August 13, 1987.
    (13) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-M081, titled ``Leg Assembly, 
Left,'' dated August 13, 1987.
    (14) Drawing number 78051-383X, Revision P, titled ``Neck Transducer 
Structural Replacement,'' dated November 1, 1995.
    (15) The Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J1733 Information 
Report, titled ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing,'' dated 
December 1994.
    (16) SAE Recommended Practice J211, ``Instrumentation for Impact 
Tests,'' Parts 1 and 2, dated March 1995.
    (b) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
    (1) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials 
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR 
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Docket 
Section, 400 Seventh Street S.W., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the 
National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on 
the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: 
http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--
regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (2) The parts lists, user's manual and drawings referred to in 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(14) of this section are available from 
Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Road, Beltsville, MD 
20705 (301) 419-5070.
    (3) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(15) and (a)(16) 
of this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, 
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.



Sec.  572.111  General description.

    (a) The dummy consists of component parts and component assemblies 
defined in drawing SA-SIDH3-M001, dated April 19, 1997, which are 
described in approximately 200 drawings and specifications that are set 
forth in Sec. Sec.  572.32, 572.33 and 572.41(a)(3),(4),(5) and (6) of 
this part, and in the drawing of the Adaptor Bracket 96-SIDH3-001.
    (1) The head assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart 
E (Sec.  572.32) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under 
drawing 78051-61X rev. C.
    (2) The neck assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart 
E (Sec.  572.33) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under 
drawing 78051-90 rev. A.
    (3) The thorax assembly consists of the assembly shown as number SID 
053 and conforms to each applicable drawing subtended by number SA-SID 
M030 rev. A.

[[Page 69]]

    (4) The lumbar spine consists of the assembly specified in subpart B 
(Sec.  572.9(a)) and conforms to drawing SA 150 M050 and drawings 
subtended by SA-SID M050 rev. A.
    (5) The abdomen and pelvis consist of the assembly and conform to 
the drawings subtended by SA 150 M060, the drawings subtended by SA 150 
M060 rev. A and the drawings subtended by SA-SID-087 sheet 1 rev. H, and 
SA-SID-87 sheet 2 rev. H.
    (6) The lower limbs consist of the assemblies specified in Subpart B 
(Sec.  572.10) shown as SA 150 M080 and SA 150 M081 in Figure 1 and SA-
SID-M080 and SA-SID-M081 and conform to the drawings subtended by those 
numbers.
    (7) The neck mounting adaptor bracket conforms to drawing 96-SIDH3-
001.
    (8) Upper and middle shoulder foams conform to drawing 96-SIDH3-006.
    (b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to the specifications of this subpart in every respect before 
being used in vehicle tests specified in Standard 201.
    (c) Disassembly, inspection and assembly procedures, external 
dimensions, weight and drawing list are set forth in the SIDH3 User's 
Manual, dated May 1997.
    (d) Sign convention for signal outputs is given in the reference 
document SAE J1733 of 1994-12, ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash 
Testing.''



Sec.  572.112  Head assembly.

    The head assembly consists of the head (drawing 78051-61X, rev. C) 
with the neck transducer structural replacement (drawing 78051-383X, 
rev. P) and three (3) accelerometers that are mounted in conformance to 
Sec.  572.36 (c).
    (a) Test procedure. (1) Soak the head assembly in a test environment 
at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 degrees C. (66 to 78 degrees 
F.) and at a relative humidity between 10 percent and 70 percent for a 
period of at least four (4) hours prior to its application in a test.
    (2) Clean the impact surface of the head skin and impact plate 
surface, described in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, with 1,1,1 
trichloroethane or equivalent prior to the test.
    (3) Suspend the head, as shown in Figure 51, so that the midsagittal 
plane makes an angle of 35 1 degrees with the 
impact surface and its anterior-posterior axis is horizontal 1 degree.
    (4) Drop the head from a height of 200 0.25 mm 
(7.87 0.01 inches), measured from the lowest point 
on the head, by a means that ensures a smooth, clean release into a 
rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate, which is 51 2 mm (2.0 0.01 in.) thick and 610 
10 mm (24.0 0.4 in) square. 
The plate shall have a dry surface and shall have a microfinish of 0.2 
microns (8 microinches) to 2.0 microns (80 microinches).
    (5) Allow at least two (2) hours between successive tests on the 
same head.
    (b) Performance criteria. (1) When the head assembly is dropped in 
accordance with Sec.  572.112(a), the measured peak resultant 
acceleration shall be between 120 and 150 G's.
    (2) The resultant acceleration-time curve shall be unimodal to the 
extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse 
shall not exceed 15 percent (zero to peak) of the main pulse. The 
longitudinal acceleration vector shall not exceed 15 G's.

[[Page 70]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04AU98.003



Sec.  572.113  Neck assembly.

    The head/neck assembly consists of the parts 78051-61X, rev. C; -84; 
-90, rev. A; -94; -98; -104, revision F; -303, rev. E;--305; -306; -307, 
rev. X and has a six axis neck transducer (drawing C-1709, revision D) 
installed in conformance with Sec.  572.36(d).

[[Page 71]]

    (a) Test procedure. (1) Soak the head and neck assembly in a test 
environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 
72 degrees F.) and at any relative humidity between 10 percent and 70 
percent for a period of at least four (4) hours prior to its application 
in a test.
    (2) Torque the jamnut (78051-64) on the neck cable (78051-301, rev. 
E) to 1.35 0.27 Nm (1.0 0.2 
ft-lb) before each test.
    (3) Using neck brackets 78051-303 and -307, mount the head/neck 
assembly to the part 572 pendulum test fixture (see Sec.  572.33, Figure 
22,) so that the midsagittal plane of the head is vertical and 
perpendicular to the plane of motion of the pendulum's longitudinal 
centerline (see Sec.  572.33, Figure 20, except that the direction of 
the head/neck assembly is rotated around the superior-inferior axis by 
an angle of 90 degrees). Install suitable transducers or other devices 
necessary for measuring the ``D'' plane (horizontal surface at the base 
of the skull) rotation with respect to the pendulum's longitudinal 
centerline. The rotation can be measured by placing a transducer at the 
occipital condyles and another at the intersection of the centerline of 
the neck and the line extending from the base of the neck as shown in 
figure 52.
    (4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height 
to achieve an impact velocity of 6.89 to 7.13 m/s (22.6 to 23.4 ft/sec) 
measured at the center of the pendulum accelerometer.
    (5) Allow the neck to flex without the head or neck contacting any 
object during the test.
    (6) Time zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the 
striker plate and the pendulum deceleration medium.
    (7) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between 
successive tests on the same neck assembly.
    (b) Performance criteria. (1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is to 
be characterized in terms of decrease in velocity as obtained by 
integrating the pendulum acceleration output.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
               Time (ms)                      Pendulum Delta-V (m/s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.....................................  1.96 to 2.55.
20.....................................  4.12 to 5.10.
30.....................................  5.73 to 7.01.
40 to 70...............................  6.27 to 7.64.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) The maximum rotation of the midsagittal plane of the head shall 
be 66 to 82 degrees with respect to the pendulum's longitudinal 
centerline. The decaying head rotation vs. time curve shall cross the 
zero angle between 58 to 67 ms after reaching its peak value.
    (3) The moment about the x-axis which coincides with the midsagittal 
plane of the head at the level of the occipital condyles shall have a 
maximum value between 73 and 88 Nm. The decaying moment vs. time curve 
shall first cross zero moment between 49 and 64 ms after reaching its 
peak value. The following formula is to be used to calculate the moment 
about the occipital condyles when using the six-axis neck transducer:

M = Mx + 0.01778 Fy

Where Mx and Fy are the moment and force measured by the transducer and 
expressed in terms of Nm and N, respectively.

    (4) The maximum rotation of the head with respect to the pendulum's 
longitudinal centerline shall occur between 2 and 16 ms after peak 
moment.

[63 FR 41470, Aug. 4, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 51882, Oct. 11, 2001]



Sec.  572.114  Thorax.

    The specifications and test procedure for the thorax for the SID/
HIII dummy are identical to those applicable to the SID dummy as set 
forth in Sec.  572.42 except that the reference to the SID device found 
in Sec.  572.42(a), (SA-SID-M001A revision A, dated May 18, 1994) does 
not apply and the reference to the SID/HIII (SA-SIDH3-M001, dated April 
19, 1997) is applied in its place.

[[Page 72]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04AU98.004



Sec.  572.115  Lumbar spine and pelvis.

    The specifications and test procedure for the lumbar spine and 
pelvis are identical to those for the SID dummy as set forth in Sec.  
572.42 except that the reference to the SID device found in Sec.  
572.42(a), (SA-SID-M001A revision A, dated May 18, 1994) does not apply 
and the reference to the SID/HIII (SA-SIDH3-M001, dated April 19, 1997) 
is applied in its place.



Sec.  572.116  Instrumentation and test conditions.

    (a) The test probe for lateral thoracic and pelvis impact tests are 
the same as those specified in Sec.  572.44(a).

[[Page 73]]

    (b) Accelerometer mounting in the thorax is the same as specified in 
Sec.  572.44(b).
    (c) Accelerometer mounting in the pelvis is the same as specified in 
Sec.  572.44(c).
    (d) Head accelerometer mounting is the same as specified in Sec.  
572.36(c).
    (e) Neck transducer mounting is the same as specified in Sec.  
572.36(d).
    (f) Instrumentation and sensors used must conform to SAE Recommended 
Practice J211, March 1995, ``Instrumentation for Impact Tests.''
    (g) The mountings for the spine, rib and pelvis accelerometers shall 
have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency 
range of the applicable channel class.
    (h) Limb joints of the test dummy shall be set at the force between 
1 to 2 g's, which just supports the limb's weight when the limbs are 
extended horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment 
does not exceed 2 g's throughout the range of the limb motion.
    (i) Performance tests must be conducted at a temperature between 
20.6 and 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 72 degrees F.) and at a relative 
humidity between 10 percent and 70 percent after exposure of the dummy 
to those conditions for a period of at least four (4) hours.
    (j) For the performance of tests specified in Sec.  572.114 and 
Sec.  572.115, the dummy is positioned the same as specified in Sec.  
572.44(h).



          Subpart N_Six-year-old Child Test Dummy, Beta Version

    Source: 65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.120  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this 
subpart by reference:
    (1) A drawings and inspection package entitled ``Parts List and 
Drawings, Hybrid III Six-year-old Child Test Dummy (H-III6C, Beta 
Version) (June 2002)'', consisting of:
    (i) Drawing No. 127-1000, 6-year H3 Head Complete,
    (ii) Drawing No. 127-1015, Neck Assembly,
    (iii) Drawing No. 127-2000, Upper Torso Assembly,
    (iv) Drawing No. 127-3000, Lower Torso Assembly,
    (v) Drawing No. 127-4000-1 and 4000-2, Leg Assembly,
    (vi) Drawing No. 127-5000-1 and 5000-2, Arm Assembly, and
    (vii) The Hybrid III Six-year-old Child Parts/Drawing List.
    (2) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly, 
Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the Hybrid III 6-year-old Child 
Crash Test Dummy (H-III6C), Beta Version, June 2002'';
    (3) SAE Recommended Practice J211-1995 Instrumentation for Impact 
Tests--Parts 1 and 2, dated March, 1995'';
    (4) SAE J1733 Information Report, titled ``Sign Convention for 
Vehicle Crash Testing'', dated December 1994.
    (b) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials 
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR 
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Technical 
Reference Library, 400 Seventh Street SW., room 5109, Washington, DC, or 
at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For 
information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-
6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--
federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
    (1) The drawings and specifications package and the PADI document 
referred to in subparagraph (a) are accessible for viewing and copying 
at the Department of Transportation Docket's public area, Plaza 401, 400 
Seventh St., SW., Washington, DC 20590, and may be downloaded from 
dms.dot.gov. They are also available from Reprographic Technologies, 
9107 Gaither Rd, Gaithersburg, MD 200877, (301) 419-5070.
    (2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of 
this section are available from the Society of

[[Page 74]]

Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 
15096.

[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47327, July 18, 2002]



Sec.  572.121  General description.

    (a) The Hybrid III type 6-year-old dummy is defined by drawings and 
specifications containing the following materials:
    (1) Technical drawings and specifications package P/N 127-0000, the 
titles of which are listed in Table A;
    (2) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of 
the Hybrid III 6-year-old test dummy, Alpha version (August 1999).

                                 Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Drawing
                     Component assembly                         number
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head assembly...............................................    127-1000
Neck assembly...............................................    127-1015
Upper torso assembly........................................    127-2000
Lower torso assembly........................................    127-3000
Leg assembly................................................    127-4000
Arm assembly................................................    127-5000
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for 
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between 
metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated 
crash impact conditions.
    (c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
must conform to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test 
similar to those specified in Standard 208, ``Occupant Crash 
Protection'', and Standard 213, ``Child Restraint Systems''.



Sec.  572.122  Head assembly and test procedure.

    (a) The head assembly for this test consists of the complete head 
(drawing 127-1000), a six-axis neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11) or 
its structural replacement (drawing 78051-383X), a head to neck-to-pivot 
pin (drawing 78051-339), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4).
    (b) When the head assembly in paragraph (a) of this section is 
dropped from a height of 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) in accordance with paragraph (c) of this 
section, the peak resultant acceleration at the location of the 
accelerometers at the head CG may not be less than 245 G or more than 
300 G. The resultant acceleration vs. time history curve shall be 
unimodal; oscillations occurring after the main pulse must be less than 
10 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration 
shall not exceed 15 g's (zero to peak).
    (c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as 
follows:
    (1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any 
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 [deg]C (66 and 78 [deg]F) and a 
relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to 
a test.
    (2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the skin and the 
impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichloroethane, or an 
equivalent. The skin of the head must be clean and dry for testing.
    (3) Suspend the head assembly as shown in Figure N1. The lowest 
point on the forehead must be 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 
0.04 in) from the impact surface and the head must 
be oriented to an incline of 62 1 deg. between the 
``D'' plane as shown in Figure N1 and the plane of the impact surface. 
The 1.57 mm (0.062 in) diameter holes located on either side of the 
dummy's head shall be used to ensure that the head is level with respect 
to the impact surface.
    (4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by means that 
ensure a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat 
horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and 610 mm (24 in) 
square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a micro finish 
of not less than 203.2. x 10-6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and 
not more than 2032.0 x 10-6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).
    (5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same 
head.



Sec.  572.123  Neck assembly and test procedure.

    (a) The neck assembly for the purposes of this test consists of the 
assembly of components shown in drawing 127-1015.
    (b) When the head-neck assembly consisting of the head (drawing 127-
1000), neck (drawing 127-1015), pivot pin (drawing 78051-339), bib 
simulator

[[Page 75]]

(drawing TE127-1025, neck bracket assembly (drawing 127-8221), six-axis 
neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), neck mounting adaptor (drawing TE-
2208-001), and three accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4) installed in the 
head assembly as specified in Sec.  572.122, is tested according to the 
test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, it shall have the 
following characteristics:
    (1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure N2, shall rotate in 
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's 
longitudinal centerline between 74 degrees and 92 degrees. Within this 
specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital 
condyles shall be not less than 27 N-m (19.9 ft-lbf) and not more than 
33 N-m (24.3 ft-lbf).
    (ii) The positive moment shall decay for the first time to 5 N-m 
(3.7 ft-lbf) between 103 ms and 123 ms.
    (iii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: 
Moment (N-m) = My-(0.01778m) x (FX).
    (iv) My is the moment about the y-axis and FX 
is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11) 
and 0.01778m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.
    (2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure N3, shall rotate in 
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's 
longitudinal centerline between 85 degrees and 103 degrees. Within this 
specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital 
condyles shall be not more than -19 N-m (-14 ft-lbf) and not less than -
24 N-m (-17.7ft-lbf).
    (ii) The negative moment shall decay for the first time to -5 N-m (-
3.7 ft-lbf) between 123 ms and 147 ms.
    (iii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: 
Moment (N-m)=My-(0.01778m)x(FX).
    (iv) My is the moment about the y-axis and FX 
is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11) 
and 0.017778m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.
    (3) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the 
pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material.
    (c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the neck assembly is as 
follows:
    (1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any 
temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 [deg]C (69 and 72 [deg]F) and a 
relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours 
prior to a test.
    (2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9000341) on the neck cable (drawing 
127-1016) to 0.23 0.02 N-m (2.0 0.2 in-lbs).
    (3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of this 
section, on the pendulum so the midsagittal plane of the head is 
vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum as shown 
in Figure N2 for flexion tests and Figure N3 for extension tests.
    (4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height 
to achieve an impact velocity of 4.95 0.12 m/s 
(16.2 0.4 ft/s) for flexion tests and 4.3 0.12 m/s (14.10 0.40 ft/s) for 
extension tests, measured by an accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as 
shown in Figure 22 of 49 CFR 572 at the instant of contact with the 
honey comb.
    (i) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the 
pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. All data channels 
should be at the zero level at this time.
    (ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an 
acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified 
below. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel to obtain the 
velocity vs. time curve:

                                                     Table B
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                            Time                                                Pendulum pulse
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                       Flexion                  Extension
                             ms                              ---------------------------------------------------
                                                                  m/s          ft/s         m/s          ft/s
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10..........................................................      1.2-1.6      3.9-5.3      1.0-1.4      3.3-4.6
20..........................................................      2.4-3.4     7.9-11.2      2.2-3.0      7.2-9.8
30..........................................................      3.8-5.0    12.5-16.4      3.2-4.2    10.5-13.8
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 76]]



Sec.  572.124  Thorax assembly and test procedure.

    (a) Thorax (upper torso) assembly. The thorax consists of the part 
of the torso assembly shown in drawing 127-2000.
    (b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely 
assembled dummy (drawing 127-0000) is impacted by a test probe 
conforming to section 572.127(a) at 6.71 0.12 m/s 
(22.0 0.4 ft/s) according to the test procedure in 
paragraph (c) of this section:
    (1) The maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the 
spine, measured with chest deflection transducer (drawing SA572-S50), 
must be not less than 38.0 mm (1.50 in) and not more than 46.0 mm (1.80 
in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force, 
measured by the probe in accordance with section 572.127, shall not be 
less than 1150 N (259 lbf) and not more than 1380 N (310 lbf). The peak 
force after 12.5 mm (0.5 in) of sternum displacement but before reaching 
the minimum required 38.0 mm (1.5 in) sternum displacement limit shall 
not exceed 1500 N (337.2 lbf).
    (2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as 
determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section shall be not less than 65 percent but not more than 85 
percent.
    (c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as 
follows:
    (1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature 
between 20.6[deg] and 22.2 [deg]C (69[deg] and 72 [deg]F) and a relative 
humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a 
test.
    (2) Seat and orient the dummy, wearing tight-fitting underwear or 
equivalent consisting of a size 5 short-sleeved shirt having a weight 
less than 0.090 kg (0.2 lb) and an opening at the top just large enough 
to permit the passage of the head with a tight fit, and a size 4 pair of 
long pants having a weight of less than 0.090 kg (0.2 lb) with the legs 
cut off sufficiently above the knee to allow the knee target to be 
visible, on a seating surface without back support as shown in Figure 
N4, with the limbs extended horizontally and forward, parallel to the 
midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane vertical within 1 degree and the ribs level in the anterior-posterior 
and lateral directions within 0.5 degrees.
    (3) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so 
that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe 
coincides with the midsagittal plane of the dummy within 2.5 mm (0.1 in) and is 12.7 1.1 mm 
(0.5 0.04 in) below the horizontal-peripheral 
centerline of the No. 3 rib and is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal 
line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (4) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of 
contact the probe's longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a 
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (5) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no 
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
    (6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other 
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make 
contact with the dummy during the test.

[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47327, July 18, 2002]



Sec.  572.125  Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test
procedure.

    (a) Upper/lower torso assembly. The test objective is to determine 
the stiffness effects of the lumbar spine (drawing 127-3002), including 
cable (drawing 127-8095), mounting plate insert (drawing 910420-048), 
nylon shoulder bushing (drawing 9001373), nut (drawing 9001336), and 
abdominal insert (drawing 127-8210), on resistance to articulation 
between upper torso assembly (drawing 127-2000) and lower torso assembly 
(drawing 127-3000).
    (b)(1) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected 
to a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level 
through a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure N5 
according to the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this 
section, the lumbar spine-abdomen assembly shall flex by an amount that 
permits the upper torso assembly to translate in angular motion until 
the machined rear surface of the instrument cavity at the back of the 
thoracic spine box is at 45 0.5 degrees relative 
to the vertical transverse plane, at which time the force applied as 
shown

[[Page 77]]

in Figure N5 must be not less than 147 N (33 lbf) and not more than 200 
N (45 lbf), and
    (2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to 
within 8 degrees of its initial position.
    (c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the torso assemblies is 
as follows:
    (1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature 
between 18.9 and 25.6 [deg]C (66 and 78 [deg]F) and a relative humidity 
between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
    (2) Attach the dummy (with or without the legs below the femurs) to 
the fixture in a seated posture as shown in Figure N5.
    (3) Secure the pelvis at the pelvis instrument cavity rear face by 
threading four \1/4\ in cap screws into the available threaded 
attachment holes. Tighten the mountings so that the test material is 
rigidly affixed to the test fixture and the pelvic-lumbar joining 
surface is horizontal.
    (4) Flex the thorax forward three times between vertical and until 
the torso reference plane, as shown in figure N5, reaches 30 2 degrees from vertical. Bring the torso to vertical 
orientation, remove all externally applied flexion forces, and wait 30 
minutes before conducting the test. During the 30-minute waiting period, 
the dummy's upper torso shall be externally supported at or near its 
vertical orientation to prevent sagging.
    (5) Remove the external support and wait two minutes. Measure the 
initial orientation of the torso reference plane of the seated, 
unsupported dummy as shown in Figure N5. This initial torso orientation 
angle may not exceed 22 degrees.
    (6) Attach the loading adapter bracket to the spine of the dummy, 
the pull cable, and the load cell as shown in Figure N5.
    (7) Apply a tension force in the midsagittal plane to the pull cable 
as shown in Figure N5 at any upper torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 
1.5 degrees per second, until the torso reference plane is at 45 0.5 degrees of flexion relative to the vertical 
transverse plane as shown in Figure N5.
    (8) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 45 0.5 degrees of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the 
highest applied force during the 10-second period.
    (9) Release all force as rapidly as possible, and measure the return 
angle at 3 minutes or any time thereafter after the release.



Sec.  572.126  Knees and knee impact test procedure.

    (a) Knee assembly. The knee assembly is part of the leg assembly 
(drawing 127-4000-1 and -2).
    (b) When the knee assembly, consisting of knee machined (drawing 
127-4013), knee flesh (drawing 127-4011), lower leg (drawing 127-4014), 
the foot assembly (drawing 127-4030-1(left) and -2 (right)) and femur 
load transducer (drawing SA572-S10) or its structural replacement 
(drawing 127-4007) is tested according to the test procedure in section 
572.127(c), the peak resistance force as measured with the test probe 
mounted accelerometer must be not less than 2.0 kN (450 lbf) and not 
more than 3.0 kN (674 lbf).
    (c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the knee assembly is as 
follows:
    (1) Soak the knee assembly in a controlled environment at any 
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 [deg]C (66 and 78 [deg]F) and a 
relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to 
a test.
    (2) Mount the test material and secure it to a rigid test fixture as 
shown in Figure N6. No contact is permitted between any part of the foot 
or tibia and any exterior surface.
    (3) Align the test probe so that throughout its stroke and at 
contact with the knee it is within 2 degrees of horizontal and collinear 
with the longitudinal centerline of the femur.
    (4) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral 
vertical or rotational movement at time-zero.
    (5) The test probe velocity at the time of contact shall be 2.1 
0.03 m/s (6.9  0.1 ft/s).
    (6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other 
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make 
contact with the dummy during testing.

[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47328, July 18, 2002]

[[Page 78]]



Sec.  572.127  Test conditions and instrumentation.

    (a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments, 
shall be of rigid metal or metal alloy construction and concentric about 
its longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as 
suspension hardware, velocity vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of 
Sec.  572.124(c)(6). The impactor shall have a mass of 2.86 0.02 kg (6.3 0.05 lb) and a 
minimum mass moment of inertia of 160 kg-c\2\ (0.141 lb-in-sec\2\) in 
yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One third of the weight of 
suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must be 
included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed 
five percent of the total weight of the probe. The impacting end of the 
probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 101.6 0.25 mm (4.00 0.01 in) diameter 
face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall 
have a 101-103 mm (4.0-4.1 in) diameter cylindrical surface extending 
for a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 in) to the rear from the impact face. The 
probe's end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an 
accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal 
axis of the probe. The impact probe shall have a free air resonant 
frequency of not less than 1000 Hz limited to the direction of the 
longitudinal axis of the impactor.
    (b) The test probe for knee impacts, except for attachments, shall 
be of rigid metal or alloy construction and concentric about its 
longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension 
hardware, velocity vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of Sec.  
572.126(c)(6). The impactor shall have a mass of 0.82 0.02 kg (1.8 0.05 lb) and a 
minimum mass moment of inertia of 34 kg-cm2 (0.03 lb-in-sec2) in yaw and 
pitch about the CG of the probe. One third of the weight of suspension 
cables and any attachments to the impact probe must be included in the 
calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of 
the total weight of the probe. The impacting end of the probe, has a 
flat, continuous, and non-deformable 76.2 0.2 mm 
(3.00 0.01 in) diameter face with an edge radius 
of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 76-77 mm (3.0-3.1 
in) diameter cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 
in) to the rear from the impact face. The probe's end opposite to the 
impact face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its 
sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The 
impact probe shall have a free air resonant frequency of not less than 
1000 Hz limited to the direction of the longitudinal axis of the 
impactor.
    (c) Head accelerometers shall have dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 
3.
    (d) Neck force/moment transducer. (1) The upper neck force/moment 
transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and 
sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S11 and be mounted 
in the head-neck assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.
    (2) The optional lower neck force/moment transducer shall have the 
dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations 
specified in drawing SA572-S26 and be mounted as shown in drawing 127-
0000 sheet 3.
    (e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration 
at T4, and as optional instrumentation in uniaxial for- and-aft oriented 
configuration on the most anterior ends of ribs 1 and 
6 and at the spine box at the levels of 1 and 
6 ribs as shown in 127-0000 sheet 3.
    (f) The chest deflection transducer shall have the dimensions and 
response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S50 and be mounted 
in the upper torso assembly as shown in 127-0000 sheet 3.
    (g) The optional lumbar spine force-moment transducer shall have the 
dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations 
specified in drawing SA572-S12 and be mounted in the lower torso 
assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3 as a replacement for 
lumbar adaptor 127-3005.

[[Page 79]]

    (h) The optional iliac spine force transducers shall have the 
dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S13 
and be mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 
3 as a replacement for ASIS load cell 127-3015-1 (left) and -2 (right).
    (i) The optional pelvis accelerometers shall have the dimensions, 
response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in 
drawing SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial 
configuration in the pelvis bone as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.
    (j) The femur force transducer shall have the dimensions and 
response characteristics specified in drawing SA72-S10 and be mounted in 
the leg assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.
    (k) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed 
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part must be 
recorded in individual data channels that conform to SAE Recommended 
Practice J211, Rev. Mar95 ``Instrumentation for lmpact Tests,'' except 
that the lumbar measurements are based on CFC 600, with channel classes 
as follows:
    (1) Head acceleration--Class 1000.
    (2) Neck:
    (i) Forces--Class 1000;
    (ii) Moments--Class 600;
    (iii) Pendulum acceleration--Class 180;
    (iv) Rotation--Class 60 (if used).
    (3) Thorax:
    (i) Rib acceleration--Class 1000;
    (ii) Spine and pendulum accelerations--Class 180;
    (iii) Sternum deflection--Class 600.
    (4) Lumbar:
    (i) Forces--Class 1000;
    (ii) Moments--Class 600;
    (iii) Flexion--Class 60 if data channel is used.
    (5) Pelvis accelerations--Class 1000.
    (6) Femur forces--Class 600.
    (l) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to 
the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle 
Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12.
    (m) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance 
frequency less than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable 
channel class.
    (n) Limb joints must be set at one G, barely restraining the weight 
of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force needed to move a 
limb segment shall not exceed 2G throughout the range of limb motion.
    (o) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or 
fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by period of not less 
than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.
    (p) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as 
specified in this subpart or in drawings subtended by this subpart.

[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47328, July 18, 2002]

[[Page 80]]



                  Sec. Figures to Subpart N of Part 572
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR18JY02.000


[[Page 81]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR18JY02.001


[[Page 82]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR18JY02.002


[[Page 83]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR13JA00.005


[[Page 84]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR19SE02.000


[[Page 85]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR18JY02.003


[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47329, July 18, 2002; 67 
FR 59023, Sept. 19, 2002]

[[Page 86]]



  Subpart O_Hybrid III 5th Percentile Female Test Dummy, Alpha Version

    Source: 65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.130  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this 
Subpart by reference:
    (1) A drawings and specification package entitled ``Parts List and 
Drawings, Part 572 Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth Percentile Small Adult 
Female Crash Test Dummy (HIII-5F, Alpha Version)'' (June 2002), 
incorporated by reference in ``572.131, and consisting of:
    (i) Drawing No. 880105-100X, Head Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec. Sec.  572.131, 572.132, 572.133, 572.134, 572.135, and 
572.137;
    (ii) Drawing No. 880105-250, Neck Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec. Sec.  572.131, 572.133, 572.134, 572.135, and 572.137;
    (iii) Drawing No. 880105-300, Upper Torso Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec. Sec.  572.131, 572.134, 572.135, and 572.137;
    (iv) Drawing No. 880105-450, Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec. Sec.  572.131, 572.134, 572.135, and 572.137;
    (v) Drawing No. 880105-560-1, Complete Leg Assembly--left, 
incorporated by reference in Sec. Sec.  572.131, 572.135, 572.136, and 
572.137;
    (vi) Drawing No. 880105-560-2, Complete Leg Assembly--right 
incorporated by reference in Sec. Sec.  572.131, 572.135, 572.136, and 
572.137;
    (vii) Drawing No. 880105-728-1, Complete Arm Assembly--left, 
incorporated by reference in Sec. Sec.  572.131, 572.134, and 572.135 as 
part of the complete dummy assembly;
    (viii) Drawing No. 880105-728-2, Complete Arm Assembly--right, 
incorporated by reference in Sec. Sec.  572.131, 572.134, and 572.135 as 
part of the complete dummy assembly;
    (ix) The Hybrid III 5th percentile small adult female crash test 
dummy parts list, incorporated by reference in Sec.  572.131;
    (2) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly, 
Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth Percentile 
Adult Female Crash Test Dummy (HIII-5F), Alpha Version'' (February 
2002), incorporated by reference in Sec.  572.132.
    (3) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation 
for Impact Tests--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation'', incorporated by 
reference in Sec.  572.137;
    (4) SAE Recommended Practice J211/2, Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation 
for Impact Tests--Part 2--Photographic Instrumentation'' incorporated by 
reference in Sec.  572.137; and
    (5) SAE J1733 of 1994-12 ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash 
Testing'', incorporated by reference in Sec.  572.137.
    (b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials 
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR 
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Technical 
Reference Library, 400 Seventh Street SW., room 5109, Washington, DC, or 
at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For 
information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-
6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--
federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
    (1) The Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth 
Percentile Small Adult Female Crash Test Dummy, (HIII-5F, Alpha Version) 
(June 2002), referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section and the 
Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the 
Hybrid III 5th Percentile Small Adult Female Crash Test Dummy, Alpha 
Version, referred to in paragraph (a)(2) of this section are available 
from Reprographic Technologies, 9107 Gaither Road, Gaithersburg, MD 
20877, (301) 419-5070. These documents are also accessible for reading 
and copying through the DOT Docket Management System.
    (2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of 
this section are available from the Society of

[[Page 87]]

Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, Pa. 
15096.

[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46413, July 15, 2002]



Sec.  572.131  General description.

    (a) The Hybrid III fifth percentile adult female crash test dummy is 
defined by drawings and specifications containing the following 
materials:
    (1) Technical drawings and specifications package P/N 880105-000 
(refer to Sec.  572.130(a)(1)), the titles of which are listed in Table 
A;
    (2) Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth 
Percentile Small Adult Female Crash Test Dummy (HIII-5F, Alpha Version) 
(June 2002) (refer to Sec.  572.130(a)(1)(ix)).

                                 Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Component assembly                      Drawing No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head Assembly............................  880105-100X
Neck Assembly............................  880105-250
Upper Torso Assembly.....................  880105-300
Lower Torso Assembly.....................  880105-450
Complete Leg Assembly--left..............  880105-560-1
Complete Leg Assembly--right.............  880105-560-2
Complete Arm Assembly--left..............  880105-728-1
Complete Arm Assembly--right.............  880105-728-2
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that, except for 
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between 
metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated 
crash impact conditions.
    (c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test similar 
to those specified in Standard 208, Occupant Crash Protection.

[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46414, July 15, 2002]



Sec.  572.132  Head assembly and test procedure.

    (a) The head assembly (refer to Sec.  572.130(a)(1)(i)) for this 
test consists of the complete head (drawing 880105-100X), a six-axis 
neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11) or its structural replacement 
(drawing 78051-383X), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4).
    (b) When the head assembly is dropped from a height of 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) in 
accordance with subsection (c) of this section, the peak resultant 
acceleration at the location of the accelerometers at the head CG may 
not be less than 250 G or more than 300 G. The resultant acceleration 
vs. time history curve shall be unimodal; oscillations occurring after 
the main pulse must be less than 10 percent of the peak resultant 
acceleration. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 15 G (zero to 
peak).
    (c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as 
follows:
    (1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any 
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 [deg]C (66 and 78 [deg]F) and a 
relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to 
a test.
    (2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the skin and the 
impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichloroethane, or an 
equivalent. The skin of the head must be clean and dry for testing.
    (3) Suspend and orient the head assembly as shown in Figure 19 of 49 
CFR 572. The lowest point on the forehead must be 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) from the 
impact surface. The 1.57 mm (0.062 in) diameter holes located on either 
side of the dummy's head shall be used to ensure that the head is level 
with respect to the impact surface.
    (4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by means that 
ensure a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat 
horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2.0 in) thick and 610 mm (24.0 
in) square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a micro 
finish of not less than 203.2.x10-6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) 
and not more than 2032.0x10-6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).
    (5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same 
head.



Sec.  572.133  Neck assembly and test procedure.

    (a) The neck assembly (refer to Sec.  572.130(a)(1)(ii)) for the 
purposes of this test consists of the assembly of components shown in 
drawing 880105-250.
    (b) When the head-neck assembly consisting of the head (drawing 
880105-100X), neck (drawing 880105-250), bib

[[Page 88]]

simulator (drawing 880105-371), upper neck adjusting bracket (drawing 
880105-207), lower neck adjusting bracket (drawing 880105-208), six-axis 
neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), and either three accelerometers 
(drawing SA572-S4) or their mass equivalent installed in the head 
assembly as specified in drawing 880105-100X, is tested according to the 
test procedure in subsection (c) of this section, it shall have the 
following characteristics:
    (1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure O1, shall rotate in 
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's 
longitudinal centerline between 77 degrees and 91 degrees. During the 
time interval while the rotation is within the specified corridor, the 
peak moment, measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA5572-311), about 
the occipital condyles may not be less than 69 N-m (51 ft-lbf) and not 
more than 83 N-m (61 ft-lbf). The positive moment shall decay for the 
first time to 10 N-m (7.4 ft-lbf ) between 80 ms and 100 ms after time 
zero.
    (ii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment 
(N-m)= My-(0.01778m)x(Fx).
    (iii) My is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is 
the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), and 
0.01778m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.
    (2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure O2, shall rotate in 
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's 
longitudinal centerline between 99 degrees and 114 degrees. During the 
time interval while the rotation is within the specified corridor, the 
peak moment, measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA5572-S11), about 
the occipital condyles shall be not more than -53 N-m (-39 ft-lbf) and 
not less than -65 N-m (-48 ft-lbf). The negative moment shall decay for 
the first time to -10 N-m (-7.4 ft-lbf) between 94 ms and 114 ms after 
time zero.
    (ii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment 
(N-m) = My - (0.01778m)x(Fx).
    (iii) My is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is 
the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), and 
0.01778 m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.
    (3) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the 
pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. All data channels 
shall be at the zero level at this time.
    (c) Test Procedure. The test procedure for the neck assembly is as 
follows:
    (1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any 
temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 [deg]C (69 and 72 [deg]F) and a 
relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours 
prior to a test.
    (2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9000018) on the neck cable (drawing 
880105-206) to 1.4 0.2 N-m (12.0 2.0 in-lb).
    (3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in subsection (b) of this 
section, on the pendulum described in Figure 22 of 49 CFR 572 so that 
the midsagittal plane of the head is vertical and coincides with the 
plane of motion of the pendulum as shown in Figure O1 for flexion tests 
and Figure O2 for extension tests.
    (4)(i) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a 
height to achieve an impact velocity of 7.01 0.12 
m/s (23.0 0.4 ft/s) for flexion tests and 6.07 
0.12 m/s (19.9 0.40 ft/s) 
for extension tests, measured by an accelerometer mounted on the 
pendulum as shown in Figure 22 of 49 CFR 572 at the instant of contact 
with the honey comb.
    (ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an 
acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified 
below. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel to obtain the 
velocity vs. time curve:

                                             Table B--Pendulum Pulse
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Flexion                        Extension
                     Time ms                     ---------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        m/s            ft/s             m/s            ft/s
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10..............................................         2.1-2.5         6.9-8.2         1.5-1.9         4.9-6.2
20..............................................         4.0-5.0       13.1-16.4         3.1-3.9       10.2-12.8
30..............................................         5.8-7.0       19.5-23.0         4.6-5.6       15.1-18.4
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 89]]


[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46414, July 15, 2002]



Sec.  572.134  Thorax assembly and test procedure.

    (a) Thorax (Upper Torso) Assembly (refer to Sec.  
572.130(a)(1)(iii)). The thorax consists of the part of the torso 
assembly shown in drawing 880105-300.
    (b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely 
assembled dummy (drawing 880105-000) is impacted by a test probe 
conforming to section 572.137(a) at 6.71 0.12 m/s 
(22.0 0.4 ft/s) according to the test procedure in 
subsection (c) of this section:
    (1) Maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the 
spine, measured with chest deflection transducer (drawing SA572-S5), 
must be not less than 50.0 mm (1.97 in) and not more than 58.0 mm (2.30 
in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force, 
measured by the impact probe as defined in section 572.137 and 
calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, shall 
not be less than 3900 N (876 lbf) and not more than 4400 N (989 lbf). 
The peak force after 18.0 mm (0.71 in) of sternum displacement but 
before reaching the minimum required 50.0 mm (1.97 in) sternum 
displacement limit shall not exceed 4600 N.
    (2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as 
determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (1) of this 
section shall be not less than 69 percent but not more than 85 percent. 
The hysteresis shall be calculated by determining the ratio of the area 
between the loading and unloading portions of the force deflection curve 
to the area under the loading portion of the curve.
    (3) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor 
mass and its deceleration.
    (c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as 
follows:
    (1) The dummy is clothed in a form fitting cotton stretch above-the-
elbow sleeved shirt and above-the-knee pants. The weight of the shirt 
and pants shall not exceed 0.14 kg (0.30 lb) each.
    (2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature 
between 20.6 and 22.2 [deg]C (69 and 72 [deg]F) and a relative humidity 
between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
    (3) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back 
support as shown in Figure O3, with the limbs extended horizontally and 
forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane 
vertical within 1 degree and the ribs level in the 
anterior-posterior and lateral directions within 0.5 degrees.
    (4) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so 
that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe 
coincides with the midsagittal plane of the dummy within 2.5 mm (0.1 in) and is 12.7 1.1 mm 
(0.5 0.04 in) below the horizontal-peripheral 
centerline of the No. 3 rib and is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal 
line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of 
contact the probe's longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a 
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (6) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no 
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
    (7) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other 
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make 
contact with the dummy during the test.

[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002]



Sec.  572.135  Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test
procedure.

    (a) Upper/lower torso assembly. The test objective is to determine 
the stiffness effects of the lumbar spine (drawing 880105-1096), and 
abdominal insert (drawing 880105-434), on resistance to articulation 
between the upper torso assembly (drawing 880105-300) and the lower 
torso assembly (drawing 880105-450) (refer to Sec.  572.130(a)(1)(iv)).
    (b)(1) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected 
to a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level 
through a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure O4 
according to the test procedure set out in subsection (c) of this 
section, the lumbar spine-abdomen assembly shall flex by an amount that 
permits the upper torso assembly to

[[Page 90]]

translate in angular motion relative to the vertical transverse plane 45 
0.5 degrees at which time the force applied must 
be not less than 320 N (71.5 lbf) and not more than 390 N (87.4 lbf), 
and
    (2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to 
within 8 degrees of its initial position.
    (c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the upper/lower torso 
assembly is as follows:
    (1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature 
between 18.9 and 25.6 [deg]C (66 and 78 [deg]F) and a relative humidity 
between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
    (2) Assemble the complete dummy (with or without the legs below the 
femurs) and attach to the fixture in a seated posture as shown in Figure 
O4.
    (3) Secure the pelvis to the fixture at the pelvis instrument cavity 
rear face by threading four \1/4\ inch cap screws into the available 
threaded attachment holes. Tighten the mountings so that the test 
material is rigidly affixed to the test fixture and the pelvic-lumbar 
joining surface is horizontal.
    (4) Attach the loading adapter bracket to the spine of the dummy as 
shown in Figure O4.
    (5) Inspect and adjust, if necessary, the seating of the abdominal 
insert within the pelvis cavity and with respect to the torso flesh, 
assuring that the torso flesh provides uniform fit and overlap with 
respect to the outside surface of the pelvis flesh.
    (6) Flex the dummy's upper torso three times between the vertical 
and until the torso reference plane, as shown in Figure O4, reaches 30 
degrees from the vertical transverse plane. Bring the torso to vertical 
orientation and wait for 30 minutes before conducting the test. During 
the 30 minute waiting period, the dummy's upper torso shall be 
externally supported at or near its vertical orientation to prevent it 
from drooping.
    (7) Remove all external support and wait two minutes. Measure the 
initial orientation angle of the torso reference plane of the seated, 
unsupported dummy as shown in Figure O4. The initial orientation angle 
may not exceed 20 degrees.
    (8) Attach the pull cable and the load cell as shown in Figure O4.
    (9) Apply a tension force in the midsagittal plane to the pull cable 
as shown in Figure O4 at any upper torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 
1.5 degrees per second, until the angle reference plane is at 45 0.5 degrees of flexion relative to the vertical 
transverse plane.
    (9) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 45 0.5 degrees of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the 
highest applied force during the 10-second period.
    (10) Release all force at the attachment bracket as rapidly as 
possible, and measure the return angle with respect to the initial angle 
reference plane as defined in paragraph (6) 3 minutes after the release.



Sec.  572.136  Knees and knee impact test procedure.

    (a) Knee assembly. The knee assembly (refer to Sec. Sec.  
572.130(a)(1)(v) and (vi)) for the purpose of this test is the part of 
the leg assembly shown in drawing 880105-560.
    (b)(1) When the knee assembly, consisting of sliding knee assembly 
(drawing 880105-528R or -528L), lower leg structural replacement 
(drawing 880105-603), lower leg flesh (drawing 880105-601), ankle 
assembly (drawing 880105-660), foot assembly (drawing 880105-651 or 
650), and femur load transducer (drawing SA572-S14) or its structural 
replacement (drawing 78051-319) is tested according to the test 
procedure in subsection (c), the peak resistance force as measured with 
the test probe-mounted accelerometer must be not less than 3450 N (776 
lbf) and not more than 4060 N (913 lbf).
    (2) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor 
mass and its deceleration.
    (c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the knee assembly is as 
follows:
    (1) Soak the knee assembly in a controlled environment at any 
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 [deg]C (66 and 78 [deg]F) and a 
relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to 
a test.
    (2) Mount the test material and secure it to a rigid test fixture as 
shown

[[Page 91]]

in Figure O5. No part of the foot or tibia may contact any exterior 
surface.
    (3) Align the test probe so that throughout its stroke and at 
contact with the knee it is within 2 degrees of horizontal and collinear 
with the longitudinal centerline of the femur.
    (4) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral 
vertical or rotational movement at the time of initial contact between 
the impactor and the knee.
    (5) The test probe velocity at the time of contact shall be 2.1 
0.03 m/s (6.9 0.1 ft/s).
    (6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other 
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make 
contact with the dummy during the test.

[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002]



Sec.  572.137  Test conditions and instrumentation.

    (a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments, 
shall be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its 
longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension 
hardware, impact vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of Sec.  
572.134(c)(7). The impactor shall have a mass of 13.97 0.23 kg (30.8 0.5 lbs) and a 
minimum mass moment of inertia of 3646 kg-cm\2\ (3.22 lbs-in-sec\2\) in 
yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One-third (1/3) of the weight 
of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must be 
included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed 
five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of 
the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis of 
the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 152.4 0.25 mm (6.00 0.01 in) diameter 
face with a minimum/maximum edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The 
impactor shall have a 152.4-152.6 mm (6.0-6.1 in) diameter cylindrical 
surface extending for a minimum of 25 mm (1.0 in) to the rear from the 
impact face. The probe's end opposite to the impact face has provisions 
for mounting of an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with 
the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe has a free air 
resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, which may be determined 
using the procedure listed in Docket No. NHTSA-6714-14.
    (b) The test probe for knee impacts, except for attachments, shall 
be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its longitudinal 
axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension hardware, 
impact vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of Sec.  572.136(c)(6). 
The impactor shall have a mass of 2.990.23 kg 
(6.60.5 lbs) and a minimum mass moment of inertia 
of 209 kg-cm\2\ (0.177 lb-in-sec\2\) in yaw and pitch about the CG of 
the probe. One-third (1/3) of the weight of suspension cables and any 
attachments to the impact probe may be included in the calculation of 
mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total 
weight of the test probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular 
to and concentric with the longitudinal axis of the probe, has a flat, 
continuous, and non-deformable 76.2 0.2 mm (3.00 
0.01 in) diameter face with a minimum/maximum edge 
radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 76.2-76.4 
mm (3.0-3.1 in) diameter cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 
12.5 mm (0.5 in) to the rear from the impact face. The probe's end 
opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer 
with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the 
probe. The impact probe has a free air resonant frequency of not less 
than 1000 Hz, which may be determined using the procedure listed in 
Docket No. NHTSA-6714-14.
    (c) Head accelerometers shall have dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 
3 of 6.
    (d) The upper neck force/moment transducer shall have the 
dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations 
specified in drawing SA572-S11 and be mounted in the head neck assembly 
as shown in drawing 880105-000, sheet 3 of 6.
    (e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 
SA572-S4 and be

[[Page 92]]

mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration within the spine 
box instrumentation cavity and as optional instrumentation in uniaxial 
for-and-aft oriented configuration arranged as corresponding pairs in 
three locations on the sternum on and at the spine box of the upper 
torso assembly as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.
    (f) The optional lumbar spine force-moment transducer shall have the 
dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations 
specified in drawing SA572-S15 and be mounted in the lower torso 
assembly as shown in drawing 880105-450.
    (g) The optional iliac spine force transducers shall have the 
dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S16 
and be mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 880105-450.
    (h) The pelvis accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration 
in the pelvis bone as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3.
    (i) The single axis femur force transducer (SA572-S14) or the 
optional multiple axis femur force/moment transducer (SA572-S29) shall 
have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis 
locations specified in the appropriate drawing and be mounted in the 
femur assembly as shown in drawing 880105-500 sheet 3 of 6.
    (j) The chest deflection transducer shall have the dimensions and 
response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S51 and be mounted 
to the upper torso assembly as shown in drawings 880105-300 and 880105-
000 sheet 3 of 6.
    (k) The optional lower neck force/moment transducer shall have the 
dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations 
specified in drawing SA572-S27 and be mounted to the upper torso 
assembly as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.
    (l) The optional thoracic spine force/moment transducer shall have 
the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations 
specified in drawing SA572-S28 and be mounted in the upper torso 
assembly as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.
    (m) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed 
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part shall be 
recorded in individual data channels that conform to SAE Recommended 
Practice J211/10, Rev. Mar95 ``Instrumentation for Impact Impact 
Tests;--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation,'' and SAE Recommended 
Practice J211/2, Rev Mar95 ``Instrumentation for Impact Tests--Part 2--
Photographic Instrumentation'', (refer to Sec. Sec.  572.130(a)(3) and 
(4) respectively) except as noted, with channel classes as follows:
    (1) Head acceleration--Class 1000
    (2) Neck:
    (i) Forces--Class 1000
    (ii) Moments--Class 600
    (iii) Pendulum acceleration--Class 180
    (iv) Rotation potentiometer--Class 60 (optional)
    (3) Thorax:
    (i) Rib acceleration--Class 1000
    (ii) Spine and pendulum accelerations--Class 180
    (iii) Sternum deflection--Class 600
    (iv) Forces--Class 1000
    (v) Moments--Class 600
    (4) Lumbar:
    (i) Forces--Class 1000
    (ii) Moments--Class 600
    (iii) Torso flexion pulling force--Class 60 if data channel is used
    (5) Pelvis:
    (i) Accelerations--Class 1000
    (ii) Iliac wing forces--Class 180
    (6) Femur forces and knee pendulum--Class 600
    (n) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to 
the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle 
Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12 (refer to section 572.130(a)(4)).
    (o) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance 
frequency less than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable 
channel class.
    (p) Limb joints must be set at one G, barely restraining the weight 
of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force needed to move a 
limb segment shall not exceed 2G throughout the range of limb motion.
    (q) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or

[[Page 93]]

fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by not less than 30 
minutes unless otherwise noted.
    (r) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as 
specified in this subpart or in drawings subtended by this subpart.

[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002; 74 
FR 29894, June 23, 2009]

[[Page 94]]



                  Sec. Figures to Subpart O of Part 572
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15JY02.000


[[Page 95]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15JY02.001


[[Page 96]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15JY02.002


[[Page 97]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15JY02.003


[[Page 98]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15JY02.004


[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002]

[[Page 99]]



       Subpart P_3-year-Old Child Crash Test Dummy, Alpha Version

    Source: 65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.140  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) The following materials are hereby incorporated in this subpart 
P by reference:
    (1) A drawings and specifications package entitled, ``Parts List and 
Drawings, Subpart P Hybrid III 3-year-old child crash test dummy, (H-
III3C, Alpha version) September 2001,'' incorporated by reference in 
Sec.  572.141 and consisting of:
    (i) Drawing No. 210-1000, Head Assembly, incorporated by reference 
in Sec. Sec.  572.141, 572.142, 572.144, 572.145, and 572.146;
    (ii) Drawing No. 210-2001, Neck Assembly, incorporated by reference 
in Sec. Sec.  572.141, 572.143, 572.144, 572.145, and 572.146;
    (iii) Drawing No. TE-208-000, Headform, incorporated by reference in 
Sec. Sec.  572.141, and 572.143;
    (iv) Drawing No. 210-3000, Upper/Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated 
by reference in Sec. Sec.  572.141, 572.144, 572.145, and 572.146;
    (v) Drawing No. 210-5000-1(L), -2(R), Leg Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec. Sec.  572.141, 572.144, 572.145 as part of a complete 
dummy assembly;
    (vi) Drawing No. 210-6000-1(L), -2(R), Arm Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec. Sec.  572.141, 572.144, and 572.145 as part of the 
complete dummy assembly;
    (2) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly, 
Disassembly and Inspection (PADI), Subpart P, Hybird III 3-year-old 
Child Crash Test Dummy, (H-III3C, Alpha Version) September 2001,'' 
incorporated by reference in Sec.  572.141;
    (3) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation 
for Impact Tests--Part 1-Electronic Instrumentation'', incorporated by 
reference in Sec.  572.146;
    (4) SAE J1733 1994-12 ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing'' 
incorporated by reference in Sec.  572.146.
    (5) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials 
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR 
Part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Docket 
Section, 400 Seventh Street SW, room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the 
National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on 
the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: 
http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--
regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (b) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
    (1) The drawings and specifications package referred to in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section and the PADI document referred to in paragraph 
(a)(2) of this section are accessible for viewing and copying at the 
Department of Transportation's Docket public area, Plaza 401, 400 
Seventh St., SW., Washington, DC 20590, and downloadable at dms.dot.gov. 
They are also available from Reprographic Technologies, 9107 Gaither 
Rd., Gaithersburg, MD 20877, (301) 419-5070.
    (2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of 
this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, 
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.

[65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 64376, Dec. 13, 2001]



Sec.  572.141  General description.

    (a) The Hybrid III 3-year-old child dummy is described by the 
following materials:
    (1) Technical drawings and specifications package 210-0000 (refer to 
Sec.  572.140(a)(1)), the titles of which are listed in Table A of this 
section;
    (2) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection document 
(PADI) (refer to Sec.  572.140(a)(2)).
    (b) The dummy is made up of the component assemblies set out in the 
following Table A of this section:

                                 Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Component assembly                      Drawing No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head Assembly............................  210-1000
Neck Assembly (complete).................  210-2001
Upper/Lower Torso Assembly...............  210-3000
Leg Assembly.............................  210-5000-1(L), -2(R)

[[Page 100]]

 
Arm Assembly.............................  210-6000-1(L), -2(R)
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for 
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between 
metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated 
crash impact conditions.
    (d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this part in every respect only before use in any test 
similar to those specified in Standard 208, Occupant Crash Protection, 
and Standard 213, Child Restraint Systems.



Sec.  572.142  Head assembly and test procedure.

    (a) The head assembly (refer to Sec.  572.140(a)(1)(i)) for this 
test consists of the head (drawing 210-1000), adapter plate (drawing ATD 
6259), accelerometer mounting block (drawing SA 572-S80), structural 
replacement of \1/2\ mass of the neck load transducer (drawing TE-107-
001), head mounting washer (drawing ATD 6262), one \1/2\-20x1 
flat head cap screw (FHCS) (drawing 9000150), and 3 accelerometers 
(drawing SA-572-S4).
    (b) When the head assembly in paragraph (a) of this section is 
dropped from a height of 376.01.0 mm (14.80.04 in) in accordance with paragraph (c) of this 
section, the peak resultant acceleration at the location of the 
accelerometers at the head CG shall not be less than 250 g or more than 
280 g. The resultant acceleration versus time history curve shall be 
unimodal, and the oscillations occurring after the main pulse shall be 
less than 10 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral 
acceleration shall not exceed 15 G (zero to peak).
    (c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as 
follows:
    (1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any 
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 [deg]C (66 and 78 [deg]F) and at any 
relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours 
prior to a test.
    (2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the head skin and 
the steel impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichlorethane, 
or an equivalent. Both impact surfaces must be clean and dry for 
testing.
    (3) Suspend the head assembly with its midsagittal plane in vertical 
orientation as shown in Figure P1 of this subpart. The lowest point on 
the forehead is 376.0 1.0 mm (14.76 0.04 in) from the steel impact surface. The 3.3 mm (0.13 
in) diameter holes, located on either side of the dummy's head in 
transverse alignment with the CG, shall be used to ensure that the head 
transverse plane is level with respect to the impact surface.
    (4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by a means that 
ensures a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat 
horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and 610 mm (24 in) 
square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a finish of not 
less than 203.2x10-6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and not more 
than 2032.0x10-6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).
    (5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same 
head.



Sec.  572.143  Neck-headform assembly and test procedure.

    (a) The neck and headform assembly (refer to Sec. Sec.  
572.140(a)(1)(ii) and 572.140(a)(1)(iii)) for the purposes of this test, 
as shown in Figures P2 and P3 of this subpart, consists of the neck 
molded assembly (drawing 210-2015), neck cable (drawing 210-2040), nylon 
shoulder bushing (drawing 9001373), upper mount plate insert (drawing 
910420-048), bib simulator (drawing TE-208-050), urethane washer 
(drawing 210-2050), neck mounting plate (drawing TE-250-021), two jam 
nuts (drawing 9001336), load-moment transducer (drawing SA 572-S19), and 
headform (drawing TE-208-000).
    (b) When the neck and headform assembly, as defined in Sec.  
572.143(a), is tested according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) 
of this section, it shall have the following characteristics:
    (1) Flexion.

[[Page 101]]

    (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure P2 of this subpart, shall rotate 
in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's 
longitudinal centerline between 70 degrees and 82 degrees. Within this 
specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital condyle 
may not be less than 42 N-m and not more than 53 N-m.
    (ii) The positive moment shall decay for the first time to 10 N-m 
between 60 ms and 80 ms after time zero.
    (iii) The moment and rotation data channels are defined to be zero 
when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.
    (2) Extension.
    (i) Plane D referenced in Figure P3 of this subpart shall rotate in 
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's 
longitudinal centerline between 83 degrees and 93 degrees. Within this 
specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital condyle 
may be not more than -43.7 N-m and not less than -53.3 N-m.
    (ii) The negative moment shall decay for the first time to -10 N-m 
between 60 and 80 ms after time zero.
    (iii) The moment and rotation data channels are defined to be zero 
when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.
    (c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled 
environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 [deg]C (69 and 72 
F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four 
hours prior to a test.
    (2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9001336) on the neck cable (drawing 
210-2040) between 0.2 N-m and 0.3 N-m.
    (3) Mount the neck-headform assembly, defined in paragraph (a) of 
this section, on the pendulum so the midsagittal plane of the headform 
is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum as 
shown in Figure P2 of this subpart for flexion and Figure P3 of this 
subpart for extension tests.
    (4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely to achieve an 
impact velocity of 5.50 0.10 m/s (18.05 + 0.40 ft/
s) for flexion and 3.65 0.1 m/s (11.98 0.40 ft/s) for extension tests, measured by an 
accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as shown in Figure 22 of this part 
572 at time zero.
    (i) The test shall be conducted without inducing any torsion 
twisting of the neck.
    (ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an 
acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified 
in Table B of this section. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data 
channel to obtain the velocity vs. time curve as indicated in Table B of 
this section.
    (iii) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between 
the pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. The pendulum data 
channel shall be zero at this time.

                                             Table B--Pendulum Pulse
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                      Time                                Flexion              Time             Extension
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                       ms                            m/s          ft/s          ms          m/s          ft/s
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.............................................      2.0-2.7      6.6-8.9            6      1.0-1.4      3.3-4.6
15.............................................      3.0-4.0     9.8-13.1           10      1.9-2.5      6.2-8.2
20.............................................      4.0-5.1    13.1-16.7           14      2.8-3.5     9.2-11.5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec.  572.144  Thorax assembly and test procedure.

    (a) Thorax (upper torso) assembly (refer to Sec.  
572.140(a)(1)(iv)). The thorax consists of the upper part of the torso 
assembly shown in drawing 210-3000.
    (b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely 
assembled dummy (drawing 210-0000) is impacted by a test probe 
conforming to Sec.  572.146(a) at 6.0 0.1 m/s 
(19.7 0.3 ft/s) according to the test procedure in 
paragraph (c) of this section.
    (1) Maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the 
spine, measured with the chest deflection transducer (SA-572-S50), must 
not be less than 32mm (1.3 in) and not more than 38mm (1.5 in). Within 
this specified compression corridor, the peak force, measured by the 
probe-mounted

[[Page 102]]

accelerometer as defined in Sec.  572.146(a) and calculated in 
accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, shall be not less than 
680 N and not more than 810 N. The peak force after 12.5 mm of sternum 
compression but before reaching the minimum required 32.0 mm sternum 
compression shall not exceed 910 N.
    (2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact, as 
determined from the force vs. deflection curve, shall be not less than 
65 percent and not more than 85 percent. The hysteresis shall be 
calculated by determining the ratio of the area between the loading and 
unloading portions of the force deflection curve to the area under the 
loading portion of the curve.
    (3) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor 
mass and its deceleration.
    (c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as 
follows:
    (1) The test dummy is clothed in cotton-polyester-based tight-
fitting shirt with long sleeves and ankle-length pants whose combined 
weight is not more than 0.25 kg (0.55 lbs).
    (2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature 
between 20.6 and 22.2 [deg]C (69 and 72 [deg]F) and at any relative 
humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a 
test.
    (3) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back 
support as shown in Figure P4, with the lower limbs extended 
horizontally and forward, the upper arms parallel to the torso and the 
lower arms extended horizontally and forward, parallel to the 
midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane being vertical within 1 degree and the ribs level in the anterior-posterior 
and lateral directions within 0.5 degrees.
    (4) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so 
that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe 
coincides with the dummy's mid-sagittal plane and is centered on the 
center of No. 2 rib within 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) and 
0.5 degrees of a horizontal plane.
    (5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of 
contact the probe's longitudinal center line is within 2 degrees of a 
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (6) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no 
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
    (7) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other 
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make 
contact with the dummy during the test.

[65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 64376, Dec. 13, 2001]



Sec.  572.145  Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test
procedure.

    (a) The test objective is to determine the resistance of the lumbar 
spine and abdomen of a fully assembled dummy (drawing 210-0000) to 
flexion articulation between upper and lower halves of the torso 
assembly (refer to Sec.  572.140(a)(1)(iv)).
    (b)(1) When the upper half of the torso assembly of a seated dummy 
is subjected to a force continuously applied at the occipital condyle 
level through the rigidly attached adaptor bracket in accordance with 
the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar 
spine-abdomen assembly shall flex by an amount that permits the upper 
half of the torso, as measured at the posterior surface of the torso 
reference plane shown in Figure P5 of this subpart, to translate in 
angular motion in the midsagittal plane 45 0.5 
degrees relative to the vertical transverse plane, at which time the 
pulling force applied must not be less than 130 N (28.8 lbf) and not 
more than 180 N (41.2 lbf), and
    (2) Upon removal of the force, the upper torso assembly returns to 
within 10 degrees of its initial position.
    (c) Test procedure. The test procedure is as follows:
    (1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature 
between 18.9[deg] and 25.6 [deg]C (66 and 78 [deg]F) and at any relative 
humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least 4 hours prior to a test.
    (2) Assemble the complete dummy (with or without the lower legs) and 
seat it on a rigid flat-surface table, as shown in Figure P5 of this 
subpart.
    (i) Unzip the torso jacket and remove the four \1/4\-20x\3/
4\ bolts which attach

[[Page 103]]

the lumbar load transducer or its structural replacement to the pelvis 
weldment (drawing 210-4510) as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart.
    (ii) Position the matching end of the rigid pelvis attachment 
fixture around the lumbar spine and align it over the four bolt holes.
    (iii) Secure the fixture to the dummy with the four \1/4\-20x\3/
4\ bolts and attach the fixture to the table. Tighten the 
mountings so that the pelvis-lumbar joining surface is horizontal within 
1 deg and the buttocks and upper legs of the 
seated dummy are in contact with the test surface.
    (iv) Attach the loading adapter bracket to the upper part of the 
torso as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart and zip up the torso jacket.
    (v) Point the upper arms vertically downward and the lower arms 
forward.
    (3)(i) Flex the thorax forward three times from vertical until the 
torso reference plane reaches 30 2 degrees from 
vertical. The torso reference plane, as shown in figure P5 of this 
subpart, is defined by the transverse plane tangent to the posterior 
surface of the upper backplate of the spine box weldment (drawing 210-
8020).
    (ii) Remove all externally applied flexion forces and support the 
upper torso half in a vertical orientation for 30 minutes to prevent it 
from drooping.
    (4) Remove the external support and after two minutes measure the 
initial orientation angle of the upper torso reference plane of the 
seated, unsupported dummy as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart. The 
initial orientation of the torso reference plane may not exceed 15 
degrees.
    (5) Attach the pull cable at the point of load application on the 
adaptor bracket while maintaining the initial torso orientation. Apply a 
pulling force in the midsagittal plane, as shown in Figure P5 of this 
subpart, at any upper torso flexion rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per 
second, until the torso reference plane reaches 45 0.5 degrees of flexion relative to the vertical 
transverse plane.
    (6) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 45 0.5 degrees of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the 
highest applied force during the 10-second period.
    (7) [Reserved]
    (8) Release all force at the loading adaptor bracket as rapidly as 
possible and measure the return angle with respect to the initial angle 
reference plane as defined in paragraph (c)(4) of this section 3 to 4 
minutes after the release.



Sec.  572.146  Test conditions and instrumentation.

    (a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments, 
shall be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its 
longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor such as suspension 
hardware, and impact vanes, must meet the requirements of Sec.  
572.144(c)(7) of this part. The impactor shall have a mass of 1.70 
0.02 kg (3.75 0.05 lb) and a 
minimum mass moment of inertia 164 kg-cm\2\ (0.145 lb-in-sec\2\) in yaw 
and pitch about the CG of the probe. One-third (\1/3\) of the weight of 
suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must be 
included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed 
five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of 
the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis of 
the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 50.8 0.25 mm (2.00 0.01 inch) diameter 
face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall 
have a 53.3 mm (2.1 in) dia. cylindrical surface extending for a minimum 
of 25.4 mm (1.0 in) to the rear from the impact face. The probe's end 
opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer 
with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the 
probe. The impact probe has a free air resonant frequency not less than 
1000 Hz limited to the direction of the longitudinal axis of the 
impactor.
    (b) Head accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA 
572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 210-0000.
    (c) The neck force-moment transducer shall have the dimensions, 
response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in 
drawing SA 572-S19 and be mounted at the upper neck transducer location 
as shown in

[[Page 104]]

drawing 210-0000. A lower neck transducer as specified in drawing SA 
572-S19 is allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of 
part No. ATD6204, as shown in drawing 210-0000.
    (d) The shoulder force transducers shall have the dimensions and 
response characteristics specified in drawing SA 572-S21 and be allowed 
to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 210-3800 
in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000.
    (e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA 
572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration at 
the T4 location, as shown in drawing 210-0000. Triaxial accelerometers 
may be mounted as optional instrumentation at T1, and T12, and in 
uniaxial configuration on the sternum at the midpoint level of ribs No. 
1 and No. 3 and on the spine coinciding with the midpoint level of No. 3 
rib, as shown in drawing 210-0000. If used, the accelerometers must 
conform to SA-572-S4.
    (f) The chest deflection potentiometer shall have the dimensions and 
response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S50 and be mounted 
in the torso assembly as shown drawing 210-0000.
    (g) The lumbar spine force/moment transducer may be mounted in the 
torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation 
in place of part No. 210-4150. If used, the transducer shall have the 
dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S20.
    (h) The pubic force transducer may be mounted in the torso assembly 
as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation in place of 
part No. 921-0022-036. If used, the transducer shall have the dimensions 
and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S18.
    (i) The acetabulum force transducers may be mounted in the torso 
assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation in 
place of part No. 210-4522. If used, the transducer shall have the 
dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S22.
    (j) The anterior-superior iliac spine transducers may be mounted in 
the torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional 
instrumentation in place of part No. 210-4540-1, -2. If used, the 
transducers shall have the dimensions and response characteristics 
specified in drawing SA-572-S17.
    (k) The pelvis accelerometers may be mounted in the pelvis in 
triaxial configuration as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional 
instrumentation. If used, the accelerometers shall have the dimensions 
and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S4.
    (l) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed 
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part shall be 
recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of 
SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation for 
Impact Tests--Part 1-Electronic Instrumentation'' (refer to Sec.  
572.140(a)(3)), with channel classes as follows:
    (1) Head acceleration--Class 1000
    (2) Neck
    (i) Force--Class 1000
    (ii) Moments--Class 600
    (iii) Pendulum acceleration--Class 180
    (iv) Rotation potentiometer response (if used)--CFC 60.
    (3) Thorax:
    (i) Rib/sternum acceleration--Class 1000
    (ii) Spine and pendulum accelerations--Class 180
    (iii) Sternum deflection--Class 600
    (iv) Shoulder force--Class 180
    (4) Lumbar:
    (i) Forces--Class 1000
    (ii) Moments--Class 600
    (iii) Torso flexion pulling force--Class 60 if data channel is used
    (5) Pelvis
    (i) Accelerations--Class 1000
    (ii) Acetabulum, pubic symphysis--Class 1000,
    (iii) Iliac wing forces--Class 180
    (m) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to 
the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle 
Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12 (refer to Sec.  572.140(a)(4)).
    (n) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance 
frequency less

[[Page 105]]

than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.
    (o) Limb joints shall be set at lG, barely restraining the weight of 
the limbs when they are extended horizontally. The force required to 
move a limb segment shall not exceed 2G throughout the range of limb 
motion.
    (p) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or 
fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by a period of not less 
than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.
    (q) Surfaces of dummy components are not painted except as specified 
in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.



                  Sec. Figures to Subpart P of Part 572

[[Page 106]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22MR00.000


[[Page 107]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22MR00.001


[[Page 108]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22MR00.002


[[Page 109]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR13DE01.237


[[Page 110]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22MR00.004


[65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 64376, Dec. 13, 2001]

[[Page 111]]



           Subpart R_CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant, Alpha Version

    Source: 65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.150  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) The following materials are incorporated by reference in this 
subpart R.
    (1) A drawings and specifications package entitled ``Parts List and 
Drawings, Subpart R, CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant Crash Test Dummy (CRABI-
12, Alpha version) August 2001'' and consisting of:
    (i) Drawing No. 921022-001, Head Assembly, incorporated by reference 
in Sec. Sec.  572.151, 572.152, 572.154, and 572.155;
    (ii) Drawing No. 921022-041, Neck Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec. Sec.  572.151, 572.153, 572.154, and 572.155;
    (iii) Drawing No. TE-3200-160, Headform, incorporated by reference 
in Sec. Sec.  572.151 and 572.153;
    (iv) Drawing No. 921022-060, Torso Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec. Sec.  572.151, 572.154, and 572.155;
    (v) Drawing No. 921022-055, Leg Assembly, incorporated by reference 
in Sec. Sec.  572.151, and 572.155 as part of a complete dummy assembly;
    (vi) Drawing No. 921022-054, Arm Assembly, incorporated by reference 
in Sec. Sec.  572.151, and 572.155 as part of the complete dummy 
assembly;
    (2) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly, 
Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) Subpart R, CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant 
Crash Test Dummy (CRABI-12, Alpha version) August 2001'' incorporated by 
reference in Sec.  572.155;
    (3) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar95 ``Instrumentation 
for Impact Tests--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation'', incorporated by 
reference in Sec.  572.155;
    (4) SAE J1733 1994-12 ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing'', 
incorporated by reference in Sec.  572.155.
    (b) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials 
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR 
Part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Docket 
Section, 400 Seventh Street S.W., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the 
National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on 
the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: 
http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--
regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
    (1) The drawings and specifications package referred to in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section and the procedures manual referred to in 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section are available from Reprographic 
Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Road, Beltsville, MD 20705 (301) 419-
5070.
    (2) The SAE materials referred to paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of 
this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, 
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.

[65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 45784, Aug. 30, 2001]



Sec.  572.151  General description.

    (a) The 12-month-old-infant crash test dummy is described by 
drawings and specifications containing the following materials:
    (1) Technical drawings and specifications package 921022-000 (refer 
to Sec.  572.150(a)(1)), the titles of which are listed in Table A of 
this section;
    (2) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection document 
(PADI) (refer to Sec.  572.150(a)(2)).
    (b) The dummy consists of the component assemblies set out in the 
following Table A:

                                 Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Component assembly                     Drawing number
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head Assembly.............................  921022-001.
Neck Assembly (complete)..................  921022-041.
Torso Assembly............................  921022-060.
Leg Assembly..............................  921022-055 R&L.
Arm Assembly..............................  921022-054 R&L.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Adjacent segments of the dummy are joined in a manner such that, 
except for contacts existing under static conditions, there is no 
contact between metallic elements throughout the range of motion or 
under simulated crash impact conditions.
    (d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
shall

[[Page 112]]

conform to this Subpart in every respect before its use in any test 
under this chapter.



Sec.  572.152  Head assembly and test procedure.

    (a) The head assembly (refer to Sec.  572.150(a)(1)(i)) for this 
test consists of the assembly (drawing 921022-001), triaxial mount block 
(SA572-80), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4).
    (b) Frontal and rear impact. (1) Frontal impact. When the head 
assembly in paragraph (a) of this section is dropped from a height of 
376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) 
in accordance with paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this section, the peak 
resultant acceleration measured at the head CG shall not be less than 
100 g or more than 120 g. The resultant acceleration vs. time history 
curve shall be unimodal, and the oscillations occurring after the main 
pulse shall be less than 17 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. 
The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 15 g's.
    (2) Rear impact. When the head assembly in paragraph (a) of this 
section is dropped from a height of 376.0 1.0 mm 
(14.8 0.04 in) in accordance with paragraph 
(c)(3)(ii) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration measured at 
the head CG shall be not less than 55 g and not more than 71 g. The 
resultant acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal, and the 
oscillations occurring after the main pulse shall be less than 17 
percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration 
shall not exceed 15 g's.
    (c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as 
follows:
    (1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any 
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 [deg]C (66 and 78 [deg]F) and at any 
relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours 
prior to a test. These temperature and humidity levels shall be 
maintained throughout the entire testing period specified in this 
section.
    (2) Before the test, clean the impact surface of the head skin and 
the steel impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichlorethane, 
or an equivalent. Both impact surfaces shall be clean and dry for 
testing.
    (3)(i) For a frontal impact test, suspend the head assembly with its 
midsagittal plane in vertical orientation as shown in Figure R1 of this 
subpart. The lowest point on the forehead is 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) from the 
impact surface. The 3.30 mm (0.13 in) diameter holes located on either 
side of the dummy's head are used to ensure that the head is level with 
respect to the impact surface. The angle between the lower surface plane 
of the neck transducer mass simulator (drawing 910420-003) and the plane 
of the impact surface is 45 1 degrees.
    (ii) For a rear impact test, suspend the head assembly with its 
midsagittal plane in vertical orientation as shown in Figure R2 of this 
subpart. The lowest point on the back of the head is 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) from the 
impact surface. The 3.30 mm (0.13 in) diameter holes located on either 
side of the dummy's head are used to ensure that the head is level with 
respect to the impact surface. The angle between the lower surface plane 
of the neck transducer structural replacement (drawing 910420-003) and 
the impact surface is 90 1 degrees.
    (4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by a means that 
ensures a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat 
horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and 610 mm (24 in) 
square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a micro finish 
of not less than 203.2 x 10-6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and 
not more than 2032.0 x 10-6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).
    (5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests of the head 
assembly at the same impact point. For head impacts on the opposite side 
of the head, the 30-minute waiting period specified in Sec.  572.155(m) 
does not apply.



Sec.  572.153  Neck-headform assembly and test procedure.

    (a) The neck and headform assembly (refer to Sec. Sec.  
572.150(a)(1)(ii) and 572.150(a)(1)(iii)) for the purposes of this test 
consists of parts shown in CRABI neck test assembly (drawing TE-3200-
100);
    (b) When the neck and headform assembly, as defined in Sec.  
572.153(a), is tested according to the test procedure in Sec.  
572.153(c), it shall have the following characteristics:

[[Page 113]]

    (1) Flexion. (i) Plane D referenced in Figure R3 of this subpart 
shall rotate in the direction of pre-impact flight with respect to the 
pendulum's longitudinal centerline not less than 75 degrees and not more 
than 86 degrees. Within this specified rotation corridor, the peak 
positive moment about the occipital condyles shall be not less than 36 
N-m (26.6 ft-lbf) and not more than 45 N-m (33.2 ft-lbf).
    (ii) The positive moment about the occipital condyles shall decay 
for the first time to 5 N-m (3.7 ft-lbf) between 60 ms and 80 ms after 
time zero.
    (iii) The moment about the occipital condyles shall be calculated by 
the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My - (0.005842m) x (Fx), where My 
is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is the shear force measured by the 
neck transducer (drawing SA572 -S23) and 0.005842m is the distance from 
the point at which the load cell measures the force to the occipital 
condyle.
    (2) Extension. (i) Plane D referenced in Figure R4 of this subpart 
shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the 
pendulum's longitudinal centerline not less than 80 degrees and not more 
than 92 degrees. Within the specified rotation corridor, the peak 
negative moment about the occipital condyles shall be not more than -12 
Nm (-8.9 ft-lbf) and not less than -23 N-m (-17.0 ft-lbf) within the 
minimum and maximum rotation interval.
    (ii) The negative moment about the occipital condyles shall decay 
for the first time to -5 Nm (-3.7 lbf-ft) between 76 ms and 90 ms after 
time zero.
    (iii) The moment about the occipital condyles shall be calculated by 
the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My - (0.005842m) x (Fx), where My 
is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is the shear force measured by the 
neck transducer (drawing SA572 -S23) and 0.005842m is the distance from 
the point at which the load cell measures the force to the occipital 
condyle.
    (c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled 
environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 [deg]C (69 and 72 
[deg]F) and at any relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at 
least four hours prior to a test. These temperature and humidity levels 
shall be maintained throughout the testing period specified in this 
section.
    (2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9001336) on the neck cable (drawing 
ATD-6206) to 0.2 to 0.3 Nm (2-3 in-lbf).
    (3) Mount the neck-headform assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of 
this section, on the pendulum so the midsagittal plane of the headform 
is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum as 
shown in Figure R3 for flexion and Figure R4 for extension tests.
    (i) The moment and rotation data channels are defined to be zero 
when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.
    (ii) The test shall be conducted without inducing any torsion of the 
neck.
    (4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely to achieve an 
impact velocity of 5.2 0.1 m/s (17.1 0.3 ft/s) for flexion and 2.5 0.1 
m/s (8.2 0.3 ft/s) for extension measured at the 
center of the pendulum accelerometer at the instant of contact with the 
honeycomb.
    (i) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the 
pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. The pendulum data 
channel shall be defined to be zero at this time.
    (ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an 
acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified 
in the following table. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel 
to obtain the velocity vs. time curve as indicated in Table B:

                                             Table B--Pendulum Pulse
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Time                         Flexion                   Time                    Extension
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 m/s                       m/s        ft/s              ms                 m/s          ft/s
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10..................................  1.6-2.3       5.2-7.5  6......................  0.8-1.2       2.6-3.9
20..................................  3.4-4.2       11.2-13  10.....................  1.5-2.1       4.9-6.9
                                                        .8
25..................................  4.3-5.2       14.1-17  14.....................  2.2-2.9       7.2-9.5
                                                        .1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 114]]



Sec.  572.154  Thorax assembly and test procedure.

    (a) Thorax Assembly (refer to Sec.  572.150(a)(1)(iv)) . The thorax 
consists of the part of the torso assembly shown in drawing 921022-060.
    (b) When the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 921022-
000) is impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec.  572.155(a) at 5.0 
0.1m/s (16.5 0.3 ft/s) 
according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, the 
peak force, measured by the impact probe in accordance with paragraph 
Sec.  572.155(a), shall be not less than 1514 N (340.7 lbf) and not more 
than 1796 N (404.1 lbf).
    (c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment 
at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 [deg]C (69 and 72 [deg]F) and 
at any relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four 
hours prior to a test. These temperature and humidity levels shall be 
maintained throughout the entire testing period specified in this 
section.
    (2) The test dummy is clothed in a cotton-polyester based tight 
fitting sweat shirt with long sleeves and ankle long pants whose 
combined weight is not more than 0.25 kg (.55 lbs).
    (3) Seat and orient the dummy on a level seating surface without 
back support as shown in Figure R5 of this subpart, with the lower limbs 
extended forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane and the arms 0 to 5 
degrees forward of vertical. The dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical 
within /1 degree and the posterior surface of the 
upper spine box is aligned at 90 /1 degrees from 
the horizontal. (Shim material may be used under the upper legs to 
maintain the dummy's specified spine box surface alignment).
    (4) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so 
that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe 
coincides with the dummy's midsagittal plane, is centered on the torso 
196 /2.5 mm (7.7 /0.1 in) 
vertically from the plane of the seating surface, and is within 0.5 
degrees of a horizontal plane.
    (5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of 
contact the probe's longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a 
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
    (6) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no 
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
    (7) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other 
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make 
contact with the dummy during the test.

[65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 45784, Aug. 30, 2001]



Sec.  572.155  Test conditions and instrumentation.

    (a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments, 
shall be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its 
longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension 
hardware, impact vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of Sec.  
572.154(c)(7). The impactor shall have a mass of 2.86 0.02 kg (6.3 0.05 lbs) and a 
minimum mass moment of inertia of 164 kg-cm\2\ (0.145 lb-in-sec\2\) in 
yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One-third of the weight of 
suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must be 
included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed 
five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of 
the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis of 
the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 101.6 0.25 mm (4.00 0.01 in) diameter 
face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall 
have a 101-103 mm (4-4.1 in) diameter cylindrical surface extending for 
a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 in) to the rear from the impact face. The 
probe's end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an 
accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal 
axis of the probe. The impact probe shall have a free air resonant 
frequency of not less than 1000 Hz measured in line with the 
longitudinal axis of the impactor, using the test method shown in the 
Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) document 
referenced in Sec.  572.151.
    (b) Head accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 921022-000.

[[Page 115]]

    (c) The neck force-moment transducer shall have the dimensions, 
response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in 
drawing SA572-S23 and shall be mounted for testing as shown in drawing 
921022-000 and in figures R3 and R4 of this subpart.
    (d) The shoulder force transducers shall have the dimensions and 
response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S25 and are allowed 
to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 921022-
022 in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 921022-000.
    (e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration 
as shown in drawing 921022-000.
    (f) The lumbar spine and lower neck force/moment transducer shall 
have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing 
SA572-S23 and are allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in 
the torso assembly in place of part No. 910420-003 as shown in drawing 
921022-000.
    (g) The pelvis accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response 
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 
SA572-S4 and are allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in 
the pelvis in triaxial configuration as shown in drawing 921022-000.
    (h) The pubic force transducer shall have the dimensions and 
response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S24 and is allowed 
to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 921022-
050 in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 921022-000.
    (i) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed 
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part are 
recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of 
SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar95 ``Instrumentation for Impact 
Tests--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation'' (refer to Sec.  
572.150(a)(3)), with channel classes as follows:
    (1) Head and headform acceleration--Class 1000.
    (2) Neck :
    (i) Forces--Class 1000;
    (ii) Moments--Class 600;
    (iii) Pendulum acceleration--Class 180;
    (iv) Rotation potentiometer response (if used)--CFC 60.
    (3) Thorax:
    (i) Spine and pendulum accelerations--Class 180;
    (ii) Shoulder forces--Class 600;
    (4) Lumbar:
    (i) Forces--Class 1000;
    (ii) Moments--Class 600;
    (5) Pelvis:
    (i) Accelerations--Class 1000;
    (ii) Pubic--Class 1000.
    (j) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to 
SAE J1733, 1994-12, ``Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface 
Vehicle Information Report,'' (refer to Sec.  572.150(a)(4)).
    (k) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance 
frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the 
applicable channel class.
    (l) Limb joints shall be set at l g, barely restraining the weight 
of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force required to move 
a limb segment shall not exceed 2 g throughout the range of limb motion.
    (m) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or 
fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by period of not less 
than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.
    (n) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as 
specified in this subpart or in drawings referenced in Sec.  572.150.

[65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 45784, Aug. 30, 2001]



                  Sec. Figures to Subpart R of Part 572

[[Page 116]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.008


[[Page 117]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.009


[[Page 118]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.010


[[Page 119]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.011


[[Page 120]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.012


[[Page 121]]





       Subpart S_Hybrid III Six-Year-Old Weighted Child Test Dummy

    Source: 69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.160  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this 
subpart S by reference:
    (1) A drawings and specifications package entitled ``Parts List and 
Drawings, Part 572 Subpart S, Hybrid III Weighted Six-Year Old Child 
Test Dummy (H-III6CW, Alpha Version) April 13, 2004'', incorporated by 
reference in Sec.  572.161 and consisting of:
    (i) Drawing No. 167-0000, Complete Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec.  572.161;
    (ii) Drawing No. 167-2000, Upper Torso Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec. Sec.  572.161, 572.164, and 572.165 as part of a 
complete dummy assembly;
    (iii) Drawing No. 167-2020 Revision A, dated December 8, 2005, Spine 
Box Weight, incorporated by reference in Sec. Sec.  572.161 and 572.165 
as part of a complete dummy assembly;
    (iv) Drawing No. 167-3000, Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated by 
reference in Sec. Sec.  572.161, and 572.165 as part of a complete dummy 
assembly;
    (v) Drawing No. 167-3010 Revision A, dated December 8, 2005, Lumbar 
Weight Base, incorporated by reference in Sec. Sec.  572.161 and 572.165 
as part of a complete dummy assembly; and
    (vi) The Hybrid III Weighted Six-Year-Old Child Parts/Drawing List, 
incorporated by reference in Sec.  572.161.
    (2) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly, 
Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the Hybrid III Six-Year-Old 
Weighted Child Test Dummy (H-III6CW), April 2004,'' incorporated by 
reference in Sec.  572.161;
    (3) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials 
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR 
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Technical 
Reference Library, 400 Seventh Street, SW., room 5109, Washington, DC, 
or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For 
information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-
6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--
federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (b) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
    (1) The Drawings and Specifications for the Hybrid III Six-Year-Old 
Weighted Child Test Dummy referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section are available in electronic format through the NHTSA docket 
center and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division of New RT, 18810 
Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, (301) 670-0090.
    (2) [Reserved]

[69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 77338, Dec. 30, 2005]



Sec.  572.161  General description.

    (a) The Hybrid III Six-Year-Old Weighted Child Test Dummy is defined 
by drawings and specifications containing the following materials:
    (1) ``Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart S, Hybrid III 
Weighted Six-Year Old Child Test Dummy (H-III6CW, Alpha Version) April 
13, 2004'' (incorporated by reference, see Sec.  572.160),
    (2) The head, neck, arm, and leg assemblies specified in 49 CFR 572 
subpart N; and
    (3) ``Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of 
the Hybrid III Six-Year-Old Weighted Child Test Dummy, April 2004'' 
(incorporated by reference, see Sec.  572.160).

                                 Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
          Component assembly \1\                     Drawing No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Complete assembly.........................  167-0000.
Upper torso assembly......................  167-2000.
Spine box weight..........................  167-2020 Rev. A.
Lower torso assembly......................  167-3000.
Lumbar weight base........................  167-3010 Rev. A.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Head, neck, arm, and leg assemblies are as specified in 49 CFR 572
  subpart N.

    (b) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for 
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between 
metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated 
crash impact conditions.
    (c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
must conform to Subpart S in every respect and Subpart N as applicable, 
before use

[[Page 122]]

in any test similar to those specified in Standard 208, ``Occupant Crash 
Protection'' (49 CFR 571.208), and Standard 213, ``Child Restraint 
Systems'' (49 CFR 571.213).

[69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 77338, Dec. 30, 2005]



Sec.  572.162  Head assembly and test procedure.

    The head assembly is assembled and tested as specified in 49 CFR 
572.122 (Subpart N).



Sec.  572.163  Neck assembly and test procedure.

    The neck assembly is assembled and tested as specified in 49 CFR 
572.123 (Subpart N).



Sec.  572.164  Thorax assembly and test procedure.

    (a) Thorax (upper torso) assembly. The thorax consists of the part 
of the torso assembly shown in drawing 167-2000 (incorporated by 
reference, see Sec.  572.160).
    (b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely 
assembled dummy (drawing 167-2000) that is seated as shown in Figure S1 
is impacted by a test probe conforming to 49 CFR 572.127(a) at 6.71 
0.12 m/s (22.0 0.4 ft/s) 
according to the test procedure specified in 49 CFR 572.124(c):
    (1) The maximum sternum displacement relative to the spine, measured 
with chest deflection transducer (specified in 49 CFR 572.124(b)(1)), 
must be not less than 38.0 mm (1.50 in) and not more than 46.0 mm (1.80 
in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force, 
measured by the probe in accordance with 49 CFR 572.127, must be not 
less than 1205 N (270.9 lbf) and not more than 1435 N (322.6 lbf). The 
peak force after 12.5 mm (0.5 in) of sternum displacement, but before 
reaching the minimum required 38.0 mm (1.46 in) sternum displacement 
limit, must not exceed an upper limit of 1500 N.
    (2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as 
determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section must be not less than 65 percent but not more than 85 
percent.
    (c) Test procedure. The thorax assembly is tested as specified in 49 
CFR 572.124(c).



Sec.  572.165  Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion 
test procedure.

    (a) Upper/lower torso assembly. The test objective is to determine 
the stiffness effects of the lumbar spine (specified in 49 CFR 
572.125(a)), including cable (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), mounting 
plate insert (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), nylon shoulder bushing 
(specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), nut (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), 
spine box weighting plates (drawing 167-2020 Revision A), lumbar base 
weight (drawing 167-3010 Revision A), and abdominal insert (specified in 
49 CFR 572.125(a)), on resistance to articulation between the upper 
torso assembly (drawing 167-2000) and the lower torso assembly (drawing 
167-3000). Drawing Nos. 167-2000, 167-2020 Revision A, 167-3000, and 
167-3010 Revision A, are incorporated by reference, see Sec.  572.160.
    (b)(1) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected 
to a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level 
through a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure S2 
according to the test procedure set out in 49 CFR 572.125(c), the lumbar 
spine-abdomen assembly must flex by an amount that permits the upper 
torso assembly to translate in angular motion until the machined surface 
of the instrument cavity at the back of the thoracic spine box is at 45 
 0.5 degrees relative to the transverse plane, at 
which time the force applied as shown in Figure S2 must be within 88.6 N 
 25 N (20.0 lbf  5.6 lbf), 
and
    (2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to 
within 9 degrees of its initial position.
    (c) Test procedure. The upper and lower torso assemblies are tested 
as specified in 49 CFR 572.125(c), except that in paragraph (c)(5) of 
that section, the initial torso orientation angle may not exceed 32 
degrees.

[69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 77338, Dec. 30, 2005]



Sec.  572.166  Knees and knee impact test procedure.

    The knee assembly is assembled and tested as specified in 49 CFR 
572.126 (Subpart N).

[[Page 123]]



Sec.  572.167  Test conditions and instrumentation.

    The test conditions and instrumentation are as specified in 49 CFR 
572.127 (Subpart N).



                  Sec. Figures to Subpart S of Part 572

[[Page 124]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16JY04.005


[[Page 125]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16JY04.006


[[Page 126]]



Subpart T [Reserved]



 Subpart U, ES	2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 50th Percentile Adult 
                                  Male

    Source: 71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.180  Incorporated materials.

    (a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this 
Subpart by reference:
    (1) A parts/drawing list entitled, ``Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 
Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES2re), February 2008,''
    (2) A drawings and inspection package entitled ``Parts List and 
Drawings, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES-2re, 
Alpha Version), February 2008,'' consisting of:
    (i) Drawing No. 175-0000 ES-2re Dummy Assembly;
    (ii) Drawing No. 175-1000 Head Assembly;
    (iii) Drawing No. 175-2000, Neck Assembly Test/Cert;
    (iv) Drawing No. 175-3000, Shoulder Assembly;
    (v) Drawing No. 175-3500, Arm Assembly, Left;
    (vi) Drawing No. 175-3800, Arm Assembly, Right;
    (vii) Drawing No. 175-4000, Thorax Assembly with Rib Extensions;
    (viii) Drawing No. 175-5000, Abdominal Assembly;
    (ix) Drawing No. 175-5500 Lumbar Spine Assembly;
    (x) Drawing No. 175-6000 Pelvis Assembly;
    (xi) Drawing No. 175-7000-1, Leg Assembly--left;
    (xii) Drawing No. 175-7000-2, Leg Assembly--right;
    (xiii) Drawing No. 175-8000, Neoprene Body Suit; and,
    (xiv) Drawing No. 175-9000, Headform Assembly;
    (3) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly, 
Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) of the EuroSID-2re 50th Percentile 
Adult Male Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, February 2008,'' incorporated 
by reference in Sec. Sec.  572.180(a)(2), and 572.181(a);
    (4) Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J211, 
Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation for Impact Tests--Part 1--Electronic 
Instrumentation''; and,
    (5) SAE J1733 of 1994-12 ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash 
Testing.''
    (b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials 
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR 
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at the Department of 
Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, 
SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone (202) 366-9826, and at the National 
Archives and Records Administration (NARA), and in electronic format 
through Regulations.gov. For information on the availability and 
inspection of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http:/
/www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--
locations.html. For information on the availability and inspection of 
this material at Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-5457, or go to: http://
www.regulations.gov.
    (c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
    (1) The Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib 
Extensions (ES2re), February 2008, referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section, the Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 
with Rib Extensions (ES-2re, Alpha Version), February 2008, referred to 
in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, and the PADI document referred to 
in paragraph (a)(3) of this section, are available in electronic format 
through Regulations.gov and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division 
of New RT, 18810 Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, telephone (301) 
670-0090.
    (2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(4) and (a)(5) of 
this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, 
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096, telephone 1-877-606-
7323.

[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33920, June 16, 2008]

[[Page 127]]



Sec.  572.181  General description.

    (a) The ES-2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 50th Percentile Adult 
Male, is defined by:
    (1) The drawings and specifications contained in the ``Parts List 
and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES-2re, 
Alpha Version), February 2008,'' incorporated by reference in Sec.  
572.180, which includes the technical drawings and specifications 
described in Drawing 175-0000, the titles of which are listed in Table 
A;

                                 Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                   Component assembly                     Drawing number
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head Assembly...........................................        175-1000
Neck Assembly Test/Cert.................................        175-2000
Neck Bracket Including Lifting Eyebolt..................        175-2500
Shoulder Assembly.......................................        175-3000
Arm Assembly-Left.......................................        175-3500
Arm Assembly-Right......................................        175-3800
Thorax Assembly with Rib Extensions.....................        175-4000
Abdominal Assembly......................................        175-5000
Lumbar Spine Assembly...................................        175-5500
Pelvis Assembly.........................................        175-6000
Leg Assembly, Left......................................      175-7000-1
Leg Assembly, Right.....................................      175-7000-2
Neoprene Body Suit......................................        175-8000
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) ``Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib 
Extensions (ES2re), February 2008,'' containing 8 pages, incorporated by 
reference in Sec.  572.180,
    (3) A listing of available transducers-crash test sensors for the 
ES-2re Crash Test Dummy is shown in drawing 175-0000 sheet 4 of 6, dated 
February 2008, incorporated by reference in Sec.  572.180,
    (4) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) of 
the ES-2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, February 2008, incorporated by 
reference in Sec.  572.180,
    (5) Sign convention for signal outputs reference document SAE J1733 
Information Report, titled ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing'' 
dated December 1994, incorporated by reference in Sec.  572.180.
    (b) Exterior dimensions of ES-2re test dummy are shown in drawing 
175-0000 sheet 3 of 6, dated February 2008.
    (c) Weights of body segments (head, neck, upper and lower torso, 
arms and upper and lower segments) and the center of gravity location of 
the head are shown in drawing 175-0000 sheet 2 of 6, dated February 
2008.
    (d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that, except for 
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no additional 
contact between metallic elements of adjacent body segments throughout 
the range of motion.
    (e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test similar 
to those in Standard No. 214, Side Impact Protection and Standard No. 
201, Occupant Protection in Interior Impact.

[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]



Sec.  572.182  Head assembly.

    (a) The head assembly consists of the head (drawing 175-1000), 
including the neck upper transducer structural replacement, and a set of 
three (3) accelerometers in conformance with specifications in Sec.  
572.189(b) and mounted as shown in drawing (175-0000 sheet 1 of 6). When 
tested to the test procedure specified in paragraph (b) of this section, 
the head assembly shall meet performance requirements specified in 
paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure. The head shall be tested per procedure specified 
in 49 CFR Sec.  572.112(a).
    (c) Performance criteria. (1) When the head assembly is dropped in 
accordance with Sec.  572.112 (a), the measured peak resultant 
acceleration shall be between 125 g's and 155 g's;
    (2) The resultant acceleration-time curve shall be unimodal to the 
extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse 
shall not exceed 15% (zero to peak) of the main pulse;
    (3) The fore-and-aft component of the head acceleration shall not 
exceed 15 g's.



Sec.  572.183  Neck assembly.

    (a) The neck assembly consists of parts shown in drawing 175-2000. 
For purposes of this test, the neck is mounted within the headform 
assembly 175-9000 as shown in Figure U1 in appendix A to this subpart. 
When subjected to tests procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section, the neck-headform assembly shall meet performance requirements 
specified in paragraph (c) of this section.

[[Page 128]]

    (b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the neck-headform assembly in a test 
environment as specified in Sec.  572.189(n);
    (2) Attach the neck-headform assembly to the Part 572 subpart E 
pendulum test fixture as shown in Figure U2-A in appendix A to this 
subpart, so that the midsagittal plane of the neck-headform assembly is 
vertical and perpendicular to the plane of motion of the pendulum 
longitudinal centerline shown in Figure U2-A. Torque the half-spherical 
screws (175-2004) located at either end of the neck assembly to 88 
5 in-lbs using the neck compression tool (175-
9500) or equivalent;
    (3) Release the pendulum from a height sufficient to allow it to 
fall freely to achieve an impact velocity of 3.40.1 m/s measured at the center of the pendulum 
accelerometer (Figure 22 as set forth in 49 CFR 572.33) at the time the 
pendulum makes contact with the decelerating mechanism. The velocity-
time history of the pendulum falls inside the corridor determined by the 
upper and lower boundaries specified in Table 1 to paragraph (a) of this 
section.
    (4) Allow the neck to flex without the neck-headform assembly making 
contact with any object;
    (5) Time zero is defined in Sec.  572.189(j).

  Table 1 to Paragraph (a)--ES-2re Neck Certification Pendulum Velocity
                                Corridor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Upper boundary                       Lower boundary
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                          Velocity     Time     Velocity
               Time  (ms)                  (m/s)       (ms)      (m/s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0....................................       0.00        0.0      -0.05
3.0....................................      -0.25        2.5     -0.375
14.0...................................      -3.20       13.5       -3.7
                                                         17.0       -3.7
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Performance criteria. (1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is to 
be characterized in terms of decrease in velocity as determined by 
integrating the filtered pendulum acceleration response from time-zero.
    (2) The maximum rotation in the lateral direction of the reference 
plane of the headform (175-9000) as shown in Figure U2-B in appendix A 
to this subpart, shall be 49 to 59 degrees with respect to the 
longitudinal axis of the pendulum occurring between 54 and 66 ms from 
time zero. Rotation of the headform-neck assembly and the neck angle 
with respect to the pendulum shall be measured with potentiometers 
specified in Sec.  572.189(c), installed as shown in drawing 175-9000, 
and calculated per procedure specified in Figure U2-B in appendix A to 
this subpart;
    (3) The decaying headform rotation vs. time curve shall cross the 
zero angle with respect to its initial position at time of impact 
relative to the pendulum centerline between 53 ms to 88 ms after the 
time the peak translation-rotation value is reached.

[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]



Sec.  572.184  Shoulder assembly.

    (a) The shoulder (175-3000) is part of the body assembly shown in 
drawing 175-0000. When subjected to impact tests specified in paragraph 
(b) of this section, the shoulder assembly shall meet performance 
requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly, without suit and 
shoulder foam pad (175-3010), in a test environment as specified in 
Sec.  572.189(n);
    (2) The dummy is seated, as shown in Figure U3 in appendix A to this 
subpart, on a flat, horizontal, rigid surface covered by two overlaid 2 
mm thick Teflon sheets and with no back support of the dummy's torso. 
The dummy's torso spine backplate is vertical within 2 degrees and the midsagittal plane of the thorax is 
positioned perpendicular to the direction of the plane of motion of the 
impactor at contact with the shoulder. The arms are oriented forward at 
502 degrees from the horizontal, pointing 
downward. The dummy's legs are horizontal and symmetrical about the 
midsaggital plane with the distance between the innermost point on the 
opposite ankle at 100 5 mm. The length of the 
elastic shoulder cord (175-3015) shall be adjusted so that a force 
between and including 27.5 and 32.5 N applied in a forward direction at 
4 1 mm from the outer edge of the clavicle in the 
same plane as the clavicle movement, is required to initiate a forward 
motion of 1 to 5 mm;
    (3) The impactor is the same as defined in Sec.  572.189(a);
    (4) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the 
shoulder,

[[Page 129]]

its longitudinal axis is within 0.5 degrees of a 
horizontal plane and perpendicular (0.5 degrees) 
to the midsagittal plane of the dummy and the centerpoint on the 
impactor's face is within 5 mm of the center of the upper arm pivot bolt 
(5000040) at contact with the test dummy, as shown in Figure U3 in 
appendix A to this subpart;
    (5) The impactor impacts the dummy's shoulder at 4.30.1 m/s.
    (c) Performance criteria. The peak acceleration of the impactor is 
between 7.5 g's and 10.5 g's during the pendulum's contact with the 
dummy.



Sec.  572.185  Thorax (upper torso) assembly.

    (a) The thorax assembly of the dummy must meet the requirements of 
both (b) and (c) of this section. Section 572.185(b) specifies 
requirements for an individual rib drop test, and Sec.  572.185(c) 
specifies requirements for a full-body thorax impact test.
    (b) Individual rib drop test. For purposes of this test, the rib 
modules (175-4002), which are part of the thorax assembly (175-4000), 
are tested as individual units. When subjected to test procedures 
specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the rib modules shall 
meet performance requirements specified in paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section. Each rib is tested at both the 459 mm and 815 mm drop height 
tests described in paragraphs (b)(1)(v)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (1) Test procedure. (i) Soak the rib modules (175-4002) in a test 
environment as specified in 572.189(n);
    (ii) Mount the rib module rigidly in a drop test fixture as shown in 
Figure U7 in appendix A to this subpart with the impacted side of the 
rib facing up;
    (iii) The drop test fixture contains a free fall guided mass of 
7.780.01 kg that is of rigid construction and with 
a flat impact face 1501.0 mm in diameter and an 
edge radius of 0.25 mm;
    (iv) Align the vertical longitudinal centerline of the drop mass so 
that the centerpoint of the downward-facing flat surface is aligned to 
impact the centerline of the rib rail guide system within  2.5 mm.
    (v) The impacting mass is dropped from the following heights:
    (A) 459 5 mm
    (B) 815 8 mm
    (vi) A test cycle consists of one drop from each drop height 
specified in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section. Allow a period of not 
less than five (5) minutes between impacts in a single test cycle. Allow 
a period of not less than thirty (30) minutes between two separate 
cycles of the same rib module.
    (2) Performance criteria.
    (i) Each of the rib modules shall deflect as specified in paragraphs 
(b)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, with the deflection measurements 
made with the internal rib module position transducer specified in Sec.  
572.189(d):
    (A) Not less than 36 mm and not more than 40 mm when impacted by the 
mass dropped from 459 mm; and,
    (B) Not less than 46 mm and not more than 51mm when impacted by the 
mass dropped from 815 mm.
    (c) Full-body thorax impact test. The thorax is part of the upper 
torso assembly shown in drawing 175-4000. For this full-body thorax 
impact test, the dummy is tested as a complete assembly (drawing 175-
0000) with the struck-side arm (175-3500, left arm; 175-3800, right arm) 
removed. The dummy's thorax is equipped with deflection potentiometers 
as specified in drawing SA572-S69. When subjected to the test procedures 
specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the thorax shall meet the 
performance requirements set forth in paragraph (c)(2).
    (1) Test Procedure. (i) Soak the dummy assembly (175-0000), with 
struck-side arm (175-3500, left arm; 175-3800, right arm), shoulder foam 
pad (175-3010), and neoprene body suit (175-8000) removed, in a test 
environment as specified in Sec.  572.189(n);
    (ii) The dummy is seated, as shown in Figure U4 in appendix A to 
this subpart, on a flat, horizontal, rigid surface covered by two 
overlaid 2 mm thick Teflon sheets and with no back support of the 
dummy's torso. The dummy's torso spine backplate is vertical within 
2 degrees and the midsagittal plane of thorax is 
positioned perpendicular to the direction of the plane of motion of the 
impactor at contact with the thorax. The non-struck side arm is oriented 
vertically, pointing downward. The dummy's legs are horizontal and 
symmetrical about the midsagittal

[[Page 130]]

plane with the distance between the innermost point on the opposite 
ankle at 100 5 mm;
    (iii) The impactor is the same as defined in Sec.  572.189(a);
    (iv) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the 
thorax its longitudinal axis is within 0.5 degrees 
of horizontal and perpendicular 0.5 degrees to the 
midsagittal plane of the dummy and the centerpoint of the impactor's 
face is within 5 mm of the impact point on the dummy's middle rib shown 
in Figure U4 in appendix A to this subpart;
    (v) The impactor impacts the dummy's thorax at 5.5 m/s 0.1 m/s.
    (vi) Time zero is defined in Sec.  572.189(k).
    (2) Performance Criteria. (i) The individual rib modules shall 
conform to the following range of deflections:
    (A) Upper rib not less than 34 mm and not greater than 41 mm;
    (B) Middle rib not less than 37 mm and not greater than 45 mm;
    (C) Lower rib not less than 37 mm and not greater than 44 mm.
    (ii) The impactor force shall be computed as the product of the 
impact probe acceleration and its mass. The peak impactor force at any 
time after 6 ms from time zero shall be not less than 5100 N and not 
greater than 6200 N.

[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]



Sec.  572.186  Abdomen assembly.

    (a) The abdomen assembly (175-5000) is part of the dummy assembly 
shown in drawing 175-0000 including load sensors specified in Sec.  
572.189(e). When subjected to tests procedures specified in paragraph 
(b) of this section, the abdomen assembly shall meet performance 
requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure.
    (1) Soak the dummy assembly (175-0000), without suit (175-8000) and 
shoulder foam pad (175-3010), as specified in Sec.  572.189(n);
    (2) The dummy is seated as shown in Figure U5 in appendix A to this 
subpart;
    (3) The abdomen impactor is the same as specified in Sec.  
572.189(a) except that on its rectangular impact surface is affixed a 
special purpose block whose weight is 1.0  0.01 
kg. The block is 70 mm high, 150 mm wide and 60 to 80 mm deep. The 
impact surface is flat, has a minimum Rockwell hardness of M85, and an 
edge radius of 4 to 5 mm. The block's wide surface is horizontally 
oriented and centered on the longitudinal axis of the probe's impact 
face as shown in Figure U5-A in appendix A to this subpart;
    (4) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the 
abdomen its longitudinal axis is within  0.5 
degrees of a horizontal plane and perpendicular  
0.5 degrees to the midsagittal plane of the dummy and the centerpoint on 
the impactor's face is aligned within 5 mm of the center point of the 
middle load measuring sensor in the abdomen as shown in Figure U5;
    (5) The impactor impacts the dummy's abdomen at 4.0 m/s  0.1 m/s;
    (6) Time zero is defined in Sec.  572.189(k).
    (c) Performance criteria.
    (1) The maximum sum of the forces of the three abdominal load 
sensors, specified in 572.189(e), shall be not less than 2200 N and not 
more than 2700 N and shall occur between 10 ms and 12.3 ms from time 
zero. The calculated sum of the three load cell forces must be 
concurrent in time.
    (2) Maximum impactor force (impact probe acceleration multiplied by 
its mass) is not less than 4000 N and not more than 4800 N occurring 
between 10.6 ms and 13.0 ms from time zero.



Sec.  572.187  Lumbar spine.

    (a) The lumbar spine assembly consists of parts shown in drawing 
175-5500. For purposes of this test, the lumbar spine is mounted within 
the headform assembly 175-9000 as shown in Figure U1 in appendix A to 
this subpart. When subjected to tests procedures specified in paragraph 
(b) of this section, the lumbar spine-headform assembly shall meet 
performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the lumbar spine-headform assembly in a 
test environment as specified in Sec.  572.189(n);
    (2) Attach the lumbar spine-headform assembly to the Part 572 
pendulum test fixture per procedure in Sec.  572.183(b)(2)

[[Page 131]]

and as shown in Figure U2-A in appendix A to this subpart. Torque the 
lumbar hex nut (p/n 9000057) on to the lumbar cable assembly (175-5506) 
to 50  5 in-lb;
    (3) Release the pendulum from a height sufficient to allow it to 
fall freely to achieve an impact velocity of 6.05 0.1 m/s measured at the center of the pendulum 
accelerometer (Figure 22) at the time the pendulum makes contact with 
its decelerating mechanism. The velocity-time history of the pendulum 
falls inside the corridor determined by the upper and lower boundaries 
specified in Table 1 to paragraph (b) of this section;
    (4) Allow the lumbar spine to flex without the lumbar spine or the 
headform making contact with any object;
    (5) Time zero is defined in Sec.  572.189(j).

  Table 1 to paragraph (b)--ES-2re Lumbar Spine Certification Pendulum
                            Velocity Corridor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Upper boundary                       Lower boundary
------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Time  (ms)      Velocity  (m/s)     Time  (ms)      Velocity  (m/s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
          1.0               0.00               0.0             -0.05
          3.7              -0.24               2.7             -0.425
         27.0              -5.80              24.5             -6.50
                                              30.0             -6.50
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Performance criteria. (1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is to 
be characterized in terms of decrease in velocity as determined by 
integrating the filtered pendulum acceleration response from time-zero.
    (2) The maximum rotation in the lateral direction of the reference 
plane of the headform (175-9000) as shown in Figure U2-B in appendix A 
to this subpart, shall be 45 to 55 degrees with respect to the 
longitudinal axis of the pendulum occurring between 39 and 53 ms from 
time zero. Rotation of the headform-neck assembly shall be measured with 
potentiometers specified in Sec.  572.189(c), installed as shown in 
drawing 175-9000, and calculated per procedure specified in Figure U2-B 
in appendix A to this subpart.
    (3) The decaying headform rotation vs. time curve shall cross the 
zero angle with respect to its initial position at impact relative to 
the pendulum centerline between 37 ms to 57 ms after the time the peak 
translation-rotation value is reached.

[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]



Sec.  572.188  Pelvis.

    (a) The pelvis (175-6000) is part of the torso assembly shown in 
drawing 175-0000. The pelvis is equipped with a pubic symphysis load 
sensor in conformance with Sec.  572.189(f) and mounted as shown in 
drawing (175-0000 sheet 4). When subjected to tests procedures specified 
in paragraph (b) of this section, the pelvis assembly shall meet 
performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure.
    (1) Soak the dummy assembly (175-0000) without suit (175-8000) and 
shoulder foam pad (175-3010) as specified in Sec.  572.189(n);
    (2) The dummy is seated as specified in Figure U6 in appendix A to 
this subpart;
    (3) The pelvis impactor is the same as specified in Sec.  
572.189(a);
    (4) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the 
pelvis its longitudinal axis is within 0.5 degrees 
of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the 
dummy and the centerpoint on the impactor's face is within 5 mm of the 
center of the H-point in the pelvis, as shown in Figure U6 in appendix A 
to this subpart;
    (5) The impactor impacts the dummy's pelvis at 4.3 0.1 m/s.
    (6) Time zero is defined in Sec.  572.189(k).
    (c) Performance criteria. (1) The impactor force (probe acceleration 
multiplied by its mass) shall be not less than 4,700 N and not more than 
5,400 N, occurring between 11.8 ms and 16.1 ms from time zero;
    (2) The pubic symphysis load, measured with load cell specified in 
Sec.  572.189(f) shall be not less than 1,230 N and not more than 1,590 
N occurring between 12.2 ms and 17.0 ms from time zero.

[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]



Sec.  572.189  Instrumentation and test conditions.

    (a) The test probe for lateral shoulder, thorax without arm, 
abdomen, and pelvis impact tests is the same as that

[[Page 132]]

specified in Sec.  572.36(a) and the impact probe has a minimum mass 
moment of inertia in yaw of 9,000 kg-cm\2\, a free air resonant 
frequency not less than 1,000 Hz and the probe's end opposite to the 
impact face has provisions to mount an accelerometer with its sensitive 
axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. All hardware 
attached directly to the impactor and one-third (\1/3\) of the mass of 
the suspension cables must be included in the calculations of the total 
impactor mass. The sum mass of the attachments and \1/3\ cable mass must 
not exceed 5 percent of the total pendulum mass. No suspension hardware, 
suspension cables, or any other attachments to the test probe, including 
velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.
    (b) Accelerometers for the head, the thoracic spine, and the pelvis 
conform to specifications of SA572-S4.
    (c) Rotary potentiometer for the neck and lumbar spine certification 
tests conforms to SA572-53.
    (d) Linear position transducer for the thoracic rib conforms to 
SA572-S69.
    (e) Load sensors for the abdomen conform to specifications of SA572-
S75.
    (f) Load sensor for the pubic symphysis conforms to specifications 
of SA572-77.
    (g) Load sensor for the lumbar spine conforms to specifications of 
SA572-76.
    (h) Instrumentation and sensors conform to the Recommended Practice 
SAE J-211 (Mar. 1995)--Instrumentation for Impact Test unless noted 
otherwise.
    (i) All instrumented response signal measurements shall be treated 
to the following specifications:
    (1) Head acceleration--Digitally filtered CFC 1000;
    (2) Neck and lumbar spine rotations--Digitally filtered CFC 180;
    (3)Neck and lumbar spine pendulum accelerations--Digitally filtered 
CFC 60;
    (4) Pelvis, shoulder, thorax without arm, and abdomen impactor 
accelerations--Digitally filtered CFC 180;
    (5) Abdominal and pubic symphysis force--Digitally filtered at CFC 
600;
    (6) Thorax deflection--Digitally filtered CFC 180.
    (j)(1) Filter the pendulum acceleration data using a SAE J211 CFC 60 
filter.
    (2) Determine the time when the filtered pendulum accelerometer data 
first crosses the -10 g level (T10).
    (3) Calculate time-zero: T0 = T10-Tm.,

Where:

Tm = 1.417 ms for the Neck Test
= 1.588 ms for the Lumbar Spine Test

    (4) Set the data time-zero to the sample number nearest to the 
calculated T0.
    (k)(1) Filter the pendulum acceleration data using a SAE J211 CFC 
180 filter.
    (2) Determine the time when the filtered pendulum accelerometer data 
first crosses the -1.0 m/s\2\ (-.102 g) acceleration level (T0).
    (3) Set the data time-zero to the sample number of the new T0.
    (l) Mountings for the head, spine and pelvis accelerometers shall 
have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency 
range of the applicable channel class.
    (m) Limb joints of the test dummy are set at the force between 1 to 
2 G's, which just supports the limb's weight when the limbs are extended 
horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not 
exceed 2 G's throughout the range of the limb motion.
    (n) Performance tests are conducted, unless specified otherwise, at 
any temperature from 20.6 to 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 72 degrees F.) and 
at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent after exposure of 
the dummy to those conditions for a period of not less than 4 hours.
    (o) Certification tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or 
fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by a period of not less 
than thirty (30) minutes unless otherwise specified.

[[Page 133]]



            Sec. Appendix A to Subpart U of Part 572--Figures
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.000


[[Page 134]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16JN08.006


[[Page 135]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.002


[[Page 136]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.003

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.004


[[Page 137]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.005


[[Page 138]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.006


[[Page 139]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.007


[[Page 140]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.008


[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]



  Subpart V, SID IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, Small Adult Female

    Source: 71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  572.190  Incorporated materials.

    (a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this 
Subpart by reference:
    (1) A parts/drawing list entitled, ``Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 
Subpart V, SID-IIsD, July 1, 2008,''
    (2) A drawings and inspection package entitled ``Drawings and 
Specifications for the SID-IIsD Small Female Crash Test Dummy, Part 572 
Subpart V, July 1, 2008,'' consisting of:
    (i) Drawing No. 180-0000, SID-IIsD Complete Assembly;
    (ii) Drawing No. 180-1000, 6 Axis Head Assembly;
    (iii) Drawing No. 180-2000, Neck Assembly;

[[Page 141]]

    (iv) Drawing No. 180-3000, Upper Torso Assembly;
    (v) Drawing No. 180-3005, Washer, Clamping;
    (vi) Drawing No. 9000021, Screw, SHCS \3/8\-16 x 1 NYLOK;
    (vii) Drawing No. 900005, Screw, SHCS \1/4\-20 x \5/8\ NYLOK;
    (viii) Drawing No. 180-4000, Lower Torso Assembly Complete;
    (ix) Drawing No. 180-5000-1, Complete Leg Assembly, Left;
    (x) Drawing No. 180-5000-2, Complete Leg Assembly, Right;
    (xi) Drawing No. 180-6000-1, Arm Assembly Left Molded;
    (xii) Drawing No. 180-6000-2, Arm Assembly Right Molded; and,
    (xiii) Drawing No. 180-9000, SID-IIsD Headform Assembly.
    (3) A procedures manual entitled, ``Procedures for Assembly, 
Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash 
Test Dummy, July 1, 2008,'' incorporated by reference in Sec.  572.191;
    (4) SAE Recommended Practice J211, Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation for 
Impact Tests--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation''; and,
    (5) SAE J1733 of 1994-12, ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash 
Testing.''
    (b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials 
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR 
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at the Department of 
Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, 
SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone (202) 366-9826, and at the National 
Archives and Records Administration (NARA), and in electronic format 
through Regulations.gov. For information on the availability and 
inspection of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http:/
/www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--
locations.html. For information on the availability and inspection of 
this material at Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-5457, or go to: http://
www.regulations.gov.
    (c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
    (1) The Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart V, SID-IIsD, July 1, 
2008, referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the package 
entitled Drawings and Specifications for SID-IIsD Small Female Crash 
Test Dummy, Part 572 Subpart V, July 1, 2008, referred to in paragraph 
(a)(2) of this section, and the PADI document referred to in paragraph 
(a)(3) of this section, are available in electronic format through 
www.Regulations.gov and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division of 
New RT, 18810 Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, (301) 670-0090.
    (2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(4) and (a)(5) of 
this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, 
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096, telephone 1-877-606-
7323.

[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29894, June 23, 2009]



Sec.  572.191  General description.

    (a) The SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, small adult female, 
is defined by:
    (1) The drawings and specifications contained in the ``Drawings and 
Specifications for SID-IIsD Small Female Crash Test Dummy, Part 572 
Subpart V, July 1, 2008,'' which includes the technical drawings and 
specifications described in Drawing 180-0000, the titles of which are 
listed in Table A;

                                 Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Drawing
                   Component assembly                         number
------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Axis Head Assembly....................................        180-1000
Neck Assembly...........................................        180-2000
Upper Torso Assembly....................................        180-3000
Clamping Washer.........................................        180-3005
Lower Torso Assembly Complete...........................        180-4000
Complete Leg Assembly, Left.............................      180-5000-1
Complete Leg Assembly, Right............................      180-5000-2
Arm Assembly Left Molded................................      180-6000-1
Arm Assembly Right Molded...............................      180-6000-2
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) The ``Parts/Drawing List, Part 572 Subpart V, SID-IIsD,'' dated 
July 1, 2008 and containing 7 pages,
    (3) A listing of available transducers-crash test sensors for the 
SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 5th percentile adult female, is 
shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5, dated July 1, 2008,
    (4) ``Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of 
the

[[Page 142]]

SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, July 1, 2008,'' and,
    (5) Sign convention for signal outputs reference document SAE J1733 
Information Report, titled ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash 
Testing,'' dated July 12, 1994, incorporated by reference in Sec.  
572.200(k).
    (b) Exterior dimensions of the SID-IIsD Small Adult Female Side 
Impact Crash Test Dummy are shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 3 of 5, 
dated July 1, 2008.
    (c) Weights and center of gravity locations of body segments are 
shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 4 of 5, dated July 1, 2008.
    (d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that, except for 
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no additional 
contact between metallic elements of adjacent body segments throughout 
the range of motion.
    (e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy 
conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test similar 
to that set forth in Standard 214, Side Impact Protection (49 CFR 
571.214).

[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]



Sec.  572.192  Head assembly.

    (a) The head assembly consists of the head (180-1000) and a set of 
three (3) accelerometers in conformance with specifications in 49 CFR 
572.200(d) and mounted as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5. When 
tested to the procedure specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the 
head assembly shall meet performance requirements specified in paragraph 
(c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure. The head shall be tested according to the 
procedure specified in 49 CFR 572.112(a).
    (c) Performance criteria.
    (1) When the head assembly is dropped from either the right or left 
lateral incline orientations in accordance with procedure in Sec.  
572.112(a), the measured peak resultant acceleration shall be between 
115 g and 137 g;
    (2) The resultant acceleration-time curve shall be unimodal to the 
extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse 
shall not exceed 15% (zero to peak) of the main pulse;
    (3) The longitudinal acceleration vector (anterior-posterior 
direction) shall not exceed 15 g.



Sec.  572.193  Neck assembly.

    (a) The neck assembly consists of parts shown in drawing 180-2000. 
For purposes of this test, the neck assembly is mounted within the 
headform assembly (180-9000) as shown in Figure V1 in appendix A to this 
subpart. When subjected to the test procedure specified in paragraph (b) 
of this section, the neck-headform assembly shall meet the performance 
requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure.
    (1) Soak the assembly in a test environment as specified in 49 CFR 
572.200(j);
    (2) Attach the neck-headform assembly, as shown in Figure V2-A or 
V2-B in appendix A to this subpart, to the 49 CFR Part 572 pendulum test 
fixture (Figure 22, 49 CFR 572.33) in either the left or right lateral 
impact orientations, respectively, so that the midsagittal plane of the 
neck-headform assembly is vertical and at right angle (90  1 degrees) to the plane of motion of the pendulum 
longitudinal centerline;
    (3) Release the pendulum from a height sufficient to achieve a 
velocity of 5.57  0.06 m/s measured at the center 
of the pendulum accelerometer, as shown in 49 CFR Part 572 Figure 15, at 
the instant the pendulum makes contact with the decelerating mechanism;
    (4) The neck flexes without the neck-headform assembly making 
contact with any object;
    (5) Time zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the 
pendulum mounted striker plate and the pendulum deceleration mechanism;
    (6) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between 
successive tests on the same neck assembly.
    (c) Performance Criteria.
    (1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is characterized in terms of 
decrease in velocity as obtained by integrating the pendulum 
acceleration output from time zero:

[[Page 143]]



------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                      Peakpendulumdelta-
                      Time(ms)                              V(m/s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0................................................      -2.20 to -2.80
15.0................................................      -3.30 to -4.10
20.0................................................      -4.40 to -5.40
25.0................................................      -5.40 to -6.10
25.0 < 100...............................      -5.50 to -6.20
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) The maximum translation-rotation of the midsagittal plane of the 
headform disk (180-9061 or 9062) in the lateral direction measured, with 
the rotation transducers specified in 49 CFR 572.200(e) shall be 71 to 
81 degrees with respect to the longitudinal axis of the pendulum (see 
Figure V2-C in appendix A to this subpart) occurring between 50 and 70 
ms from time zero;
    (3) Peak occipital condyle moment shall not be higher than -36 Nm 
and not lower than -44 Nm. The moment measured by the upper neck load 
cell (Mx) shall be adjusted by the following formula: Mx(oc) \1\= 
Mx+0.01778Fy;
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Mx(oc) is the moment at occipital condyle (Newton-meters) and Fy 
is the lateral shear force (Newtons) measured by the load cell.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) The decaying moment shall cross the 0 Nm line after peak moment 
between 102 ms-126 ms after time zero.

[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]



Sec.  572.194  Shoulder.

    (a) The shoulder structure is part of the upper torso assembly shown 
in drawing 180-3000. For the shoulder impact test, the dummy is tested 
as a complete assembly (drawing 180-0000). The dummy is equipped with T1 
laterally oriented accelerometer as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d), and 
deflection potentiometer as specified in 180-3881 configured for 
shoulder and installed as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5. When 
subjected to the test procedure as specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section, the shoulder shall meet the performance requirements of 
paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test 
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
    (2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and 
cotton underwear pants on a certification bench, specified in Figure V3 
in appendix A to this subpart, the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of 
which are covered with a 2 mm thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet;
    (3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted 
side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10 
mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V4-A in appendix A 
to this subpart, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical 
orientation.
    (4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper 
torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat 
back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.
    (5) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in 
paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib 
mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 
24.6  2.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown 
in Figure V4-B in appendix A to this subpart.
    (6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical 
about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner 
part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to 
each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the 
feet are vertical and as close together as possible.
    (7) Orient the arm to point forward at 90 2 
degrees relative to the inferior-superior orientation of the upper torso 
spine box incline.
    (8) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).
    (9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the 
dummy's arm rotation centerline (ref. item 23 in drawing 180-3000) the 
impactor's longitudinal axis is within  1 degree 
of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the 
dummy. The centerpoint of the impactor face at contact is within 2 mm of 
the shoulder yoke assembly rotation centerline (drawing 180-3327), as 
shown in Figure V4-A in appendix A to this subpart.
    (10) The dummy's arm-shoulder is impacted at 4.3  0.1 m/s with the impactor meeting the alignment and 
contact point requirements of paragraph (b)(9) of this section.

[[Page 144]]

    (11) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between 
successive tests of the same shoulder assembly.
    (c) Performance criteria.
    (1) While the impactor is in contact with the dummy's arm, the 
shoulder shall compress not less than 28 mm and not more than 37 mm 
measured by the potentiometer specified in (a);
    (2) Peak lateral acceleration of the upper spine (T1) shall not be 
less than 17 g and not more than 22 g;
    (3) Peak impactor acceleration shall be not less than 13 g and not 
more than 18 g.

[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]



Sec.  572.195  Thorax with arm.

    (a) The thorax is part of the upper torso assembly shown in drawing 
180-3000. For the thorax with arm impact test, the dummy is tested as a 
complete assembly (drawing 180-0000). The dummy's thorax is equipped 
with T1 and T12 laterally oriented accelerometers as specified in 49 CFR 
572.200(d), and deflection potentiometers for the thorax and shoulder as 
specified in 180-3881, installed as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 
5. When subjected to the test procedure as specified in paragraph (b) of 
this section, the thorax shall meet performance requirements of 
paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test 
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
    (2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and 
cotton underwear pants on a certification bench, specified in Figure V3, 
the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of which are covered with a 2-mm-
thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet.
    (3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted 
side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10 
mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V5-A, while the 
midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical orientation.
    (4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper 
torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat 
back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.
    (5) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in 
paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib 
mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 
24.6  2.0 degrees relative to horizontal as shown 
in Figure V5-B in appendix A to this subpart.
    (6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical 
about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner 
part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to 
each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the 
feet are vertical and as close together as possible.
    (7) Orient the arm downward to the lowest detent such that the 
longitudinal centerline of the arm is parallel to the inferior-superior 
orientation of the spine box.
    (8) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).
    (9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the 
dummy's arm, its longitudinal axis is within 1 
degree of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane 
of the dummy. The centerpoint of the impactor face is within 2 mm of the 
vertical midpoint of the second thoracic rib and coincident with a line 
parallel to the seat back incline passing through the center of the 
shoulder yoke assembly arm rotation pivot (drawing 180-3327), as shown 
in Figure V5-A in appendix A to this subpart.
    (10) The dummy's arm is impacted at 6.7  0.1 
m/s.
    (11) Time zero is defined as the time of contact between the impact 
probe and the arm.
    (12) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between 
successive tests of the same thorax assembly.
    (c) Performance criteria.
    (1) While the impactor is in contact with the dummy's arm, the 
thoracic ribs and the shoulder shall conform to the following range of 
deflections:
    (i) Shoulder not less than 31 mm and not more than 40 mm;
    (ii) Upper thorax rib not less than 25 mm and not more than 32 mm;
    (iii) Middle thorax rib not less than 30 mm and not more than 36 mm;

[[Page 145]]

    (iv) Lower thorax rib not less than 32 mm and not more than 38 mm;
    (2) Peak lateral acceleration of the upper spine (T1) shall not be 
less than 34 g and not more than 43 g, and the lower spine (T12) not 
less than 29 g and not more than 37 g;
    (3) Peak impactor acceleration after 5 ms after time zero shall be 
not less than 30 g and not more than 36 g.

[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]



Sec.  572.196  Thorax without arm.

    (a) The thorax is part of the upper torso assembly shown in drawing 
180-3000. For this thorax test, the dummy is tested as a complete 
assembly (drawing 180-0000) with the arm (180-6000) on the impacted side 
removed. The dummy's thorax is equipped with T1 and T12 laterally 
oriented accelerometers as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d) and with 
deflection potentiometers for the thorax as specified in drawing 180-
3881, installed as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5. When 
subjected to the test procedure specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section, the thorax shall meet the performance requirements set forth in 
paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test 
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
    (2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and 
cotton underwear pants on a calibration bench, specified in Figure V3 in 
appendix A to this subpart, the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of 
which are covered with a 2-mm-thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet.
    (3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted 
side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10 
mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V6-A, while the 
midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical orientation.
    (4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper 
torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat 
back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.
    (5) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in 
paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib 
mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 
24.6  2.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown 
in Figure V6-B in appendix A to this subpart.
    (6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical 
about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner 
part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to 
each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the 
feet are vertical and as close together as possible.
    (7) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).
    (8) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the 
thorax, its longitudinal axis is within 1 degree of a horizontal plane 
and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy. The centerpoint 
of the impactor face is within 2 mm of the vertical midpoint of the 
second thorax rib and coincident with a line parallel to the seat back 
incline passing through the center of the shoulder yoke assembly arm 
rotation pivot (drawing 180-3327), as shown in Figure V6-A in appendix A 
to this subpart.
    (9) The dummy's thorax is impacted at 4.3  0.1 
m/s.
    (10) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between 
successive tests of the same thorax assembly.
    (c) Performance criteria.
    (1) While the impactor is in contact with the dummy's thorax, the 
ribs shall conform to the following range of deflections:
    (i) Upper thorax rib not less than 32 mm and not more than 40 mm;
    (ii) Middle thorax rib not less than 39 mm and not more than 45 mm;
    (iii) Lower thorax rib not less than 35 mm and not more than 43 mm;
    (2) Peak acceleration of the upper spine (T1) shall not be less than 
13 g and not more than 17 g and the lower spine (T12) not less than 7 g 
and not more than 11 g;
    (3) Peak impactor acceleration shall not be less than 14 g and not 
more than 18 g.

[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]

[[Page 146]]



Sec.  572.197  Abdomen.

    (a) The abdomen assembly is part of the upper torso assembly (180-
3000) and is represented by two ribs (180-3368) and two linear 
deflection potentiometers (180-3881). The abdomen test is conducted on 
the complete dummy assembly (180-0000) with the arm (180-6000) on the 
impacted side removed. The dummy is equipped with a lower spine 
laterally oriented accelerometer as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d) and 
deflection potentiometers specified in drawing 180-3881, installed as 
shown in sheet 2 of drawing 180-0000. When subjected to the test 
procedure as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the abdomen 
shall meet performance requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test 
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
    (2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and 
cotton underwear pants on a calibration bench, specified in Figure V3, 
the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of which are covered with a 2 mm 
thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet.
    (3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted 
side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10 
mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V7-A in Appendix A 
to this subpart, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical 
orientation.
    (4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper 
torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat 
back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.
    (5) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in paragraph 
(b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib mount 
(drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 24.6 
 2.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown in 
Figure V7-B in appendix A to this subpart);
    (6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical 
about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner 
part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to 
each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the 
feet are vertical and as close together as possible;
    (7) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(b);
    (8) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the 
abdomen, its longitudinal axis is within  1 degree 
of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the 
dummy and the centerpoint of the impactor's face is within 2 mm of the 
vertical midpoint between the two abdominal ribs and coincident with a 
line parallel to the seat back incline passing through the center of the 
shoulder yoke assembly arm rotation pivot (drawing 180-3327), as shown 
in Figure V7-A in appendix A to this subpart;
    (9) The dummy's abdomen is impacted at 4.3  
0.1 m/s.
    (10) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between 
successive tests of the same abdomen assembly.
    (c) Performance criteria. (1) While the impact probe is in contact 
with the dummy's abdomen, the deflection of the upper abdominal rib 
shall be not less than 36 mm and not more than 47 mm, and the lower 
abdominal rib not less than 33 mm and not more than 44 mm.
    (2) Peak acceleration of the lower spine (T12) laterally oriented 
accelerometer shall be not less than 9 g and not more than 14 g;
    (3) Peak impactor acceleration shall be not less than 12 g and not 
more than 16 g.

[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]



Sec.  572.198  Pelvis acetabulum.

    (a) The acetabulum is part of the lower torso assembly shown in 
drawing 180-4000. The acetabulum test is conducted by impacting the side 
of the lower torso of the assembled dummy (drawing 180-0000). The dummy 
is equipped with a laterally oriented pelvis accelerometer as specified 
in 49 CFR 572.200(d), acetabulum load cell SA572-S68, mounted as shown 
in sheet 2 of 5 of drawing 180-0000, and an unused and certified pelvis 
plug (180-4450). When subjected to the test procedure as specified in 
paragraph (b) of this section, the pelvis shall meet performance

[[Page 147]]

requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test 
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
    (2) Seat the dummy, without the torso jacket (180-3450) and without 
cotton underwear pants, as shown in Figure V8-A in appendix A to this 
subpart, on a calibration bench, specified in Figure V3 in appendix A to 
this subpart, with the seatpan and the seatback surfaces covered with a 
2-mm-thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet;
    (3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted 
side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10 
mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V8-A in appendix A 
to this subpart, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical 
orientation.
    (4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper 
torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat 
back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.
    (5) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in 
paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib 
mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 
24.6  1.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown 
in Figure V8-B in appendix A to this subpart;
    (6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical 
about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner 
part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to 
each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the 
feet are vertical and as close together as possible.
    (7) Rotate the arm downward to the lowest detent such that the 
longitudinal centerline of the arm is parallel to the inferior-superior 
orientation of the spine box.
    (8) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).
    (9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the 
pelvis, its longitudinal axis is within 1 degree 
of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the 
dummy. The centerpoint of the impactor's face is in line within 2 mm of 
the longitudinal centerline of the \1/4\-20x\1/2\ flat head cap screw 
through the center of the acetabulum load cell (SA572-S68), as shown in 
Figure V8-A in appendix A to this subpart;
    (11) Time zero is defined as the time of contact between the impact 
probe and the pelvis plug.
    (12) Allow a period of at least 120 minutes between successive tests 
of the same pelvis assembly.
    (c) Performance criteria. While the impactor is in contact with the 
pelvis:
    (1) Peak acceleration of the impactor is not less than 38 g and not 
more than 47 g;
    (2) Peak lateral acceleration of the pelvis after 6 ms after time 
zero is not less than 34 g and not more than 42 g;
    (3) Peak acetabulum force is not less than 3.60 kN and not more than 
4.30 kN.

[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]



Sec.  572.199  Pelvis iliac.

    (a) The iliac is part of the lower torso assembly shown in drawing 
180-4000. The iliac test is conducted by impacting the side of the lower 
torso of the assembled dummy (drawing 180-0000). The dummy is equipped 
with a laterally oriented pelvis accelerometer as specified in 49 CFR 
572.200(d), and iliac wing load cell SA572-S66, mounted as shown in 
sheet 2 of 5 of drawing 180-0000. When subjected to the test procedure 
as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the pelvis shall meet 
performance requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test 
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
    (2) Seat the dummy, without the torso jacket and without cotton 
underwear pants, as shown in Figure V9-A in appendix A to this subpart, 
on a flat, rigid, horizontal surface covered with a 2-mm-thick PTFE 
(Teflon) sheet.
    (3) The legs are outstretched in front of the dummy such that they 
are symmetrical about the midsagittal plane, the thighs touch the seated 
surface, the inner part of the right and left legs at the knees are as 
close as possible to each other, and the feet are in full

[[Page 148]]

dorsiflexion and as close together as possible.
    (4) Orient the arm downward to the lowest detent such that the 
longitudinal centerline of the arm is parallel to the inferior-superior 
orientation of the spine box.
    (5) The midsagittal plane of the dummy is vertical, and superior 
surface of the lower half neck assembly load cell replacement (180-3815) 
in the lateral direction is within 1 degree 
relative to the horizontal as shown in Figure V9-A.
    (6) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in 
paragraphs (b)(3), (4) and (5) of this section, the top of the shoulder 
rib mount (180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is within 
1.0 degree relative to horizontal as shown in 
Figure V9-B in Appendix A to this subpart.
    (7) The pelvis impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(c).
    (8) The dummy is positioned with respect to the impactor such that 
the longitudinal centerline of the impact probe is in line with the 
longitudinal centerline of the iliac load cell access hole, and the 88.9 
mm dimension of the probe's impact surface is aligned horizontally.
    (9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the 
pelvis, the longitudinal axis of the impactor is within 1 degree of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the 
midsagittal plane of the dummy.
    (10) The dummy's pelvis is impacted at the iliac location at 
4.30.1 m/s.
    (11) Allow a period of at least 120 minutes between successive tests 
of the same pelvis assembly.
    (c) Performance criteria. While the impactor is in contact with the 
pelvis:
    (1) Peak acceleration of the impactor is not less than 36 g and not 
more than 45 g;
    (2) Peak acceleration of the pelvis is not less than 28 g and not 
more than 39 g;
    (3) Peak iliac force is not less than 4.10 kN and not more than 5.10 
kN.

[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]



Sec.  572.200  Instrumentation and test conditions.

    (a) The test probe for shoulder, lateral thorax, and pelvis-
acetabulum impact tests is the same as that specified in 49 CFR 
572.137(a) except that its impact face diameter is 120.70  0.25 mm and it has a minimum mass moment of inertia of 
3646 kg-cm\2\.
    (b) The test probe for the lateral abdomen impact test is the same 
as that specified in 572.137(a) except that its impact face diameter is 
76.20  0.25 mm and it has a minimum mass moment of 
inertia of 3646 kg-cm\2\.
    (c) The test probe for the pelvis-iliac impact tests is the same as 
that specified in 49 CFR 572.137(a) except that it has a rectangular 
flat impact surface 50.8 x 88.9 mm for a depth of at least 76 mm and a 
minimum mass moment of inertia of 5000 kg-cm\2\.
    (d) Accelerometers for the head, the thoracic spine, and the pelvis 
conform to specifications of SA572-S4.
    (e) Rotary potentiometers for the neck-headform assembly conform to 
SA572-S51.
    (f) Instrumentation and sensors conform to the Recommended Practice 
SAE J-211 (March 1995), Instrumentation for Impact Test, unless noted 
otherwise.
    (g) All instrumented response signal measurements shall be treated 
to the following specifications:
    (1) Head acceleration--digitally filtered CFC 1000;
    (2) Neck-headform assembly translation-rotation--digitally filtered 
CFC 60;
    (3) Neck pendulum, T1 and T12 thoracic spine and pelvis 
accelerations--digitally filtered CFC 180;
    (4) Neck forces (for the purpose of occipital condyle calculation) 
and moments--digitally filtered at CFC 600;
    (5) Pelvis, shoulder, thorax and abdomen impactor accelerations--
digitally filtered CFC 180;
    (6) Acetabulum and iliac wings forces--digitally filtered at CFC 
600;
    (7) Shoulder, thorax, and abdomen deflection--digitally filtered CFC 
600.
    (h) Mountings for the head, thoracic spine and pelvis accelerometers 
shall have no resonant frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency 
range of the applicable channel class;

[[Page 149]]

    (i) Leg joints of the test dummy are set at the force between 1 to 2 
g, which just support the limb's weight when the limbs are extended 
horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not 
exceed 2 g throughout the range of the limb motion.
    (j) Performance tests are conducted, unless specified otherwise, at 
any temperature from 20.6 to 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 72 degrees F.) and 
at any relative humidity from 10% to 70% after exposure of the dummy to 
those conditions for a period of 4 hours.
    (k) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to 
the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle 
Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12 (refer to Sec.  572.191(a)(5)).

[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]

[[Page 150]]



            Sec. Appendix A to Subpart V of Part 572--Figures
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.009


[[Page 151]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.010


[[Page 152]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.011


[[Page 153]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.012


[[Page 154]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.013

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN09.005


[[Page 155]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.015

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.016


[[Page 156]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.017

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.018


[[Page 157]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.019

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.020


[[Page 158]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.021

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.022


[[Page 159]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.023

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN09.006


[[Page 160]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN09.007


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]



PART 573_DEFECT AND NONCOMPLIANCE RESPONSIBILITY AND REPORTS--Table of
Contents




Sec.
573.1 Scope.
573.2 Purpose.
573.3 Application.
573.4 Definitions.
573.5 Defect and noncompliance responsibility.
573.6 Defect and noncompliance information report.
573.7 Quarterly reports.
573.8 Lists of purchasers, owners, dealers, distributors, lessors and 
          lessees.
573.9 Address for submitting required reports and other information.
573.10 Reporting the sale or lease of defective or noncompliant tires.
573.11 Prohibition on sale or lease of new defective and noncompliant 
          motor vehicles and items of replacement equipment.
573.12 Prohibition on sale or lease of new and used defective and 
          noncompliant motor vehicle equipment.
573.13 Reimbursement for prenotification remedies.
573.14 Accelerated remedy program.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 30102, 30103, 30116-30121, 30166; delegation of 
authority at 49 CFR 1.50 and 49 CFR 501.8.

    Source: 43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  573.1  Scope.

    This part:
    (a) Sets forth the responsibilities under 49 U.S.C. 30116-30121 of 
manufacturers of motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment with respect 
to safety-related defects and noncompliances with Federal motor vehicle 
safety standards in motor vehicles and items of motor vehicle equipment; 
and
    (b) Specifies requirements for--
    (1) Manufacturers to maintain lists of owners, purchasers, dealers, 
and distributors notified of defective and noncomplying motor vehicles 
and motor vehicle original and replacement equipment,
    (2) Reporting to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 
(NHTSA) defects in motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment and 
noncompliances with motor vehicle safety standards prescribed under part 
571 of this chapter, and

[[Page 161]]

    (3) Providing quarterly reports on defect and noncompliance 
notification campaigns.

[69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]



Sec.  573.2  Purposes.

    The purposes of this part are:
    (a) To facilitate the notification of owners of defective and 
noncomplying motor vehicles and items of motor vehicle equipment, and 
the remedy of such defects and noncompliances, by equitably apportioning 
the responsibility for safety-related defects and noncompliances with 
Federal motor vehicle safety standards among manufacturers of motor 
vehicles and motor vehicle equipment; and
    (b) To inform NHTSA of defective and noncomplying motor vehicles and 
items of motor vehicle equipment, and to obtain information for NHTSA on 
the adequacy of manufacturers' defect and noncompliance notification 
campaigns, on corrective action, on owner response, and to compare the 
defect incidence rate among different groups of vehicles.

[67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]



Sec.  573.3  Application.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this 
section, this part applies to manufacturers of complete motor vehicles, 
incomplete motor vehicles, and motor vehicle original and replacement 
equipment, with respect to all vehicles and equipment that have been 
transported beyond the direct control of the manufacturer.
    (b) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in a 
motor vehicle or equipment item imported into the United States, 
compliance with Sec. Sec.  573.6 and 573.7 by either the fabricating 
manufacturer or the importer of the vehicle or equipment item shall be 
considered compliance by both.
    (c) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in a 
vehicle manufactured in two or more stages, compliance with Sec. Sec.  
573.6 and 573.7 by either the manufacturer of the incomplete vehicle or 
any subsequent manufacturer of the vehicle shall be considered 
compliance by all manufacturers.
    (d) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in an 
item of replacement equipment (except tires) compliance with Sec. Sec.  
573.6 and 573.7 by the brand name or trademark owner shall be considered 
compliance by the manufacturer. Tire brand name owners are considered 
manufacturers (49 U.S.C. 10102(b)(1)(E)) and have the same reporting 
requirements as manufacturers.
    (e) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in an 
item of original equipment used in the vehicles of only one vehicle 
manufacturer, compliance with Sec. Sec.  573.6 and 573.7 by either the 
vehicle or equipment manufacturer shall be considered compliance by 
both.
    (f) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in 
original equipment installed in the vehicles of more than one 
manufacturer, compliance with Sec.  573.6 is required of the equipment 
manufacturer as to the equipment item, and of each vehicle manufacturer 
as to the vehicles in which the equipment has been installed. Compliance 
with Sec.  573.7 is required of the manufacturer who is conducting the 
recall campaign.
    (g) The provisions of Sec.  573.10 apply to all persons.
    (h) The provisions of Sec.  573.11 apply to dealers, including 
retailers of motor vehicle equipment.
    (i) The provisions of Sec.  573.12 apply to all persons.

[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 60 FR 17268, Apr. 5, 1995; 66 
FR 38162, July 23, 2001; 67 FR 19697, Apr. 23, 2002; 68 FR 18142, Apr. 
15, 2003]



Sec.  573.4  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part:
    Act means 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301.
    Administrator means the Administrator of the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration or his delegate.
    First purchaser means first purchaser for purposes other than 
resale.
    Leased motor vehicle means any motor vehicle that is leased to a 
person for a term of at least four months by a lessor who has leased 
five or more vehicles in the twelve months preceding the date of 
notification by the vehicle manufacturer of the existence of a safety-
related defect or noncompliance

[[Page 162]]

with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard in the motor vehicle.
    Lessee means a person who is the lessee of a leased motor vehicle as 
defined in this section.
    Lessor means a person or entity that is the owner, as reflected on 
the vehicle's title, of any five or more leased vehicles (as defined in 
this section), as of the date of notification by the manufacturer of the 
existence of a safety-related defect or noncompliance with a Federal 
motor vehicle safety standard in one or more of the leased motor 
vehicles.
    Original equipment means an item of motor vehicle equipment (other 
than a tire) that was installed in or on a motor vehicle at the time of 
its delivery to the first purchaser if the item of equipment was 
installed on or in the motor vehicle at the time of its delivery to a 
dealer or distributor for distribution, or was installed by the dealer 
or distributor with the express authorizations of the motor vehicle 
manufacturer.
    Readable form means a form readable by the unassisted eye or 
readable by machine. If readable by machine, the submitting party must 
obtain written confirmation from the Office of Defects Investigation 
immediately prior to submission that the machine is readily available to 
NHTSA. For all similar information responses, once a manufacturer has 
obtained approval for the original response in that form, it will not 
have to obtain approval for future submissions in the same form. In 
addition, all coded information must be accompanied by an explanation of 
the codes used.
    Replacement equipment means motor vehicle equipment other than 
original equipment as defined in this section, and tires.

[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 60 FR 17268, Apr. 5, 1995; 67 
FR 45872, July 10, 2002]



Sec.  573.5  Defect and noncompliance responsibility.

    (a) Each manufacturer of a motor vehicle shall be responsible for 
any safety-related defect or any noncompliance determined to exist in 
the vehicle or in any item of original equipment.
    (b) Each manufacturer of an item of replacement equipment shall be 
responsible for any safety-related defect or any noncompliance 
determined to exist in the equipment.

[67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]



Sec.  573.6  Defect and noncompliance information report.

    (a) Each manufacturer shall furnish a report to the NHTSA for each 
defect in his vehicles or in his items of original or replacement 
equipment that he or the Administrator determines to be related to motor 
vehicle safety, and for each noncompliance with a motor vehicle safety 
standard in such vehicles or items of equipment which either he or the 
Administrator determines to exist.
    (b) Each report shall be submitted not more than 5 working days 
after a defect in a vehicle or item of equipment has been determined to 
be safety related, or a noncompliance with a motor vehicle safety 
standard has been determined to exist. At a minimum, information 
required by paragraphs (1), (2) and (5) of paragraph (c) of this section 
shall be submitted in the initial report. The remainder of the 
information required by paragraph (c) of this section that is not 
available within the five-day period shall be submitted as it becomes 
available. Each manufacturer submitting new information relative to a 
previously submitted report shall refer to the notification campaign 
number when a number has been assigned by the NHTSA.
    (c) Each manufacturer shall include in each report the information 
specified below.
    (1) The manufacturer's name: The full corporate or individual name 
of the fabricating manufacturer and any brand name or trademark owner of 
the vehicle or item of equipment shall be spelled out, except that such 
abbreviations as ``Co.'' or ``Inc.'', and their foreign equivalents, and 
the first and middle initials of individuals, may be used. In the case 
of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in an imported vehicle or 
item of equipment, the agency designated by the fabricating manufacturer 
pursuant to 49 U.S.C. section 30164(a) shall be also stated. If the 
fabricating manufacturer is a corporation

[[Page 163]]

that is controlled by another corporation that assumes responsibility 
for compliance with all requirements of this part the name of the 
controlling corporation may be used.
    (2) Identification of the vehicles or items of motor vehicle 
equipment potentially containing the defect or noncompliance, including 
a description of the manufacturer's basis for its determination of the 
recall population and a description of how the vehicles or items of 
equipment to be recalled differ from similar vehicles or items of 
equipment that the manufacturer has not included in the recall.
    (i) In the case of passenger cars, the identification shall be by 
the make, line, model year, the inclusive dates (month and year) of 
manufacture, and any other information necessary to describe the 
vehicles.
    (ii) In the case of vehicles other than passenger cars, the 
identification shall be by body style or type, inclusive dates (month 
and year) of manufacture and any other information necessary to describe 
the vehicles, such as GVWR or class for trucks, displacement (cc) for 
motorcycles, and number of passengers for buses.
    (iii) In the case of items of motor vehicle equipment, the 
identification shall be by the generic name of the component (tires, 
child seating systems, axles, etc.), part number, size and function if 
applicable, the inclusive dates (month and year) of manufacture if 
available and any other information necessary to describe the items.
    (iv) In the case of motor vehicles or items of motor vehicle 
equipment in which the component that contains the defect or 
noncompliance was manufactured by a different manufacturer from the 
reporting manufacturer, the reporting manufacturer shall identify the 
component and the manufacturer of the component by name, business 
address, and business telephone number. If the reporting manufacturer 
does not know the identity of the manufacturer of the component, it 
shall identify the entity from which it was obtained.
    (v) In the case of items of motor vehicle equipment, the 
manufacturer of the equipment shall identify by name, business address, 
and business telephone number every manufacturer that purchases the 
defective or noncomplying component for use or installation in new motor 
vehicles or new items of motor vehicle equipment.
    (3) The total number of vehicles or items of equipment potentially 
containing the defect or noncompliance, and where available the number 
of vehicles or items of equipment in each group identified pursuant to 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
    (4) The percentage of vehicles or items of equipment specified 
pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) of this section estimated to actually 
contain the defect or noncompliance.
    (5) A description of the defect or noncompliance, including both a 
brief summary and a detailed description, with graphic aids as 
necessary, of the nature and physical location (if applicable) of the 
defect or noncompliance.
    (6) In the case of a defect, a chronology of all principal events 
that were the basis for the determination that the defect related to 
motor vehicle safety, including a summary of all warranty claims, field 
or service reports, and other information, with their dates of receipt.
    (7) In the case of a noncompliance, the test results and other 
information that the manufacturer considered in determining the 
existence of the noncompliance. The manufacturer shall identify the date 
of each test and observation that indicated that a noncompliance might 
or did exist.
    (8)(i) A description of the manufacturer's program for remedying the 
defect or noncompliance. This program shall include a plan for 
reimbursing an owner or purchaser who incurred costs to obtain a remedy 
for the problem addressed by the recall within a reasonable time in 
advance of the manufacturer's notification of owners, purchasers and 
dealers, in accordance with Sec.  573.13 of this part. A manufacturer's 
plan may incorporate by reference a general reimbursement plan it 
previously submitted to NHTSA, together with information specific to the 
individual recall. Information required by Sec.  573.13 that is not in a 
general reimbursement plan shall be submitted in the manufacturer's 
report to NHTSA under this section. If a manufacturer

[[Page 164]]

submits one or more general reimbursement plans, the manufacturer shall 
update each plan every two years, in accordance with Sec.  573.13. The 
manufacturer's remedy program and reimbursement plans will be available 
for inspection by the public at NHTSA headquarters.
    (ii) The estimated date(s) on which it will begin sending 
notifications to owners, and to dealers and distributors, that there is 
a safety-related defect or noncompliance and that a remedy without 
charge will be available to owners, and the estimated date(s) on which 
it will complete such notifications (if different from the beginning 
date). If a manufacturer subsequently becomes aware that either the 
beginning or the completion dates reported to the agency for any of the 
notifications will be delayed by more than two weeks, it shall promptly 
advise the agency of the delay and the reasons therefore, and furnish a 
revised estimate.
    (iii) If a manufacturer intends to file a petition for an exemption 
from the recall requirements of the Act on the basis that a defect or 
noncompliance is inconsequential as it relates to motor vehicle safety, 
it shall notify NHTSA of that intention in its report to NHTSA of the 
defect or noncompliance under this section. If such a petition is filed 
and subsequently denied, the manufacturer shall provide the information 
required by paragraph (c)(8)(ii) of this section within five Federal 
government business days from the date the petition denial is published 
in the Federal Register.
    (iv) If a manufacturer advises NHTSA that it intends to file such a 
petition for exemption from the notification and remedy requirements on 
the grounds that the defect or noncompliance is inconsequential as it 
relates to motor vehicle safety, and does not do so within the 30-day 
period established by 49 CFR 556.4(c), the manufacturer must submit the 
information required by paragraph (c)(8)(ii) of this section no later 
than the end of that 30-day period.
    (9) In the case of a remedy program involving the replacement of 
tires, the manufacturer's program for remedying the defect or 
noncompliance shall:
    (i) Address how the manufacturer will assure that the entities 
replacing the tires are aware of the legal requirements related to 
recalls of tires established by 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301 and regulations 
thereunder. At a minimum, the manufacturer shall notify its owned stores 
and/or distributors, as well as all independent outlets that are 
authorized to replace the tires that are the subject of the recall, 
annually or for each individual recall that the manufacturer conducts, 
about the ban on the sale of new defective or noncompliant tires (49 CFR 
573.11); the prohibition on the sale of new and used defective and 
noncompliant tires (49 CFR 573.12); and the duty to notify NHTSA of any 
sale of a new or used recalled tire for use on a motor vehicle (49 CFR 
573.10). For tire outlets that are manufacturer-owned or otherwise 
subject to the control of the manufacturer, the manufacturer shall also 
provide directions to comply with these statutory provisions and the 
regulations thereunder.
    (ii) Address how the manufacturer will prevent, to the extent 
reasonably within its control, the recalled tires from being resold for 
installation on a motor vehicle. At a minimum, the manufacturer shall 
include the following information, to be furnished to each tire outlet 
that it owns, or that is authorized to replace tires that are recalled, 
either annually or for each individual recall the manufacturer conducts:
    (A) Written directions to manufacturer-owned and other manufacturer-
controlled outlets to alter the recalled tires permanently so that they 
cannot be used on vehicles. These shall include instructions on the 
means to render recalled tires unsuitable for resale for installation on 
motor vehicles and instructions to perform the incapacitation of each 
recalled tire, with the exception of any tires that are returned to the 
manufacturer pursuant to a testing program, within 24 hours of receipt 
of the recalled tire at the outlet. If the manufacturer has a testing 
program for recalled tires, these directions shall also include criteria 
for selecting recalled tires for testing and instructions for labeling 
those tires and

[[Page 165]]

returning them promptly to the manufacturer for testing.
    (B) Written guidance to all other outlets which are authorized to 
replace the recalled tires on how to alter the recalled tires promptly 
and permanently so that they cannot be used on vehicles.
    (C) A requirement that manufacturer-owned and other manufacturer-
controlled outlets report to the manufacturer, either on a monthly basis 
or within 30 days of the deviation, the number of recalled tires removed 
from vehicles by the outlet that have not been rendered unsuitable for 
resale for installation on a motor vehicle within the specified time 
frame (other than those returned for testing) and describe any such 
failure to act in accordance with the manufacturer's plan;
    (iii) Address how the manufacturer will limit, to the extent 
reasonably within its control, the disposal of the recalled tires in 
landfills and, instead, channel them into a category of positive reuse 
(shredding, crumbling, recycling, and recovery) or another alternative 
beneficial non-vehicular use. At a minimum, the manufacturer shall 
include the following information, to be furnished to each tire outlet 
that it owns or that is authorized to replace tires that are recalled, 
either annually or for each individual recall that the manufacturer 
conducts:
    (A)(1) Written directions that require manufacturer-owned and other 
manufacturer-controlled outlets either:
    (i) To ship recalled tires to one or more locations designated by 
the manufacturer as part of the program or allow the manufacturer to 
collect and dispose of the recalled tires; or
    (ii) To ship recalled tires to a location of their own choosing, 
provided that they comply with applicable state and local laws and 
regulations regarding disposal of tires.
    (2) Under option (c)(9)(iii)(A)(1)(ii) of this section, the 
directions must also include further direction and guidance on how to 
limit the disposal of recalled tires in landfills and, instead, channel 
them into a category of positive reuse (shredding, crumbling, recycling, 
and recovery) or another alternative beneficial non-vehicular use.
    (B)(1) Written guidance that authorizes all other outlets that are 
authorized to replace the recalled tires either:
    (i) To ship recalled tires to one or more locations designated by 
the manufacturer or allow the manufacturer to collect and dispose of the 
recalled tires; or
    (ii) To ship recalled tires to a location of their own choosing, 
provided that they comply with applicable state and local laws and 
regulations regarding disposal of tires.
    (2) Under option (c)(9)(iii)(B)(1)(ii) of this section, the 
manufacturer must also include further guidance on how to limit the 
disposal of recalled tires in landfills and, instead, channel them into 
a category of positive reuse (shredding, crumbling, recycling, and 
recovery) or another alternative beneficial non-vehicular use.
    (C) A requirement that manufacturer-owned and other manufacturer-
controlled outlets report to the manufacturer, on a monthly basis or 
within 30 days of the deviation, the number of recalled tires disposed 
of in violation of applicable state and local laws and regulations, and 
describe any such failure to act in accordance with the manufacturer's 
plan; and
    (D) A description of the manufacturer's program for disposing of the 
recalled tires that are returned to the manufacturer or collected by the 
manufacturer from the retail outlets, including, at a minimum, 
statements that the returned tires will be disposed of in compliance 
with applicable state and local laws and regulations regarding disposal 
of tires, and will be channeled, insofar as possible, into a category of 
positive reuse (shredding, crumbling, recycling and recovery) or another 
alternative beneficial non-vehicular use, instead of being disposed of 
in landfills.
    (iv) To the extent that the manufacturer wishes to limit the 
frequency of shipments of recalled tires, it must specify both a minimum 
time period and a minimum weight for the shipments and provide that 
shipments may be made at whichever minimum occurs first.
    (v) Written directions required under this paragraph to be furnished 
to a

[[Page 166]]

manufacturer-owned or controlled outlet shall be sent to the person in 
charge of each outlet by first-class mail or by electronic means, such 
as FAX transmissions or e-mail, with further instructions to notify all 
employees of the outlet who are involved with removal, rendering 
unsuitable for use, or disposition of recalled tires of the applicable 
requirements and procedures.
    (vi) Manufacturers must implement the plans for disposition of 
recalled tires that they file with NHTSA pursuant to this paragraph. The 
failure of a manufacturer to implement its plan in accordance with its 
terms constitutes a violation of the Safety Act.
    (10) A representative copy of all notices, bulletins, and other 
communications that relate directly to the defect or noncompliance and 
are sent to more than one manufacturer, distributor, dealer or 
purchaser. These copies shall be submitted to NHTSA's Recall Management 
Division (NVS-215) (RMD), not later than 5 days after they are initially 
sent to manufacturers, distributors, dealers, or purchasers. Submission 
shall be made by any means, including those means identified in Sec.  
573.9 of this part, which permits the manufacturer to verify promptly 
that the copy was in fact received by RMD and the date it was received 
by RMD.
    (11) The manufacturer's campaign number, if not identical to the 
identification number assigned by NHTSA.

[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 44 FR 20437, Apr. 5, 1979; 48 
FR 44081, Sept. 27, 1983; 60 FR 17268, Apr. 5, 1995; 61 FR 278, Jan. 4, 
1996. Redesignated at 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 
64063, Oct. 17, 2002; 69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004; 69 FR 50084, Aug. 13, 
2004; 70 FR 38814, July 6, 2005; 72 FR 32016, June 11, 2007]

    Effective Date Note: At 74 FR 47757, Sept. 17, 2009, Sec.  573.6 was 
amended by revising paragraphs (c)(2)(iii) and (iv), effective Oct. 19, 
2009. For the convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as 
follows:



Sec.  573.6  Defect and noncompliance information report.

                                * * * * *

    (c) * * *
    (2) * * *
    (iii) In the case of items of motor vehicle equipment, the 
identification shall be by the generic name of the component (tires, 
child seating systems, axles, etc.), part number (for tires, a range of 
tire identification numbers, as required by 49 CFR 574.5), size and 
function if applicable, the inclusive dates (month and year) of 
manufacture if available and any other information necessary to describe 
the items.
    (iv) In the case of motor vehicles or items of motor vehicle 
equipment in which the component that contains the defect or 
noncompliance was manufactured by a different manufacturer from the 
reporting manufacturer, the reporting manufacturer shall identify the 
component and, if known, the component's country of origin (i.e. final 
place of manufacture or assembly), the manufacturer and/or assembler of 
the component by name, business address, and business telephone number. 
If the reporting manufacturer does not know the identity of the 
manufacturer of the component, it shall identify the entity from which 
it was obtained. If at the time of submission of the initial report, the 
reporting manufacturer does not know the country of origin of the 
component, the manufacturer shall ascertain the country of origin and 
submit a supplemental report with that information once it becomes 
available.

                                * * * * *



Sec.  573.7  Quarterly reports.

    (a) Each manufacturer who is conducting a defect or noncompliance 
notification campaign to manufacturers, distributors, dealers, or owners 
shall submit to NHTSA a report in accordance with paragraphs (b), (c), 
and (d) of this section. Unless otherwise directed by the NHTSA, the 
information specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this section 
shall be included in the quarterly report, with respect to each 
notification campaign, for each of six consecutive quarters beginning 
with the quarter in which the campaign was initiated (i.e., the date of 
initial mailing of the defect or noncompliance notification to owners) 
or corrective action has been completed on all defective or noncomplying 
vehicles or items of replacement equipment involved in the campaign, 
whichever occurs first.
    (b) Each report shall include the following information identified 
by and in the order of the subparagraph headings of this paragraph.
    (1) The notification campaign number assigned by NHTSA.
    (2) The date notification began and the date completed.

[[Page 167]]

    (3) The number of vehicles or items of equipment involved in the 
notification campaign.
    (4) The number of vehicles and equipment items which have been 
inspected and repaired and the number of vehicles and equipment items 
inspected and determined not to need repair.
    (5) The number of vehicles or items of equipment determined to be 
unreachable for inspection due to export, theft, scrapping, failure to 
receive notification, or other reasons (specify). The number of vehicles 
or items or equipment in each category shall be specified.
    (6) In reports by equipment manufacturers, the number of items of 
equipment repaired and/or returned by dealers, other retailers, and 
distributors to the manufacturer prior to their first sale to the 
public.
    (7) For all recalls that involve the replacement of tires, the 
manufacturer shall provide:
    (i) The aggregate number of recalled tires that the manufacturer 
becomes aware have not been rendered unsuitable for resale for 
installation on a motor vehicle in accordance with the manufacturer's 
plan provided to NHTSA pursuant to Sec.  573.6(c)(9);
    (ii) The aggregate number of recalled tires that the manufacturer 
becomes aware have been disposed of in violation of applicable state and 
local laws and regulations; and
    (iii) A description of any failure of a tire outlet to act in 
accordance with the directions in the manufacturer's plan, including an 
identification of the outlet(s) in question.
    (c) Information supplied in response to the paragraphs (b)(4) and 
(5) of this section shall be cumulative totals.
    (d) The reports required by this section shall be submitted in 
accordance with the following schedule, except that if the due date 
specified below falls on a Saturday, Sunday or Federal holiday, the 
report shall be submitted on the next day that is a business day for the 
Federal government:
    (1) For the first calendar quarter (January 1 through March 31), on 
or before April 30;
    (2) For the second calendar quarter (April 1 through June 30), on or 
before July 30;
    (3) For the third calendar quarter (July 1 through September 30), on 
or before October 30; and
    (4) For the fourth calendar quarter (October 1 through December 31), 
on or before January 30.

[51 FR 398, Jan. 6, 1986, as amended at 60 FR 17269, Apr. 5, 1995. 
Redesignated at 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002, as amended at 69 FR 50085, 
Aug. 13, 2004]



Sec.  573.8  Lists of purchasers, owners, dealers, distributors, 
lessors, and lessees.

    (a) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles shall maintain, in a form 
suitable for inspection such as computer information storage devices or 
card files, a list of the names and addresses of registered owners, as 
determined through State motor vehicle registration records or other 
sources or the most recent purchasers where the registered owners are 
unknown, for all vehicles involved in a defect or noncompliance 
notification campaign initiated after the effective date of this part. 
The list shall include the vehicle identification number for each 
vehicle and the status of remedy with respect to each vehicle, updated 
as of the end of each quarterly reporting period specified in Sec.  
573.7. Each vehicle manufacturer shall also maintain such a list of the 
names and addresses of all dealers and distributors to which a defect or 
noncompliance notification was sent. Each list shall be retained for 5 
years, beginning with the date on which the defect or noncompliance 
information report required by Sec.  573.6 is initially submitted to 
NHTSA.
    (b) Each manufacturer (including brand name owners) of tires shall 
maintain, in a form suitable for inspection such as computer information 
storage devices or card files, a list of the names and addresses of the 
first purchasers of his tires for all tires involved in a defect or 
noncompliance notification campaign initiated after the effective date 
of this part. The list shall include the tire identification number of 
all tires and shall show the status of remedy with respect to each owner 
involved in each notification campaign, updated as of the end of each 
quarterly reporting period specified in Sec.  573.6. Each list shall be 
retained, beginning with the date on

[[Page 168]]

which the defect information report is initially submitted to the NHTSA, 
for 3 years.
    (c) For each item of equipment involved in a defect or noncompliance 
notification campaign initiated after the effective date of this part, 
each manufacturer of motor vehicle equipment other than tires shall 
maintain, in a form suitable for inspection, such as computer 
information storage devices or card files, a list of the names and 
addresses of each distributor and dealer of such manufacturer, each 
motor vehicle or motor vehicle equipment manufacturer and most recent 
purchaser known to the manufacturer to whom a potentially defective or 
noncomplying item of equipment has been sold and to whom notification is 
sent, the number of such items sold to each, and the date of shipment. 
The list shall show as far as is practicable the number of items 
remedied or returned to the manufacturer and the dates of such remedy or 
return. Each list shall be retained, beginning with the date on which 
the defect report required by Sec.  573.5 is initially submitted to the 
NHTSA, for 5 years.
    (d) Each lessor of leased motor vehicles that receives a 
notification from the manufacturer of such vehicles that the vehicle 
contains a safety-related defect or fails to comply with a Federal motor 
vehicle safety standard shall maintain, in a form suitable for 
inspection, such as computer information storage devices or card files, 
a list of the names and addresses of all lessees to which the lessor has 
provided notification of a defect or noncompliance pursuant to 49 CFR 
577.5(h). The list shall also include the make, model, model year, and 
vehicle identification number of each such leased vehicle, and the date 
on which the lessor mailed notification of the defect or noncompliance 
to the lessee. The information required by this paragraph must be 
retained by the lessor for one calendar year from the date the vehicle 
lease expires.

[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 44 FR 20437, Apr. 5, 1979; 60 
FR 17269, Apr. 5, 1995; 61 FR 278, Jan. 4, 1996. Redesignated at 67 FR 
45872, July 10, 2002; 69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]



Sec.  573.9  Address for submitting required reports and other
information.

    All submissions, except as otherwise required by this part, shall be 
addressed to the Associate Administrator for Enforcement, National 
Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Attention: Recall Management 
Division (NVS-215), 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. 
These submissions may be submitted as an attachment to an e-mail message 
to RMD.ODI@dot.gov in a portable document format (.pdf). Whether or not 
they are also submitted electronically, defect or noncompliance reports 
required by section 573.6 of this part must be submitted by certified 
mail in accordance with 49 U.S.C. 30118(c).

[72 FR 32016, June 11, 2007]



Sec.  573.10  Reporting the sale or lease of defective or noncompliant
tires.

    (a) Reporting requirement. Subject to paragraph (b) of this section, 
any person who knowingly and willfully sells or leases for use on a 
motor vehicle a defective tire or a tire that is not compliant with an 
applicable tire safety standard with actual knowledge that the 
manufacturer of such tire has notified its dealers of such defect or 
noncompliance as required under 49 U.S.C. 30118(c) or as required by an 
order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) must report that sale or lease to the 
Associate Administrator for Enforcement, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave., 
SE., Washington, DC 20590.
    (b) Exclusions from reporting requirement. Paragraph (a) of this 
section is not applicable where, before delivery under a sale or lease 
of a tire:
    (1) The defect or noncompliance of the tire is remedied as required 
under 49 U.S.C. 30120; or
    (2) Notification of the defect or noncompliance is required by an 
order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b), but enforcement of the order is 
restrained or the order is set aside in a civil action to which 49 
U.S.C. 30121(d) applies.
    (c) Contents of report; requirement of signature. (1) A report 
submitted pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section

[[Page 169]]

must contain the following information, where that information is 
available to the person selling or leasing the defective or noncompliant 
tire:
    (i) A statement that the report is being submitted pursuant to 49 
CFR 573.10(a) (sale or lease of defective or noncompliant tires);
    (ii) The name, address and phone number of the person who purchased 
or leased the tire;
    (iii) The name of the manufacturer of the tire;
    (iv) The tire's brand name, model name, and size;
    (v) The tire's DOT identification number;
    (vi) The date of the sale or lease; and
    (vii) The name, address, and telephone number of the seller or 
lessor.
    (2) Each report must be dated and signed, with the name of the 
person signing the report legibly printed or typed below the signature.
    (d) Reports required to be submitted pursuant to this section must 
be submitted no more than that five working days after a person to whom 
a tire covered by this section has been sold or leased has taken 
possession of that tire. Submissions must be made by any means which 
permits the sender to verify promptly that the report was in fact 
received by NHTSA and the day it was received by NHTSA.

[65 FR 81413, Dec. 26, 2000, as amended at 72 FR 32016, June 11, 2007]



Sec.  573.11  Prohibition on sale or lease of new defective and 
noncompliant motor vehicles and items of replacement equipment.

    (a) If notification is required by an order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) 
or is required under 49 U.S.C. 30118(c) and the manufacturer has 
provided to a dealer (including retailers of motor vehicle equipment) 
notification about a new motor vehicle or new item of replacement 
equipment in the dealer's possession, including actual and constructive 
possession, at the time of notification that contains a defect related 
to motor vehicle safety or does not comply with an applicable motor 
vehicle safety standard issued under 49 CFR part 571, the dealer may 
sell or lease the motor vehicle or item of replacement equipment only 
if:
    (1) The defect or noncompliance is remedied as required by 49 U.S.C. 
30120 before delivery under the sale or lease; or
    (2) When the notification is required by an order under 49 U.S.C. 
30118(b), enforcement of the order is restrained or the order is set 
aside in a civil action to which 49 U.S.C. 30121(d) applies.
    (b) Paragraph (a) of this section does not prohibit a dealer from 
offering the vehicle or equipment for sale or lease, provided that the 
dealer does not sell or lease it.

[67 FR 19697, Apr. 23, 2002]



Sec.  573.12  Prohibition on sale or lease of new and used defective 
and noncompliant motor vehicle equipment.

    (a) Subject to Sec.  573.12(b), no person may sell or lease any new 
or used item of motor vehicle equipment (including a tire) as defined by 
49 U.S.C. 30102(a)(7), for installation on a motor vehicle, that is the 
subject of a decision under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) or a notice required 
under 49 U.S.C. 30118(c), in a condition that it may be reasonably used 
for its original purpose.
    (b) Paragraph (a) of this section is not applicable where:
    (1) The defect or noncompliance is remedied as required under 49 
U.S.C. 30120 before delivery under the sale or lease;
    (2) Notification of the defect or noncompliance is required by an 
order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b), but enforcement of the order is 
restrained or the order is set aside in a civil action to which 49 
U.S.C. 30121(d) applies.

[67 FR 19698, Apr. 23, 2002]



Sec.  573.13  Reimbursement for pre-notification remedies.

    (a) Pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30120(d) and Sec.  573.6(c)(8)(i) of this 
part, this section specifies requirements for a manufacturer's plan 
(including general reimbursement plans submitted pursuant to Sec.  
573.6(c)(8)(i)) to reimburse owners and purchasers for costs incurred 
for remedies in advance of the manufacturer's notification of safety-
related defects and noncompliance with Federal motor vehicle safety 
standards under subsection (b) or (c) of 49 U.S.C. 30118.

[[Page 170]]

    (b) Definitions. The following definitions apply to this section:
    (1) Booster seat means either a backless child restraint system or a 
belt-positioning seat.
    (2) Claimant means a person who seeks reimbursement for the costs of 
a pre-notification remedy for which he or she paid.
    (3) Pre-notification remedy means a remedy that is performed on a 
motor vehicle or item of replacement equipment for a problem 
subsequently addressed by a notification under subsection (b) or (c) of 
49 U.S.C. 30118 and that is obtained during the period for reimbursement 
specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (4) Other child restraint system means all child restraint systems 
as defined in 49 CFR 571.213 S4 not included within the categories of 
rear-facing infant seat or booster seat.
    (5) Rear-facing infant seat means a child restraint system that is 
designed to position a child to face only in the direction opposite to 
the normal direction of travel of the motor vehicle.
    (6) Warranty means a warranty as defined in Sec.  579.4(c) of this 
chapter.
    (c) The manufacturer's plan shall specify a period for 
reimbursement, as follows:
    (1) The beginning date shall be no later than a date based on the 
underlying basis for the recall determined as follows:
    (i) For a noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety 
standard, the date shall be the date of the first test or observation by 
either NHTSA or the manufacturer indicating that a noncompliance may 
exist.
    (ii) For a safety-related defect that is determined to exist 
following the opening of an Engineering Analysis (EA) by NHTSA's Office 
of Defects Investigation (ODI), the date shall be the date the EA was 
opened, or one year before the date of the manufacturer's notification 
to NHTSA pursuant to Sec.  573.6 of this part, whichever is earlier.
    (iii) For a safety-related defect that is determined to exist in the 
absence of the opening of an EA, the date shall be one year before the 
date of the manufacturer's notification to NHTSA pursuant to Sec.  573.6 
of this part.
    (2) The ending date shall be no earlier than:
    (i) For motor vehicles, 10 calendar days after the date on which the 
manufacturer mailed the last of its notifications to owners pursuant to 
part 577 of this chapter.
    (ii) For replacement equipment, 10 calendar days after the date on 
which the manufacturer mailed the last of its notifications to owners 
pursuant to part 577 of this chapter (where applicable) or 30 days after 
the conclusion of the manufacturer's initial efforts to provide public 
notice of the existence of the defect or noncompliance pursuant to Sec.  
577.7, whichever is later.
    (d) The manufacturer's plan shall provide for reimbursement of costs 
for pre-notification remedies, subject to the conditions established in 
the plan. The following conditions and no others may be established in 
the plan.
    (1) The plan may exclude reimbursement for costs incurred within the 
period during which the manufacturer's original or extended warranty 
would have provided for a free repair of the problem addressed by the 
recall, without any payment by the consumer unless a franchised dealer 
or authorized representative of the manufacturer denied warranty 
coverage or the repair made under warranty did not remedy the problem 
addressed by the recall. The exclusion based on an extended warranty may 
be applied only when the manufacturer provided written notice of the 
terms of the extended warranty to owners.
    (2)(i) For a motor vehicle, the plan may exclude reimbursement:
    (A) If the pre-notification remedy was not of the same type (repair, 
replacement, or refund of purchase price) as the recall remedy;
    (B) If the pre-notification remedy did not address the defect or 
noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the defect or 
noncompliance; or
    (C) If the pre-notification remedy was not reasonably necessary to 
correct the defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a 
manifestation of the defect or noncompliance.
    (ii) However, the plan may not require that the pre-notification 
remedy be identical to the remedy elected by

[[Page 171]]

the manufacturer pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30120(a)(1)(A).
    (3)(i) For replacement equipment, the plan may exclude 
reimbursement:
    (A) If the pre-notification remedy did not address the defect or 
noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the defect or 
noncompliance;
    (B) If the pre-notification remedy was not reasonably necessary to 
correct the defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a 
manifestation of the defect and noncompliance; or
    (C) In the case of a child restraint system that was replaced, if 
the replacement child restraint is not the same type (i.e., rear-facing 
infant seat, booster seat, or other child restraint system) as the 
restraint that was the subject of the recall.
    (ii) However, the plan may not require that the pre-notification 
remedy be identical to the remedy elected by the manufacturer pursuant 
to 49 U.S.C. 30120(a)(1)(B).
    (4) The plan may exclude reimbursement if the claimant did not 
submit adequate documentation to the manufacturer at an address or 
location designated pursuant to Sec.  573.13(f). The plan may require, 
at most, that the following documentation be submitted:
    (i) Name and mailing address of the claimant;
    (ii) Identification of the product that was recalled:
    (A) For motor vehicles, the vehicle make, model, model year, and 
vehicle identification number of the vehicle;
    (B) For replacement equipment other than child restraint systems and 
tires, a description of the equipment, including model and size as 
appropriate;
    (C) For child restraint systems, a description of the restraint, 
including the type (rear-facing infant seat, booster seat, or other 
child restraint system) and the model; or
    (D) For tires, the model and size;
    (iii) Identification of the recall (either the NHTSA recall number 
or the manufacturer's recall number);
    (iv) Identification of the owner or purchaser of the recalled motor 
vehicle or replacement equipment at the time that the pre-notification 
remedy was obtained;
    (v) A receipt for the pre-notification remedy, which may be an 
original or copy:
    (A) If the reimbursement sought is for a repair, the manufacturer 
may require that the receipt indicate that the repair addressed the 
defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the 
defect or noncompliance, and state the total amount paid for the repair 
of that problem. Itemization of a receipt of the amount for parts, 
labor, other costs and taxes, may not be required unless it is unclear 
on the face of the receipt that the repair for which reimbursement is 
sought addressed only the pre-notification remedy relating to the 
pertinent defect or noncompliance or manifestation thereof.
    (B) If the reimbursement sought is for the replacement of a vehicle 
part or an item of replacement equipment, the manufacturer may require 
that the receipt identify the item and state the total amount paid for 
the item that replaced the defective or noncompliant item;
    (vi) In the case of items of replacement equipment that were 
replaced, documentation that the claimant or a relative thereof (with 
relationship stated) owned the recalled item. Such documentation could 
consist of:
    (A) An invoice or receipt showing purchase of the recalled item of 
replacement equipment;
    (B) If the claimant sent a registration card for a recalled child 
restraint system or tire to the manufacturer, a statement to that 
effect;
    (C) A copy of the registration card for the recalled child restraint 
system or tire; or
    (D) Documentation demonstrating that the claimant had replaced a 
recalled tire that was on a vehicle that he, she, or a relative owned; 
and
    (vii) If the pre-notification remedy was obtained at a time when the 
vehicle or equipment could have been repaired or replaced at no charge 
under a manufacturer's original or extended warranty program, 
documentation indicating that the manufacturer's dealer or authorized 
facility either refused to remedy the problem addressed by the recall 
under the warranty or that

[[Page 172]]

the warranty repair did not correct the problem addressed by the recall.
    (e) The manufacturer's plan shall specify the amount of costs to be 
reimbursed for a pre-notification remedy.
    (1) For motor vehicles:
    (i) The amount of reimbursement shall not be less than the lesser 
of:
    (A) The amount paid by the owner for the remedy, or
    (B) The cost of parts for the remedy, plus associated labor at local 
labor rates, miscellaneous fees such as disposal of waste, and taxes. 
Costs for parts may be limited to the manufacturer's list retail price 
for authorized parts.
    (ii) Any associated costs, including, but not limited to, taxes or 
disposal of wastes, may not be limited.
    (2) For replacement equipment:
    (i) The amount of reimbursement ordinarily would be the amount paid 
by the owner for the replacement item.
    (ii) In cases in which the owner purchased a brand or model 
different from the item of motor vehicle equipment that was the subject 
of the recall, the manufacturer may limit the amount of reimbursement to 
the retail list price of the defective or noncompliant item that was 
replaced, plus taxes.
    (iii) If the item of motor vehicle equipment was repaired, the 
provisions of paragraph (e)(1) of this section apply.
    (f) The manufacturer's plan shall identify an address to which 
claimants may mail reimbursement clams and may identify franchised 
dealer(s) and authorized facilities to which claims for reimbursement 
may be submitted directly.
    (g) The manufacturer (either directly or through its designated 
dealer or facility) shall act upon requests for reimbursement as 
follows:
    (1) The manufacturer shall act upon a claim for reimbursement within 
60 days of its receipt. If the manufacturer denies the claim, the 
manufacturer must send a notice to the claimant within 60 days of 
receipt of the claim that includes a clear, concise statement of the 
reasons for the denial.
    (2) If a claim for reimbursement is incomplete when originally 
submitted, the manufacturer shall advise the claimant within 60 days of 
receipt of the claim of the documentation that is needed and offer an 
opportunity to resubmit the claim with complete documentation.
    (h) Reimbursement shall be in the form of a check or cash from the 
manufacturer or a designated dealer or facility.
    (i) The manufacturer shall make its reimbursement plan available to 
the public upon request.
    (j) Any disputes over the denial in whole or in part of a claim for 
reimbursement shall be resolved between the claimant and the 
manufacturer. NHTSA will not mediate or resolve any disputes regarding 
eligibility for, or the amount of, reimbursement.
    (k) Each manufacturer shall implement each plan for reimbursement in 
accordance with this section and the terms of the plan.
    (l) Nothing in this section requires that a manufacturer provide 
reimbursement in connection with a fraudulent claim for reimbursement.
    (m) A manufacturer's plan may provide that it will not apply to 
recalls based solely on noncompliant or defective labels.
    (n) The requirement that reimbursement for a pre-notification remedy 
be provided to an owner does not apply if, in the case of a motor 
vehicle or replacement equipment other than a tire, it was bought by the 
first purchaser more than 10 calendar years before notice is given under 
49 U.S.C. 30118(c) or an order is issued under section 49 U.S.C. 
30118(b). In the case of a tire, this period shall be 5 calendar years.

[67 FR 64063, Oct. 17, 2002]



Sec.  573.14  Accelerated remedy program.

    (a) An accelerated remedy program is one in which the manufacturer 
expands the sources of replacement parts needed to remedy the defect or 
noncompliance, or expands the number of authorized repair facilities 
beyond those facilities that usually and customarily provide remedy work 
for the manufacturer, or both.
    (b) The Administrator may require a manufacturer to accelerate its 
remedy program if:
    (1) The Administrator finds that there is a risk of serious injury 
or

[[Page 173]]

death if the remedy program is not accelerated;
    (2) The Administrator finds that acceleration of the remedy program 
can be reasonably achieved by expanding the sources of replacement 
parts, expanding the number of authorized repair facilities, or both; 
and
    (3) The Administrator determines that the manufacturer's remedy 
program is not likely to be capable of completion within a reasonable 
time.
    (c) The Administrator, in deciding whether to require the 
manufacturer to accelerate a remedy program and what to require the 
manufacturer to do, will consult with the manufacturer and may consider 
a wide range of information, including, but not limited to, the 
following: the manufacturer's initial or revised report submitted under 
Sec.  573.6(c), information from the manufacturer, information from 
other manufacturers and suppliers, information from any source related 
to the availability and implementation of the remedy, and the 
seriousness of the risk of injury or death associated with the defect or 
noncompliance.
    (d) As required by the Administrator, an accelerated remedy program 
shall include the manner of acceleration (expansion of the sources of 
replacement parts, expansion of the number of authorized repair 
facilities, or both), may require submission of a plan, may identify the 
parts to be provided and/or the sources of those parts, may require the 
manufacturer to notify the agency and owners about any differences among 
different sources or brands of parts, may require the manufacturer to 
identify additional authorized repair facilities, and may specify 
additional owner notifications related to the program. The Administrator 
may also require the manufacturer to include a program to provide 
reimbursement to owners who incur costs to obtain the accelerated 
remedy.
    (e) Under an accelerated remedy program, the remedy that is provided 
shall be equivalent to the remedy that would have been provided if the 
manufacturer's remedy program had not been accelerated. The replacement 
parts used to remedy the defect or noncompliance shall be reasonably 
equivalent to those that would have been used if the remedy program were 
not accelerated. The service procedures shall be reasonably equivalent. 
In the case of tires, all replacement tires shall be the same size and 
type as the defective or noncompliant tire, shall be suitable for use on 
the owner's vehicle, shall have the same or higher load index and speed 
rating, and, for passenger car tires, shall have the same or better 
rating in each of the three categories enumerated in the Uniform Tire 
Quality Grading System. See 49 CFR 575.104. In the case of child 
restraints systems, all replacements shall be of the same type (e.g., 
rear-facing infant seats with a base, rear-facing infant seats without a 
base, convertible seats (designed for use in both rear- and forward-
facing modes), forward-facing only seats, high back booster seats with a 
five-point harness, and belt positioning booster seats) and the same 
overall quality.
    (f) In those instances where the accelerated remedy program provides 
that an owner may obtain the remedy from a source other than the 
manufacturer or its dealers or authorized facilities by paying for the 
remedy and/or its installation, the manufacturer shall reimburse the 
owner for the cost of obtaining the remedy as specified on paragraphs 
(f)(1) through (f)(3) of this section. Under these circumstances, the 
accelerated remedy program shall include, to the extent required by the 
Administrator:
    (1) A description of the remedy and costs that are eligible for 
reimbursement, including identification of the equipment and/or parts 
and labor for which reimbursement is available;
    (2) Identification, with specificity or as a class, of the 
alternative repair facilities at which reimbursable repairs may be 
performed, including an explanation of how to arrange for service at 
those facilities; and
    (3) Other provisions assuring appropriate reimbursement that are 
consistent with those set forth in Sec.  573.13, including, but not 
limited to, provisions regarding the procedures and needed documentation 
for making a claim for reimbursement, the amount of costs to be 
reimbursed, the office to which claims for reimbursement shall be 
submitted, the requirements on manufacturers for acting on claims for

[[Page 174]]

reimbursement, and the methods by which owners can obtain information 
about the program.
    (g) In response to a manufacturer's request, the Administrator may 
authorize a manufacturer to terminate its accelerated remedy program if 
the Administrator concludes that the manufacturer can meet all future 
demands for the remedy through its own sources in a prompt manner. If 
required by the Administrator, the manufacturer shall provide notice of 
the termination of the program to all owners of unremedied vehicles and 
equipment at least 30 days in advance of the termination date, in a form 
approved by the Administrator.
    (h) Each manufacturer shall implement any accelerated remedy program 
required by the Administrator according to the terms of that program.

[67 FR 72392, Dec. 5, 2002]



PART 574_TIRE IDENTIFICATION AND RECORDKEEPING--Table of Contents




Sec.
574.1 Scope.
574.2 Purpose.
574.3 Definitions.
574.4 Applicability.
574.5 Tire identification requirements.
574.6 Identification mark.
574.7 Information requirements--new tire manufacturers, new tire brand 
          name owners.
574.8 Information requirements--tire distributors and dealers.
574.9 Requirements for motor vehicle dealers.
574.10 Requirements for motor vehicle manufacturers.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30117, and 30166; delegation 
of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.

    Editorial Note: An interpretation of manufacturer's designee issued 
by NHTSA and published at 36 FR 9780, May 28, 1971, provides as follows:


    ``A request for an interpretation has been received from the Rubber 
Manufacturers Association asking that it be made clear that, under the 
Tire Identification and Recordkeeping Regulation (part 574), 
particularly Sec. Sec.  574.7 and 574.8, only the tire manufacturer, 
brand name owner, or retreader may designate a third party to provide 
the necessary recording forms or to maintain the records required by the 
regulation.

    ``Another person has requested an interpretation concerning the 
questions whether: (1) A tire manufacturer, brand name owner or 
retreader may designate one or more persons to be its designee for the 
purpose of maintaining the information, (2) an independent distributor 
or dealer may select a designee for the retention of the manufacturer's 
records, provided the manufacturer approves the designation, and (3) the 
independent distributor or dealer may seek administrative relief in the 
event he believes the information retained by the manufacturer is being 
used to his detriment.

    ``Under section 113(f) of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle 
Safety Act (15 U.S.C. 1402(f) and part 574, it is the tire manufacturer 
who has the ultimate responsibility for maintaining the records of first 
purchasers. Therefore, it is the tire manufacturer or his designee who 
must maintain these records. The term designee, as used in the 
regulation, was not intended to preclude multiple designees; if the tire 
manufacturer desires, he may designate more than one person to maintain 
the required information. Furthermore, neither the Act nor the 
regulation prohibits the distributor or dealer from being the 
manufacturer's designee nor do they prohibit a distributor or dealer 
from selecting someone to be the manufacturer's designee provided the 
manufacturer approves of the selection.

    ``With respect to the possibility of manufacturers using the 
maintained information to the detriment of a distributor or dealer, the 
NHTSA will of course investigate claims by distributors or dealers of 
alleged misconduct and, if the maintained information is being misused, 
take appropriate action.

    ``Issued under the authority of sections 103, 113, and 119 of the 
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act, 15 U.S.C. 1392, 1402, and 
1407, and the delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51.''



Sec.  574.1  Scope.

    This part sets forth the method by which new tire manufacturers and 
new tire brand name owners shall identify tires for use on motor 
vehicles and maintain records of tire purchasers, and the methods by 
which retreaders and retreaded tire brand name owners shall identify 
tires for use on motor vehicles. This part also sets forth the methods 
by which independent tire dealers and distributors shall record, on 
registration forms, their names and addresses and the identification 
number of the tires sold to tire purchasers

[[Page 175]]

and provide the forms to the purchasers, so that the purchasers may 
report their names to the new tire manufacturers and new tire brand name 
owners, and by which other tire dealers and distributors shall record 
and report the names of tire purchasers to the new tire manufacturers 
and new tire brand name owners.

(Authority: Secs. 108, 119, and 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 
U.S.C. 1392, 1407, and 1421); sec. 4, Pub. L. 97-311, 96 Stat. 1619 (15 
U.S.C. 1418); and delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50)

[49 FR 4760, Feb. 8, 1984]



Sec.  574.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to facilitate notification to purchasers 
of defective or nonconforming tires, pursuant to Sections 30118 and 
30119 of Title 49, United States Code, so that they may take appropriate 
action in the interest of motor vehicle safety.

[61 FR 29495, June 11, 1996]



Sec.  574.3  Definitions.

    (a) Statutory definitions. All terms in this part that are defined 
in Section 30102 of Title 49, United States Code, are used as defined 
therein.
    (b) Motor vehicle safety standard definitions. Unless otherwise 
indicated, all terms used in this part that are defined in the Motor 
Vehicle Safety Standards, part 571 of this subchapter (hereinafter the 
Standards), are used as defined therein.
    (c)(1) Independent means, with respect to a tire distributor or 
dealer, one whose business is not owned or controlled by a tire 
manufacturer or brand name owner.
    (2) Mileage contract purchaser means a person who purchases or 
leases tire use on a mileage basis.
    (3) New tire brand name owner means a person, other than a new tire 
manufacturer, who owns or has the right to control the brand name of a 
new tire or a person who licenses another to purchase new tires from a 
new tire manufacturer bearing the licensor's brand name.
    (4) Retreaded tire brand name owner means a person, other than a 
retreader, who owns or has the right to control the brand name of a 
retreaded tire or a person who licenses another to purchase retreaded 
tires from a retreader bearing the licensor's brand name.
    (5) Tire purchaser means a person who buys or leases a new tire, or 
who buys or leases for 60 days or more a motor vehicle containing a new 
tire for purposes other than resale.

(Authority: Secs. 103, 108, 112, 119, 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 
(15 U.S.C. 1392, 1397, 1401, 1407, 1421); secs. 102, 103, 104, Pub. L. 
93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1411-1420); 92 Stat. 2689 (15 U.S.C. 
1418); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51)

[36 FR 1197, Jan. 26, 1971, as amended at 44 FR 7964, Feb. 8, 1979; 49 
FR 38612, Oct. 1, 1984; 61 FR 29495, June 11, 1996]



Sec.  574.4  Applicability.

    This part applies to manufacturers, brand name owners, retreaders, 
distributors, and dealers of new and retreaded tires, and new non-
pneumatic tires and non-pneumatic tire assemblies for use on motor 
vehicles manufactured after 1948 and to manufacturers and dealers of 
motor vehicles manufactured after 1948. However, it does not apply to 
persons who retread tires solely for their own use.

[36 FR 5422, Mar. 23, 1971, as amended at 55 FR 29596, July 20, 1990]



Sec.  574.5  Tire identification requirements.

    Each tire manufacturer shall conspicuously label on one sidewall of 
each tire it manufactures, except tires manufactured exclusively for 
mileage-contract purchasers, or non-pneumatic tires or non-pneumatic 
tire assemblies, by permanently molding into or onto the sidewall, in 
the manner and location specified in Figure 1, a tire identification 
number containing the information set forth in paragraphs (a) through 
(d) of this section. However, at the option of the manufacturer, the 
information contained in paragraph (d) of this section may, instead of 
being permanently molded, be laser etched into or onto the sidewall in 
the location specified in Figure 1, during the manufacturing process of 
the tire and not later than 24 hours after the tire is removed from the 
mold. Each tire retreader, except tire retreaders who retread tires 
solely for their own use, shall conspicuously label one sidewall

[[Page 176]]

of each tire it retreads by permanently molding or branding into or onto 
the sidewall, in the manner and location specified in Figure 2, a tire 
identification number containing the information set forth in paragraphs 
(a) through (d) of this section. However, at the option of the 
retreader, the information set forth in paragraph (d) of this section 
may, instead of being permanently molded or branded, be laser etched 
into or onto the sidewall in the location specified in Figure 2, during 
the retreading of the tire and not later than 24 hours after the 
application of the new tread. In addition, the DOT symbol required by 
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards shall be located as shown in 
Figures 1 and 2. The DOT symbol shall not appear on tires to which no 
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard is applicable, except that the DOT 
symbol on tires for use on motor vehicles other than passenger cars may, 
prior to retreading, be removed from the sidewall or allowed to remain 
on the sidewall, at the retreader's option. The symbols to be used in 
the tire identification number for tire manufacturers and retreaders 
are: ``A, B, C, D, E, F, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, R, T, U, V, W, X, Y, 1, 2, 
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0''. Tires manufactured or retreaded exclusively 
for mileage-contract purchasers are not required to contain a tire 
identification number if the tire contains the phrase ``for mileage 
contract use only'' permanently molded into or onto the tire sidewall in 
lettering at least one-quarter inch high. Each manufacturer of a non-
pneumatic tire or a non-pneumatic tire assembly shall permanently mold, 
stamp or otherwise permanently mark into or onto one side of the non-
pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire assembly a tire identification 
number containing the information set forth in paragraphs (a) through 
(d) of this section. In addition, the DOT symbol required by the Federal 
motor vehicle safety standards shall be positioned relative to the tire 
identification number as shown in Figure 1, and the symbols to be used 
for the other information are those listed above. The labeling for a 
non-pneumatic tire or a non-pneumatic tire assembly shall be in the 
manner specified in Figure 1 and positioned on the non-pneumatic tire or 
non-pneumatic tire assembly such that it is not placed on the tread or 
the outermost edge of the tire and is not obstructed by any portion of 
the non-pneumatic rim or wheel center member designated for use with 
that non-pneumatic tire in S4.4 of Standard No. 129 (49 CFR 571.129).
    (a) First grouping. The first group, of two or three symbols, 
depending on whether the tire is new or retreaded, shall represent the 
manufacturer's assigned identification mark (see Sec.  574.6).
    (b) Second grouping. For new tires, the second group, of no more 
than two symbols, shall be used to identify the tire size. For a new 
non-pneumatic tire or a non-pneumatic tire assembly, the second group, 
of not more than two symbols, shall be used to identify the non-
pneumatic tire identification code. For retreaded tires, the second 
group, of no more than two symbols, shall identify the retread matrix in 
which the tire was processed or a tire size code if a matrix was not 
used to process the retreaded tire. Each new-tire manufacturer and 
retreader shall maintain a record of each symbol used, with the 
corresponding matrix or tire size and shall provide such record to the 
NHTSA upon written request.
    (c) Third grouping. The third group, consisting of no more than four 
symbols, may be used at the option of the manufacturer or retreader as a 
descriptive code for the purpose of identifying significant 
characteristics of the tire. However, if the tire is manufactured for a 
brand name owner, one of the functions of the third grouping shall be to 
identify the brand name owner. Each manufacturer or retreader who uses 
the third grouping shall maintain a detailed record of any descriptive 
or brand name owner code used, which shall be provided to the Bureau 
upon written request.
    (d) Fourth grouping. The fourth grouping, consisting of four 
numerical symbols, must identify the week and year of manufacture. The 
first two symbols must identify the week of the year by using ``01'' for 
the first full calendar week in each year, ``02'' for the second full 
calendar week, and so on. The calendar week runs from Sunday through the 
following Saturday. The final week of each year may include

[[Page 177]]

not more than 6 days of the following year. The third and fourth symbols 
must identify the year. Example: 0101 means the 1st week of 2001, or the 
week beginning Sunday, January 7, 2001, and ending Saturday, January 13, 
2001. The symbols signifying the date of manufacture shall immediately 
follow the optional descriptive code (paragraph (c) of this section). If 
no optional descriptive code is used, the symbols signifying the date of 
manufacture must be placed in the area shown in Figures 1 and 2 of this 
section for the optional descriptive code.
    (e) Tire identification number height. Notwithstanding Figures 1 and 
2, each character in the tire identification number on tires with less 
than 6 inches in cross section width or tires with less than 13 inches 
bead diameter may be any size of 5/32 inches (4 mm) or greater.

[[Page 178]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR18NO02.004


[[Page 179]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR18NO02.005


[[Page 180]]



[36 FR 1197, Jan. 26, 1971, as amended at 36 FR 9870, May 23, 1971; 37 
FR 23727, Nov. 8, 1972; 37 FR 25521, Dec. 1, 1972; 39 FR 5192, Feb. 11, 
1974; 39 FR 12105, Apr. 3, 1974; 50 FR 2288, Jan. 16, 1985; 55 FR 29596, 
July 20, 1990; 64 FR 36812, July 8, 1999; 67 FR 69628, Nov. 18, 2002; 69 
FR 31320, June 3, 2004; 69 FR 51400, Aug. 19, 2004; 69 FR 64501, Nov. 5, 
2004]



Sec.  574.6  Identification mark.

    To obtain the identification mark required by 574.5(a), each 
manufacturer of new or retreaded pneumatic tires, non-pneumatic tires or 
non-pneumatic tire assemblies shall apply in writing to the Office of 
Vehicle Safety Compliance, National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC 20590, identify 
itself as a tire manufacturer or retreader and furnish the following 
information:
    (a) The name, or other designation identifying the applicant, and 
its main office address.
    (b) The name, or other identifying designation, of each individual 
plant operated by the manufacturer and the address of each plant, if 
applicable.
    (c) The type of tires manufactured at each plant, e.g., pneumatic 
tires for passenger cars, buses, trucks or motorcycles; pneumatic 
retreaded tires; or non-pneumatic tires or non-pneumatic tire 
assemblies.

[55 FR 29596, July 20, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 29495, June 11, 1996]



Sec.  574.7  Information requirements--new tire manufacturers, new tire
brand name owners.

    (a)(1) Each new tire manufacturer and each new tire brand name owner 
(hereinafter referred to in this section and Sec.  574.8 as ``tire 
manufacturer'') or its designee, shall provide tire registration forms 
to every distributor and dealer of its tires which offers new tires for 
sale or lease to tire purchasers.
    (2) Each tire registration form provided to independent distributors 
and dealers pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of this section shall contain 
space for recording the information specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) 
through (a)(4)(iii) of this section. Each form shall:
    (i) Have the following physical characteristics:
    (A) Be rectangular;
    (B) Be not less than 3\1/2\ inches high, 5 inches long, and 0.007 
inches thick;
    (C) Be not more than 4\1/4\ inches high, 6 inches long, and 0.016 
inch thick.
    (ii) On the address side of the form, be addressed with the name and 
address of the manufacturer or its designee, and include, in the upper 
right hand corner, the statement ``Affix a postcard stamp.''
    (iii) On the other side of the form:
    (A) Include the tire manufacturer's name, unless it appears on the 
address side of the form;
    (B) Include a statement explaining the purpose of the form and how a 
consumer may register tires. The statement shall:
    (1) Include the heading ``IMPORTANT''.
    (2) Include the sentence: ``In case of a recall, we can reach you 
only if we have your name and address.''
    (3) Indicate that sending in the card will add a person to the 
manufacturer's recall list.
    (4) A tire manufacturer may voluntarily provide means for tire 
registration via the Internet, by telephone or other electronic means. 
If a tire manufacturer voluntarily provides a Web site or other means by 
which its tires can be registered, it may (but is not required to) 
include a sentence listing one or more such means, beginning with the 
phrase ``Instead of mailing this form, you can * * *.'' Example: Instead 
of mailing this form, you can register online at [insert tire 
manufacturer's registration Web site address].
    (5) Include the sentence: ``Do it today.''
    (C) Include space for recording tire identification numbers for six 
tires.
    (D) Use shading to distinguish between areas of the form to be 
filled in by sellers and customers.
    (1) Include the statement: ``Shaded areas must be filled in by 
seller.''
    (2) The areas of the form for recording tire identification numbers 
and information about the seller of the tires must be shaded.
    (3) The area of the form for recording the customer name and address 
must not be shaded.
    (E) Include, in the top right corner, the phrase ``OMB Control No. 
2127-0050''.

[[Page 181]]

    (3) Each tire registration form provided to distributors and dealers 
that are not independent distributors or dealers pursuant to paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section must contain space for recording the information 
specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(iii) of this section. 
Each form must include:
    (A) A statement indicating where the form should be returned, 
including the name and mailing address of the manufacturer or its 
designee.
    (B) The tire manufacturers' logo or other identification, if the 
manufacturer is not identified as part of the statement indicating where 
the form should be returned.
    (C) The statement: ``IMPORTANT: FEDERAL LAW REQUIRES TIRE 
IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS MUST BE REGISTERED''.
    (D) In the top right corner, the phrase ``OMB Control No. 2127-
0050''.
    (4)(i) Name and address of the tire purchaser.
    (ii) Tire identification number.
    (iii) Name and address of the tire seller or other means by which 
the tire manufacturer can identify the tire seller.
    (b) Each tire manufacturer shall record and maintain, or have 
recorded and maintained for it by a designee, the information from 
registration forms which are submitted to it or its designee. No tire 
manufacturer shall use the information on the registration forms for any 
commercial purpose detrimental to tire distributors and dealers. Any 
tire manufacturer to which registration forms are mistakenly sent shall 
forward those registration forms to the proper tire manufacturer within 
90 days of the receipt of the forms.
    (c) Each tire manufacturer shall maintain, or have maintained for it 
by a designee, a record of each tire distributor and dealer that 
purchases tires directly from the manufacturer and sells them to tire 
purchasers, the number of tires purchased by each such distributor or 
dealer, the number of tires for which reports have been received from 
each such distributor or dealer other than an independent distributor or 
dealer, the number of tires for which reports have been received from 
each such independent distributor or dealer, the total number of tires 
for which registration forms have been submitted to the manufacturer or 
its designee, and the total number of tires sold by the manufacturer.
    (d) The information that is specified in paragraph (a)(4) of this 
section and recorded on registration forms submitted to a tire 
manufacturer or its designee shall be maintained for a period of not 
less than five years from the date on which the information is recorded 
by the manufacturer or its designee.
    (e) Tire manufacturers may voluntarily provide means for tire 
registration via the Internet, by telephone or other electronic means.
    (f) Each tire manufacturer shall meet the requirements of paragraphs 
(b), (c) and (d) of this section with respect to tire registration 
information submitted to it or its designee by any means authorized by 
the manufacturer in addition to the use of registration forms.

(Authority: Secs. 108, 119, and 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 
U.S.C. 1392, 1407, and 1421); sec. 4, Pub. L. 97-311, 96 Stat. 1619 (15 
U.S.C. 1418); and delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50)

[49 FR 4760, Feb. 8, 1984; 49 FR 5621, Feb. 14, 1984, as amended at 56 
FR 49427, Sept. 30, 1991; 64 FR 36815, July 8, 1999; 67 FR 45872, July 
10, 2002; 71 FR 39233, July 12, 2006; 73 FR 72368, Nov. 28, 2008]



Sec.  574.8  Information requirements--tire distributors and dealers.

    (a) Independent distributors and dealers.
    (1) Each independent distributor and each independent dealer selling 
or leasing new tires to tire purchasers or lessors (hereinafter referred 
to in this section as ``tire purchasers'') shall comply with paragraph 
(a)(1)(i), (a)(1)(ii) or (a)(1)(iii) of this section:
    (i) At the time of sale or lease of the tire, provide each tire 
purchaser with a paper tire registration form on which the distributor 
or dealer has recorded the following information:
    (A) The entire tire identification number of the tire(s) sold or 
leased to the tire purchaser, and
    (B) The distributor's or dealer's name and street address. In lieu 
of the street address, and if one is available, the distributor or 
dealer's e-mail address or

[[Page 182]]

Web site may be recorded. Other means of identifying the distributor or 
dealer known to the manufacturer may also be used.
    (ii) Record the following information on a paper tire registration 
form and return it to the tire manufacturer, or its designee, on behalf 
of the tire purchaser, at no charge to the tire purchaser and within 30 
days of the date of sale or lease:
    (A) The purchaser's name and address,
    (B) The entire tire identification number of the tire(s) sold or 
leased to the tire purchaser, and
    (C) The distributor's or dealer's name and street address. In lieu 
of the street address, and if one is available, the distributor or 
dealer's e-mail address or Web site may be recorded. Other means of 
identifying the distributor or dealer known to the manufacturer may also 
be used.
    (iii) Electronically transmit the following information on the tire 
registration form by any means listed on the form by the tire 
manufacturer, or by such other means as may be authorized by the tire 
manufacturer, to the tire manufacturer or its designee, using secure 
means (e.g., https on the Web), at no charge to the tire purchaser and 
within 30 days of the date of sale or lease:
    (A) The purchaser's name and address,
    (B) The entire tire identification number of the tire(s) sold or 
leased to the tire purchaser, and
    (C) The distributor's or dealer's name and street address. In lieu 
of the street address, and if one is available, the distributor or 
dealer's e-mail address or Web site may be recorded. Other means of 
identifying the distributor or dealer known to the manufacturer may also 
be used.
    (2) Each independent distributor or dealer that complies with 
paragraph (a)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section shall use either the tire 
registration forms provided by the tire manufacturers pursuant to Sec.  
574.7(a) or registration forms obtained from another source. Paper forms 
obtained from other sources must comply with the requirements specified 
in Sec.  574.7(a) for forms provided by tire manufacturers to 
independent distributors and dealers.
    (3) Multiple tire sales or leases by the same tire purchaser may be 
recorded on a single paper registration form or in a single Web site 
transaction.
    (4) Each independent distributor or dealer that is complying with 
paragraph (a)(1)(iii) with respect to a sale or lease shall include a 
statement to that effect on the invoice for that sale or lease and 
provide the invoice to the tire purchaser.
    (b) Other distributors and dealers.
    (1) Each distributor and each dealer, other than an independent 
distributor or dealer, selling new tires to tire purchasers:
    (i) shall submit, using paper registration forms or, if authorized 
by the tire manufacturer, secure electronic means, the information 
specified in Sec.  574.7(a)(4) to the manufacturer of the tires sold, or 
to the manufacturer's designee.
    (ii) shall submit the information specified in Sec.  574.7(a)(4) to 
the tire manufacturer or the manufacturer's designee, not less often 
than every 30 days. A distributor or dealer selling fewer than 40 tires 
of all makes, types and sizes during a 30 day period may wait until a 
total of 40 new tires is sold. In no event may more than six months 
elapse before the Sec.  574.7(a)(4) information is forwarded to the 
respective tire manufacturers or their designees.
    (c) Each distributor and each dealer selling new tires to other tire 
distributors or dealers shall supply to the distributor or dealer a 
means to record the information specified in Sec.  574.7(a)(4), unless 
such means has been provided to that distributor or dealer by another 
person or by a manufacturer.
    (d) Each distributor and each dealer shall immediately stop selling 
any group of tires when so directed by a notification issued pursuant to 
49 U.S.C. 30118, Notification of defects and noncompliance.

[73 FR 72368, Nov. 28, 2008]



Sec.  574.9  Requirements for motor vehicle dealers.

    (a) Each motor vehicle dealer who sells a used motor vehicle for 
purposes other than resale, who leases a motor

[[Page 183]]

vehicle for more than 60 days, that is equipped with new tires is 
considered, for purposes of this part, to be a tire dealer and shall 
meet the requirements specified in Sec.  574.8.
    (b) Each person selling a motor vehicle to first purchasers for 
purposes other than resale, that is equipped with new tires that were 
not on the motor vehicle when shipped by the vehicle manufacturer is 
considered a tire dealer for purposes of this part and shall meet the 
requirements specified in Sec.  574.8.

(Authority: Secs. 103, 108, 112, 119, 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 
(15 U.S.C. 1392, 1397, 1401, 1407, 1421); secs. 102, 103, 104, Pub. L. 
93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1411-1420); 92 Stat. 2689 (15 U.S.C. 
1418); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51)

[44 FR 7964, Feb. 8, 1979]



Sec.  574.10  Requirements for motor vehicle manufacturers.

    Each motor vehicle manufacturer, or his designee, shall maintain a 
record of the new tires on or in each vehicle shipped by him or a motor 
vehicle distributor or dealer, and shall maintain a record of the name 
and address of the first purchaser for purposes other than resale of 
each vehicle equipped with such tires. These records shall be maintained 
for a period of not less than 5 years from the date of sale of the 
vehicle to the first purchaser for purposes other than resale.

(Authority: Secs. 103, 108, 112, 119, 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 
(15 U.S.C. 1392, 1397, 1401, 1407, 1421); secs. 102, 103, 104, Pub. L. 
93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1411-1420); 92 Stat. 2689 (15 U.S.C. 
1418); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51)

[44 FR 7964, Feb. 8, 1979, as amended at 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]



PART 575_CONSUMER INFORMATION--Table of Contents




   Subpart A_Regulations Issued Under Section 112(d) of the National 
              Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act; General

Sec.
575.1 Scope.
575.2 Definitions.
575.3 Matter incorporated by reference.
575.4 Application.
575.5 Separability.
575.6 Requirements.
575.7 Special vehicles.

            Subpart B_Regulations; Consumer Information Items

575.101-575.102 [Reserved]
575.103 Truck-camper loading.
575.104 Uniform tire quality grading standards.
575.105 Vehicle rollover.

    Subpart C_Transportation Recall Enhancement, Accountability, and 
                 Documentation Act; Consumer Information

575.201 Child restraint performance.

 Subpart D_Safe, Accountable, Flexible, Efficient Transportation Equity 
       Act: A Legacy for Users (SAFETEA	LU); Consumer Information

575.301 Vehicle Labeling of Safety Rating Information.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 32302, 30111, 301115, 30117, 30166, and 30168, 
Pub. L. 104-414, 114 Stat. 1800, Pub. L. 109-59, 119 Stat. 1144, 15 
U.S.C. 1232(g); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.



   Subpart A_Regulations Issued Under Section 112(d) of the National 
              Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act; General

    Source: 35 FR 6867, Apr. 30, 1970, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  575.1  Scope.

    This part contains Federal Motor Vehicle Consumer Information 
Regulations established under section 112(d) of the National Traffic and 
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 (15 U.S.C. 1401(d)) (hereinafter ``the 
Act'').



Sec.  575.2  Definitions.

    (a) Statutory definitions. All terms used in this part that are 
defined in section 102 of the Act are used as defined in the Act.
    (b) Motor Vehicle Safety Standard definitions. Unless otherwise 
indicated, all terms used in this part that are defined in the Motor 
Vehicle Safety Standards, part 571 of this subchapter (hereinafter ``the 
Standards''), are used as defined in the Standards without regard to the 
applicability of a standard in which a definition is contained.
    (c) Definitions used in this part.

[[Page 184]]

    Owner's manual means the document which contains the manufacturer's 
comprehensive vehicle operating and maintenance instructions, and which 
is intended to remain with the vehicle for the life of the vehicle.
    Skid number means the frictional resistance measured in accordance 
with American Society for Testing and Materials Method E-274 at 40 miles 
per hour, omitting water delivery as specified in paragraph 7.1 of that 
Method.

[35 FR 6867, Apr. 30, 1970, as amended at 38 FR 5339, Feb. 28, 1973; 48 
FR 44081, Sept. 27, 1983; 54 FR 48749, Nov. 27, 1989; 64 FR 27924, May 
24, 1999]



Sec.  575.3  Matter incorporated by reference.

    The incorporation by reference provisions of Sec.  571.5 of this 
subchapter apply to this part.



Sec.  575.4  Application.

    (a) General. Except as provided in paragraphs (b) through (d) of 
this section, each section set forth in subpart B of this part applies 
according to its terms to motor vehicles and tires manufactured after 
the effective date indicated.
    (b) Military vehicles. This part does not apply to motor vehicles or 
tires sold directly to the Armed Forces of the United States in 
conformity with contractual specifications.
    (c) Export. This part does not apply to motor vehicles or tires 
intended solely for export and so labeled or tagged.
    (d) Import. This part does not apply to motor vehicles or tires 
imported for purposes other than resale.

[39 FR 1039, Jan. 4, 1974]



Sec.  575.5  Separability.

    If any section established in this part or its application to any 
person or circumstances is held invalid, the remainder of the part and 
the application of that section to other persons or circumstances is not 
affected thereby.



Sec.  575.6  Requirements.

    (a)(1) At the time a motor vehicle is delivered to the first 
purchaser for purposes other than resale, the manufacturer of that 
vehicle shall provide the Uniform Tire Quality Grading information 
required by Sec.  575.104(d)(1)(iii) in the owner's manual of each 
vehicle it produces. The vehicle manufacturer shall also provide to the 
purchaser, in writing and in the English language, the information 
specified in Sec.  575.103 of this part that is applicable to that 
vehicle. The information provided with a vehicle may contain more than 
one table, but the document must either:
    (i) Clearly and unconditionally indicate which of the tables apply 
to the vehicle with which it is provided, or
    (ii) Contain a statement on its cover referring the reader to the 
vehicle certification label for specific information concerning which of 
the tables apply to that vehicle. If the manufacturer chooses option in 
paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section, the vehicle certification label 
shall include such specific information.

    Example 1. Manufacturer X furnishes a document containing several 
tables that apply to various groups of vehicles that it produces. The 
document contains the following notation on its front page: ``The 
information that applies to this vehicle is contained in Table 5.'' That 
notation satisfies the requirement.

    Example 2. Manufacturer Y furnishes a document containing several 
tables as in Example 1, with the following notation on its front page:

    ``Information applies as follows:
Model P. Regular cab, 135 in. (3,430 mm) wheel base--Table 1.
Model P. Club cab, 142 in. (3,607 mm) wheel base--Table 2.
Model Q--Table 3.''

    This notation does not satisfy the requirement, since it is 
conditioned on the model or the equipment of the vehicle with which the 
document is furnished, and therefore additional information is required 
to select the proper table.

    (2)(i) At the time a motor vehicle manufactured on or after 
September 1, 1990 is delivered to the first purchaser for purposes other 
than resale, the manufacturer shall provide to the purchaser, in writing 
in the English language and not less than 10 point type, the following 
statement in the owner's manual, or, if there is no owner's manual, on a 
one-page document:

    If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a 
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the 
National Highway Traffic Safety

[[Page 185]]

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying [INSERT NAME OF 
MANUFACTURER].
    If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, 
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it 
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become 
involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or [INSERT 
NAME OF MANUFACTURER].
    To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free 
at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; 
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, 
DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle 
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

    (ii) The manufacturer shall specify in the table of contents of the 
owner's manual the location of the statement in 575.6(a)(2)(i). The 
heading in the table of contents shall state ``Reporting Safety 
Defects.''
    (3) For vehicles manufactured prior to September 1, 2000, at the 
time a motor vehicle is delivered to the first purchaser for purposes 
other than resale, the manufacturer of that vehicle shall provide the 
purchaser, in writing and in the English language, the information 
specified in Sec. Sec.  575.103 and 575.104 of this part that is 
applicable to that vehicle and its tires. The document provided with a 
vehicle may contain more than one table, but the document must either 
clearly and unconditionally indicate which of the tables apply to the 
vehicle with which it is provided, or contain a statement on its cover 
referring the reader to the vehicle certification label for specific 
information concerning which of the tables apply to that vehicle. If the 
manufacturer chooses option (a)(2) of this section, the vehicle 
certification label shall include such specific information.

    Example 1. Manufacturer X furnishes a document containing several 
tables, which apply to various groups of vehicles that it produces. The 
document contains the following notation on its front page: ``The 
information that applies to this vehicle is contained in Table 5.'' The 
notation satisfies the requirement.
    Example 2. Manufacturer Y furnishes a document containing several 
tables as in Example 1, with the following notation on its front page: 
Information applies as follows:
    Model P, 6-cylinder engine--Table 1.
    Model P, 8-cylinder engine--Table 2.
    Model Q--Table 3.
    This notation does not satisfy the requirement, since it is 
conditioned on the model or the equipment of the vehicle with which the 
document is furnished, and therefore additional information is required 
to select the proper table.

    (4) When a motor vehicle that has a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, 
except a motorcycle or low speed vehicle, and that is manufactured on or 
after September 1, 2005, is delivered to the first purchaser for 
purposes other than resale, the manufacturer shall provide to the 
purchaser, in writing in the English language and not less than 10 point 
type, a discussion of the items specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) 
through (v) of this section in the owner's manual, or, if there is no 
owner's manual, in a document:
    (i) Tire labeling, including a description and explanation of each 
marking on the tires provided with the vehicle, and information about 
the location of the Tire Identification Number (TIN);
    (ii) Recommended tire inflation pressure, including a description 
and explanation of:
    (A) Recommended cold tire inflation pressure,
    (B) The vehicle placard and tire inflation pressure label specified 
in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 110 and their location in 
the vehicle,
    (C) Adverse safety consequences of underinflation (including tire 
failure), and
    (D) Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper 
inflation;
    (iii) Glossary of tire terminology, including ``cold tire 
pressure,'' ``maximum inflation pressure,'' and ``recommended inflation 
pressure,'' and all non-technical terms defined in S3 of FMVSS Nos. 110 
& 139;
    (iv) Tire care, including maintenance and safety practices;
    (v) Vehicle load limits, including a description and explanation of:
    (A) Locating and understanding load limit information, total load 
capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity, and cargo capacity,
    (B) Calculating total and cargo load capacities with varying seating 
configurations including quantitative examples showing/illustrating how 
the vehicle's cargo and luggage capacity

[[Page 186]]

decreases as the combined number and size of occupants increases,
    (C) Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capabilities,
    (D) Adverse safety consequences of overloading on handling and 
stopping and on tires.
    (5) When a motor vehicle that has a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, 
except a motorcycle or low speed vehicle, and that is manufactured on or 
after September 1, 2005, is delivered to the first purchaser for 
purposes other than resale, the manufacturer shall provide to the 
purchaser, in writing in the English language and not less than 10 point 
type, the following verbatim statement, as applicable, in the owner's 
manual, or, if there is no owner's manual, in a document:
    (i) For vehicles except trailers: ``Steps for Determining Correct 
Load Limit--
    (1) Locate the statement ``The combined weight of occupants and 
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's 
placard.
    (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that 
will be riding in your vehicle.
    (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from 
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
    (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and 
luggage load capacity. For example, if the ``XXX'' amount equals 1400 
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the 
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
    (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded 
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo 
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
    (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer 
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine 
how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your 
vehicle.''
    (ii) For trailers: ``Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit--
    (1) Locate the statement ``The weight of cargo should never exceed 
XXX kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.
    (2) This figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage 
load capacity.''
    (3) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded 
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo 
and luggage load capacity.
    (b) At the time a motor vehicle tire is delivered to the first 
purchaser for a purpose other than resale, the manufacturer of that 
tire, or in the case of a tire marketed under a brand name, the brand 
name owner, shall provide to that purchaser the information specified in 
subpart B of this part that is applicable to that tire.
    (c) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles, each brand name owner of 
tires, and each manufacturer of tires for which there is no brand name 
owner shall provide for examination by prospective purchasers, at each 
location where its vehicles or tires are offered for sale by a person 
with whom the manufacturer or brand name owner has a contractual, 
proprietary, or other legal relationship, or by a person who has such a 
relationship with a distributor of the manufacturer or brand name owner 
concerning the vehicle or tire in question, the information specified in 
subpart B of this part that is applicable to each of the vehicles or 
tires offered for sale at that location. The information shall be 
provided without charge and in sufficient quantity to be available for 
retention by prospective purchasers or sent by mail to a prospective 
purchaser upon his request. With respect to newly introduced vehicles or 
tires, the information shall be provided for examination by prospective 
purchasers not later than the day on which the manufacturer or brand 
name owner first authorizes those vehicles or tires to be put on general 
public display and sold to consumers.
    (d)(1)(i) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this 
section, in the case of all sections of subpart B other than Sec.  
575.104, as they apply to information submitted prior to new model 
introduction, each manufacturer of motor vehicles shall submit to the 
Administrator 2 copies of the information specified in subpart B of this 
part that is applicable to the vehicles offered for

[[Page 187]]

sale, at least 90 days before information on such vehicles is first 
provided for examination by prospective purchasers pursuant to paragraph 
(c) of this section.
    (ii) Where an unforeseen preintroduction modification in vehicle 
design or equipment results in a change in vehicle performance for a 
characteristic included in subpart B of this part, a manufacturer of 
motor vehicles may revise information previously furnished under 
paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section by submission to the Administrator 
of 2 copies of the revised information reflecting the performance 
changes, at least 30 days before information on such vehicles is first 
provided to prospective purchasers pursuant to paragraph (c) of this 
section.
    (2)(i) In the case of Sec.  575.104, each brand name owner of tires, 
and each manufacturer of tires for which there is no brand name owner 
shall submit to the Administrator 2 copies of the information specified 
in Subpart B of this part that is applicable to the tires offered for 
sale, at least 30 days before it is first provided for examination by 
prospective purchasers pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section.
    (ii) In the case of all other sections of Subpart B of this Part as 
they apply to post-introduction changes in information submitted for the 
current model year, each manufacturer of motor vehicles, each brand name 
owner of tires, and each manufacturer of tires for which there is no 
brand name owner shall submit to the Administrator 2 copies of the 
information specified in Subpart B of this part that is applicable to 
the vehicles or tires offered for sale, at least 30 days before it is 
first provided for examination by prospective purchasers pursuant to 
paragraph (c) of this section.

[39 FR 1039, Jan. 4, 1974, as amended at 41 FR 13923, Apr. 1, 1976; 45 
FR 47153, July 14, 1980; 47 FR 7258, Feb. 18, 1982; 52 FR 27810, July 
24, 1987; 54 FR 48749, Nov. 27, 1989; 64 FR 27924, May 24, 1999; 67 FR 
69631, Nov. 18, 2002; 69 FR 31320, June 3, 2004; 70 FR 35557, June 21, 
2005]



Sec.  575.7  Special vehicles.

    A manufacturer who produces vehicles having a configuration not 
available for purchase by the general public need not make available to 
ineligible purchasers, pursuant to Sec.  575.6(c), the information for 
those vehicles specified in subpart B of this part, and shall identify 
those vehicles when furnishing the information required by Sec.  
575.6(d).

[40 FR 11727, Mar. 13, 1975]



            Subpart B_Regulations; Consumer Information Items



Sec. Sec.  575.101-575.102  [Reserved]



Sec.  575.103  Truck-camper loading.

    (a) Scope. This section requires manufacturers of slide-in campers 
to affix to each camper a label that contains information relating to 
identification and proper loading of the camper and to provide more 
detailed loading information in the owner's manual. This section also 
requires manufacturers of trucks that would accommodate slide-in campers 
to specify the cargo weight ratings and the longitudinal limits within 
which the center of gravity for the cargo weight rating should be 
located.
    (b) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to provide information 
that can be used to reduce overloading and improper load placement in 
truck-camper combinations and unsafe truck- camper matching in order to 
prevent accidents resulting from the adverse effects of these conditions 
on vehicle steering and braking.
    (c) Application. This section applies to slide-in campers and to 
trucks that are capable of accommodating slide- in campers.
    (d) Definitions.
    Camper means a structure designed to be mounted in the cargo area of 
a truck, or attached to an incomplete vehicle with motive power, for the 
purpose of providing shelter for persons.
    Cargo Weight Rating means the value specified by the manufacturer as 
the cargo-carrying capacity, in pounds or kilograms, of a vehicle, 
exclusive of the weight of occupants in designated seating positions, 
computed as 68 kilograms or 150 pounds times the number of designated 
seating positions.
    Slide-in Camper means a camper having a roof, floor, and sides, 
designed to be mounted on and removable from the cargo area of a truck 
by the user.

[[Page 188]]

    (e) Requirements--(1) Slide-in Camper--(i) Labels. Each slide-in 
camper shall have permanently affixed to it, in such a manner that it 
cannot be removed without defacing or destroying it, and in a plainly 
visible location on an exterior rear surface other than the roof, steps, 
or bumper extension, a label containing the following information in the 
English language lettered in block capitals and numerals not less than 
2.4 millimeters (three thirty-seconds of an inch) high, of a color 
contrasting with the background, in the order shown below and in the 
form illustrated in Figure 1.
    (A) Name of camper manufacturer. The full corporate or individual 
name of the actual assembler of the camper shall be spelled out, except 
that such abbreviations as ``Co.'' or ``Inc.'' and their foreign 
equivalents, and the first and middle initials of individuals may be 
used. The name of the manufacturer shall be preceded by the words 
``Manufactured by'' or ``Mfd by.''
    (B) Month and year of manufacture. It may be spelled out, such as 
``June 1995'' or expressed in numerals, such as ``695.''
    (C) The following statement completed as appropriate:

    ``Camper weight is ------------ kg. (------------ lbs.) maximum when 
it contains standard equipment, ------------ liters (------------ gal.) 
of water, ------------ kg. (------------ lbs.) of bottled gas, and ----
-------- cubic meters (------------ cubic ft.) refrigerator (or icebox 
with ------------ kg. (------------ lbs.) of ice, as applicable). 
Consult owner's manual (or data sheet, as applicable) for weights of 
additional or optional equipment.''

    (D) ``Liters (or gal.) of water'' refers to the volume of water 
necessary to fill the camper's fresh water tanks to capacity. ``Kg. (or 
lbs.) of bottled gas'' refers to the amount of gas necessary to fill the 
camper's bottled gas tanks to capacity. The statement regarding a 
``refrigerator'' or ``icebox'' refers to the capacity of the 
refrigerator with which the vehicle is equipped or the weight of the ice 
with which the icebox may be filled. Any of these items may be omitted 
from the statement if the corresponding accessories are not included 
with the camper, provided that the omission is noted in the camper 
owner's manual as required in paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (ii) Owner's manual. Each slide-in camper manufacturer shall provide 
with each camper a manual or other document containing the information 
specified in paragraph (e)(1)(ii) (A) through (F) of this section.
    (A) The statement and information provided on the label as specified 
in paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this section. Instead of the information 
required by paragraphs (e)(1)(i)(B) of this section, a manufacturer may 
use the statements ``See camper identification label located (as 
applicable) for month and year of manufacture.'' If water, bottled gas, 
or refrigerator (icebox) has been omitted from this statement, the 
manufacturer's information shall note such omission and advise that the 
weight of any such item when added to the camper should be added to the 
maximum camper weight figure used in selecting an appropriate truck.
    (B) A list of other additional or optional equipment that the camper 
is designed to carry, and the maximum weight of each if its weight is 
more than 9 kg. (20 lbs) when installed.
    (C) The statement: ``To estimate the total cargo load that will be 
placed on a truck, add the weight of all passengers in the camper, the 
weight of supplies, tools, and all other cargo, the weight of installed 
additional or optional camper equipment, and the manufacturer's camper 
weight figure. Select a truck that has a cargo weight rating that is 
equal to or greater than the total cargo load of the camper and whose 
manufacturer recommends a cargo center of gravity zone that will contain 
the camper's center of gravity when it is installed.''
    (D) The statements: ``When loading this camper, store heavy gear 
first, keeping it on or close to the camper floor. Place heavy things 
far enough forward to keep the loaded camper's center of gravity within 
the zone recommended by the truck manufacturer. Store only light objects 
on high shelves. Distribute weight to obtain even side-to-side balance 
of the loaded vehicle. Secure loose items to prevent

[[Page 189]]

weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the 
truck-camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on 
the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. The load on an axle 
should not exceed its gross axle weight rating (GAWR). The total of the 
axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). 
These weight ratings are given on the vehicle certification label that 
is located on the left side of the vehicle, normally on the dash panel, 
hinge pillar, door latch post, or door edge next to the driver on trucks 
manufactured on or after January 1, 1972. If weight ratings are 
exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.''
    (E) A picture showing the location of the longitudinal center of 
gravity of the camper within an accuracy of 5 centimeters (2 inches) 
under the loaded condition specified in paragraph (e)(1)(i)(D) of this 
section in the manner illustrated in Figure 2.
    (F) A picture showing the proper match of a truck and slide-in 
camper in the form illustrated in Figure 3.
    (2) Trucks. (i) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this 
section, each manufacturer of a truck that is capable of accommodating a 
slide-in camper shall provide to the purchaser in the owner's manual or 
other document delivered with the truck, in writing and in the English 
language, the information specified in paragraphs (e)(2)(i) (A) through 
(E) of this section.
    (A) A picture showing the manufacturer's recommended longitudinal 
center of gravity zone for the cargo weight rating in the form 
illustrated in Figure 4. The boundaries of the zone shall be such that 
when a slide-in camper equal in weight to the truck's cargo weight 
rating is installed, no GAWR of the truck is exceeded.
    (B) The truck's cargo weight rating.
    (C) The statements: ``When the truck is used to carry a slide-in 
camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer's 
camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper 
equipment not included in the manufacturer's camper weight figure, the 
weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper. The 
total cargo load should not exceed the truck's cargo weight rating and 
the camper's center of gravity should fall within the truck's 
recommended center of gravity zone when installed.''
    (D) A picture showing the proper match of a truck and slide-in 
camper in the form illustrated in Figure 3.
    (E) The statements: ``Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts 
that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is 
loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels 
separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not 
exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the 
axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). 
These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label that is 
located on the left side of the vehicle, normally the dash, hinge 
pillar, door latch post, or door edge next to the driver. If weight 
ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below 
the ratings.''
    (ii) If a truck would accommodate a slide-in camper but the 
manufacturer of the truck recommends that the truck not be used for that 
purpose, the information specified in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this 
section shall not be provided but instead the manufacturer shall provide 
a statement that the truck should not be used to carry a slide-in 
camper.

                  MFD. BY: (CAMPER MANUFACTURER'S NAME)

(MONTH AND YEAR OF MANUFACTURE)
    CAMPER WEIGHT IS ------------ KG (------------ LB) MAXIMUM WHEN IT 
CONTAINS STANDARD EQUIPMENT, ------------ LITERS (------------ GAL) OF 
WATER, ------------ KG (------------ LB) OF BOTTLED GAS, AND ----------
-- CUBIC METERS (------------ CUBIC FT) REFRIGERATOR (OR ICEBOX WITH --
---------- KG (------------ LB) OF ICE, AS APPLICABLE). CONSULT OWNER'S 
MANUAL (OR DATA SHEET AS APPLICABLE) FOR WEIGHTS OF ADDITIONAL OR 
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT.

[[Page 190]]

                       Figure 1. Label for Camper
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.181


[[Page 191]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.182


[[Page 192]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.183


[61 FR 36657, July 12, 1996, as amended at 70 FR 39970, July 12, 2005]

[[Page 193]]



Sec.  575.104  Uniform tire quality grading standards.

    (a) Scope. This section requires motor vehicle and tire 
manufacturers and tire brand name owners to provide information 
indicating the relative performance of passenger car tires in the areas 
of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
    (b) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to aid the consumer in 
making an informed choice in the purchase of passenger car tires.
    (c) Application. (1) This section applies to new pneumatic tires for 
use on passenger cars. However, this section does not apply to deep 
tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, 
tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to limited 
production tires as defined in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
    (2) ``Limited production tire'' means a tire meeting all of the 
following criteria, as applicable:
    (i) The annual domestic production or importation into the United 
States by the tire's manufacturer of tires of the same design and size 
as the tire does not exceed 15,000 tires;
    (ii) In the case of a tire marketed under a brand name, the annual 
domestic purchase or importation into the United States by a brand name 
owner of tires of the same design and size as the tire does not exceed 
15,000 tires;
    (iii) The tire's size was not listed as a vehicle manufacturer's 
recommended tire size designation for a new motor vehicle produced in or 
imported into the United States in quantities greater than 10,000 during 
the calendar year preceeding the year of the tire's manufacture; and
    (iv) The total annual domestic production or importation into the 
United States by the tire's manufacturer, and in the case of a tire 
marketed under a brand name, the total annual domestic purchase or 
purchase for importation into the United States by the tire's brand name 
owner, of tires meeting the criteria of paragraphs (c)(2) (i), (ii), and 
(iii) of this section, does not exceed 35,000 tires.

Tire design is the combination of general structural characteristics, 
materials, and tread pattern, but does include cosmetic, identifying or 
other minor variations among tires.
    (d) Requirements--(1) Information. (i) Each manufacturer of tires, 
or in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, each brand name 
owner, shall provide grading information for each tire of which he is 
the manufacturer or brand name owner in the manner set forth in 
paragraphs (d)(1)(i) (A) and (B) of this section. The grades for each 
tire shall be only those specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. 
Each tire shall be able to achieve the level of performance represented 
by each grade with which it is labeled. An individual tire need not, 
however, meet further requirements after having been subjected to the 
test for any one grade.
    (A) Except for a tire of a new tire line, manufactured within the 
first six months of production of the tire line, each tire shall be 
graded with the words, letters, symbols, and figures specified in 
paragraph (d)(2) of this section, permanently molded into or onto the 
tire sidewall between the tire's maximum section width and shoulder in 
accordance with one of the methods described in Figure 1. For purposes 
of this paragraph, new tire line shall mean a group of tires differing 
substantially in construction, materials, or design from those 
previously sold by the manufacturer or brand name owner of the tires. As 
used in this paragraph, the term ``construction'' refers to the internal 
structure of the tire (e.g., cord angles, number and placement of 
breakers), ``materials'' refers to the substances used in manufacture of 
the tire (e.g., belt fiber, rubber compound), and ``design'' refers to 
properties or conditions imposed by the tire mold (e.g., aspect ratio, 
tread pattern).
    (B) Each tire manufactured on and after the effective date of these 
amendments, other than a tire sold as original equipment on a new 
vehicle, shall have affixed to its tread surface so as not to be easily 
removable a label or labels containing its grades and other information 
in the form illustrated in Figure 2, Parts I and II. The treadwear grade 
attributed to the tire shall be either imprinted or indelibly stamped on 
the label containing the material in Part I of Figure 2, directly to the 
right of or below the word ``TREADWEAR.''

[[Page 194]]

The traction grade attributed to the tire shall be indelibly circled in 
an array of the potential grade letters AA, A, B, or C, directly to the 
right of or below the word ``TRACTION'' in Part I of Figure 2. The 
temperature resistance grade attributed to the tire shall be indelibly 
circled in an array of the potential grade letters A, B, or C, directly 
to the right of or below the word ``TEMPERATURE'' in Part I of Figure 2. 
The words ``TREADWEAR,'' ``TRACTION,'' AND ``TEMPERATURE,'' in that 
order, may be laid out vertically or horizontally. The text of Part II 
of Figure 2 may be printed in capital letters. The text of Part I and 
the text of Part II of Figure 2 need not appear on the same label, but 
the edges of the two texts must be positioned on the tire tread so as to 
be separated by a distance of no more than one inch. If the text of Part 
I and the text of Part II of Figure 2 are placed on separate labels, the 
notation ``See EXPLANATION OF DOT QUALITY GRADES'' shall be added to the 
bottom of the Part I text, and the words ``EXPLANATION OF DOT QUALITY 
GRADES'' shall appear at the top of the Part II text. The text of Figure 
2 shall be oriented on the tire tread surface with lines of type running 
perpendicular to the tread circumference. If a label bearing a tire size 
designation is attached to the tire tread surface and the tire size 
designation is oriented with lines type running perpendicular to the 
tread circumference, the text of Figure 2 shall read in the same 
direction as the tire size designation.
    (ii) In the case of the information required by Sec.  575.6(c) to be 
furnished to prospective purchasers of tires, each tire manufacturer or 
brand name owner shall, as part of that information, list all possible 
grades for traction and temperature resistance, and restate verbatim the 
explanation for each performance area specified in Figure 2. The 
information need not be in the same format as in Figure 2. The 
information must indicate clearly and unambiguously the grade in each 
performance area for each tire of that manufacturer or brand name owner 
offered for sale at the particular location.
    (iii) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles equipped with passenger 
car tires shall include in the owner's manual of each such vehicle a 
list of all possible grades for traction and temperature resistance and 
restate verbatim the explanation for each performance area specified in 
Figure 2, Part II. The information need not be in the exact format of 
Figure 2, Part II, but it must contain a statement referring the reader 
to the tire sidewall for the specific tire grades for the tires with 
which the vehicle is equipped, as follows:

                      Uniform Tire Quality Grading

    Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall 
between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

                 Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

    (iv) In the case of information required in accordance with Sec.  
575.6(a) to be furnished to the first purchaser of a new motor vehicle, 
each manufacturer of motor vehicles shall, as part of the required 
information, list all possible grades for traction and temperature 
resistance and restate verbatim the explanation for each performance 
area specified in Figure 2 to this section. The information need not be 
in the format of Figure 2 to this section, but it must contain a 
statement referring the reader to the tire sidewall for the specific 
tire grades for the tires with which the vehicle is equipped.
    (2) Performance--(i) Treadwear. Each tire shall be graded for 
treadwear performance with the word ``TREADWEAR'' followed by a number 
of two or three digits representing the tire's grade for treadwear, 
expressed as a percentage of the NHTSA nominal treadwear value, when 
tested in accordance with the conditions and procedures specified in 
paragraph (e) of this section. Treadwear grades shall be expressed in 
multiples of 20 (for example, 80, 120, 160).
    (ii) Traction. Each tire shall be graded for traction performance 
with the word ``TRACTION,'' followed by the symbols AA, A, B, or C, when 
the tire is tested in accordance with the conditions and

[[Page 195]]

procedures specified in paragraph (f) of this section.
    (A) The tire shall be graded C when the adjusted traction 
coefficient is either:
    (1) 0.38 or less when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of 
this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of 
this section, or
    (2) 0.26 or less when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of 
this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of 
this section.
    (B) The tire may be graded B only when its adjusted traction 
coefficient is both:
    (1) More than 0.38 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) 
of this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) 
of this section, and
    (2) More than 0.26 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) 
of this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) 
of this section.
    (C) The tire may be graded A only when its adjusted traction 
coefficient is both:
    (1) More than 0.47 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) 
of this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) 
of this section, and
    (2) More than 0.35 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) 
of this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) 
of this section.
    (D) The tire may be graded AA only when its adjusted traction 
coefficient is both:
    (1) More than 0.54[mu] when tested in accordance with paragraph 
(f)(2) of this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph 
(f)(1)(i) of this section; and
    (2) More than 0.38[mu] when tested in accordance with paragraph 
(f)(2) of this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph 
(f)(1)(i) of this section.
    (iii) Temperature resistance. Each tire shall be graded for 
temperature resistance performance with the word ``TEMPERATURE'' 
followed by the letter A, B, or C, based on its performance when the 
tire is tested in accordance with the procedures specified in paragraph 
(g) of this section. A tire shall be considered to have successfully 
completed a test stage in accordance with this paragraph if, at the end 
of the test stage, it exhibits no visual evidence of tread, sidewall, 
ply, cord, innerliner, or bead separation, chunking, broken cords, 
cracking or open splices as defined in Sec.  571.109 of this chapter, 
and the tire pressure is not less than the pressure specified in 
paragraph (g)(1) of this section.
    (A) The tire shall be graded C if it fails to complete the 500 rpm 
test stage specified in paragraph (g)(9) of this section.
    (B) The tire may be graded B only if it successfully completes the 
500 rpm test stage specified in paragraph (g)(9) of this section.
    (C) The tire may be graded A only if it successfully completes the 
575 rpm test stage specified in paragraph (g)(9) of this section.
    (e) Treadwear grading conditions and procedures--(1) Conditions. (i) 
Tire treadwear performance is evaluated on a specific roadway course 
approximately 400 miles in length, which is established by the NHTSA 
both for its own compliance testing and for that of regulated persons. 
The course is designed to produce treadwear rates that are generally 
representative of those encountered by tires in public use. The course 
and driving procedures are described in appendix A of this section.
    (ii) Treadwear grades are evaluated by first measuring the 
performance of a candidate tire on the government test course, and then 
correcting the projected mileages obtained to account for environmental 
variations on the basis of the performance of the course monitoring 
tires run in the same convoy.
    (iii) In convoy tests, each vehicle in the same convoy, except for 
the lead vehicle, is throughout the test within human eye range of the 
vehicle immediately ahead of it.
    (iv) A test convoy consists of two or four passenger cars, light 
trucks, or MPVs, each with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less.
    (v) On each convoy vehicle, all tires are mounted on identical rims 
of design or measuring rim width specified for tires of that size in 
accordance with

[[Page 196]]

49 CFR 571.109, S4.4.1 (a) or (b), or a rim having a width within -0 to 
+0.50 inches of the width listed.
    (2) Treadwear grading procedure. (i) Equip a convoy as follows: 
Place four course monitoring tires on one vehicle. Place four candidate 
tires with identical size designations on each other vehicle in the 
convoy. On each axle, place tires that are identical with respect to 
manufacturer and line.
    (ii) Inflate each candidate and each course monitoring tire to the 
applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section.
    (iii) Load each vehicle so that the load on each course monitoring 
and candidate tire is 85 percent of the test load specified in Sec.  
575.104(h).
    (iv) Adjust wheel alignment to the midpoint of the vehicle 
manufacturer's specifications, unless adjustment to the midpoint is not 
recommended by the manufacturer; in that case, adjust the alignment to 
the manufacturer's recommended setting. In all cases, the setting is 
within the tolerance specified by the manufacturer of the alignment 
machine.
    (v) Subject candidate and course monitoring tires to ``break-in'' by 
running the tires in the convoy for two circuits of the test roadway 
(800 miles). At the end of the first circuit, rotate each vehicle's 
tires by moving each front tire to the same side of the rear axle and 
each rear tire to the opposite side of the front axle. Visually inspect 
each tire for any indication of abnormal wear, tread separation, bulging 
of the sidewall, or any sign of tire failure. Void the grading results 
from any tire with any of these anomalies, and replace the tire.
    (vi) After break-in, allow the air pressure in the tires to fall to 
the applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section or for 2 
hours, whichever occurs first. Measure, to the nearest 0.001 inch, the 
tread depth of each candidate and each course monitoring tire, avoiding 
treadwear indicators, at six equally spaced points in each groove. For 
each tire compute the average of the measurements. Do not measure those 
shoulder grooves which are not provided with treadwear indicators.
    (vii) Adjust wheel alignment to the midpoint of the manufacturer's 
specifications, unless adjustment to the midpoint is not recommended by 
the manufacturer; in that case, adjust the alignment according to the 
manufacturer's recommended setting. In all cases, the setting is within 
the tolerance specified by the manufacturer of the alignment machine.
    (viii) Drive the convoy on the test roadway for 6,400 miles.
    (A) After each 400 miles, rotate each vehicle's tires by moving each 
front tire to the same side of the rear axle and each rear tire to the 
opposite side of the front axle. Visually inspect each tire for 
treadwear anomalies.
    (B) After each 800 miles, rotate the vehicles in the convoy by 
moving the last vehicle to the lead position. Do not rotate driver 
positions within the convoy. In four-car convoys, vehicle one shall 
become vehicle two, vehicle two shall become vehicle three, vehicle 
three shall become vehicle four, and vehicle four shall become vehicle 
one.
    (C) After each 800 miles, if necessary, adjust wheel alignment to 
the midpoint of the vehicle manufacturer's specification, unless 
adjustment to the midpoint is not recommended by the manufacturer; in 
that case, adjust the alignment to the manufacturer's recommended 
setting. In all cases, the setting is within the tolerance specified by 
the manufacturer of the alignment machine.
    (D) After each 800 miles, if determining the projected mileage by 
the 9-point method set forth in (e)(2)(ix)(A)(1), measure the average 
tread depth of each tire following the procedure set forth in paragraph 
(e)(2)(vi) of this section.
    (E) After each 1,600 miles, move the complete set of four tires to 
the following vehicle. Move the tires on the last vehicle to the lead 
vehicle. In moving the tires, rotate them as set forth in 
(e)(2)(viii)(A) of this section.
    (F) At the end of the test, measure the tread depth of each tire 
pursuant to the procedure set forth in paragraph (e)(2)(vi) of this 
section.
    (ix)(A) Determine the projected mileage for each candidate tire 
either by the nine-point method of least squares set forth in paragraph 
(e)(2)(ix)(A)(1) of this section and appendix C to this section, or by 
the two-point arithmetical

[[Page 197]]

method set forth in paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(A)(2) of this section. Notify 
NHTSA about which of the alternative grading methods is being used.
    (1) Nine-Point Method of Least Squares. For each course monitoring 
and candidate tire in the convoy, using the average tread depth 
measurements obtained in accordance with paragraphs (e)(2)(vi) and 
(e)(2)(viii)(D) of this section and the corresponding mileages as data 
points, apply the method of least squares as described in appendix C to 
this section to determine the estimated regression line of y on x given 
by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.184

Where:

y = average tread depth in mils
x = miles after break-in,
a = y intercept of regression line (reference tread depth) in mils, 
calculated using the method of least squares; and
b = the slope of the regression line in mils of tread depth per 1,000 
miles, calculated using the method of least squares. This slope will be 
negative in value. The tire's wear rate is defined as the absolute value 
of the slope of the regression line.

    (2) Two-Point Arithmetical Method. For each course monitoring and 
candidate tire in the convoy, using the average tread depth measurements 
obtained in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(vi) and (e)(2)(viii)(F) of 
this section and the corresponding mileages as data points, determine 
the slope (m) of the tire's wear in mils of tread depth per 1,000 miles 
by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.185

Where:

Yo = average tread depth after break-in, mils
Y1 = average tread depth at 6,400 miles, mils
Xo = 0 miles (after break-in).
X1 = 6,400 miles of travel

This slope (m) will be negative in value. The tire's wear rate is 
defined as the slope (m) expressed in mils per 1,000 miles.

    (B) Average the wear rates of the four course monitoring tires as 
determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(A) of this section.
    (C) Determine the course severity adjustment factor by dividing the 
base course wear rate for the course monitoring tires (see Note to this 
paragraph) by the average wear rate for the four course monitoring 
tires.

    Note to paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(C): The base wear rate for the course 
monitoring tires will be obtained by the government by running ASTM E-
1136 course monitoring tires for 6,400 miles over the San Angelo, Texas, 
UTQGS test route 4 times per year, then using the average wear rate from 
the last 4 quarterly CMT tests for the base course wear rate 
calculation. Each new base course wear rate will be filed in the DOT 
Docket Management section. This value will be furnished to the tester by 
the government at the time of the test. The course monitoring tires used 
in a test convoy must be no more than one year old at the commencement 
of the test and must be used within two months after removal from 
storage.

    (D) Determine the adjusted wear rate for each candidate tire by 
multiplying its wear rate determined in accordance with paragraph 
(e)(2)(ix)(A) of this section by the course severity adjustment factor 
determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(C) of this section.
    (E) Determine the projected mileage for each candidate tire by 
applying the appropriate formula set forth below:
    (1) If the projected mileage is calculated pursuant to paragraph 
(e)(2)(ix)(A)(1) of this section, then:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.186

Where:

a = y intercept of regression line (reference tread depth) for the 
candidate tire as determined in accordance with paragraph 
(e)(2)(ix)(A)(1) of this section.
b\1\ = the adjusted wear rate for the candidate tire as determined in 
accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(D) of this section.

    (2) If the projected mileage is calculated pursuant to 
(e)(2)(ix)(a)(2) of this section, then:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07SE99.000

Where:

Yo = average tread depth after break-in, mils
mc = the adjusted wear rate for the candidate tires as determined in 
accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(D) of this section.

    (F) Compute the grade (P) of the NHTSA nominal treadwear value for

[[Page 198]]

each candidate tire by using the following formula:

P = Projected mileage x base course wear raten/402

    Where base course wear raten = new base course wear rate, 
i.e., average treadwear of the last 4 quarterly course monitoring tire 
tests conducted by NHTSA.

    Round off the percentage to the nearest lower 20-point increment.
    (f) Traction grading conditions and procedures--(1) Conditions. (i) 
Tire traction performance is evaluated on skid pads that are 
established, and whose severity is monitored, by the NHTSA both for its 
compliance testing and for that of regulated persons. The test pavements 
are asphalt and concrete surfaces constructed in accordance with the 
specifications for pads ``C'' and ``A'' in the ``Manual for the 
Construction and Maintenance of Skid Surfaces,'' National Technical 
Information Service No. DOT-HS-800-814. The surfaces have locked wheel 
traction coefficients when evaluated in accordance with paragraphs 
(f)(2)(i) through (f)(2)(vii) of this section of 0.50 0.10 for the asphalt and 0.35 0.10 
for the concrete. The location of the skid pads is described in appendix 
B to this section.
    (ii) The standard tire is the American Society for Testing and 
Materials (ASTM) E 501 ``Standard Tire for Pavement Skid Resistance 
Tests.''
    (iii) The pavement surface is wetted in accordance with paragraph 
3.5, ``Pavement Wetting System,'' of ASTM Method E 274-79, ``Skid 
Resistance of Paved Surfaces Using a Full-Scale Tire.''
    (iv) The test apparatus is a test trailer built in conformity with 
the specifications in paragraph 3, ``Apparatus,'' of ASTM Method E 274-
79, and instrumented in accordance with paragraph 3.3.2 of that method, 
except that ``wheel load'' in paragraph 3.2.2 and tire and rim 
specifications in paragraph 3.2.3 of that method are as specified in the 
procedures in paragraph (f)(2) of this section for standard and 
candidate tires.
    (v) The test apparatus is calibrated in accordance with ASTM Method 
F 377-74, ``Standard Method for Calibration of Braking Force for Testing 
of Pneumatic Tires'' with the trailer's tires inflated to 24 psi and 
loaded to 1,085 pounds.
    (vi) Consecutive tests on the same surface are conducted not less 
than 30 seconds apart.
    (vii) A standard tire is discarded in accordance with ASTM Method E 
501.
    (2) Procedure. (i) Prepare two standard tires as follows:
    (A) Condition the tires by running them for 200 miles on a pavement 
surface.
    (B) Mount each tire on a rim of design or measuring rim width 
specified for tires of its size in accordance with 49 CFR 571.109, 
S4.4.1 (a) or (b), or a rim having a width within -0 to +0.50 inches of 
the width listed. Then inflate the tire to 24 psi, or, in the case of a 
tire with inflation pressure measured in kilopascals, to 180 kPa.
    (C) Statically balance each tire-rim combination.
    (D) Allow each tire to cool to ambient temperature and readjust its 
inflation pressure to 24 psi, or, in the case of a tire with inflation 
pressure measured in kilopascals, to 180 kPa.
    (ii) Mount the tires on the test apparatus described in paragraph 
(f)(1)(iv) of this section and load each tire to 1,085 pounds.
    (iii) Tow the trailer on the asphalt test surface specified in 
paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section at a speed of 40 mph, lock one 
trailer wheel, and record the locked-wheel traction coefficient on the 
tire associated with that wheel between 0.5 and 1.5 seconds after 
lockup.
    (iv) Repeat the test on the concrete surface, locking the same 
wheel.
    (v) Repeat the tests specified in paragraphs (f)(2) (iii) and (iv) 
of this section for a total of 10 measurements on each test surface.
    (vi) Repeat the procedures specified in paragraphs (f)(2) (iii) 
through (v) of this section, locking the wheel associated with the other 
tire.
    (vii) Average the 20 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to 
find the standard tire traction coefficient for the asphalt surface. 
Average the 20 measurements taken on the concrete

[[Page 199]]

surface to find the standard tire traction coefficient for the concrete 
surface. The standard tire traction coefficient so determined may be 
used in the computation of adjusted traction coefficients for more than 
one candidate tire.
    (viii) Prepare two candidate tires of the same construction type, 
manufacturer, line, and size designation in accordance with paragraph 
(f)(2)(i) of this section, mount them on the test apparatus, and test 
one of them according to the procedures of paragraph (f)(2)(ii) through 
(v) of this section, except load each tire to 85% of the test load 
specified in Sec.  575.104(h). For CT tires, the test inflation of 
candidate tires shall be 230 kPa. Candidate tire measurements may be 
taken either before or after the standard tire measurements used to 
compute the standard tire traction coefficient. Take all standard tire 
and candidate tire measurements used in computation of a candidate 
tire's adjusted traction coefficient within a single three hour period. 
Average the 10 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to find the 
candidate tire traction coefficient for the asphalt surface. Average the 
10 measurements taken on the concrete surface to find the candidate tire 
traction coefficient for the concrete surface.
    (ix) Compute a candidate tire's adjusted traction coefficient for 
asphalt ([mu]a) by the following formula:

([mu]a) = Measured candidate tire coefficient for 
    asphalt+0.50 -Measured standard tire coefficient for asphalt

    (x) Compute a candidate tire's adjusted traction coefficient for 
concrete ([mu]c) by the following formula:

[mu]c=Measured candidate tire coefficient for concrete +0.35 
    [mu]Measured standard tire coefficient for concrete

    (g) Temperature resistance grading. (1) Mount the tire on a rim of 
design or measuring rim width specified for tires of its size in 
accordance with Sec.  571.109, paragraph S4.4.1 (a) or (b) and inflate 
it to the applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section.
    (2) Condition the tire-rim assembly to a temperature of 95 [deg]F 
for at least 3 hours.
    (3) Adjust the pressure again to the applicable pressure specified 
in Table 1 of this section.
    (4) Mount the tire-rim assembly on an axle, and press the tire tread 
against the surface of a flat-faced steel test wheel that is 67.23 
inches in diameter and at least as wide as the section width of the 
tire.
    (5) During the test, including the pressure measurements specified 
in paragraphs (g) (1) and (3) of this section, maintain the temperature 
of the ambient air, as measured 12 inches from the edge of the rim 
flange at any point on the circumference on either side of the tire at 
95 [deg]F. Locate the temperature sensor so that its readings are not 
affected by heat radiation, drafts, variations in the temperature of the 
surrounding air, or guards or other devices.
    (6) Press the tire against the test wheel with a load of 88 percent 
of the tire's maximum load rating as marked on the tire sidewall.
    (7) Rotate the test wheel at 250 rpm for 2 hours.
    (8) Remove the load, allow the tire to cool to 95 [deg]F or for 2 
hours, whichever occurs last, and readjust the inflation pressure to the 
applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section.
    (9) Reapply the load and without interruption or readjustment of 
inflation pressure, rotate the test wheel at 375 rpm for 30 minutes, and 
then at successively higher rates in 25 rpm increments, each for 30 
minutes, until the tire has run at 575 rpm for 30 minutes, or to 
failure, whichever occurs first.

                                                            Table I--Test Inflation Pressures
                                             [Maximum permissible inflation pressure for the following test]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                 Tires other than CT tires                             CT tires
                                                              ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                          Test type                                        psi                            kPa                             kPa
                                                              ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 32     36     40     60    240    280    300    340    350    290    330    350    390
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Treadwear test...............................................     24     28     32     52    180    220    180    220    180    230    270    230    270
Temperature resistant test...................................     30     34     38     58    220    260    220    260    220    270    310    270    310
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 200]]

    (h) Determination of test load. (1) To determine test loads for 
purposes of paragraphs (e)(2)(iii) and (f)(2)(viii), follow the 
procedure set forth in paragraphs (h) (2) through (5) of this section.
    (2) Determine the tire's maximum inflation pressure and maximum load 
rating both as specified on the tire's sidewall.
    (3) Determine the appropriate multiplier corresponding to the tire's 
maximum inflation pressure, as set forth in Table 2.
    (4) Multiply the tire's maximum load rating by the multiplier 
determined in paragraph (h)(3). This is the tire's calculated load.
    (5) Round the product determined in paragraph (h)(4) (the calculated 
load) to the nearest multiple of ten pounds or, if metric units are 
used, 5 kilograms. For example, 903 pounds would be rounded to 900 and 
533 kilograms would be rounded to 535. This figure is the test load.

                                 Table 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  Multiplier  Multiplier
                                                  to be used  to be used
           Maximum inflation pressure                 for         for
                                                   treadwear   traction
                                                    testing     testing
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                        Tires other than CT tires
------------------------------------------------------------------------
32 psi..........................................        .851        .851
36 psi..........................................        .870        .797
40 psi..........................................        .883        .753
240 kPa.........................................        .866        .866
280 kPa.........................................        .887        .804
300 kPa.........................................        .866        .866
340 kPa.........................................        .887        .804
350 kPa.........................................        .866        .866
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                CT tires
------------------------------------------------------------------------
290 kPa.........................................        .866        .866
330 kPa.........................................        .887        .804
305 kPa.........................................        .866        .866
390 kPa.........................................        .887        .804
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                                    Table 2A
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                       Temp resistance                         Treadwear
                                                 ---------------------------          --------------------------
              Tire size designation                      Max pressure        Traction         Max pressure
                                                 ---------------------------          --------------------------
                                                     32       36       40                 32       36       40
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
145/70 R13......................................      615      650      685       523      523      553      582
155/70 R13......................................      705      740      780       599      599      629      663
165/70 R13......................................      795      835      880       676      676      710      748
175/70 R13......................................      890      935      980       757      757      795      833
185/70 R13......................................      990     1040     1090       842      842      884      926
195/70 R13......................................     1100     1155     1210       935      935      982     1029
155/70 R14......................................      740      780      815       629      629      663      693
175/70 R14......................................      925      975     1025       786      786      829      871
185/70 R14......................................     1045     1100     1155       888      888      935      982
195/70 R14......................................     1155     1220     1280       982      982     1037     1088
155/70 R15......................................      770      810      850       655      655      689      723
175/70 R15......................................      990     1040     1090       842      842      884      927
185/70 R15......................................     1100     1155     1210       935      935      982     1029
5.60-13.........................................      725      810      880       616      616      689      748
5.20-14.........................................      695      785      855       591      591      667      727
165-15..........................................      915    1,015    1,105       779      779      863      939
185/60 R 13.....................................      845      915      980       719      719      778      833
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i)-(l) [Reserved]

[[Page 201]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.196

                 Figure 2--[Part I]--DOT QUALITY GRADES

TREADWEAR

TRACTION AA A B C

TEMPERATURE A B C


[[Page 202]]


    (Part II) All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety 
Requirements in Addition to These Grades

                                Treadwear

    The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate 
of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified 
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one 
and one-half (1\1/2\) times as well on the government course as a tire 
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual 
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the 
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and 
differences in road characteristics and climate.

                                Traction

    The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. 
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as 
measured under controlled conditions on specified government test 
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction 
performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based 
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include 
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

                               Temperature

    The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing 
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to 
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified 
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the 
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive 
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to 
a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the 
Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher 
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum 
required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is 
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. 
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately 
or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

        Appendix A--Treadwear Test Course and Driving Procedures

    Introduction. The test course consists of three loops of a total of 
400 miles in the geographical vicinity of Goodfellow AFB, San Angelo, 
Tex.
    The first loop runs south 143 miles through the cities of Eldorado, 
Sonora, and Juno, Tex. to the Camp Hudson Historical Marker, and returns 
by the same route.
    The second loop runs east over Farm and Ranch Roads (FM) and returns 
to its starting point.
    The third loop runs northwest to Water Valley, northeast toward 
Robert Lee and returns via Texas 208 to the vicinity of Goodfellow AFB.
    Route. The route is shown in Figure 3. The table identifies key 
points by number. These numbers are encircled in Figure 3 and in 
parentheses in the descriptive material that follows.
    Southern Loop. The course begins at the intersection (1) of Ft. 
McKavitt Road and Paint Rock Road (FM388) at the northwest corner of 
Goodfellow AFB. Drive east via FM 388 to junction with Loop Road 306 
(2). Turn right onto Loop Road 306 and proceed south to junction with 
US277 (3). Turn onto US277 and proceed south through Eldorado and Sonora 
(4), continuing on US277 to junction with FM189 (5). Turn right onto 
FM189 and proceed to junction with Texas 163 (6). Turn left onto Texas 
163, and at the option of the manufacturer:
    (A) Proceed south to Camp Hudson Historical Marker and onto the 
paved shoulder (7). Reverse route to junction of Loop Road 306 and FM 
388 (2); or
    (B) Proceed south to junction with Frank's Crossing. Reverse route 
at Frank's Crossing and proceed north on Texas 163 to junction with 
Highway 189; Reverse route at junction with Highway 189; proceed south 
on Texas 163 to junction with Frank's Crossing; reverse route at Frank's 
Crossing and proceed north to junction of Loop Road 306 and FM 388 (2).
    Eastern Loop. From junction of Loop Road 306 and FM388 (2), make 
right turn onto FM388 and drive east to junction with FM2334 (13). Turn 
right onto FM2334 and proceed south across FM765 (14) to junction of 
FM2334 and US87 (15). For convoys that originate at Goodfellow AFB, make 
U-turn and return to junction of FM388 and Loop Road 306 (2) by the same 
route. For convoys that do not originate at Goodfellow AFB, upon 
reaching junction of FM2334 and US87 (15), make U-Turn and continue 
north on FM2334 past the intersection with FM388 to Veribest Cotton Gin, 
a distance of 1.8 miles beyond the intersection. Make U-turn and return 
to junction of FM2334 and FM388. Turn right onto FM388, proceed west to 
junction FM388 and Loop Road 306.
    Northwestern Loop. From junction of Loop Road 306 and FM388 (2), 
make right turn onto Loop Road 306. Proceed onto US277, to junction with 
FM2105 (8). Turn left onto FM2105 and proceed west to junction with US87 
(10). Turn right on US87 and proceed northwest to the junction with 
FM2034 near the town of Water Valley (11). Turn right onto FM2034 and 
proceed north to Texas 208 (12). Turn right onto Texas 208 and proceed 
south to junction with FM2105 (9). Turn left onto FM2105 and proceed 
east to junction with

[[Page 203]]

US277 (8). Turn right onto US277 and proceed south onto Loop Road 306 to 
junction with FM388 (2). For convoys that originate at Goodfellow AFB, 
turn right onto FM388 and proceed to starting point at junction of Ft. 
McKavitt Road and FM388 (1). For convoys that do not originate at 
Goodfellow AFB, do not turn right onto FM388 but continue south on Loop 
Road 306.
    Driving instructions. The drivers shall run at posted speed limits 
throughout the course unless an unsafe condition arises. If such 
condition arises, the speed should be reduced to the maximum safe 
operating speed.
    Braking Procedures at STOP signs. There are a number of 
intersections at which stops are required. At each of these 
intersections a series of signs is placed in a fixed order at follows:

                               Sign Legend

Highway Intersection 1000 (or 2000) Feet
STOP AHEAD
Junction XXX
Direction Sign (Mereta[rarr])
STOP or YIELD
    Procedures. 1. Approach each intersection at posted speed limit.
    2. When abreast of the STOP AHEAD sign, apply the brakes so that the 
vehicle decelerates smoothly to 20 mph when abreast of the direction 
sign.
    3. Come to a complete stop at the STOP sign or behind any vehicle 
already stopped.

[[Page 204]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.190


[[Page 205]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.191

                     Appendix B--Traction Skid Pads

    Two skid pads have been laid on an unused runway and taxi strip on 
Goodfellow AFB. Their location is shown in Figure 4.
    The asphalt skid pad is 600 ft.x60 ft. and is shown in black on the 
runway in Figure 4. The pad is approached from either end by a

[[Page 206]]

75 ft. ramp followed by 100 ft. of level pavement. This arrangement 
permits the skid trailers to stabilize before reaching the test area. 
The approaches are shown on the figure by the hash-marked area.
    The concrete pad is 600 ft.x48 ft. and is on the taxi strip. The 
approaches to the concrete pad are of the same design as those for the 
asphalt pads.
    A two lane asphalt road has been built to connect the runway and 
taxi strip. The road is parallel to the northeast-southwest runway at a 
distance of 100 ft. The curves have super-elevation to permit safe exit 
from the runway at operating speeds.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.192

                   Appendix C--Method of Least Squares

    The method of least squares is a method of calculation by which it 
is possible to obtain a reliable estimate of a true physical 
relationship from a set of data which involve random error. The method 
may be used to establish a regression line that minimizes the sum of the 
squares of the deviations of the measured data points from the line. The 
regression line is consequently described as the line of ``best fit'' to 
the data points. It is described in terms of its slope and its ``y'' 
intercept.
    The graph in Figure 5 depicts a regression line calculated using the 
least squares method from data collected from a hypothetical treadwear 
test of 6,400 miles, with tread depth measurements made at every 500 
miles.

[[Page 207]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.193

    In this graph, xj,yj (j=0, 1, . . ;. 8) are 
the individual data points representing the tread depth measurements 
(the overall average for the tire with 6 measurements in each tire 
groove) at the beginning of the test (after break-in) and at the end of 
each 800-mile segment of the test.
    The absolute value of the slope of the regression line is an 
expression of the mils of tread worn per 1,000 miles, and is calculated 
by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.194

    The ``y'' intercept of the regression line (a) in mils is calculated 
by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.195

                          Appendix D--User Fees

    1. Course Monitoring Tires: A fee of $333.00 will be assessed for 
each course monitoring tire purchased from NHTSA at Goodfellow Air Force 
Base, San Angelo, Texas. This fee is based upon the direct and indirect 
costs attributable to: (a) the purchase of course monitoring tires by 
NHTSA, (b) a pro rata allocation of salaries and general facility costs 
associated with maintenance of the tires, and (c) warehouse storage fees 
for the tires.
    2. Use of Government Traction Skid Pads: A fee of $34.00 will be 
assessed for each hour, or fraction thereof, that the traction skid pads 
at Goodfellow Air Force Base, San Angelo, Texas are used. This fee is 
based upon the direct and indirect costs attributable to: (a) 
depreciation on facilities and equipment comprising or used in 
conjunction with the traction skid pads (i.e., skid system, water truck, 
air compressor, skid track, tractor sweeper, equipment, buildings), (b) 
the calibration of the traction skid pads, and (c) a pro rata allocation 
of salaries and general facility costs associated with maintenance of 
the traction skid pads.
    3. Fee payments shall be by check, draft, money order, or Electronic 
Funds Transfer

[[Page 208]]

System made payable to the Treasurer of the United States.
    4. The fees set forth in this appendix continue in effect until 
adjusted by the Administrator of NHTSA. The Administrator reviews the 
fees set forth in this appendix and, if appropriate, adjusts them by 
rule at least every 2 years.

[43 FR 30549, July 17, 1978]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec.  
575.104, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec.  575.105  Vehicle rollover.

    (a) Purpose and scope. This section requires manufacturers of 
utility vehicles to alert the drivers of those vehicles that they have a 
higher possibility of rollover than other vehicle types and to advise 
them of steps that can be taken to reduce the possibility of rollover 
and/or to reduce the likelihood of injury in a rollover.
    (b) Application. This section applies to utility vehicles.
    (c) Definitions.
    Utility vehicles means multipurpose passenger vehicles (other than 
those which are passenger car derivatives) which have a wheelbase of 110 
inches or less and special features for occasional off-road operation.
    (d) Required information--(1) Rollover Warning Label. (i) Except as 
provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, each vehicle must have a 
label permanently affixed to either side of the sun visor, at the 
manufacturer's option, at the driver's seating position. The label must 
conform in content, form and sequence to the label shown in Figure 1 of 
this section, and must comply with the following requirements:
    (A) The heading area must be yellow, with the text and the alert 
symbol in black.
    (B) The message area must be white with black text.
    (C) The pictograms must be black with a white background.
    (D) The label must be appropriately sized so that it is legible, 
visible and prominent to the driver.
    (ii) Vehicles manufactured on or after September 1, 1999 and before 
September 1, 2000. When the rollover warning label required by paragraph 
(d)(1)(i) of this section and the air bag warning label required by 
paragraph S4.5.1(b) of 49 CFR 571.208 are affixed to the same side of 
the driver side sun visor, either:
    (A) The rollover warning label must be affixed to the right (as 
viewed from the driver's seat) of the air bag warning label and the 
labels may not be contiguous; or
    (B) The pictogram of the air bag warning label must be separated 
from the pictograms of the rollover warning label by text, and
    (1 ) The labels must be located such that the shortest distance from 
any of the lettering or graphics on the rollover warning label to any of 
the lettering or graphics on the air bag warning label is not less than 
3 cm, or
    (2 ) If the rollover warning and air bag warning labels are each 
completely surrounded by a continuous solid-lined border, the shortest 
distance from the border of the rollover warning label to the border of 
the air bag warning label is not less than 1 cm.
    (iii) The manufacturer must select the option to which a vehicle is 
certified by the time the manufacturer certifies the vehicle and may not 
thereafter select a different option for that vehicle. If a manufacturer 
chooses to certify compliance with more than one compliance option, the 
vehicle must satisfy the requirements applicable to each of the options 
selected.
    (iv) Vehicles manufactured on or after September 1, 2000. When the 
rollover warning label required by paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section 
and the air bag warning label required by paragraph S4.5.1(b) of 49 CFR 
571.208 are affixed to the same side of the driver side sun visor the 
pictogram of the air bag warning label must be separated from the 
pictograms of the rollover warning label by text and:
    (A) The labels must be located such that the shortest distance from 
any of the lettering or graphics on the rollover warning label to any of 
the lettering or graphics on the air bag warning label is not less than 
3 cm, or
    (B) If the rollover warning and air bag warning labels are each 
completely surrounded by a continuous solid-lined border, the shortest 
distance from the border of the rollover warning label to the border of 
the air bag warning label must be not less than 1 cm.

[[Page 209]]

    (2) Alternate location for warning label. As an alternative to 
affixing the warning label required by paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this 
section to the driver's sun visor, a manufacturer may permanently affix 
the label to the lower rear corner of the forwardmost driver's side 
window. The label must be legible, visible and prominent to a person 
next to the exterior of the driver's door.
    (3) Rollover Alert Label. If the label required by paragraph (d)(1) 
of this section and affixed to the driver side sun visor is not visible 
when the sun visor is in the stowed position, an alert label must be 
permanently affixed to that visor so that the label is visible when the 
visor is in that position. The alert label must comply with the 
following requirements:
    (i) The label must read:

                            ROLLOVER WARNING

                             Flip Visor Over

    (ii) The label must be black with yellow text.
    (iii) The label must be no less than 20 square cm.
    (4) Owner's Manual. The owner's manual must include the following 
statements and discussions:
    (i) The statement ``Utility vehicles have a significantly higher 
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.''
    (ii) A discussion of the vehicle design features which cause this 
type of vehicles to be more likely to rollover (e.g., higher center of 
gravity);
    (iii) A discussion of the driving practices that can reduce the risk 
of a rollover (e.g., avoiding sharp turns at excessive speed); and
    (iv) The statement: ``In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is 
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.''
    (5) Combined Rollover and Air Bag Alert Warning. If the warnings 
required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section and paragraph S4.5.1(b) of 
49 CFR 571.208 to be affixed to the driver side sun visor are not 
visible when the sun visor is in the stowed position, a combined 
rollover and air bag alert label may be permanently affixed to that 
visor in lieu of the alert labels required by paragraph (d)(3) of this 
section and paragraph S4.5.1(c)(2) of 49 CFR 571.208. The combined 
rollover and air bag alert label must be visible when the visor is in 
the stowed position. The combined rollover and air bag alert warning 
must conform in content to the label shown in Figure 2 of this section, 
and must comply with the following requirements:
    (i) The label must read:

AIR BAG AND ROLLOVER WARNINGS
Flip Visor Over

    (ii) The message area must be black with yellow text. The message 
area must be no less than 20 square cm.
    (iii) The pictogram shall be black with a red circle and slash on a 
white background. The pictogram must be not less than 20 mm in diameter.
    (6) At the option of the manufacturer, the requirements in paragraph 
(d)(1)(i) for labels that are permanently affixed to specified parts of 
the vehicle may instead be met by permanent marking and molding of the 
required information.

[[Page 210]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09MR99.056


[[Page 211]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU99.020


[64 FR 11733, Mar. 9, 1999, as amended at 64 FR 47123, Aug. 30, 1999]



    Subpart C_Transportation Recall Enhancement, Accountability, and 
                 Documentation Act; Consumer Information



Sec.  575.201  Child restraint performance.

    The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has established a 
program for rating the performance of child restraints. The agency makes 
the information developed under this rating program available through a 
variety of means, including postings on its Web site, http://
www.nhtsa.dot.gov.

[67 FR 67494, Nov. 5, 2002]



 Subpart D_Safe, Accountable, Flexible, Efficient Transportation Equity 
       Act: A Legacy for Users (SAFETEA	LU); Consumer Information

    Source: 71 FR 53585, Sept. 12, 2006, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  575.301  Vehicle Labeling of Safety Rating Information.

    (a) Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this section is to aid 
potential purchasers in the selection of new passenger motor vehicles by 
providing them with safety rating information developed by NHTSA in its 
New Car Assessment Program (NCAP) testing. Manufacturers of passenger 
motor vehicles described in paragraph (b) of this

[[Page 212]]

section are required to include this information on the Monroney label. 
Although NHTSA also makes the information available through means such 
as postings at http://www.safercar.gov and http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov, the 
additional Monroney label information is intended to provide consumers 
with relevant information at the point of sale.
    (b) Application. This section applies to automobiles with a GVWR of 
10,000 pounds or less, manufactured on or after September 1, 2007, that 
are required by the Automobile Information Disclosure Act, 15 U.S.C. 
1231-1233, to have price sticker labels (Monroney labels), e.g., 
passenger vehicles, station wagons, passenger vans, and sport utility 
vehicles.
    (c) Definitions. (1) Monroney label means the label placed on new 
automobiles with the manufacturer's suggested retail price and other 
consumer information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1231-1233.
    (2) Safety rating label means the label with NCAP safety rating 
information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1232(g). The safety rating label 
is part of the Monroney label.
    (d) Required Label. (1) Except as specified in paragraph (f) of this 
section, each vehicle must have a safety rating label that is part of 
its Monroney label, meets the requirements specified in paragraph (e) of 
this section, and conforms in content, format and sequence to the sample 
label depicted in Figure 1 of this section. If NHTSA has not provided a 
safety rating for any category of vehicle performance for a vehicle, the 
manufacturer may use the smaller label specified in paragraph (f) of 
this section.
    (2) The label must depict the star ratings for that vehicle as 
reported to the vehicle manufacturer by NHTSA.
    (3) Whenever NHTSA informs a manufacturer in writing of a new safety 
rating for a specified vehicle or the continued applicability of an 
existing safety rating for a new model year, including any safety 
concerns, the manufacturer shall include the new or continued safety 
rating on vehicles manufactured on or after the date 30 calendar days 
after receipt by the manufacturer of the information.
    (4) If, for a vehicle that has an existing safety rating for a 
category, NHTSA informs the manufacturer in writing that it has approved 
an optional NCAP test that will cover that category, the manufacturer 
may depict vehicles manufactured on or after the date of receipt of the 
information as ``Not Rated'' or ``To Be Rated'' for that category.
    (5) The text ``Frontal Crash,'' ``Side Crash,'' ``Rollover,'' 
``Driver,'' ``Passenger,'' ``Front Seat,'' ``Rear Seat'' and where 
applicable, ``Not Rated'' or ``To Be Rated,'' the star graphic 
indicating each rating, as well as any text in the header and footer 
areas of the label, must have a minimum font size of 12 point. All 
remaining text and symbols on the label (including the star graphic 
specified in paragraph (e)(8)(i)(A) of this section, must have a minimum 
font size of 8 point.
    (e) Required Information and Format--(1) Safety Rating Label Border. 
The safety rating label must be surrounded by a solid dark line that is 
a minimum of 3 points in width.
    (2) Safety Rating Label Size and Legibility. The safety rating label 
must be presented in a legible, visible, and prominent fashion that 
covers at least 8 percent of the total area of the Monroney label (i.e., 
including the safety rating label) or an area with a minimum of 4\1/2\ 
inches in length and 3\1/2\ inches in height on the Monroney label, 
whichever is larger.
    (3) Heading Area. The words ``Government Safety Ratings'' must be in 
boldface, capital letters that are light in color and centered. The 
background must be dark.
    (4) Frontal Crash Area. (i) The frontal crash area must be placed 
immediately below the heading area and must have dark text and a light 
background. Both the driver and the right front passenger frontal crash 
test ratings must be displayed with the maximum star ratings achieved.
    (ii) The words ``Frontal Crash'' must be in boldface, cover two 
lines, and be aligned to the left side of the label.
    (iii) The word ``Driver'' must be on the same line as the word 
``Frontal'' in ``Frontal Crash,'' and be left justified, horizontally 
centered and vertically aligned at the top of the label. The

[[Page 213]]

achieved star rating for ``Driver'' must be on the same line, left 
justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.
    (iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for the ``Driver'' 
position, the text ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as 
an alternative, the words ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if 
the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the 
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same 
line as the text ``Driver'', left justified, and aligned to the right 
side of the label.
    (v) The word ``Passenger'' must be on the same line as the word 
``Crash'' in ``Frontal Crash,'' below the word ``Driver,'' and be left 
justified, horizontally centered and vertically aligned at the top of 
the label. The achieved star rating for ``Passenger'' must be on the 
same line, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.
    (vi) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for ``Passenger,'' 
the words ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as an 
alternative, the words ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the 
manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the 
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same 
line as the text ``Passenger'', left justified, and aligned to the right 
side of the label.
    (vii) The words ``Star ratings based on the risk of injury in a 
frontal impact.'', followed (on the next line) by the statement 
``Frontal ratings should ONLY be compared to other vehicles of similar 
size and weight.'' must be placed at the bottom of the frontal crash 
area.
    (5) Side Crash Area. (i) The side crash area must be immediately 
below the frontal crash area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum 
of three points in width. The text must be dark against a light 
background. Both the driver and the rear seat passenger side crash test 
rating must be displayed with the maximum star rating achieved.
    (ii) The words ``Side Crash'' must cover two lines, and be aligned 
to the left side of the label in boldface.
    (iii) The words ``Front seat'' must be on the same line as the word 
``Side'' in ``Side Crash'' and be left justified, horizontally centered 
and vertically aligned in the middle of the label. The achieved star 
rating for ``Front seat'' must be on the same line, left justified, and 
aligned to the right side of the label.
    (iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for ``Front Seat,'' 
the words ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as an 
alternative, the words ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the 
manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the 
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same 
line as the text ``Front seat'', left justified, and aligned to the 
right side of the label.
    (v) The words ``Rear seat'' must be on the same line as the word 
``Crash'' in ``Side Crash,'' below the word ``Front seat,'' and be left 
justified, horizontally centered and vertically aligned in the middle of 
the label. The achieved star rating for ``Rear seat'' must be on the 
same line, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.
    (vi) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for ``Rear Seat,'' 
the text ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as an 
alternative, the text ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the 
manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the 
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same 
line as the text ``Rear seat'', left justified, and aligned to the right 
side of the label.
    (vii) The words: ``Star ratings based on the risk of injury in a 
side impact.'' must be placed at the bottom of the side crash area.
    (6) Rollover Area. (i) The rollover area must be immediately below 
the side crash area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum of three 
points in width. The text must be dark against a light background. The 
rollover test rating must be displayed with the maximum star rating 
achieved.
    (ii) The word ``Rollover'' must be aligned to the left side of the 
label in boldface. The achieved star rating

[[Page 214]]

must be on the same line, aligned to the right side of the label.
    (iii) If NHTSA has not tested the vehicle, the words ``Not Rated'' 
must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words ``To Be 
Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received 
written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for 
NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text 
``Rollover'', left justified, and aligned to the right side of the 
label.
    (iv) The words: ``Star ratings based on the risk of rollover in a 
single vehicle crash.'' must be placed at the bottom of the rollover 
area.
    (7) Graphics. The star graphic is depicted in Figure 3 and the 
safety concern graphic is depicted in Figure 4.
    (8) General Information Area. (i) The general information area must 
be immediately below the rollover area, separated by a dark line that is 
a minimum of three points in width. The text must be dark and the 
background must be light. The text must state the following, in the 
specified order, on separate lines:
    (A) `` Star ratings range from 1 to 5 stars 
([starf][starf][starf][starf][starf]), with 5 being the highest.'' and
    (B) ``Source: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 
(NHTSA)''
    (9) Footer Area. The text ``www.safercar.gov or 1-888-327-4236'' 
must be provided in boldface letters that are light in color, and be 
centered. The background must be dark.
    (10) Safety Concern. For vehicle tests for which NHTSA reports a 
safety concern as part of the star rating, the label must:
    (i) Depict, as a superscript to the star rating, the related symbol, 
as depicted in Figure 4 of this section, at \2/3\ the font size of the 
base star, and
    (ii) Include at the bottom of the relevant area (i.e., frontal crash 
area, side crash area, rollover area), as the last line of that area, 
the related symbol, as depicted in Figure 4 of this section, as a 
superscript of the rest of the line, and the text ``Safety Concern: 
Visit www.safercar.gov or call 1-888-327-4236 for more details.''
    (11) No additional information may be provided in the safety rating 
label area. The specified information provided in a language other than 
English is not considered to be additional information.
    (f) Smaller Safety Rating Label for Vehicles with No Ratings. (1) If 
NHTSA has not released a safety rating for any category for a vehicle, 
the manufacturer may use a smaller safety rating label that meets 
paragraphs (f)(2) through (f)(5) of this section. A sample label is 
depicted in Figure 2.
    (2) The label must be at least 4\1/2\ inches in width and 1\1/2\ 
inches in height, and must be surrounded by a solid dark line that is a 
minimum of 3 points in width.
    (3) Heading Area. The text must read ``Government Safety Ratings'' 
and be in 14-point boldface, capital letters that are light in color, 
and be centered. The background must be dark.
    (4) General Information. The general information area must be below 
the header area. The text must be dark and the background must be light. 
The text must state the following, in at least 12-point font, be left-
justified, and aligned to the left side of the label, in the specified 
order:
    (i) ``This vehicle has not been rated by the government for frontal 
crash, side crash, or rollover risk.''
    (ii) ``Source: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 
(NHTSA).''
    (5) Footer Area. The text ``www.safercar.gov or 1-888-327-4236'' 
must be provided in 14-point boldface letters that are light in color, 
and be centered.The background must be dark.
    (6) No additional information may be provided in the smaller safety 
rating label area. The specified information provided in a language 
other than English is not considered to be additional information.
    (g) Labels for alterers. (1) If, pursuant to 49 CFR 567.7, a person 
is required to affix a certification label to a vehicle, and the vehicle 
has a safety rating label with one or more safety ratings, the alterer 
must also place another label on that vehicle as specified in this 
paragraph.
    (2) The additional label (which does not replace the one required by 
49 CFR 567.7) must read: ``This vehicle has been altered. The stated 
star ratings on the

[[Page 215]]

safety rating label may no longer be applicable.''
    (3) The label must be placed adjacent to the Monroney label or as 
close to it as physically possible.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE06.002


[[Page 216]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE06.003

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE06.004


[71 FR 53585, Sept. 12, 2006, as amended at 72 FR 45176, Aug. 13, 2007]



PART 576_RECORD RETENTION--Table of Contents




Sec.
576.1 Scope.
576.2 Purpose.
576.3 Application.
576.4 Definitions.
576.5 Basic requirements.
576.6 Records.
576.7 Retention.
576.8 Malfunctions covered.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322(a), 30117, 30120(g), 30141-30147; 
delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.

    Source: 39 FR 30045, Aug. 20, 1974, unless otherwise noted.

    Editorial Note: For an interpretation document regarding part 576, 
see 40 FR 3296, Jan. 21, 1975.



Sec.  576.1  Scope.

    This part establishes requirements for the retention by 
manufacturers of motor vehicles and of motor vehicle equipment, of 
claims, complaints, reports, and other records concerning alleged and 
proven motor vehicle or motor vehicle equipment defects and malfunctions 
that may be related to motor vehicle safety.

[67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]



Sec.  576.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to preserve records that are needed for 
the proper investigation, and adjudication or other disposition, of 
possible defects related to motor vehicle safety and instances of 
nonconformity to the motor vehicle safety standards and associated 
regulations.



Sec.  576.3  Application.

    This part applies to all manufacturers of motor vehicles, with 
respect to all records generated or acquired on or after August 16, 
1969, and to all manufacturers of motor vehicle equipment, with respect 
to all records in their possession, generated or acquired on or after 
August 9, 2002.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]



Sec.  576.4  Definitions.

    All terms in this part that are defined in 49 U.S.C. 30102 and part 
579 of this chapter are used as defined therein.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]

[[Page 217]]



Sec.  576.5  Basic requirements.

    (a) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles, child restraint systems, 
and tires shall retain, as specified in Sec.  576.7 of this part, all 
records described in Sec.  576.6 of this part for a period of five 
calendar years from the date on which they were generated or acquired by 
the manufacturer.
    (b) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment 
shall retain, as specified in Sec.  576.7 of this part, all the 
underlying records on which the information reported under part 579 of 
this chapter is based, for a period of five calendar years from the date 
on which they were generated or acquired by the manufacturer, except as 
provided in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (c) Manufacturers need not retain copies of documents transmitted to 
NHTSA pursuant to parts 573, 577, and 579 of this chapter.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]



Sec.  576.6  Records.

    Records to be maintained by manufacturers under this part include 
all documentary materials, films, tapes, and other information-storing 
media that contain information concerning malfunctions that may be 
related to motor vehicle safety. Such records include, but are not 
limited to, reports and other documents, including material generated or 
communicated by computer, telefax or other electronic means, that are 
related to work performed under warranties; and any lists, compilations, 
analyses, or discussions of such malfunctions contained in internal or 
external correspondence of the manufacturer, including communications 
transmitted electronically.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]



Sec.  576.7  Retention.

    Duplicate copies need not be retained. Information may be reproduced 
or transferred from one storage medium to another (e.g., from paper 
files to microfilm) as long as no information is lost in the 
reproduction or transfer, and when so reproduced or transferred the 
original form may be treated as a duplicate.



Sec.  576.8  Malfunctions covered.

    For purposes of this part, ``malfunctions that may be related to 
motor vehicle safety'' shall include, with respect to a motor vehicle or 
item of motor vehicle equipment, any failure or malfunction beyond 
normal deterioration in use, or any failure of performance, or any flaw 
or unintended deviation from design specifications, that could in any 
reasonably foreseeable manner be a causative factor in, or aggravate, an 
accident or an injury to a person.



PART 577_DEFECT AND NONCOMPLIANCE NOTIFICATION--Table of Contents




Sec.
577.1 Scope.
577.2 Purpose.
577.3 Application.
577.4 Definitions.
577.5 Notification pursuant to a manufacturer's decision.
577.6 Notification pursuant to Administrator's decision.
577.7 Time and manner of notification.
577.8 Disclaimers.
577.9 Conformity to statutory requirements.
577.10 Follow-up notification.
577.11 Reimbursement notification.
577.12 Notification pursuant to an accelerated remedy program.
577.13 Notification to dealers and distributors.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 30102, 30103, 30116-30121, 30166; delegations 
of authority at 49 CFR 1.50 and 49 CFR 501.8.

    Source: 41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  577.1  Scope.

    This part sets forth requirements for manufacturer notification to 
owners, dealers, and distributors of motor vehicles and items of 
replacement equipment about a defect that relates to motor vehicle 
safety or a noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard.

[69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]



Sec.  577.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to ensure that notifications of defects 
or noncompliances adequately inform and effectively motivate owners of 
potentially defective or noncomplying motor

[[Page 218]]

vehicles or items of replacement equipment to have such vehicles or 
equipment inspected and, where necessary, remedied as quickly as 
possible. It is also to ensure that dealers and distributors of motor 
vehicles and items of replacement equipment are made aware of the 
existence of defects and noncompliances and of their rights and 
responsibilities with regard thereto.

[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]



Sec.  577.3  Application.

    This part applies to manufacturers of complete motor vehicles, 
incomplete motor vehicles, and replacement equipment. In the case of 
vehicles manufactured in two or more stages, compliance by either the 
manufacturer of the incomplete vehicle, any subsequent manufacturer, or 
the manufacturer of affected replacement equipment, shall be considered 
compliance by each of those manufacturers.



Sec.  577.4  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this part:
    Act means 49 U.S.C. Chapter 30101-30169.
    Administrator means the Administrator of the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration or his delegate.
    First purchaser means the first purchaser in good faith for a 
purpose other than resale.
    Leased motor vehicle means any motor vehicle that is leased to a 
person for a term of at least four months by a lessor who has leased 
five or more vehicles in the twelve months preceding the date of 
notification by the vehicle manufacturer of the existence of a safety-
related defect or noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety 
standard in the motor vehicle.
    Lessee means a person who is the lessee of a leased motor vehicle as 
defined in this section.
    Lessor means a person or entity that is the owner, as reflected on 
the vehicle's title, of any five or more leased vehicles (as defined in 
this section), as of the date of notification by the manufacturer of the 
existence of a safety-related defect or noncompliance with a Federal 
motor vehicle safety standard in one or more of the leased motor 
vehicles.
    Owners includes purchaser.

[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 60 FR 17270, Apr. 5, 1995]



Sec.  577.5  Notification pursuant to a manufacturer's decision.

    (a) When a manufacturer of motor vehicles or replacement equipment 
determines that any motor vehicle or item of replacement equipment 
produced by the manufacturer contains a defect that relates to motor 
vehicle safety, or fails to conform to an applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety standard, the manufacturer shall provide notification in 
accordance with paragraph (a) of Sec.  577.7, unless the manufacturer is 
exempted by the Administrator (pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30118(d) or 
30120(h)) from giving such notification. The notification shall contain 
the information specified in this section. The information required by 
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section shall be presented in the form 
and order specified. The information required by paragraphs (d) through 
(h) of this section may be presented in any order. Except as authorized 
by the Administrator, the manufacturer shall submit a copy of its 
proposed owner notification letter, including any provisions or 
attachments related to reimbursement, to NHTSA's Recall Management 
Division (NVS-215) no fewer than five Federal Government business days 
before it intends to begin mailing it to owners. The manufacturer shall 
mark the outside of each envelope in which it sends an owner 
notification letter with a notation that includes the words ``SAFETY,'' 
``RECALL,'' and ``NOTICE,'' all in capital letters and in type that is 
larger than that used in the address section, and is also 
distinguishable from the other type in a manner other than size. Except 
where the format of the envelope has been previously approved by NHTSA's 
Recall Management Division (NVS-215), each manufacturer must submit the 
envelope format it intends to use to that division at least five Federal 
Government business days before mailing the notification to owners. 
Submission of envelopes and proposed owner notification letters shall be 
made by any means, including those means identified in 49 CFR 573.9, 
that

[[Page 219]]

permits the manufacturer to verify receipt promptly by the Recall 
Management Division and the date it was received by that division. 
Notification sent to an owner whose address is in either the 
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico or the Canal Zone shall be written in both 
English and Spanish.
    (b) An opening statement: ``This notice is sent to you in accordance 
with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety 
Act.''
    (c) Whichever of the following statements is appropriate:
    (1) ``(Manufacturer's name or division) has decided that a defect 
which relates to motor vehicle safety exists in (identified motor 
vehicles, in the case of notification sent by a motor vehicle 
manufacturer; identified replacement equipment, in the case of 
notification sent by a replacement equipment manufacturer);'' or
    (2) ``(Manufacturer's name or division) has decided that (identified 
motor vehicles, in the case of notification sent by a motor vehicle 
manufacturer; identified replacement equipment, in the case of 
notification sent by a replacement equipment manufacturer) fail to 
conform to Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. (number and title 
of standard).''
    (d) When the manufacturer determines that the defect or 
noncompliance may not exist in each such vehicle or item of replacement 
equipment, he may include an additional statement to that effect.
    (e) A clear description of the defect or noncompliance, which shall 
include--
    (1) An identification of the vehicle system or particular item(s) of 
motor vehicle equipment affected.
    (2) A description of the malfunction that may occur as a result of 
the defect or noncompliance. The description of a noncompliance with an 
applicable standard shall include, in general terms, the difference 
between the performance of the noncomplying vehicle or item of 
replacement equipment and the performance specified by the standard;
    (3) A statement of any operating or other conditions that may cause 
the malfunction to occur; and
    (4) A statement of the precautions, if any, that the owners should 
take to reduce the chance that the malfunction will occur before the 
defect or noncompliance is remedied.
    (f) An evaluation of the risk to motor vehicle safety reasonably 
related to the defect or noncompliance.
    (1) When vehicle crash is a potential occurrence, the evaluation 
shall include whichever of the following is appropriate:
    (i) A statement that the defect or noncompliance can cause vehicle 
crash without prior warning; or
    (ii) A description of whatever prior warning may occur, and a 
statement that if this warning is not heeded, vehicle crash can occur.
    (2) When vehicle crash is not the potential occurrence, the 
evaluation must include a statement indicating the general type of 
injury to occupants of the vehicle, or to persons outside the vehicle, 
that can result from the defect or noncompliance, and a description of 
whatever prior warning may occur.
    (g) A statement of measures to be taken to remedy the defect or 
noncompliance, in accordance with paragraph (g)(1) or (g)(2) of this 
section, whichever is appropriate.
    (1) When the manufacturer is required by the Act to remedy the 
defect or noncompliance without charge, or when he will voluntarily so 
remedy in full conformity with the Act, he shall include--
    (i) A statement that he will cause such defect or noncompliance to 
be remedied without charge, and whether such remedy will be by repair, 
replacement, or (except in the case of replacement equipment) refund, 
less depreciation, of the purchase price.
    (ii) The earliest date on which the defect or noncompliance will be 
remedied without charge. In the case of remedy by repair, this date 
shall be the earliest date on which the manufacturer reasonably expects 
that dealers or other service facilities will receive necessary parts 
and instructions. The manufacturer shall specify the last date, if any, 
on which he will remedy tires without charge.
    (iii) In the case of remedy by repair through the manufacturer's 
dealers or other service facilities:

[[Page 220]]

    (A) A general description of the work involved in repairing the 
defect or noncompliance; and
    (B) The manufacturer's estimate of the time reasonably necessary to 
perform the labor required to correct the defect or noncompliance.
    (iv) In the case of remedy by repair through service facilities 
other than those of the manufacturer or its dealers:
    (A) The name and part number of each part must be added, replaced, 
or modified;
    (B) A description of any modifications that must be made to existing 
parts, which shall also be identified by name and part number;
    (C) Information as to where needed parts will be available;
    (D) A detailed description (including appropriate illustrations) of 
each step required to correct the defect or noncompliance;
    (E) The manufacturer's estimate of the time reasonably necessary to 
perform the labor required to correct the defect or noncompliance; and
    (F) The manufacturer's recommendations of service facilities where 
the owner should have the repairs performed.
    (v) In the case of remedy by replacement, a description of the motor 
vehicle or item of replacement equipment that the manufacturer will 
provide as a replacement for the defective or noncomplying vehicle or 
equipment.
    (vi) In the case of remedy by refund of purchase price, the method 
or basis for the manufacturer's assessment of depreciation.
    (vii) A statement informing the owner that he or she may submit a 
complaint to the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., Washington, DC 20590; or call 
the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov, if the owner believes that:
    (A) The manufacturer, distributor, or dealer has failed or is unable 
to remedy the defect or noncompliance without charge.
    (B) The manufacturer has failed or is unable to remedy the defect or 
noncompliance without charge--
    (1) (In the case of motor vehicles or items of replacement 
equipment, other than tires) within a reasonable time, which is not 
longer than 60 days in the case of repair after the owner's first tender 
to obtain repair following the earliest repair date specified in the 
notification, unless the period is extended by Administrator.
    (2) (In the case of tires) after the date specified in the 
notification on which replacement tires will be available.
    (2) When the manufacturer is not required to remedy the defect or 
noncompliance without charge and he will not voluntarily so remedy, the 
statement shall include--
    (i) A statement that the manufacturer is not required by the Act to 
remedy without charge.
    (ii) A statement of the extent to which the manufacturer will 
voluntarily remedy, including the method of remedy and any limitations 
and conditions imposed by the manufacturer on such remedy.
    (iii) The manufacturer's opinion whether the defect or noncompliance 
can be remedied by repair. If the manufacturer believes that repair is 
possible, the statement shall include the information specified in 
paragraph (g)(1)(iv) of this section, except that;
    (A) The statement required by paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(A) of this 
section shall also indicate the suggested list price of each part.
    (B) The statement required by paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(C) of this 
section shall also indicate the manufacturer's estimate of the date on 
which the parts will be generally available.
    (h) Any lessor who receives a notification of a determination of a 
safety-related defect or noncompliance pertaining to any leased motor 
vehicle shall send a copy of such notice to the lessee as prescribed by 
Sec.  577.7(a)(2)(iv). This requirement applies to both initial and 
follow-up notifications, but

[[Page 221]]

does not apply where the manufacturer has notified a lessor's lessees 
directly.

(Authority: Secs. 108, 112, and 119, Pub. L. 89-563; 80 Stat. 718; secs. 
102, 103, and 104, Pub. L. 93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1397, 1401, 
1408, and 1411-1420); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50)

[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 46 FR 6971, Jan. 22, 1981; 46 
FR 28657, May 28, 1981; 60 FR 17270, Apr. 5, 1995; 61 FR 279, Jan. 4, 
1996; 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003; 70 FR 35557, June 21, 2005; 72 FR 
32016, June 11, 2007]



Sec.  577.6  Notification pursuant to Administrator's decision.

    (a) Agency-ordered notification. When a manufacturer is ordered 
pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) to provide notification of a defect or 
noncompliance, he shall provide such notification in accordance with 
Sec. Sec.  577.5 and 577.7, except that the statement required by 
paragraph (c) of Sec.  577.5 shall indicate that the decision has been 
made by the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration.
    (b) Provisional notification. When a manufacturer does not provide 
notification as required by paragraph (a) of this section, and an action 
concerning the Administrator's order to provide such notification has 
been filed in a United States District Court, the manufacturer shall, 
upon the Administrator's further order, provide in accordance with 
paragraph (b) of Sec.  577.7 a provisional notification containing the 
information specified in this paragraph, in the order and, where 
specified, the form of paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(12) of this 
section.
    (1) An opening statement: ``This notice is sent to you in accordance 
with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety 
Act.''
    (2) Whichever of the following statements is appropriate:
    (i) ``The Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration has decided that a defect which relates to motor vehicle 
safety exists in (identified motor vehicles, in the case of notification 
sent by a manufacturer of motor vehicles; identified replacement 
equipment, in the case of notification sent by a manufacturer of 
replacement equipment);'' or
    (ii) ``The Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration has decided that (identified motor vehicles in the case 
of notification sent by a motor vehicle manufacturer; identified 
replacement equipment, in the case of notification sent by a 
manufacturer of replacement equipment) fail to conform to federal Motor 
Vehicle Safety Standard No. (number and title of standard).''
    (3) When the Administrator decides that the defect or noncompliance 
may not exist in each such vehicle or item of replacement equipment, the 
manufacturer may include an additional statement to that effect.
    (4) The statement: ``(Manufacturer's name or division) is contesting 
this determination in a proceeding in the Federal courts and has been 
required to issue this notice pending the outcome of the court 
proceeding.''
    (5) A clear description of the Administrator's stated basis for his 
decision, as provided in his order, including a brief summary of the 
evidence and reasoning that the Administrator relied upon in making his 
decision.
    (6) A clear description of the Administrator' stated evaluation as 
provided in his order of the risk to motor vehicle safety reasonably 
related to the defect or noncompliance.
    (7) Any measures that the Administrator has stated in his order 
should be taken by the owner to avoid an unreasonable hazard resulting 
from the defect or noncompliance.
    (8) A brief summary of the evidence and reasoning upon which the 
manufacturer relies in contesting the Administrator's determination.
    (9) A statement regarding the availability of remedy and 
reimbursement in accordance with paragraph (b)(9)(i) or (9)(ii) of this 
section, whichever is appropriate.
    (i) When the purchase date of the vehicle or item of equipment is 
such that the manufacturer is required by the Act to remedy without 
charge or to reimburse the owner for reasonable and necessary repair 
expenses, he shall include--
    (A) A statement that the remedy will be provided without charge to 
the owner if the Court upholds the Administrator's decision;
    (B) A statement of the method of remedy. If the manufacturer has not

[[Page 222]]

yet determined the method of remedy, he shall indicate that he will 
select either repair, replacement with an equivalent vehicle or item of 
replacement equipment, or (except in the case of replacement equipment) 
refund, less depreciation, of the purchase price; and
    (C) A statement that, if the Court upholds the Administrator's 
decision, he will reimburse the owner for any reasonable and necessary 
expenses that the owner incurs (not in excess of any amount specified by 
the Administrator) in repairing the defect or noncompliance following a 
date, specified by the manufacturer, which shall not be later than the 
date of the Administrator's order to issue this notification.
    (ii) When the manufacturer is not required either to remedy without 
charge or to reimburse, he shall include--
    (A) A statement that he is not required to remedy or reimburse, or
    (B) A statement of the extent to which he will voluntarily remedy or 
reimburse, including the method of remedy, if then known, and any 
limitations and conditions on such remedy or reimbursement.
    (10) A statement indicating whether, in the manufacturer's opinion, 
the defect or noncompliance can be remedied by repair. When the 
manufacturer believes that such remedy is feasible, the statement shall 
include:
    (i) A general description of the work and the manufacturer's 
estimate of the costs involved in repairing the defect or noncompliance;
    (ii) Information on where needed parts and instructions for 
repairing the defect or noncompliance will be available, including the 
manufacturer's estimate of the day on which they will be generally 
available;
    (iii) The manufacturer's estimate of the time reasonably necessary 
to perform the labor required to correct the defect or noncompliance; 
and
    (iv) The manufacturer's recommendations of service facilities where 
the owner could have the repairs performed, including (in the case of a 
manufacturer required to reimburse if the Administrator's decision is 
upheld in the court proceeding) at least one service facility for whose 
charges the owner will be fully reimbursed if the Administrator's 
decision is upheld.
    (11) A statement that further notice will be mailed by the 
manufacturer to the owner if the Administrator's decision is upheld in 
the court proceeding.
    (12) An address of the manufacturer where the owner may write to 
obtain additional information regarding the notification and remedy.
    (c) Post-litigation notification. When a manufacturer does not 
provide notification as required in paragraph (a) of this section and 
the Administrator prevails in an action commenced with respect to such 
notification, the manufacturer shall, upon the Administrator's further 
order, provide notification in accordance with paragraph (b) of Sec.  
577.7 containing the information specified in paragraph (a) of this 
section, except that--
    (1) The statement required by paragraph (c) of Sec.  577.5 shall 
indicate that the decision has been made by the Administrator and that 
his decision has been upheld in a proceeding in the Federal courts; and
    (2) When a provisional notification was issued regarding the defect 
or noncompliance and the manufacturer is required under the Act to 
reimburse--
    (i) The manufacturer shall state that he will reimburse the owner 
for any reasonable and necessary expenses that the owner incurred (not 
in excess of any amount specified by the Administrator) for repair of 
the defect or noncompliance of the vehicle or item of equipment on or 
after the date on which provisional notification was ordered to be 
issued and on or before a date not sooner than the date on which this 
notification is received by the owner. The manufacturer shall determine 
and specify both dates.
    (ii) The statement required by paragraph (g)(1)(vii) of Sec.  577.5 
shall also inform the owner that he may submit a complaint to the 
Administrator if the owner believes that the manufacturer has failed to 
reimburse adequately.
    (3) If the manufacturer is not required under the Act to reimburse, 
he shall include--
    (i) A statement that he is not required to reimburse, or
    (ii) When he will voluntarily reimburse, a statement of the extent 
to

[[Page 223]]

which he will do so, including any limitations and conditions on such 
reimbursement.

[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 60 FR 17271, Apr. 5, 1995]



Sec.  577.7  Time and manner of notification.

    (a) The notification required by Sec.  577.5 shall--
    (1) Be furnished within a reasonable time after the manufacturer 
first decides that either a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety 
or a noncompliance exists. The Administrator may order a manufacturer to 
send the notification to owners on a specific date where the 
Administrator finds, after consideration of available information and 
the views of the manufacturer, that such notification is in the public 
interest. The factors that the Administrator may consider include, but 
are not limited to, the severity of the safety risk; the likelihood of 
occurrence of the defect or noncompliance; whether there is something 
that an owner can do to reduce either the likelihood of occurrence of 
the defect or noncompliance or the severity of the consequences; whether 
there will be a delay in the availability of the remedy from the 
manufacturer; and the anticipated length of any such delay.
    (2) Be accomplished--
    (i) In the case of a notification required to be sent by a motor 
vehicle manufacturer, by first class mail to each person who is 
registered under State law as the owner of the vehicle and whose name 
and address are reasonably ascertainable by the manufacturer through 
State records or other sources available to him. If the owner cannot be 
reasonably ascertained, the manufacturer shall notify the most recent 
purchaser known to the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall also provide 
notification to each lessee of a leased motor vehicle that is covered by 
an agreement between the manufacturer and a lessor under which the 
manufacturer is to notify lessees directly of safety-related defects and 
noncompliances.
    (ii) In the case of a notification required to be sent by a 
replacement equipment manufacturer--
    (A) By first class mail to the most recent purchaser known to the 
manufacturer, and
    (B) (Except in the case of a tire) if decided by the Administrator 
to be required for motor vehicle safety, by public notice in such manner 
as the Administrator may require after consultation with the 
manufacturer.
    (iii) In the case of a manufacturer required to provide notification 
concerning any defective or noncomplying tire, by first class or 
certified mail.
    (iv) In the case of a notification to be sent by a lessor to a 
lessee of a leased motor vehicle, by first-class mail to the most recent 
lessee known to the lessor. Such notification shall be mailed within ten 
days of the lessor's receipt of the notification from the vehicle 
manufacturer.
    (b) The notification required by any paragraph of Sec.  577.6 shall 
be provided:
    (1) Within 60 days after the manufacturer's receipt of the 
Administrator's order to provide the notification, except that the 
notification shall be furnished within a shorter or longer period if the 
Administrator incorporates in his order a finding that such period is in 
the public interest; and
    (2) In the manner and to the recipient specified in paragraph (a) of 
this section.
    (c) The notification required by Sec.  577.13 shall--
    (1) Be furnished within a reasonable time after the manufacturer 
decides that a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety or a 
noncompliance exists. In the case of defects or noncompliances that 
present an immediate and substantial threat to motor vehicle safety, the 
manufacturer shall transmit this notice to dealers and distributors 
within three business days of its transmittal of the Defect and 
Noncompliance Information Report under 49 CFR 573.6 to NHTSA, except 
that when the manufacturer transmits the notice by other than electronic 
means, the manufacturer shall transmit this notice to dealers and 
distributors within five business days of its transmittal of the Defect 
and Noncompliance Information Report to NHTSA. In all other cases, the 
notification shall be provided in accordance with the schedule submitted 
to the agency pursuant to

[[Page 224]]

Sec.  573.6(c)(8)(ii), unless that schedule is modified by the 
Administrator. The Administrator may direct a manufacturer to send the 
notification to dealers on a specific date if the Administrator finds, 
after consideration of available information and the views of the 
manufacturer, that such notification is in the public interest. The 
factors that the Administrator may consider include, but are not limited 
to, the severity of the safety risk; the likelihood of occurrence of the 
defect or noncompliance; the time frame in which the defect or 
noncompliance may manifest itself; availability of an interim remedial 
action by the owner; whether a dealer inspection would identify vehicles 
or items of equipment that contain the defect or noncompliance; and the 
time frame in which the manufacturer plans to provide the notification 
and the remedy to its dealers.
    (2) Be accomplished--
    (i) In the case of a notification required to be sent by a motor 
vehicle manufacturer, by certified mail, verifiable electronic means 
such as receipts or logs from electronic mail or satellite distribution 
system, or other more expeditious and verifiable means to all dealers 
and distributors of the vehicles that contain the defect or 
noncompliance.
    (ii) In the case of a notification required to be sent by a 
manufacturer of replacement equipment or tires, by certified mail, 
verifiable electronic means such as receipts or logs from electronic 
mail or satellite distribution system, or other more expeditious and 
verifiable means to all dealers and distributors of the product that are 
known to the manufacturer.
    (iii) In those cases where a manufacturer of motor vehicles or items 
of motor vehicle equipment provided the recalled product(s) to a group 
of dealers or distributors through a central office, notification to 
that central office will be deemed to be notice to all dealers and 
distributors within that group.
    (iv) In those cases in which a manufacturer of motor vehicles or 
items of motor vehicle equipment has provided the recalled product to 
independent dealers through independent distributors, the manufacturer 
may satisfy its notification responsibilities by providing the 
information required under this section to its distributors. In such 
cases, the manufacturer must also instruct those distributors to 
transmit a copy of the manufacturer's notification to known distributors 
and retail outlets along the distribution chain within five working days 
from its receipt.
    (d) Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(1) of this section, where the 
recall is being conducted pursuant to an order issued by the 
Administrator under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b), notification required by Sec.  
577.13 shall be given on or before the date prescribed in the 
Administrator's order.

[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 60 FR 17271, Apr. 5, 1995; 69 
FR 34959, June 23, 2004; 70 FR 38814, July 6, 2005]



Sec.  577.8  Disclaimers.

    (a) A notification sent pursuant to Sec. Sec.  577.5, 577.6, 577.9 
or 577.10 regarding a defect which relates to motor vehicle safety shall 
not, except as specifically provided in this part, contain any statement 
or implication that there is no defect, that the defect does not relate 
to motor vehicle safety, or that the defect is not present in the 
owner's or lessee's vehicle or item of replacement equipment. This 
section also applies to any notification sent to a lessor or directly to 
a lessee by a manufacturer.
    (b) A notification sent pursuant to Sec. Sec.  577.5, 577.6, 577.9 
or 577.10 regarding a noncompliance with an applicable motor vehicle 
safety standard shall not, except as specifically provided in this part, 
contain any statement or implication that there is not a noncompliance, 
or that the noncompliance is not present in the owner's or lessee's 
vehicle or item of replacement equipment. This section also applies to 
any notification sent to a lessor or directly to a lessee by a 
manufacturer.

[60 FR 17272, Apr. 5, 1995]



Sec.  577.9  Conformity to statutory requirements.

    A notification that does not conform to the requirements of this 
part is a violation of the Act.

[[Page 225]]



Sec.  577.10  Follow-up notification.

    (a) If, based on quarterly reports submitted pursuant to Sec.  573.7 
of this part or other available information, the Administrator decides 
that a notification of a safety-related defect of a noncompliance with a 
Federal motor vehicle safety standard sent by a manufacturer has not 
resulted in an adequate number of vehicles or items of equipment being 
returned for remedy, the Administrator may direct the manufacturer to 
send a follow-up notification in accordance with this section. The 
scope, timing, form, and content of such follow-up notification will be 
established by the Administrator, in consultation with the manufacturer, 
to maximize the number of owners, purchasers, and lessees who will 
present their vehicles or items of equipment for remedy.
    (b) The Administrator may consider the following factors in deciding 
whether or not to require a manufacturer to undertake a follow-up 
notification campaign:
    (1) The percentage of covered vehicles or items of equipment that 
have been presented for the remedy;
    (2) The amount of time that has elapsed since the prior 
notification(s);
    (3) The likelihood that a follow-up notification will increase the 
number of vehicles or items of equipment receiving the remedy;
    (4) The seriousness of the safety risk from the defect or 
noncompliance;
    (5) Whether the prior notification(s) undertaken by the manufacturer 
complied with the requirements of the statute and regulations; and
    (6) Such other factors as are consistent with the purpose of the 
statute.
    (c) A manufacturer shall be required to provide a follow-up 
notification under this section only with respect to vehicles or items 
of equipment that have not been returned for remedy pursuant to the 
prior notification(s).
    (d) Except where the Administrator determines otherwise, the follow-
up notification shall be sent to the same categories of recipients that 
received the prior notification(s).
    (e) A follow-up notification must include:
    (1) A statement that identifies it as a follow-up to an earlier 
communication;
    (2) A statement urging the recipient to present the vehicle or item 
of equipment for remedy; and
    (3) Except as determined by the Administrator, the information 
required to be included in the initial notification.
    (f) The manufacturer shall mark the outside of each envelope in 
which it sends a follow-up notification in a manner which meets the 
requirements of Sec.  577.5(a) of this part.
    (g) Notwithstanding any other provision of this part, the 
Administrator may authorize the use of other media besides first-class 
mail for a follow-up notification.

[60 FR 17272, Apr. 5, 1995, as amended at 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003]



Sec.  577.11  Reimbursement notification.

    (a) Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (e) of this section, 
when a manufacturer of motor vehicles or replacement equipment is 
required to provide notice in accordance with Sec. Sec.  577.5 or 577.6, 
in addition to complying with other sections of this part, the 
manufacturer shall notify owners that they may be eligible to receive 
reimbursement for the cost of obtaining a pre-notification remedy of a 
problem associated with a defect or noncompliance consistent with the 
manufacturer's reimbursement plan submitted to NHTSA pursuant to 
Sec. Sec.  573.6(c)(8)(i) and 573.13 of this chapter.
    (b) The manufacturer's notification shall include a statement, 
following the items required by Sec.  577.5 or Sec.  577.6, that
    (1) Refers to the possible eligibility for reimbursement for the 
cost of repair or replacement; and
    (2) Describes how a consumer may obtain information about 
reimbursement from the manufacturer;
    (c) The information referred to in Sec.  577.11(b)(2) of this part 
shall be provided in one of the following ways:
    (1) In an enclosure to the notification under Sec.  577.5 or Sec.  
577.6 that provides the information described in Sec.  577.11(d), 
consistent with the manufacturer's reimbursement plan; or
    (2) Through a toll-free telephone number (with TTY capability) 
identified in the notification that provides the information described 
in Sec.  577.11(d),

[[Page 226]]

consistent with the manufacturer's reimbursement plan.
    (3) For notifications of defects or noncompliances in item of motor 
vehicle equipment that are in a form other than a letter to a specific 
owner or purchaser, if the manufacturer does not otherwise maintain a 
toll-free telephone number for the use of consumers, the manufacturer 
may refer claimants to a non-toll-free telephone number (with TTY 
capability) if it also specifies a mailing address at which owners can 
obtain the relevant information regarding the manufacturer's 
reimbursement plan.
    (d) The information to be provided under paragraph (c) of this 
section must:
    (1) Identify the vehicle and/or equipment that is the subject of the 
recall and the underlying problem;
    (2) State that the manufacturer has a program for reimbursing pre-
notification remedies and identify the type of remedy eligible for 
reimbursement;
    (3) Identify any limits on the time period in which the repair or 
replacement of the recalled vehicle or equipment must have occurred;
    (4) Identify any restrictions on eligibility for reimbursement that 
the manufacturer is imposing (as limited by Sec.  573.13 (d) of this 
chapter);
    (5) Specify all necessary documentation that must be submitted to 
obtain reimbursement;
    (6) Explain how to submit a claim for reimbursement of a pre-
notification remedy; and
    (7) Identify the office and address of the manufacturer where a 
claim can be submitted by mail and any authorized dealers or facilities 
where a claimant may submit a claim for reimbursement.
    (e) The manufacturer is not required to provide notification 
regarding reimbursement under this section if NHTSA finds, based upon a 
written request by a manufacturer accompanied by supporting information, 
views, and arguments, that all covered vehicles are under warranty or 
that no person would be eligible for reimbursement under Sec.  573.13 of 
this chapter.

[67 FR 64065, Oct. 17, 2002]



Sec.  577.12  Notification pursuant to an accelerated remedy program.

    (a) When the Administrator requires a manufacturer to accelerate its 
remedy program under Sec.  573.14 of this chapter, or when a 
manufacturer agrees with a request from the Administrator that it 
accelerate its remedy program in advance of being required to do so, in 
addition to complying with other sections of this part, the manufacturer 
shall provide notification in accordance with this section.
    (b) Except as provided elsewhere in this section or when the 
Administrator determines otherwise, the notification under this section 
shall be sent to the same recipients as provided by Sec.  577.7. If no 
notification has been provided to owners pursuant to this part, the 
provisions required by this section may be combined with the 
notification under Sec. Sec.  577.5 or 577.6. A manufacturer need only 
provide a notification under this section to owners of vehicles or items 
of equipment for which the defect or noncompliance has not been 
remedied.
    (c) The manufacturer's notification shall include the following:
    (1) If there was a prior notification, a statement that identifies 
that notification and states that this notification supplements it;
    (2) When the accelerated remedy program has been required by the 
Administrator, a statement that the National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration has required the manufacturer to accelerate its remedy 
program;
    (3) A statement of how the program has been accelerated (e.g., by 
expanding the sources of replacement parts and/or expanding the number 
of authorized repair facilities);
    (4) Where applicable, a statement that the owner may elect to obtain 
the recall remedy using designated service facilities other than those 
that are owned or franchised by the manufacturer or are the 
manufacturer's authorized dealers, and an explanation of how the owner 
may arrange for service at those other facilities;
    (5) Where applicable, a statement that the owner may elect to obtain 
the recall remedy using specified replacement parts or equipment from 
sources other than the manufacturer;

[[Page 227]]

    (6) Where applicable, a statement indicating whether the owner will 
be required to pay an alternative facility and/or parts supplier, 
subject to reimbursement by the manufacturer; and
    (7) If an owner will be required to pay an alternative facility and/
or parts supplier, a statement that the owner will be eligible to have 
those expenditures reimbursed by the manufacturer, and a description of 
how a consumer may obtain information about reimbursement from the 
manufacturer consistent with Sec.  577.11(b)(2), (c) and (d).

[67 FR 72393, Dec. 5, 2002]



Sec.  577.13  Notification to dealers and distributors.

    (a) The notification to dealers and distributors of a safety-related 
defect or a noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard 
shall contain a clear statement that identifies the notification as 
being a safety recall notice, an identification of the motor vehicles or 
items of motor vehicle equipment covered by the recall, a description of 
the defect or noncompliance, and a brief evaluation of the risk to motor 
vehicle safety related to the defect or noncompliance. The notification 
shall also include a complete description of the recall remedy, and the 
estimated date on which the remedy will be available. Information 
required by this paragraph that is not available at the time of the 
original notification shall be provided as it becomes available.
    (b) The notification shall also include an advisory stating that it 
is a violation of Federal law for a dealer to deliver a new motor 
vehicle or any new or used item of motor vehicle equipment (including a 
tire) covered by the notification under a sale or lease until the defect 
or noncompliance is remedied.
    (c) The manufacturer shall, upon request of the Administrator, 
demonstrate that it sent the required notification to each of its known 
dealers and distributors and the date of such notification.

[69 FR 34960, June 23, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 38815, July 6, 2005]



PART 578_CIVIL AND CRIMINAL PENALTIES--Table of Contents




Sec.
578.1 Scope.
578.2 Purpose.
578.3 Applicability.
578.4 Definitions.
578.5 Inflationary adjustment of civil penalties.
578.6 Civil penalties for violations of specified provisions of Title 49 
          of the United States Code.
578.7 Criminal safe harbor provision.

    Authority: Pub. L. 101-410, Pub. L. 104-134, Pub. L. 106-414, 49 
U.S.C. 30165, 49 U.S.C. 30170, 30505, 32308, 32309, 32507, 32709, 32710, 
32912, and 33115; delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.

    Source: 62 FR 5169, Feb. 4, 1997, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  578.1  Scope.

    This part specifies the civil penalties for violations of statutes 
administered by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, as 
adjusted for inflation. This part also sets forth the requirements 
regarding the reasonable time and the manner of correction for a person 
seeking safe harbor protection from criminal liability under 49 U.S.C. 
30170(a).

[65 FR 81418, Dec. 26, 2000]



Sec.  578.2  Purpose.

    One purpose of this part is to preserve the remedial impact of civil 
penalties and to foster compliance with the law by specifying the civil 
penalties for statutory violations, as adjusted for inflation. The other 
purpose of this part is to set forth the requirements regarding the 
reasonable time and the manner of correction for a person seeking safe 
harbor protection from criminal liability under 49 U.S.C. 30170(a).

[65 FR 81418, Dec. 26, 2000]



Sec.  578.3  Applicability.

    This part applies to civil penalties for violations of Chapters 301, 
305, 323, 325, 327, 329, and 331 of Title 49 of the

[[Page 228]]

United States Code. This part also applies to the criminal penalty safe 
harbor provision of section 30170 of Title 49 of the United States Code.

[65 FR 81419, Dec. 26, 2000]



Sec.  578.4  Definitions.

    All terms used in this part that are defined in sections 30102, 
30501, 32101, 32702, 32901, and 33101 of Title 49 of the United States 
Code are used as defined in the appropriate statute.
    Administrator means the Administrator of the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration.
    Civil penalty means any non-criminal penalty, fine, or other 
sanction that:
    (1) Is for a specific monetary amount as provided by Federal law, or 
has a maximum amount provided for by Federal law; and
    (2) Is assessed, compromised, collected, or enforced by NHTSA 
pursuant to Federal law.
    NHTSA means the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.

[62 FR 5169, Feb. 4, 1997, as amended at 65 FR 81419, Dec. 26, 2000]



Sec.  578.5  Inflationary adjustment of civil penalties.

    The civil penalties set forth in this part continue in effect until 
adjusted by the Administrator. At least once every four years, the 
Administrator shall review the amount of these civil penalties and will, 
if appropriate, adjust them by rule.



Sec.  578.6  Civil penalties for violations of specified provisions
of Title 49 of the United States Code.

    (a) Motor vehicle safety--(1) In general. A person who violates any 
of sections 30112, 30115, 30117 through 30122, 30123(a), 30125(c), 
30127, or 30141 through 30147 of Title 49 of the United States Code or a 
regulation prescribed under any of those sections is liable to the 
United States Government for a civil penalty of not more than $6,000 for 
each violation. A separate violation occurs for each motor vehicle or 
item of motor vehicle equipment and for each failure or refusal to allow 
or perform an act required by any of those sections. The maximum civil 
penalty under this paragraph for a related series of violations is 
$16,375,000.
    (2) School buses. Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1) of this section, 
a person who:
    (i) Violates section 30112(a)(1) of Title 49 United States Code by 
the manufacture, sale, offer for sale, introduction or delivery for 
introduction into interstate commerce, or importation of a school bus or 
school bus equipment (as those terms are defined in 49 U.S.C. Sec.  
30125(a)); or
    (ii) Violates section 30112(a)(2) of Title 49 United States Code, 
shall be subject to a civil penalty of not more than $10,000 for each 
violation. A separate violation occurs for each motor vehicle or item of 
motor vehicle equipment and for each failure or refusal to allow or 
perform an act required by that section. The maximum penalty under this 
paragraph for a related series of violations is $15,000,000.
    (3) Section 30166. A person who violates section 30166 of Title 49 
of the United States Code or a regulation prescribed under that section 
is liable to the United States Government for a civil penalty for 
failing or refusing to allow or perform an act required under that 
section or regulation. The maximum penalty under this paragraph is 
$6,000 per violation per day. The maximum penalty under this paragraph 
for a related series of daily violations is $16,375,000.
    (b) National Automobile Title Information System. An individual or 
entity violating 49 U.S.C. Chapter 305 is liable to the United States 
Government for a civil penalty of not more than $1,100 for each 
violation.
    (c) Bumper standards. (1) A person that violates 49 U.S.C. Sec.  
32506(a) is liable to the United States Government for a civil penalty 
of not more than $1,100 for each violation. A separate violation occurs 
for each passenger motor vehicle or item of passenger motor vehicle 
equipment involved in a violation of 49 U.S.C. 32506(a)(1) or (4)--
    (i) That does not comply with a standard prescribed under 49 U.S.C. 
32502, or
    (ii) For which a certificate is not provided, or for which a false 
or misleading certificate is provided, under 49 U.S.C. 32504.

[[Page 229]]

    (2) The maximum civil penalty under this paragraph (c) for a related 
series of violations is $1,025,000.
    (d) Consumer information regarding crashworthiness and damage 
susceptibility. A person that violates 49 U.S.C. 32308(a) is liable to 
the United States Government for a civil penalty of not more than $1,100 
for each violation. Each failure to provide information or comply with a 
regulation in violation of 49 U.S.C. 32308(a) is a separate violation. 
The maximum penalty under this paragraph for a related series of 
violations is $500,000.
    (e) Country of origin content labeling. A manufacturer of a 
passenger motor vehicle distributed in commerce for sale in the United 
States that willfully fails to attach the label required under 49 U.S.C. 
32304 to a new passenger motor vehicle that the manufacturer 
manufactures or imports, or a dealer that fails to maintain that label 
as required under 49 U.S.C. 32304, is liable to the United States 
Government for a civil penalty of not more than $1,100 for each 
violation. Each failure to attach or maintain that label for each 
vehicle is a separate violation.
    (f) Odometer tampering and disclosure. (1) A person that violates 49 
U.S.C. Chapter 327 or a regulation prescribed or order issued thereunder 
is liable to the United States Government for a civil penalty of not 
more than $3,200 for each violation. A separate violation occurs for 
each motor vehicle or device involved in the violation. The maximum 
civil penalty under this paragraph for a related series of violations is 
$130,000.
    (2) A person that violates 49 U.S.C. Chapter 327 or a regulation 
prescribed or order issued thereunder, with intent to defraud, is liable 
for three times the actual damages or $2,000, whichever is greater.
    (g) Vehicle theft protection. (1) A person that violates 49 U.S.C. 
33114(a)(1)-(4) is liable to the United States Government for a civil 
penalty of not more than $1,100 for each violation. The failure of more 
than one part of a single motor vehicle to conform to an applicable 
standard under 49 U.S.C. 33102 or 33103 is only a single violation. The 
maximum penalty under this paragraph for a related series of violations 
is $325,000.
    (2) A person that violates 49 U.S.C. 33114(a)(5) is liable to the 
United States Government for a civil penalty of not more than $130,000 a 
day for each violation.
    (h) Automobile fuel economy. (1) A person that violates 49 U.S.C. 
32911(a) is liable to the United States Government for a civil penalty 
of not more than $16,000 for each violation. A separate violation occurs 
for each day the violation continues.
    (2) Except as provided in 49 U.S.C. 32912(c), a manufacturer that 
violates a standard prescribed for a model year under 49 U.S.C. 32902 is 
liable to the United States Government for a civil penalty of $5.50 
multiplied by each .1 of a mile a gallon by which the applicable average 
fuel economy standard under that section exceeds the average fuel 
economy--
    (i) Calculated under 49 U.S.C. 32904(a)(1)(A) or (B) for automobiles 
to which the standard applies manufactured by the manufacturer during 
the model year;
    (ii) Multiplied by the number of those automobiles; and
    (iii) Reduced by the credits available to the manufacturer under 49 
U.S.C. 32903 for the model year.

[62 FR 5169, Feb. 4, 1997, as amended at 64 FR 37878, July 14, 1999; 65 
FR 68110, Nov. 14, 2000; 66 FR 41151, Aug. 7, 2001; 69 FR 57866, Sept. 
28, 2004; 70 FR 53311, Sept. 8, 2005; 71 FR 28281, May 16, 2006; 73 FR 
9956, Feb. 25, 2008]



Sec.  578.7  Criminal safe harbor provision.

    (a) Scope. This section sets forth the requirements regarding the 
reasonable time and the manner of correction for a person seeking safe 
harbor protection from criminal liability under 49 U.S.C. 30170(a)(2), 
which provides that a person described in 49 U.S.C. 30170(a)(1) is not 
subject to criminal penalties thereunder if:
    (1) At the time of the violation, such person does not know that the 
violation would result in an accident causing death or serious bodily 
injury; and
    (2) The person corrects any improper reports or failure to report, 
with respect to reporting requirements of 49 U.S.C. 30166, within a 
reasonable time.

[[Page 230]]

    (b) Reasonable time. A correction is considered to have been 
performed within a reasonable time if the person seeking protection from 
criminal liability makes the correction to any improper (i.e., 
incorrect, incomplete, or misleading) report not more than thirty (30) 
calendar days after the date of the report to the agency and corrects 
any failure to report not more than thirty (30) calendar days after the 
report was due to be sent to or received by the agency, as the case may 
be, pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30166, including a regulation, requirement, 
request or order issued thereunder. In order to meet these reasonable 
time requirements, all submissions required by this section must be 
received by NHTSA within the time period specified in this paragraph, 
and not merely mailed or otherwise sent within that time period.
    (c) Sufficient manner of correction. Each person seeking safe harbor 
protection from criminal penalties under 49 U.S.C. 30170(a)(2) must 
comply with the following with respect to each improper report and 
failure to report for which safe harbor protection is sought:
    (1) Sign and submit to NHTSA a dated document identifying:
    (i) Each previous improper report (e.g., informational statement and 
document submission), and each failure to report as required under 49 
U.S.C. 30166, including a regulation, requirement, request or order 
issued thereunder, for which protection is sought, and
    (ii) The specific predicate under which the improper or omitted 
report should have been provided (e.g., the report was required by a 
specified regulation, NHTSA Information Request, or NHTSA Special 
Order).
    (2) Submit the complete and correct information that was required to 
be submitted but was improperly submitted or was not previously 
submitted, including relevant documents that were not previously 
submitted, or, if the person cannot do so, provide a detailed 
description of that information and/or the content of those documents 
and the reason why the individual cannot provide them to NHTSA (e.g., 
the information or documents are not in the individual's possession or 
control).
    (3) For a corporation, the submission must be signed by an 
authorized person (ordinarily, the individual officer or employee who 
submitted the improper report or who should have provided the report 
that the corporation failed to submit on behalf of the company, or 
someone in the company with authority to make such a submission).
    (4) Submissions must be made by a means which permits the sender to 
verify promptly that the report was in fact received by NHTSA and the 
day it was received by NHTSA.
    (5) Submit the report to Chief Counsel (NCC-10), National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration, Room 5219, 400 Seventh Street, SW., 
Washington, DC 20590.

[65 FR 81419, Dec. 26, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 38384, July 24, 2001]



PART 579_REPORTING OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS ABOUT POTENTIAL 
DEFECTS--Table of Contents




                            Subpart A_General

Sec.
579.1 Scope.
579.2 Purpose.
579.3 Application.
579.4 Terminology.
579.5 Notices, bulletins, customer satisfaction campaigns, consumer 
          advisories, and other communications.
579.6 Address for submitting reports and other information.
579.7-579.10 [Reserved]

  Subpart B_Reporting of Safety Recalls and Other Safety Campaigns in 
                            Foreign Countries

579.11 Reporting responsibilities.
579.12 Contents of reports.
579.13-579.20 [Reserved]

            Subpart C_Reporting of Early Warning Information

579.21 Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 500 or more light 
          vehicles annually.
579.22 Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 500 or more medium-
          heavy vehicles and buses annually.
579.23 Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 500 or more 
          motorcycles annually.
579.24 Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 500 or more trailers 
          annually.

[[Page 231]]

579.25 Reporting requirements for manufacturers of child restraint 
          systems.
579.26 Reporting requirements for manufacturers of tires.
579.27 Reporting requirements for manufacturers of fewer than 500 
          vehicles annually, for manufacturers of original equipment, 
          and for manufacturers of replacement equipment other than 
          child restraint systems and tires.
579.28 Due date of reports and other miscellaneous provisions.
579.29 Manner of reporting.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 30102-103, 30112, 30117-121, 30166-167; 
delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50 and 49 CFR 501.8.

    Source: 67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002, unless otherwise noted.



                            Subpart A_General



Sec.  579.1  Scope.

    This part sets forth requirements for reporting information and 
submitting documents that may help identify defects related to motor 
vehicle safety and noncompliances with Federal motor vehicle safety 
standards, including reports of foreign safety recalls and other safety-
related campaigns conducted outside the United States under 49 U.S.C. 
30166(l), early warning information under 49 U.S.C. 30166(m), and copies 
of communications about defects and noncompliances under 49 U.S.C. 
30166(f).



Sec.  579.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to enhance motor vehicle safety by 
specifying information and documents that manufacturers of motor 
vehicles and motor vehicle equipment must provide to NHTSA with respect 
to possible safety-related defects and noncompliances in their products, 
including the reporting of safety recalls and other safety campaigns 
that the manufacturer conducts outside the United States.

[67 FR 63310, Oct. 11, 2002]



Sec.  579.3  Application.

    (a) This part applies to all manufacturers of motor vehicles and 
motor vehicle equipment with respect to all motor vehicles and motor 
vehicle equipment that have been offered for sale, sold, or leased in 
the United States by the manufacturer, including any parent corporation, 
any subsidiary or affiliate of the manufacturer, or any subsidiary or 
affiliate of any parent corporation, and with respect to all motor 
vehicles and motor vehicle equipment that have been offered for sale, 
sold, or leased in a foreign country by the manufacturer, including any 
parent corporation, any subsidiary or affiliate of the manufacturer, or 
any subsidiary or affiliate of any parent corporation, and are identical 
or substantially similar to any motor vehicles or motor vehicle 
equipment that have been offered for sale, sold, or leased in the United 
States.
    (b) In the case of any report required under subpart B of this part, 
compliance by the fabricating manufacturer, the importer, the brand name 
owner, or a parent or subsidiary of such fabricator, importer, or brand 
name owner of the motor vehicle or motor vehicle equipment that is 
identical or substantially similar to that covered by the foreign recall 
or other safety campaign, shall be considered compliance by all persons.
    (c) In the case of any report required under subpart C of this part, 
compliance by the fabricating manufacturer, the importer, the brand name 
owner, or a parent or United States subsidiary of such fabricator, 
importer, or brand name owner of the motor vehicle or motor vehicle 
equipment, shall be considered compliance by all persons.
    (d) With regard to any information required to be reported under 
subpart C of this part, an entity covered under paragraph (a) of this 
section need only review information and systems where information 
responsive to subpart C of this part is kept in the usual course of 
business.

[43 FR 38833, Aug. 31, 1978, as amended at 67 FR 63310, Oct. 11, 2002]



Sec.  579.4  Terminology.

    (a) Statutory terms. The terms dealer, defect, distributor, motor 
vehicle, motor vehicle equipment, and State are used as defined in 49 
U.S.C. 30102.
    (b) Regulatory terms. The term Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 
is used as defined in Sec.  565.3(o) of this chapter. The terms bus, 
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

[[Page 232]]

(GVWR), motorcycle, multipurpose passenger vehicle, passenger car, 
trailer, and truck are used as defined in Sec.  571.3(b) of this 
chapter. The term Booster seat is used as defined in S4 of Sec.  571.213 
of this chapter. The term Tire Identification Number (TIN) is the ``tire 
identification number'' described in Sec.  574.5 of this chapter. The 
term Limited production tire is used as defined in Sec.  575.104(c)(2) 
of this chapter.
    (c) Other terms. The following terms apply to this part:
    Administrator means the Administrator of the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), or the Administrator's delegate.
    Affiliate means, in the context of an affiliate of or person 
affiliated with a specified person, a person that directly, or 
indirectly through one or more intermediates, controls or is controlled 
by, or is under common control with, the person specified. The term 
person usually is a corporation.
    Air bag means an air bag or other automatic occupant restraint 
device (other than a ``seat belt'' as defined in this subpart) installed 
in a motor vehicle that restrains an occupant in the event of a vehicle 
crash without requiring any action on the part of the occupant to obtain 
the benefit of the restraint. This term includes inflatable restraints 
(front and side air bags), knee bolsters, and any other automatic 
restraining device that may be developed that does not include a 
restraining belt or harness. This term also includes all air bag-related 
components, such as the inflator assembly, air bag module, control 
module, crash sensors and all hardware and software associated with the 
air bag. This term includes all associated switches, control units, 
connective elements (such as wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and 
mounting elements (such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Base means the detachable bottom portion of a child restraint system 
that may remain in the vehicle to provide a base for securing the system 
to a seat in a motor vehicle.
    Bead means all the materials in a tire below the sidewalls in the 
rim contact area, including bead rubber components, the bead bundle and 
rubber coating if present, the body ply and its turn-up including the 
rubber coating, rubber, fabric, or metallic reinforcing materials, and 
the inner-liner rubber under the bead area.
    Brand name owner means a person that markets a motor vehicle or 
motor vehicle equipment under its own trade name whether or not it is 
the fabricator or importer of the vehicle or equipment.
    Buckle and restraint harness means the components of a child 
restraint system that are intended to restrain a child seated in such a 
system, including the belt webbing, buckles, buckle release mechanism, 
belt adjusters, belt positioning devices, and shields.
    Child restraint system means any system that meets, or is offered 
for sale in the United States as meeting, any definition in S4 of Sec.  
571.213 of this chapter, or that is offered for sale as a child 
restraint system in a foreign country.
    Claim means a written request or written demand for relief, 
including money or other compensation, assumption of expenditures, or 
equitable relief, related to a motor vehicle crash, accident, the 
failure of a component or system of a vehicle or an item of motor 
vehicle equipment, or a fire originating in or from a motor vehicle or a 
substance that leaked from a motor vehicle. Claim includes, but is not 
limited to, a demand in the absence of a lawsuit, a complaint initiating 
a lawsuit, an assertion or notice of litigation, a settlement, covenant 
not to sue or release of liability in the absence of a written demand, 
and a subrogation request. A claim exists regardless of any denial or 
refusal to pay it, and regardless of whether it has been settled or 
resolved in the manufacturer's favor. The existence of a claim may not 
be conditioned on the receipt of anything beyond the document(s) stating 
a claim. Claim does not include demands related to asbestos exposure, to 
emissions of volatile organic compounds from vehicle interiors, or to 
end-of-life disposal of vehicles, parts or components of vehicles, 
equipment, or parts or components of equipment.
    Common green tires means tires that are produced to the same 
internal specifications but that have, or may have, different external 
characteristics and

[[Page 233]]

may be sold under different tire line names.
    Consumer complaint means a communication of any kind made by a 
consumer (or other person) to or with a manufacturer addressed to the 
company, an officer thereof or an entity thereof that handles consumer 
matters, a manufacturer website that receives consumer complaints, a 
manufacturer electronic mail system that receives such information at 
the corporate level, or that are otherwise received by a unit within the 
manufacturer that receives consumer inquiries or complaints, including 
telephonic complaints, expressing dissatisfaction with a product, or 
relating the unsatisfactory performance of a product, or any actual or 
potential defect in a product, or any event that allegedly was caused by 
any actual or potential defect in a product, but not including a claim 
of any kind or a notice involving a fatality or injury.
    Control (including the terms controlling, controlled by, and under 
common control with) means the possession, direct or indirect, of the 
power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of 
a person, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by 
contract, or otherwise.
    Customer satisfaction campaign, consumer advisory, recall, or other 
activity involving the repair or replacement of motor vehicles or motor 
vehicle equipment means any communication by a manufacturer to, or made 
available to, more than one dealer, distributor, lessor, lessee, other 
manufacturer, or owner, whether in writing or by electronic means, 
relating to repair, replacement, or modification of a vehicle, component 
of a vehicle, item of equipment, or a component thereof, the manner in 
which a vehicle or child restraint system is to be maintained or 
operated (excluding promotional and marketing materials, customer 
satisfaction surveys, and operating instructions or owner's manuals that 
accompany the vehicle or child restraint system at the time of first 
sale); or advice or direction to a dealer or distributor to cease the 
delivery or sale of specified models of vehicles or equipment.
    Dealer field report means a field report from a dealer or authorized 
service facility of a manufacturer of motor vehicles or motor vehicle 
equipment.
    Electrical system means any electrical or electronic component of a 
motor vehicle that is not included in one of the other reporting 
categories enumerated in subpart C of this part, and specifically 
includes the battery, battery cables, alternator, fuses, and main body 
wiring harnesses of the motor vehicle and the ignition system, including 
the ignition switch and starter motor. The term also includes all 
associated switches, control units, connective elements (such as wiring 
harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting elements (such as 
brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Engine and engine cooling means the component (e.g., motor) of a 
motor vehicle providing motive power to the vehicle, and includes the 
exhaust system (including the exhaust emission system), the engine 
control unit, engine lubrication system, and the underhood cooling 
system for that engine. This term also includes all associated switches, 
control units, connective elements (such as wiring harnesses, hoses, 
piping, etc.), and mounting elements (such as brackets, fasteners, 
etc.).
    Equipment comprises original and replacement equipment: (1) Original 
equipment means an item of motor vehicle equipment (other than a tire) 
that was installed in or on a motor vehicle at the time of its delivery 
to the first purchaser if the item of equipment was installed on or in 
the motor vehicle at the time of its delivery to a dealer or distributor 
for distribution; or the item of equipment was installed by the dealer 
or distributor with the express authorization of the motor vehicle 
manufacturer.
    (2) Replacement equipment means motor vehicle equipment other than 
original equipment, and tires.
    Exterior lighting mean all the exterior lamps (including any 
interior-mounted center highmounted stop lamp if mounted in the interior 
of a vehicle), lenses, reflectors, and associated equipment of a motor 
vehicle, including all associated switches, control units, connective 
elements (such as wiring harnesses, piping, etc.), and mounting elements 
(such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).

[[Page 234]]

    Field report means a communication in writing, including 
communications in electronic form, from an employee or representative of 
a manufacturer of motor vehicles or motor vehicle equipment, a dealer or 
authorized service facility of such manufacturer, or an entity known to 
the manufacturer as owning or operating a fleet, to the manufacturer 
regarding the failure, malfunction, lack of durability, or other 
performance problem of a motor vehicle or motor vehicle equipment, or 
any part thereof, produced for sale by that manufacturer and transported 
beyond the direct control of the manufacturer, regardless of whether 
verified or assessed to be lacking in merit, but does not include any 
document covered by the attorney-client privilege or the work product 
exclusion.
    Fire means combustion or burning of material in or from a vehicle as 
evidenced by flame. The term also includes, but is not limited to, 
thermal events and fire-related phenomena such as smoke and melt, but 
does not include events and phenomena associated with a normally 
functioning vehicle such as combustion of fuel within an engine or 
exhaust from an engine.
    Fleet means more than ten motor vehicles of the same make, model, 
and model year.
    Foreign country means a country other than the United States.
    Foreign government means the central government of a foreign country 
as well as any political subdivision of that country.
    Fuel system means all components of a motor vehicle used to receive 
and store fuel, and to transfer fuel between the vehicle's fuel storage, 
engine, or fuel emission systems. This term includes, but is not limited 
to, the fuel tank and filler cap, neck, and pipe, along with associated 
piping, hoses, and clamps, the fuel pump, fuel lines, connectors from 
the fuel tank to the engine, the fuel injection/carburetion system 
(including fuel injector rails and injectors), and the fuel vapor 
recovery system(s), canister(s), and vent lines. The term also includes 
all associated switches, control units, connective elements (such as 
wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting elements (such as 
brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Good will means the repair or replacement of a motor vehicle or item 
of motor vehicle equipment, including labor, paid for by the 
manufacturer, at least in part, when the repair or replacement is not 
covered under warranty, or under a safety recall reported to NHTSA under 
part 573 of this chapter.
    Handle means any element of a child restraint system that is 
designed to facilitate carrying the restraint outside a motor vehicle, 
other than an element of the seat shell.
    Incomplete light vehicle means an incomplete vehicle as defined in 
Sec.  568.3 of this chapter which, when completed, will be a light 
vehicle.
    Integrated child restraint system means a factory-installed built-in 
child restraint system as defined in S4 of Sec.  571.213 of this chapter 
and includes any factory-authorized built-in child restraint system.
    Latch means a latching, locking, or linking system of a motor 
vehicle and all its components fitted to a vehicle's exterior doors, 
rear hatch, liftgate, tailgate, trunk, or hood. This term also includes, 
but is not limited to, devices for the remote operation of a latching 
device such as remote release cables (and associated components), 
electric release devices, or wireless control release devices, and 
includes all components covered in FMVSS No. 206. This term also 
includes all associated switches, control units, connective elements 
(such as wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting elements 
(such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Light vehicle means any motor vehicle, except a bus, motorcycle, or 
trailer, with a GVWR of 10,000 lbs or less.
    Make means a name that a manufacturer applies to a group of 
vehicles.
    Manufacturer means a person manufacturing or assembling motor 
vehicles or motor vehicle equipment, or importing motor vehicles or 
motor vehicle equipment for resale. This term includes any parent 
corporation, any subsidiary or affiliate, and any subsidiary or 
affiliate of a parent corporation of such a person.

[[Page 235]]

    Medium-heavy vehicle means any motor vehicle, except a trailer, with 
a GVWR greater than 10,000 lbs.
    Minimal specificity means:
    (1) For a vehicle, the make, model, and model year,
    (2) For a child restraint system, the manufacturer and the model 
(either the model name or model number),
    (3) For a tire, the manufacturer, tire line, and tire size, and
    (4) For other motor vehicle equipment, the manufacturer and, if 
there is a model or family of models identified on the item of 
equipment, the model name or model number.
    Model means a name that a manufacturer of motor vehicles applies to 
a family of vehicles within a make which have a degree of commonality in 
construction, such as body, chassis or cab type. For equipment other 
than child restraint systems, it means the name that the manufacturer 
uses to designate it. For child restraint systems, it means the name 
that the manufacturer uses to identify child restraint systems with the 
same seat shell, buckle, base (if so equipped) and restraint system.
    Model year means the year that a manufacturer uses to designate a 
discrete model of vehicle, irrespective of the calendar year in which 
the vehicle was manufactured. If the manufacturer has not assigned a 
model year, it means the calendar year in which the vehicle was 
manufactured.
    Notice means a document, other than a media article, that does not 
include a demand for relief, and that a manufacturer receives from a 
person other than NHTSA.
    Other safety campaign means an action in which a manufacturer 
communicates with owners and/or dealers in a foreign country with 
respect to conditions under which motor vehicles or equipment should be 
operated, repaired, or replaced that relate to safety (excluding 
promotional and marketing materials, customer satisfaction surveys, and 
operating instructions or owner's manuals that accompany the vehicle or 
child restraint system at the time of first sale; or advice or direction 
to a dealer or distributor to cease the delivery or sale of specified 
models of vehicles or equipment).
    Parking brake means a mechanism installed in a motor vehicle which 
is designed to prevent the movement of a stationary motor vehicle, 
including all associated switches, control units, connective elements 
(such as wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting elements 
(such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Platform means the basic structure of a vehicle including, but not 
limited to, the majority of the floorpan or undercarriage, and elements 
of the engine compartment. The term includes a structure that a 
manufacturer designates as a platform. A group of vehicles sharing a 
common structure or chassis shall be considered to have a common 
platform regardless of whether such vehicles are of the same type, are 
of the same make, or are sold by the same manufacturer.
    Power train means the components or systems of a motor vehicle which 
transfer motive power from the engine to the wheels, including the 
transmission (manual and automatic), gear selection devices and 
associated linkages, clutch, constant velocity joints, transfer case, 
driveline, differential(s), and all driven axle assemblies. This term 
includes all associated switches, control units, connective elements 
(such as wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting elements 
(such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Product evaluation report means a field report prepared by, and 
containing the observations or comments of, a manufacturer's employee 
who submitted the report concerning the operation or performance of a 
vehicle or child restraint system as part of the employee's personal use 
of the vehicle or child restraint system under a manufacturer's program 
authorizing such use, but does not include a report by an employee who 
has been granted personal use of a vehicle or child restraint system for 
the specific purpose of facilitating the employee's technical or 
engineering evaluation of a known or suspected problem with that vehicle 
or child restraint system.
    Production year means, for equipment and tires, the calendar year in 
which the item was produced.
    Property damage means physical injury to tangible property.

[[Page 236]]

    Property damage claim means a claim for property damage, excluding 
that part of a claim, if any, pertaining solely to damage to a component 
or system of a vehicle or an item of equipment itself based on the 
alleged failure or malfunction of the component, system, or item, and 
further excluding matters addressed under warranty.
    Rear-facing infant seat means a child restraint system that is 
designed to position a child to face only in the direction opposite to 
the normal direction of travel of the motor vehicle.
    Reporting period means a calendar quarter of a year, unless 
otherwise stated.
    Rollover means a single-vehicle crash in which a motor vehicle 
rotates on its longitudinal axis to at least 90 degrees, regardless of 
whether it comes to rest on its wheels.
    Safety recall means an offer by a manufacturer to owners of motor 
vehicles or equipment in a foreign country to provide remedial action to 
address a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety or a failure to 
comply with an applicable safety standard or guideline, whether or not 
the manufacturer agrees to pay the full cost of the remedial action.
    Seats means all components of a motor vehicle that are subject to 
FMVSS Nos. 202, 207, and 209, including all electrical and electronic 
components within the seat that are related to seat positioning, 
heating, and cooling. This term also includes all associated switches, 
control units, connective elements (such as wiring harnesses, hoses, 
piping, etc.), and mounting elements (such as brackets, fasteners, 
etc.).
    Seat belts means any belt system, other than an air bag, that may or 
may not require the occupant to latch, fasten, or secure the components 
of the seat belt/webbing based restraint system to ready its use for 
protection of the occupant in the event of a vehicle crash. This term 
includes the webbing, buckle, anchorage, retractor, belt pretensioner 
devices, load limiters, and all components, hardware and software 
associated with an automatic or manual seat belt system addressed by 
FMVSS No. 209 or 210. This term also includes integrated child restraint 
systems in vehicles, and includes any device (and all components of that 
device), installed in a motor vehicle in accordance with FMVSS No. 213, 
which is designed for use as a safety restraint device for a child too 
small to use a vehicle's seat belts. This term includes all vehicle 
components installed in accordance with FMVSS No. 225. This term also 
includes all associated switches, control units, connective elements 
(such as wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting elements 
(such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Seat shell means the portion of a child restraint system that 
provides the structural shape, form and support for the system, and for 
other components of the system such as belt attachment points, and 
anchorage points to allow the system to be secured to a passenger seat 
in a motor vehicle, but not including a shield.
    Service brake system means all components of the service braking 
system of a motor vehicle intended for the transfer of braking 
application force from the operator to the wheels of a vehicle, 
including the foundation braking system, such as the brake pedal, master 
cylinder, fluid lines and hoses, braking assist components, brake 
calipers, wheel cylinders, brake discs, brake drums, brake pads, brake 
shoes, and other related equipment installed in a motor vehicle in order 
to comply with FMVSS Nos. 105, 121, 122, or 135 (except equipment 
relating specifically to a parking brake). This term also includes 
systems and devices for automatic control of the brake system such as 
antilock braking, traction control, stability control, and enhanced 
braking. The term includes all associated switches, control units, 
connective elements (such as wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and 
mounting elements (such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Sidewall means the area of a tire between the tread and the bead 
area, including the sidewall rubber components, the body ply and its 
coating rubber under the side area, and the inner-liner rubber under the 
body ply in the side area.
    SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) means the alpha-numeric designation 
assigned by a manufacturer to uniquely identify a tire product. This 
term is sometimes

[[Page 237]]

referred to as a product code, a product ID, or a part number.
    Steering system means all steering control system components, 
including the steering system mechanism and its associated hardware, the 
steering wheel, steering column, steering shaft, linkages, joints 
(including tie-rod ends), steering dampeners, and power steering assist 
systems. This term includes a steering control system as defined by 
FMVSS No. 203 and any subsystem or component of a steering control 
system, including those components defined in FMVSS No. 204. This term 
also includes all associated switches, control units, connective 
elements (such as wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting 
elements (such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Structure means any part of a motor vehicle that serves to maintain 
the shape and size of the vehicle, including the frame, the floorpan, 
the body, bumpers, doors, tailgate, hatchback, trunk lid, hood, and 
roof. The term also includes all associated mounting elements (such as 
brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Suspension system means all components and hardware associated with 
a motor vehicle suspension system, including the associated control 
arms, steering knuckles, spindles, joints, bushings, ball joints, 
springs, shock absorbers, stabilizer (anti sway) bars, and bearings that 
are designed to minimize the impact on the vehicle chassis of shocks 
from road surface irregularities that may be transmitted through the 
wheels, and to provide stability when the vehicle is being operated 
through a range of speed, load, and dynamic conditions. The term also 
includes all electronic control systems and mechanisms for active 
suspension control, as well as all associated components such as 
switches, control units, connective elements (such as wiring harnesses, 
hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting elements (such as brackets, 
fasteners, etc.).
    Tire means an item of motor vehicle equipment intended to interface 
between the road and a motor vehicle. The term includes all the tires of 
a vehicle, including the spare tire. For purposes of Sec. Sec.  579.21 
through 579.24 and Sec.  579.27 of this part, this term also includes 
the tire inflation valves, tubes, and tire pressure monitoring and 
regulating systems, as well as all associated switches, control units, 
connective elements (such as wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and 
mounting elements (such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Tire line means the entire name used by a tire manufacturer to 
designate a tire product including all prefixes and suffixes as they 
appear on the sidewall of a tire.
    Trailer hitch means all coupling systems, devices, and components 
thereof, designed to join or connect any two motor vehicles. This term 
also includes all associated switches, control units, connective 
elements (such as wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting 
elements (such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Tread (also known as crown) means all materials in the tread area of 
a tire including the rubber that makes up the tread, the sub-base 
rubber, when present, between the tread base and the top of the belts, 
the belt material, either steel and/or fabric, and the rubber coating of 
the same including any rubber inserts, the body ply and its coating 
rubber under the tread area of the tire, and the inner-liner rubber 
under the tread.
    Type means, in the context of a light vehicle, a vehicle certified 
by its manufacturer pursuant to Sec.  567.4(g)(7) of this chapter as a 
passenger car, multipurpose passenger vehicle, or truck, or a vehicle 
identified by its manufacturer as an incomplete vehicle pursuant to 
Sec.  568.4 of this chapter. In the context of a medium heavy vehicle 
and bus, it means one of the following categories: Truck, tractor, 
transit bus, school bus, coach, recreational vehicle, emergency vehicle, 
or other. In the context of a trailer, it means one of the following 
categories: Recreational trailers, van trailers, flatbed trailer, 
trailer converter dolly, lowbed trailer, dump trailer, tank trailer, dry 
bulk trailer, livestock trailer, boat trailer, auto transporter, or 
other. In the context of a child restraint system, it means the category 
of child restraint system selected from one of the following: rear-
facing infant seat, booster seat, or other.

[[Page 238]]

    Vehicle speed control means the systems and components of a motor 
vehicle that control vehicle speed either by command of the operator or 
by automatic control, including, but not limited, to the accelerator 
pedal, linkages, cables, springs, speed control devices (such as cruise 
control) and speed limiting devices. This term includes, but is not 
limited to the items addressed by FMVSS No. 124 and all associated 
switches, control units, connective elements (such as wiring harnesses, 
hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting elements (such as brackets, 
fasteners, etc.).
    Visibility means the systems and components of a motor vehicle 
through which a driver views the surroundings of the vehicle including 
windshield, side windows, back window, and rear view mirrors, and 
systems and components used to wash and wipe windshields and back 
windows. This term includes those vehicular systems and components that 
can affect the ability of the driver to clearly see the roadway and 
surrounding area, such as the systems and components identified in FMVSS 
Nos. 103, 104, and 111. This term also includes the defogger/defroster 
system, the heater core, blower fan, windshield wiper systems, mirrors, 
windows and glazing material, heads-up display (HUD) systems, and 
exterior view-based television systems, but does not include exterior 
lighting systems which are defined under ``Lighting.'' This term 
includes all associated switches, control units, connective elements 
(such as wiring harnesses, hoses, piping, etc.), and mounting elements 
(such as brackets, fasteners, etc.).
    Warranty means any written affirmation of fact or written promise 
made in connection with the sale or lease of a motor vehicle or motor 
vehicle equipment by a manufacturer to a buyer or lessee that relates to 
the nature of the material or workmanship and affirms or promises that 
such material or workmanship is defect free or will meet a specified 
level of performance over a specified period of time (including any 
extensions of such specified period of time), or any undertaking in 
writing in connection with the sale or lease by a manufacturer of a 
motor vehicle or item of motor vehicle equipment to refund, repair, 
replace, or take other remedial action with respect to such product in 
the event that such product fails to meet the specifications set forth 
in the undertaking.
    Warranty adjustment means any payment or other restitution, such as, 
but not limited to, replacement, repair, credit, or cash refund, made by 
a tire manufacturer to a consumer or to a dealer, in reimbursement for 
payment or other restitution to a consumer, pursuant to a warranty 
program offered by the manufacturer or goodwill.
    Warranty claim means any claim paid by a manufacturer, including 
provision of a credit, pursuant to a warranty program, an extended 
warranty program, or good will. It does not include claims for 
reimbursement for costs or related expenses for work performed to remedy 
a safety-related defect or noncompliance reported to NHTSA under part 
573 of this chapter, or in connection with a motor vehicle emissions-
related recall under the Clean Air Act or in accordance with State law 
as authorized under 42 U.S.C. 7543(b) or 7507.
    Wheel means the assembly or component of a motor vehicle to which a 
tire is mounted. The term includes any item of motor vehicle equipment 
used to attach the wheel to the vehicle, including inner cap nuts and 
the wheel studs, bolts, and nuts.
    Work product means a document in the broad sense of the word, 
prepared in anticipation of litigation where there is a reasonable 
prospect of litigation and not for some other purpose such as a business 
practice, and prepared or requested by an attorney or an agent for an 
attorney.
    (d) Identical or substantially similar motor vehicle, item of motor 
vehicle equipment, or tire. (1) A motor vehicle sold or in use outside 
the United States is identical or substantially similar to a motor 
vehicle sold or offered for sale in the United States if--
    (i) Such a vehicle has been sold in Canada or has been certified as 
complying with the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards;
    (ii) Such a vehicle is listed in the VSP or VSA columns of appendix 
A to part 593 of this chapter;
    (iii) Such a vehicle is manufactured in the United States for sale 
in a foreign country; or

[[Page 239]]

    (iv) Such a vehicle uses the same vehicle platform as a vehicle sold 
or offered for sale in the United States.
    (2) An item of motor vehicle equipment sold or in use outside the 
United States is identical or substantially similar to equipment sold or 
offered for sale in the United States if such equipment and the 
equipment sold or offered for sale in the United States have one or more 
components or systems that are the same, and the component or system 
performs the same function in vehicles or equipment sold or offered for 
sale in the United States, regardless of whether the part numbers are 
identical.
    (3) A tire sold or in use outside the United States is substantially 
similar to a tire sold or offered for sale in the United States if it 
has the same size, speed rating, load index, load range, number of plies 
and belts, and similar ply and belt construction and materials, 
placement of components, and component materials, irrespective of plant 
of manufacture or tire line.

[43 FR 38833, Aug. 31, 1978, as amended at 67 FR 63310, Oct. 11, 2002; 
68 FR 4113, Jan. 28, 2003; 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003; 68 FR 35142, June 
11, 2003; 69 FR 20557, Apr. 16, 2004; 72 FR 29443, May 29, 2007]

    Effective Date Note: At 74 FR 47757, Sept. 17, 2009, Sec.  579.4 was 
amended by revising the definition of ``Other safety campaign'' in 
paragraph (c), effective Oct. 19, 2009. For the convenience of the user, 
the revised text is set forth as follows:



Sec.  579.4  Terminology.

                                * * * * *

    (c) * * *

                                * * * * *

    Other safety campaign means an action in which a manufacturer 
communicates with owners and/or dealers in a foreign country with 
respect to conditions under which motor vehicles or equipment should be 
operated, repaired, or replaced that relate to safety (excluding 
promotional and marketing materials, customer satisfaction surveys, and 
operating instructions or owner's manuals that accompany the vehicle or 
child restraint system at the time of first sale); or advice or 
direction to a dealer or distributor to cease the delivery or sale of 
specified models of vehicles or equipment.

                                * * * * *



Sec.  579.5  Notices, bulletins, customer satisfaction campaigns, 
consumer advisories, and other communications.

    (a) Each manufacturer shall furnish to NHTSA's Early Warning 
Division (NVS-217) a copy of all notices, bulletins, and other 
communications (including those transmitted by computer, telefax, or 
other electronic means and including warranty and policy extension 
communiqu[eacute]s and product improvement bulletins) other than those 
required to be submitted pursuant to Sec.  573.6(c)(10) of this chapter, 
sent to more than one manufacturer, distributor, dealer, lessor, lessee, 
owner, or purchaser, in the United States, regarding any defect in its 
vehicles or items of equipment (including any failure or malfunction 
beyond normal deterioration in use, or any failure of performance, or 
any flaw or unintended deviation from design specifications), whether or 
not such defect is safety-related.
    (b) Each manufacturer shall furnish to NHTSA a copy of each 
communication relating to a customer satisfaction campaign, consumer 
advisory, recall, or other safety activity involving the repair or 
replacement of motor vehicles or equipment, that the manufacturer issued 
to, or made available to, more than one dealer, distributor, lessor, 
lessee, other manufacturer, owner, or purchaser, in the United States.
    (c) If a notice or communication is required to be submitted under 
both paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, it need only be submitted 
once.
    (d) Each copy shall be in readable form and shall be submitted not 
later than five working days after the end of the month in which it is 
issued. However, a document described in paragraph (b) of this section 
and issued before July 1, 2003, need not be submitted.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003; 
68 FR 35147, June 11, 2003; 69 FR 49823, Aug. 12, 2004; 72 FR 32017, 
June 11, 2007]

[[Page 240]]



Sec.  579.6  Address for submitting reports and other information.

    (a) Except as provided by paragraph (b) of this section, 
information, reports, and documents required to be submitted to NHTSA 
pursuant to this part may be submitted by mail, by facsimile, or by e-
mail. If submitted by mail, they must be addressed to the Associate 
Administrator for Enforcement, National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration, Attention: Early Warning Division (NVS-217), 1200 New 
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. If submitted by facsimile, 
they must be addressed to the Associate Administrator for Enforcement 
and transmitted to (202) 366-7882. If submitted by e-mail, submissions 
under subpart B of this part must be submitted to frecalls@dot.gov and 
submissions under Sec.  579.5 must be submitted to tsb@dot.gov.
    (b) Information, documents and reports that are submitted to NHTSA's 
early warning data repository must be submitted in accordance with Sec.  
579.29 of this part. Submissions must be made by a means that permits 
the sender to verify that the report was in fact received by NHTSA and 
the day it was received by NHTSA.

[68 FR 4113, Jan. 28, 2003, as amended at 72 FR 32017, June 11, 2007]



Sec. Sec.  579.7-579.10  [Reserved]



  Subpart B_Reporting of Safety Recalls and Other Safety Campaigns in 
                            Foreign Countries

    Source: 67 FR 63310, Oct. 11, 2002, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  579.11  Reporting responsibilities.

    (a) Determination by a manufacturer. Not later than 5 working days 
after a manufacturer determines to conduct a safety recall or other 
safety campaign in a foreign country covering a motor vehicle, item of 
motor vehicle equipment, or tire that is identical or substantially 
similar to a vehicle, item of equipment, or tire sold or offered for 
sale in the United States, the manufacturer shall report the 
determination to NHTSA. For purposes of this paragraph, this period is 
determined by reference to the general business practices of the office 
in which such determination is made, and the office reporting to NHTSA.
    (b) Determination by a foreign government. Not later than 5 working 
days after a manufacturer receives written notification that a foreign 
government has determined that a safety recall or other safety campaign 
must be conducted in its country with respect to a motor vehicle, item 
of motor vehicle equipment, or tire that is identical or substantially 
similar to a vehicle, item of equipment, or tire sold or offered for 
sale in the United States, the manufacturer shall report the 
determination to NHTSA. For purposes of this paragraph, this period is 
determined by reference to the general business practices of the office 
where the manufacturer receives such notification, the manufacturer's 
international headquarters office (if involved), and the office 
reporting to NHTSA.
    (c) One-time historical reporting. Not later than 30 calendar days 
after November 12, 2002, a manufacturer that has made a determination to 
conduct a recall or other safety campaign in a foreign country, or that 
has received written notification that a foreign government has 
determined that a safety recall or other safety campaign must be 
conducted in its country in the period between November 1, 2000 and 
November 12, 2002, and that has not reported such determination or 
notification of determination to NHTSA in a report that identified the 
model(s) and model year(s) of the vehicles, equipment, or tires that 
were the subject of the foreign recall or other safety campaign, the 
model(s) and model year(s) of the vehicles, equipment, or tires that 
were identical or substantially similar to the subject of the recall or 
campaign, and the defect or other condition that led to the foreign 
recall or campaign, as of November 12, 2002, shall report such 
determination or notification of determination to NHTSA if the safety 
recall or other safety campaign covers a motor vehicle, item of motor 
vehicle equipment, or tire that is identical or substantially similar to 
a vehicle, item of equipment, or tire sold or offered for sale in the 
United States. However, a report need not be

[[Page 241]]

resubmitted under this paragraph if the original report identified the 
model(s) and model year(s) of the vehicles, equipment, or tires that 
were the subject of the foreign recall or other safety campaign, 
identified the model(s) and model year(s) of the identical or 
substantially similar products in the United States, and identified the 
defect or other condition that led to the foreign recall or other safety 
campaign.
    (d) Exemptions from reporting. Notwithstanding paragraphs (a), (b), 
and (c) of this section a manufacturer need not report a foreign safety 
recall or other safety campaign to NHTSA if:
    (1) The manufacturer has determined that for the same or 
substantially similar reasons relating to motor vehicle safety that it 
is conducting a safety recall or other safety campaign in a foreign 
country, a safety-related defect or noncompliance with a Federal motor 
vehicle safety standard exists in identical or substantially similar 
motor vehicles, motor vehicle equipment, or tires sold or offered for 
sale in the United States, and has filed a defect or noncompliance 
information report pursuant to part 573 of this chapter, provided that 
the scope of the foreign recall or campaign is not broader than the 
scope of the recall campaign in the United States;
    (2) The component or system that gave rise to the foreign recall or 
other campaign does not perform the same function in any substantially 
similar vehicles or equipment sold or offered for sale in the United 
States; or
    (3) The sole subject of the foreign recall or other campaign is a 
label affixed to a vehicle, item of equipment, or a tire.
    (e) Annual list of substantially similar vehicles. Not later than 
November 1 of each year, each manufacturer of motor vehicles that sells 
or offers a motor vehicle for sale in the United States shall submit to 
NHTSA a document that identifies both each model of motor vehicle that 
the manufacturer sells or plans to sell during the following year in a 
foreign country that the manufacturer believes is identical or 
substantially similar to a motor vehicle sold or offered for sale in the 
United States (or to a motor vehicle that is planned for sale in the 
United States in the following year), and each such identical or 
substantially similar motor vehicle sold or offered for sale in the 
United States. Not later than 30 days after January 28, 2003, each 
manufacturer to which this paragraph applies shall submit an initial 
annual list of vehicles for calendar year 2003 that meets the 
requirements of this paragraph.

[67 FR 63310, Oct. 11, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 4113, Jan. 28, 2003]



Sec.  579.12  Contents of reports.

    (a) Each report made pursuant to Sec.  579.11 of this part must be 
dated and must include the information specified in Sec.  573.6(c)(1), 
(c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(5) of this chapter. Each such report must also 
identify each foreign country in which the safety recall or other safety 
campaign is being conducted, state whether the foreign action is a 
safety recall or other safety campaign, state whether the determination 
to conduct the recall or campaign was made by the manufacturer or by a 
foreign government, describe the manufacturer's program for remedying 
the defect or noncompliance (if the action is a safety recall), specify 
the date of the determination and the date the recall or other campaign 
was commenced or will commence in each foreign country, and identify all 
motor vehicles, equipment, or tires that the manufacturer sold or 
offered for sale in the United States that are identical or 
substantially similar to the motor vehicles, equipment, or tires covered 
by the foreign recall or campaign. If a determination has been made by a 
foreign government, the report must also include a copy of the 
determination in the original language and, if the determination is in a 
language other than English, a copy translated into English.
    (b) Information required by paragraph (a) of this section that is 
not available within the 5-working day period specified in Sec.  579.11 
of this part shall be submitted as it becomes available.

[[Page 242]]



Sec. Sec.  579.13-579.20  [Reserved]



            Subpart C_Reporting of Early Warning Information



Sec.  579.21  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 500 or more 
light vehicles annually.

    For each reporting period, a manufacturer whose aggregate number of 
light vehicles manufactured for sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced 
or delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, or imported into 
the United States, during the calendar year of the reporting period or 
during each of the prior two calendar years is 500 or more shall submit 
the information described in this section. For paragraphs (a) and (c) of 
this section, the manufacturer shall submit information separately with 
respect to each make, model, and model year of light vehicle 
manufactured during the reporting period and the nine model years prior 
to the earliest model year in the reporting period, including models no 
longer in production.
    (a) Production information. Information that states the 
manufacturer's name, the quarterly reporting period, the make, the 
model, the model year, the type, the platform, and the production. The 
production shall be stated as either the cumulative production of the 
current model year to the end of the reporting period, or the total 
model year production for each model year for which production has 
ceased.
    (b) Information on incidents involving death or injury. For all 
light vehicles manufactured during a model year covered by the reporting 
period and the nine model years prior to the earliest model year in the 
reporting period:
    (1) A report on each incident involving one or more deaths or 
injuries occurring in the United States that is identified in a claim 
against and received by the manufacturer or in a notice received by the 
manufacturer which notice alleges or proves that the death or injury was 
caused by a possible defect in the manufacturer's vehicle, together with 
each incident involving one or more deaths occurring in a foreign 
country that is identified in a claim against and received by the 
manufacturer involving the manufacturer's vehicle, if that vehicle is 
identical or substantially similar to a vehicle that the manufacturer 
has offered for sale in the United States. The report shall be submitted 
as a report on light vehicles and organized such that incidents are 
reported alphabetically by make, within each make alphabetically by 
model, and within each model chronologically by model year.
    (2) For each incident described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, 
the manufacturer shall separately report the make, model, model year, 
and VIN of the vehicle, the incident date, the number of deaths, the 
number of injuries for incidents occurring in the United States, the 
State or foreign country where the incident occurred, each system or 
component of the vehicle that allegedly contributed to the incident, and 
whether the incident involved a fire or rollover, coded as follows: 01 
steering system, 02 suspension system, 03 service brake system, 05 
parking brake, 06 engine and engine cooling system, 07 fuel system, 10 
power train, 11 electrical system, 12 exterior lighting, 13 visibility, 
14 air bags, 15 seat belts, 16 structure, 17 latch, 18 vehicle speed 
control, 19 tires, 20 wheels, 22 seats, 23 fire, 24 rollover, 98 where a 
system or component not covered by categories 01 through 22 is specified 
in the claim or notice, and 99 where no system or component of the 
vehicle is specified in the claim or notice. If an incident involves 
more than one such code, each shall be reported separately in the report 
with a limit of five codes to be included.
    (c) Numbers of property damage claims, consumer complaints, warranty 
claims, and field reports. Separate reports on the numbers of those 
property damage claims, consumer complaints, warranty claims, and field 
reports which involve the systems and components that are specified in 
codes 01 through 22 in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, or a fire (code 
23), or rollover (code 24). Each such report shall state, separately by 
each such code, the number of such property damage claims, consumer 
complaints, warranty claims, or field reports, respectively, that 
involves the

[[Page 243]]

systems or components or fire or rollover indicated by the code. If an 
underlying property damage claim, consumer complaint, warranty claim, or 
field report involves more than one such code, each shall be reported 
separately in the report with no limit on the number of codes to be 
included. No reporting is necessary if the system or component involved 
is not specified in such codes, and the incident did not involve a fire 
or rollover.
    (d) Copies of field reports. For all light vehicles manufactured 
during a model year covered by the reporting period and the nine model 
years prior to the earliest model year in the reporting period, a copy 
of each field report (other than a dealer report or a product evaluation 
report) involving one or more of the systems or components identified in 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section, or fire, or rollover, containing any 
assessment of an alleged failure, malfunction, lack of durability, or 
other performance problem of a motor vehicle or item of motor vehicle 
equipment (including any part thereof) that is originated by an employee 
or representative of the manufacturer and that the manufacturer received 
during a reporting period. These documents shall be submitted 
alphabetically by make, within each make alphabetically by model, and 
within each model chronologically by model year. For purposes of this 
paragraph, if a field report refers to more than one make or model of 
light vehicle produced by a manufacturer on a particular platform, the 
manufacturer shall submit the report alphabetically by platform rather 
than by make or model. If such a field report refers to more than one 
platform, separate copies shall be submitted for each such platform. If 
a field report refers to more than one model year of a specified make/
model or platform, the manufacturer shall submit it by the earliest 
model year to which it refers.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003; 
68 FR 35142, June 11, 2003; 72 FR 29443, May 29, 2007]

    Effective Date Note: At 74 FR 47757, Sept. 17, 2009, Sec.  579.21 
was amended by revising the section heading and the first sentence of 
the introductory text, effective Oct. 19, 2009. For the convenience of 
the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:



Sec.  579.21  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 5,000 or more 
          light vehicles annually.

    For each reporting period, a manufacturer whose aggregate number of 
light vehicles manufactured for sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced 
or delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, or imported into 
the United States, during the calendar year of the reporting period or 
during each of the prior two calendar years is 5,000 or more shall 
submit the information described in this section. * * *

                                * * * * *



Sec.  579.22  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 500 or more
medium-heavy vehicles and buses annually.

    For each reporting period, a manufacturer whose aggregate number of 
medium-heavy vehicles and buses manufactured for sale, sold, offered for 
sale, introduced or delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, 
or imported into the United States, during the calendar year of the 
reporting period or during either of the prior two calendar years is 500 
or more shall submit the information described in this section. For 
paragraphs (a) and (c) of this section, the manufacturer shall submit 
information separately with respect to each make, model, and model year 
of medium-heavy vehicle and bus manufactured during the reporting period 
and the nine model years prior to the earliest model year in the 
reporting period, including models no longer in production.
    (a) Production information. Information that states the 
manufacturer's name, the quarterly reporting period, the make, the 
model, the model year, the type, and the production. The production 
shall be stated as either the cumulative production of the current model 
year to the end of the reporting period, or the total model year 
production for each model year for which production has ceased. For each 
model that is manufactured and available with more than one type of fuel 
system (i.e., gasoline, diesel, or other (including vehicles that can be 
operated using more than one type of fuel, such as gasoline and 
compressed natural gas)), the information required by this subsection 
shall be reported separately by each of the three fuel system types.

[[Page 244]]

For each model that is manufactured and available with more than one 
type of service brake system (i.e., hydraulic or air), the information 
required by this subsection shall be reported by each of the two brake 
types. If the service brake system in a vehicle is not readily 
characterized as either hydraulic or air, the vehicle shall be 
considered to have hydraulic service brakes.
    (b) Information on incidents involving death or injury. For all 
medium heavy vehicles and buses manufactured during a model year covered 
by the reporting period and the nine model years prior to the earliest 
model year in the reporting period:
    (1) A report on each incident involving one or more deaths or 
injuries occurring in the United States that is identified in a claim 
against and received by the manufacturer or in a notice received by the 
manufacturer which notice alleges or proves that the death or injury was 
caused by a possible defect in the manufacturer's vehicle, together with 
each incident involving one or more deaths occurring in a foreign 
country that is identified in a claim against and received by the 
manufacturer involving the manufacturer's vehicle, if that vehicle is 
identical or substantially similar to a vehicle that the manufacturer 
has offered for sale in the United States. The report shall be submitted 
as a report on medium-heavy vehicles and buses and organized such that 
incidents are reported alphabetically by make, within each make 
alphabetically by model, and within each model chronologically by model 
year.
    (2) For each incident described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, 
the manufacturer shall separately report the make, model, model year, 
and VIN of the medium-heavy vehicle or bus, the incident date, the 
number of deaths, the number of injuries for incidents occurring in the 
United States, the State or foreign country where the incident occurred, 
each system or component of the vehicle that allegedly contributed to 
the incident, and whether the incident involved a fire or rollover, 
coded as follows: 01 steering system, 02 suspension system, 03 service 
brake system, hydraulic, 04 service brake system, air, 05 parking brake, 
06 engine and engine cooling system, 07 fuel system, gasoline, 08 fuel 
system, diesel, 09 fuel system, other, 10 power train, 11 electrical, 12 
exterior lighting, 13 visibility, 14 air bags, 15 seat belts, 16 
structure, 17 latch, 18 vehicle speed control, 19 tires, 20 wheels, 21 
trailer hitch, 22 seats, 23 fire, 24 rollover, 98 where a system or 
component not covered by categories 01 through 22 is specified in the 
claim or notice, and 99 where no system or component of the vehicle is 
specified in the claim or notice. If an incident involves more than one 
such code, each shall be reported separately in the report with a limit 
of five codes to be included.
    (c) Numbers of property damage claims, consumer complaints, warranty 
claims, and field reports. Separate reports on the numbers of those 
property damage claims, consumer complaints, warranty claims, and field 
reports which involve the systems and components that are specified in 
codes 01 through 22 in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, or a fire (code 
23), or rollover (code 24). Each such report shall state, separately by 
each such code, the number of such property damage claims, consumer 
complaints, warranty claims, or field reports, respectively, that 
involves the systems or components or fire or rollover indicated by the 
code. If an underlying property damage claim, consumer complaint, 
warranty claim, or field report involves more than one such code, each 
shall be reported separately in the report with no limit on the number 
of codes to be included. No reporting is necessary if the system or 
component involved is not specified in such codes, and the incident did 
not involve a fire or rollover.
    (d) Copies of field reports. For all medium heavy vehicles and buses 
manufactured during a model year covered by the reporting period and the 
nine model years prior to the earliest model year in the reporting 
period, a copy of each field report (other than a dealer report or a 
product evaluation report) involving one or more of the systems or 
components identified in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, or fire, or 
rollover, containing any assessment of an alleged failure, malfunction, 
lack of durability, or other performance problem of a motor vehicle or 
item of

[[Page 245]]

motor vehicle equipment (including any part thereof) that is originated 
by an employee or representative of the manufacturer and that the 
manufacturer received during a reporting period. These documents shall 
be submitted alphabetically by make, within each make alphabetically by 
model, and within each model chronologically by model year. For purposes 
of this paragraph, if a field report refers to more than one make or 
model of vehicle produced by a manufacturer on a particular platform, 
the manufacturer shall submit the report alphabetically by platform 
rather than by make or model. If such a field report refers to more than 
one platform, separate copies shall be submitted for each such platform. 
If a field report refers to more than one model year of a specified 
make/model or platform, the manufacturer shall submit it by the earliest 
model year to which it refers.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003; 
68 FR 35143, June 11, 2003; 72 FR 29443, May 29, 2007]

    Effective Date Note: At 74 FR 47757, Sept. 17, 2009, Sec.  579.22 
was amended by revising the section heading, the introductory text and 
the introductory text to paragraph (b), effective Oct. 19, 2009. For the 
convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:



Sec.  579.22  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 100 or more 
          buses, manufacturers of 500 or more emergency vehicles and 
          manufacturers of 5,000 or more medium-heavy vehicles (other 
          than buses and emergency vehicles) annually.

    For each reporting period, a manufacturer whose aggregate number of 
buses manufactured for sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced or 
delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, or imported into the 
United States, during the calendar year of the reporting period or 
during either of the prior two calendar years is 100 or more shall 
submit the information described in this section. For each reporting 
period, a manufacturer whose aggregate number of emergency vehicles 
(ambulances and fire trucks) manufactured for sale, sold, offered for 
sale, introduced or delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, 
or imported into the United States, during the calendar year of the 
reporting period or during either of the prior two calendar years is 500 
or more shall submit the information described in this section. For each 
reporting period, a manufacturer whose aggregate number of medium-heavy 
vehicles (a sum that does not include buses or emergency vehicles) 
manufactured for sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced or delivered 
for introduction in interstate commerce, or imported into the United 
States, during the calendar year of the reporting period or during 
either of the prior two calendar years is 5,000 or more shall submit the 
information described in this section. For paragraphs (a) and (c) of 
this section, the manufacturer shall submit information separately with 
respect to each make, model, and model year of bus, emergency vehicle 
and/or medium-heavy vehicle manufactured during the reporting period and 
the nine model years prior to the earliest model year in the reporting 
period, including models no longer in production.

                                * * * * *

    (b) Information on incidents involving death or injury. For all 
buses, emergency vehicles and medium heavy vehicles manufactured during 
a model year covered by the reporting period and the nine model years 
prior to the earliest model year in the reporting period:

                                * * * * *



Sec.  579.23  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 500 or more
motorcycles annually.

    For each reporting period, a manufacturer whose aggregate number of 
motorcycles manufactured for sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced or 
delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, or imported into the 
United States, during the calendar year of the reporting period or 
during either of the prior two calendar years is 500 or more shall 
submit the information described in this section. For paragraphs (a) and 
(c) of this section, the manufacturer shall submit information 
separately with respect to each make, model, and model year of 
motorcycle manufactured during the reporting period and the nine model 
years prior to the earliest model year in the reporting period, 
including models no longer in production.
    (a) Production information. Information that states the 
manufacturer's name, the quarterly reporting period, the make, the 
model, the model year, and the production. The production shall be 
stated as either the cumulative production of the current model year to 
the end of the reporting period, or the total model year production for

[[Page 246]]

each model year for which production has ceased.
    (b) Information on incidents involving death or injury. For all 
motorcycles manufactured during a model year covered by the reporting 
period and the nine model years prior to the earliest model year in the 
reporting period:
    (1) A report on each incident involving one or more deaths or 
injuries occurring in the United States that is identified in a claim 
against and received by the manufacturer or in a notice received by the 
manufacturer which notice alleges or proves that the death or injury was 
caused by a possible defect in the manufacturer's motorcycle, together 
with each incident involving one or more deaths occurring in a foreign 
country that is identified in a claim against and received by the 
manufacturer involving the manufacturer's motorcycle, if that motorcycle 
is identical or substantially similar to a motorcycle that the 
manufacturer has offered for sale in the United States. The report shall 
be submitted as a report on motorcycles and organized such that 
incidents are reported alphabetically by make, within each make 
alphabetically by model, and within each model chronologically by model 
year.
    (2) For each incident described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, 
the manufacturer shall separately report the make, model, model year, 
and VIN of the motorcycle, the incident date, the number of deaths, the 
number of injuries for incidents occurring in the United States, the 
State or foreign country where the incident occurred, each system or 
component of the motorcycle that allegedly contributed to the incident, 
and whether the incident involved a fire, coded as follows: 01 steering, 
02 suspension, 03 service brake system, 06 engine and engine cooling, 07 
fuel system, 10 power train, 11 electrical, 12 exterior lighting, 16 
structure,18 vehicle speed control, 19 tires, 20 wheels, 23 fire, 98 
where a system or component not covered by categories 01 through 20 is 
specified in the claim or notice, and 99 where no system or component of 
the vehicle is specified in the claim or notice. If an incident involves 
more than one such code, each shall be reported separately in the report 
with a limit of five codes to be included.
    (c) Numbers of property damage claims, consumer complaints, warranty 
claims, and field reports. Separate reports on the numbers of those 
property damage claims, consumer complaints, warranty claims, and field 
reports which involve the systems and components that are specified in 
codes 01 through 20 in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, or a fire (code 
23). Each such report shall state, separately by each such code, the 
number of such property damage claims, consumer complaints, warranty 
claims, or field reports, respectively, that involves the systems or 
components or fire indicated by the code. If an underlying property 
damage claim, consumer complaint, warranty claim, or field report 
involves more than one such code, each shall be reported separately in 
the report with no limit on the number of codes to be included. No 
reporting is necessary if the system or component involved is not 
specified in such codes, and the incident did not involve a fire.
    (d) Copies of field reports. For all motorcycles manufactured during 
a model year covered by the reporting period and the nine model years 
prior to the earliest model year in the reporting period, a copy of each 
field report (other than a dealer report or a product evaluation report) 
involving one or more of the systems or components identified in 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section or fire, containing any assessment of 
an alleged failure, malfunction, lack of durability, or other 
performance problem of a motorcycle or item of motor vehicle equipment 
(including any part thereof) that is originated by an employee or 
representative of the manufacturer and that the manufacturer received 
during a reporting period. These documents shall be submitted 
alphabetically by make, within each make alphabetically by model, and 
within each model chronologically by model year. For purposes of this 
paragraph, if a field report refers to more than one make or model of 
motorcycle produced by a manufacturer on a particular platform, the 
manufacturer shall submit the report alphabetically by platform rather 
than by make or model. If such a field report refers to more than one

[[Page 247]]

platform, separate copies shall be submitted for each such platform. If 
a field report refers to more than one model year of a specified make/
model or platform, the manufacturer shall submit it by the earliest 
model year to which it refers.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003; 
68 FR 35143, June 11, 2003; 72 FR 29443, May 29, 2007]

    Effective Date Note: At 74 FR 47758, Sept. 17, 2009, Sec.  579.23 
was amended by revising the section heading and by revising the first 
sentence of the introductory text, effective Oct. 19, 2009. For the 
convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:



Sec.  579.23  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 5,000 or more 
          motorcycles annually.

    For each reporting period, a manufacturer whose aggregate number of 
motorcycles manufactured for sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced or 
delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, or imported into the 
United States, during the calendar year of the reporting period or 
during either of the prior two calendar years is 5,000 or more shall 
submit the information described in this section. * * *

                                * * * * *



Sec.  579.24  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 500 or more
trailers annually.

    For each reporting period, a manufacturer whose aggregate number of 
trailers manufactured for sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced or 
delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, or imported into the 
United States, during the calendar year of the reporting period or 
during either of the prior two calendar years is 500 or more shall 
submit the information described in this section. For paragraphs (a) and 
(c) of this section, the manufacturer shall submit information with 
respect to each make, model and model year of trailer manufactured 
during the reporting period and the nine model years prior to the 
earliest model year in the reporting period, including models no longer 
in production.
    (a) Production information. Information that states the 
manufacturer's name, the quarterly reporting period, the make, the 
model, the model year, the type, and the production. The production 
shall be stated as either the cumulative production of the current model 
year to the end of the reporting period, or the total model year 
production for each model year for which production has ceased. For each 
model that is manufactured and available with more than one type of 
service brake system (i.e., hydraulic and air), the information required 
by this subsection shall be reported by each of the two brake types 
(i.e., ``H'' for hydraulic, ``A'' for air). If the service brake system 
in a trailer is not readily characterized as either hydraulic or air, 
the trailer shall be considered to have hydraulic service brakes. If a 
model has no brake system, it shall be reported as ``N,'' for none.
    (b) Information on incidents involving death or injury. For all 
trailers manufactured during a model year covered by the reporting 
period and the nine model years prior to the earliest model year in the 
reporting period:
    (1) A report on each incident involving one or more deaths or 
injuries occurring in the United States that is identified in a claim 
against and received by the manufacturer or in a notice received by the 
manufacturer which notice alleges or proves that the death or injury was 
caused by a possible defect in the manufacturer's trailer, together with 
each incident involving one or more deaths occurring in a foreign 
country that is identified in a claim against and received by the 
manufacturer involving the manufacturer's trailer, if that trailer is 
identical or substantially similar to a trailer that the manufacturer 
has offered for sale in the United States. The report shall be submitted 
as a report on trailers and organized such that incidents are reported 
alphabetically by make, with each make alphabetically by model, and 
within each model chronologically by model year.
    (2) For each incident described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, 
the manufacturer shall separately report the make, model, model year, 
and VIN of the trailer, the incident date, the number of deaths, the 
number of injuries for incidents occurring in the United States, the 
State or foreign country where the incident occurred,

[[Page 248]]

each system or component of the trailer that allegedly contributed to 
the incident, and whether the incident involved a fire, coded as 
follows: 02 suspension, 03 service brake system, hydraulic, 04 service 
brake system, air, 05 parking brake, 11 electrical, 12 exterior 
lighting, 16 structure, 17 latch, 19 tires, 20 wheels, 21 trailer hitch, 
23 fire, 98 where a system or component not covered by categories 02 
through 21 is specified in the claim or notice, and 99 where no system 
or component of the trailer is specified in the claim or notice. If an 
incident involves more than one such code, each shall be reported 
separately in the report with a limit of five codes to be included.
    (c) Numbers of property damage claims, consumer complaints, warranty 
claims, and field reports. Separate reports on the numbers of those 
property damage claims, consumer complaints, warranty claims, and field 
reports which involve the systems and components that are specified in 
codes 02 through 21 in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, or a fire (code 
23). Each such report shall state, separately by each such code, the 
number of such property damage claims, consumer complaints, warranty 
claims, or field reports, respectively, that involves the systems or 
components or fire indicated by the code. If an underlying property 
damage claim, consumer complaint, warranty claim, or field report 
involves more than one such code, each shall be reported separately in 
the report with no limit on the number of codes to be included. No 
reporting is necessary if the system or component involved is not 
specified in such codes, and the incident did not involve a fire.
    (d) Copies of field reports. For all trailers manufactured during a 
model year covered by the reporting period and the nine model years 
prior to the earliest model year in the reporting period, a copy of each 
field report (other than a dealer report or a product evaluation report) 
involving one or more of the systems or components identified in 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section or fire, containing any assessment of 
an alleged failure, malfunction, lack of durability, or other 
performance problem of a trailer or item of motor vehicle equipment 
(including any part thereof) that is originated by an employee or 
representative of the manufacturer and that the manufacturer received 
during a reporting period. These documents shall be submitted 
alphabetically by make, within each make alphabetically by model, and 
within each model chronologically by model year. For purposes of this 
paragraph, if a field report refers to more than one make or model of 
trailer produced by a manufacturer on a particular platform, the 
manufacturer shall submit the report alphabetically by platform rather 
than by make or model. If such a field report refers to more than one 
platform, separate copies shall be submitted for each such platform. If 
a field report refers to more than one model year of a specified make/
model or platform, the manufacturer shall submit it by the earliest 
model year to which it refers.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2003, as amended at 68 FR 18143, Apr. 15, 2003; 
68 FR 35143, June 11, 2003; 72 FR 29443, May 29, 2007]

    Effective Date Note: At 74 FR 47758, Sept. 17, 2009, Sec.  579.24 
was amended by revising the section heading and by revising the first 
sentence of the introductory text, effective Oct. 19, 2009. For the 
convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:



Sec.  579.24  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of 5,000 or more 
          trailers annually.

    For each reporting period, a manufacturer whose aggregate number of 
trailers manufactured for sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced or 
delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, or imported into the 
United States, during the calendar year of the reporting period or 
during either of the prior two calendar years is 5,000 or more shall 
submit the information described in this section. * * *

                                * * * * *



Sec.  579.25  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of child
restraint systems.

    For each reporting period, a manufacturer who has manufactured for 
sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced or delivered for introduction 
in interstate commerce, or imported child restraint systems into the 
United States, shall submit the information described in this section. 
For paragraphs (a) and (c) of this section, the manufacturer shall 
submit information separately

[[Page 249]]

with respect to each make, model, and production year of child restraint 
system manufactured during the reporting period and the four production 
years prior to the earliest production year in the reporting period, 
including models no longer in production. For paragraph (c) of this 
section, if any consumer complaints or warranty claims regarding a model 
of child restraint system do not specify the production year of the 
system, the manufacturer shall submit information for ``unknown'' 
production year in addition to the up-to-five production years for which 
the manufacturer must otherwise report the number of such consumer 
complaints/warranty claims.
    (a) Production information. Information that states the 
manufacturer's name, the quarterly reporting period, the make, the 
model, the production year, the type, and the production. The production 
shall be stated as either the cumulative production of the current model 
year to the end of the reporting period, or the total calendar year 
production for each calendar year for which production has ceased.
    (b) Information on incidents involving death or injury. For all 
child restraint systems manufactured during a production year covered by 
the reporting period and the four production years prior to the earliest 
production year in the reporting period:
    (1) A report on each incident involving one or more deaths or 
injuries occurring in the United States that is identified in a claim 
against and received by the manufacturer or in a notice received by the 
manufacturer which notice alleges or proves that the death or injury was 
caused by a possible defect in the manufacturer's child restraint 
system, together with each incident involving one or more deaths 
occurring in a foreign country that is identified in a claim against and 
received by the manufacturer involving the manufacturer's child 
restraint system, if the child restraint system is identical or 
substantially similar to a child restraint system that the manufacturer 
has offered for sale in the United States. The report shall be submitted 
as a report on child restraint systems and organized such that incidents 
are reported alphabetically by make, within each make alphabetically by 
model, and within each model chronologically by production year.
    (2) For each such incident described in paragraph (b)(1) of this 
section, the manufacturer shall separately report the make, model, and 
production year of the child restraint system, the incident date, the 
number of deaths, the number of injuries for incidents occurring in the 
United States, the State or foreign country where the incident occurred, 
and each system or component of the child restraint system that 
allegedly contributed to the incident, coded as follows: 51 buckle and 
restraint harness, 52 seat shell, 53 handle, 54 base, 98 where a system 
or component not covered by categories 51 through 54 is specified in the 
claim or notice, and 99 where no system or component of the child 
restraint system is specified in the claim or notice. If an incident 
involves more than one such code, each shall be reported separately in 
the report. If the production year of the child restraint system is 
unknown, the manufacturer shall specify the number ``9999'' in the field 
for production year.
    (c) Numbers of consumer complaints and warranty claims, and field 
reports. Separate reports on the numbers of those consumer complaints 
and warranty claims, and field reports, which involve the systems and 
components that are specified in codes 51 through 54 in paragraph (b)(2) 
of this section. Each such report shall state, separately by each such 
code, the number of such consumer complaints and warranty claims, or 
field reports, respectively, that involves the systems or components 
indicated by the code. If an underlying consumer complaint and warranty 
claim, or field report, involves more than one such code, each shall be 
counted separately in the report with no limit on the number of codes to 
be included. No reporting is necessary if the system or component 
involved is not specified in such codes.
    (d) Copies of field reports. For all child restraint systems 
manufactured during a production year covered by the reporting period 
and the four production years prior to the earliest production year in 
the reporting period, a copy of each field report (other than a dealer

[[Page 250]]

report or a product evaluation report) involving one or more of the 
systems or components identified in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, 
containing any assessment of an alleged failure, malfunction, lack of 
durability, or other performance problem of a child restraint system 
(including any part thereof) that is originated by an employee or 
representative of the manufacturer and that the manufacturer received 
during a reporting period. These documents shall be submitted 
alphabetically by make, within each make alphabetically by model, and 
within each model chronologically by production year. For purposes of 
this paragraph, if a field report refers to more than one make or model 
of child restraint system produced by a manufacturer, the manufacturer 
shall submit the report under the first such model in alphabetical 
order. If a field report refers to more than one production year of a 
specified make/model, the manufacturer shall submit it by the earliest 
production year to which it refers.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 18143, Apr. 15, 2003; 
68 FR 35144, June 11, 2003; 72 FR 29444, May 29, 2007]



Sec.  579.26  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of tires.

    For each reporting period, a manufacturer (including a brand name 
owner) who has manufactured for sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced 
or delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, or imported tires 
in the United States shall submit the information described in this 
section. For purposes of this section, an importer of motor vehicles for 
resale is deemed to be the manufacturer of the tires on and in the 
vehicle at the time of its importation if the manufacturer of the tires 
is not required to report under this section. For paragraphs (a) and (c) 
of this section, the manufacturer shall submit information separately 
with respect to each tire line, size, SKU, plant where manufactured, and 
model year of tire manufactured during the reporting period and the four 
calendar years prior to the reporting period, including tire lines no 
longer in production. For each group of tires with the same SKU, plant 
where manufactured, and year for which the volume produced or imported 
is less than 15,000, or are deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-
saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 
12 inches or less, or are not passenger car tires, light truck tires, or 
motorcycle tires, the manufacturer need only report information on 
incidents involving a death or injury, as specified in paragraph (b) of 
this section. For purposes of this section, the two-character DOT 
alphanumeric code for production plants located in the United States 
assigned by NHTSA in accordance with Sec. Sec.  574.5(a) and 574.6(b) of 
this chapter may be used to identify ``plant where manufactured.'' If 
the production plant is located outside the United States, the full 
plant name must be provided.
    (a) Production information. Information that states the 
manufacturer's name, the quarterly reporting period, the tire line, the 
tire size, the tire type code, the SKU, the plant where manufactured, 
whether the tire is approved for use as original equipment on a motor 
vehicle, if so, the make, model, and model year of each vehicle for 
which it is approved, the production year, the cumulative warranty 
production, and the cumulative total production through the end of the 
reporting period. If the manufacturer knows that a particular group of 
tires is not used as original equipment on a motor vehicle, it shall 
state ``N'' in the appropriate field, and if the manufacturer is not 
certain, it shall state ``U'' in that field.
    (b) Information on incidents involving death or injury. For all 
tires manufactured during a production year covered by the reporting 
period and the four production years prior to the earliest production 
year in the reporting period:
    (1) A report on each incident involving one or more deaths or 
injuries occurring in the United States that is identified in a claim 
against and received by the manufacturer or in a notice received by the 
manufacturer which notice alleges or proves that the death or injury was 
caused by a possible defect in the manufacturer's tire, together with 
each incident involving one or more deaths occurring in a foreign 
country that is identified in a

[[Page 251]]

claim against and received by the manufacturer involving the 
manufacturer's tire, if that tire is identical or substantially similar 
to a tire that the manufacturer has offered for sale in the United 
States. The report shall be submitted as a report on tires and organized 
such that incidents are reported alphabetically by tire line, within 
each tire line by tire size, and within each tire size chronologically 
by production year.
    (2) For each such incident described in paragraph (b)(1) of this 
section, the manufacturer shall separately report the tire line, size, 
and production year of the tire, the TIN, the incident date, the number 
of deaths, the number of injuries for incidents occurring in the United 
States, the State or foreign country where the incident occurred, the 
make, model, and model year of the vehicle on which the tire was 
installed, and each component of the tire that allegedly contributed to 
the incident, coded as follows: 71 tread, 72 sidewall, 73 bead, 98 where 
a component not covered by categories 71 through 73 is specified in the 
claim or notice, and 99 where no component of the tire is specified in 
the claim or notice. If an incident involves more than one such code, 
each shall be reported separately in the report.
    (c) Numbers of property damage claims and warranty adjustments. 
Separate reports on the numbers of those property damage claims and 
warranty adjustments which involve the components that are specified in 
codes 71 through 73, and 98, in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. Each 
such report shall state, separately by each such code, the numbers of 
such property damage claims and warranty adjustments, respectively, that 
involve the components indicated by the code. If an underlying property 
damage claim or warranty adjustment involves more than one such code, 
each shall be reported separately in the report with no limit on the 
number of codes to be included. No reporting is necessary if the system 
or component involved is not specified in such codes, or if the TIN is 
not specified in any property damage claim.
    (d) Common green tire reporting. With each quarterly report, each 
manufacturer of tires shall provide NHTSA with a list of common green 
tires. For each specific common green tire grouping, the list shall 
provide all relevant tire lines, tire type codes, SKU numbers, brand 
names, and brand name owners.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 18143, Apr. 15, 2003; 
68 FR 35144, June 11, 2003]



Sec.  579.27  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of fewer than
500 vehicles annually, for manufacturers of original equipment, and 

for manufacturers of replacement equipment other than child restraint
systems and tires.

    (a) Applicability. This section applies to all manufacturers of 
vehicles with respect to vehicles that are not covered by reports on 
light vehicles, medium-heavy vehicles and buses, motorcycles, or 
trailers submitted pursuant to Sec. Sec.  579.21 through 579.24 of this 
part, to all manufacturers of original equipment, to all manufacturers 
of replacement equipment other than manufacturers of tires and child 
restraint systems, and to registered importers registered under 49 
U.S.C. 30141(c).
    (b) Information on incidents involving deaths. For each reporting 
period, a manufacturer to which this section applies shall submit a 
report, pertaining to vehicles and/or equipment manufactured or sold 
during the calendar year of the reporting period and the nine calendar 
years prior to the reporting period (four calendar years for equipment), 
including models no longer in production, on each incident involving one 
or more deaths occurring in the United States that is identified in a 
claim against and received by the manufacturer or in a notice received 
by the manufacturer which notice alleges or proves that the death was 
caused by a possible defect in the manufacturer's vehicle or equipment, 
together with each incident involving one or more deaths occurring in a 
foreign country that is identified in a claim against and received by 
the manufacturer involving the manufacturer's vehicle or equipment, if 
it is identical or substantially similar to a vehicle or item of 
equipment that the manufacturer has offered for sale in the United 
States. The report shall be organized such that incidents are reported 
alphabetically

[[Page 252]]

by make, within each make alphabetically by model, and within each model 
chronologically by model year. If a manufacturer has not received such a 
claim or notice during a reporting period, the manufacturer need not 
submit a report to NHTSA for that reporting period.
    (c) For each incident described in paragraph (b) of this section, 
the manufacturer shall separately report the make, model, and model year 
of the vehicle or equipment, the VIN (for vehicles only), the incident 
date, the number of deaths, the number of injuries for incidents 
occurring in the United States, the State or foreign country where the 
incident occurred, each system or component of the vehicle or equipment 
that allegedly contributed to the incident, and whether the incident 
involved a fire or rollover, as follows:
    (1) For light vehicles, the system or component involved, and the 
existence of a fire or rollover, shall be identified and coded as 
specified in Sec.  579.21(b)(2) of this part.
    (2) For medium-heavy vehicles and buses, the system or component 
involved, and the existence of a fire or rollover, shall be identified 
and coded as specified in Sec.  579.22(b)(2) of this part.
    (3) For motorcycles, the system or component involved, and the 
existence of a fire, shall be identified and coded as specified in Sec.  
579.23(b)(2) of this part.
    (4) For trailers, the system or component involved, and the 
existence of a fire, shall be identified and coded as specified in Sec.  
579.24(b)(2) of this part.
    (5) For original and replacement equipment, a written identification 
of each component of the equipment that was allegedly involved, and 
whether there was a fire, in the manufacturer's own words.
    (6) For original and replacement equipment, if the production year 
of the equipment is unknown, the manufacturer shall specify the number 
``9999'' in the field for model or production year.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 18143, Apr. 15, 2003; 
68 FR 35144, June 11, 2003]

    Effective Date Note: At 74 FR 47758, Sept. 17, 2009, Sec.  579.27 
was amended by revising the section heading, effective Oct. 19, 2009. 
For the convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as 
follows:



Sec.  579.27  Reporting requirements for manufacturers of fewer than 100 
          buses annually, for manufacturers of fewer than 500 emergency 
          vehicles annually, for manufacturers of fewer than 5,000 light 
          vehicles, medium-heavy vehicles (other than buses and 
          emergency vehicles), motorcycles or trailers annually, for 
          manufacturers of original equipment, and for manufacturers of 
          replacement equipment other than child restraint systems and 
          tires.

                                * * * * *



Sec.  579.28  Due date of reports and other miscellaneous provisions.

    (a) Initial submission of reports. Except as provided in paragraph 
(n) of this section, the first calendar quarter for which reports are 
required under Sec. Sec.  579.21 through 579.27 of this subpart is the 
third calendar quarter of 2003.
    (b) Due date of reports. Except as provided in subsection (n) of 
this section, each manufacturer of motor vehicles and motor vehicle 
equipment shall submit each report that is required by this subpart not 
later than 60 days after the last day of the reporting period. Except as 
provided in Sec.  579.27(b), if a manufacturer has not received any of 
the categories of information or documents during a quarter for which it 
is required to report pursuant to Sec. Sec.  579.21 through 579.26, the 
manufacturer's report must indicate that no relevant information or 
documents were received during that quarter. If the due date for any 
report is a Saturday, Sunday or a Federal holiday, the report shall be 
due on the next business day.
    (c) One-time reporting of historical information. (1) No later than 
January 15, 2004:
    (i) Each manufacturer of vehicles covered by Sec. Sec.  579.21 
through 579.24 of this part shall file separate reports providing 
information on the numbers of warranty claims recorded in the 
manufacturer's warranty system, and field reports, that it received in 
each calendar quarter from July 1, 2000, to June 30, 2003, for vehicles 
manufactured in model years 1994 through 2003 (including any vehicle 
designated as a 2004 model);
    (ii) Each manufacturer of child restraint systems covered by Sec.  
579.25 of

[[Page 253]]

this part shall file separate reports covering the numbers of warranty 
claims recorded in the manufacturer's warranty system and consumer 
complaints (added together), and field reports, that it received in each 
calendar quarter from July 1, 2000, to June 30, 2003, for child 
restraint systems manufactured from July 1, 1998, to June 30, 2003, and
    (iii) Each manufacturer of tires covered by Sec.  579.26 of this 
part shall file separate reports covering the numbers of warranty 
adjustments recorded in the manufacturer's warranty adjustment system 
for tires that it received in each calendar quarter from July 1, 2000, 
to June 30, 2003, for tires manufactured from July 1, 1998, to June 30, 
2003.
    (2) Each report filed under paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall 
include production data, as specified in paragraph (a) of 579.21 through 
579.26 of this part and shall identify the alleged system or component 
covered by warranty claim, warranty adjustment, or field report as 
specified in paragraph (c) of 579.21 through 579.26 of this part.
    (d) Minimal specificity. A claim or notice involving death, a claim 
or notice involving injury, a claim involving property damage, a 
consumer complaint, a warranty claim or warranty adjustment, or a field 
report need not be reported if it does not identify the vehicle or 
equipment with minimal specificity. If a manufacturer initially receives 
a claim, notice, complaint, warranty claim, warranty adjustment, or 
field report in which the vehicle or equipment is not identified with 
minimal specificity and subsequently obtains information that provides 
the requisite information needed to identify the product with minimal 
specificity, the claim, etc. shall be deemed to have been received when 
the additional information is received. If a manufacturer receives a 
claim or notice involving death or injury in which the vehicle or 
equipment is not identified with minimal specificity and the matter is 
being handled by legal counsel retained by the manufacturer, the 
manufacturer shall attempt to obtain the missing minimal specificity 
information from such counsel.
    (e) Claims received by registered agents. A claim received by any 
registered agent of a manufacturer under the laws of any State, or the 
agent that any manufacturer offering motor vehicles or motor vehicle 
equipment for import has designated pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30164(a), 
shall be deemed received by the manufacturer.
    (f) Updating of information required in reports. (1) Except as 
specified in this subsection, a manufacturer need not update its reports 
under this subpart.
    (2) With respect to each report of an incident submitted under 
paragraph (b) of Sec. Sec.  579.21 through 579.26 of this part:
    (i) If a vehicle manufacturer is not aware of the VIN, or a tire 
manufacturer is not aware of the TIN, at the time the incident is 
initially reported, the manufacturer shall submit an updated report of 
such incident in its report covering the reporting period in which the 
VIN or TIN is identified. A manufacturer need not submit an updated 
report if the VIN or TIN is identified by the manufacturer in a 
reporting period that is more than one year later than the initial 
report to NHTSA.
    (ii) If a manufacturer indicated code 99 in its report because a 
system or component had not been identified in the claim or notice that 
led to the report, and the manufacturer becomes aware during a 
subsequent calendar quarter that one or more of the specified systems or 
components allegedly contributed to the incident, the manufacturer shall 
submit an updated report of such incident in its report covering the 
reporting period in which the involved specified system(s) or 
component(s) is (are) identified. A manufacturer need not submit an 
updated report if the system(s) or component(s) is(are) identified by 
the manufacturer in a reporting period that is more than one year later 
than the initial report to NHTSA.
    (iii) If one or more systems or components is identified in a 
manufacturer's report of an incident, the manufacturer need not submit 
an updated report to reflect additional systems or components allegedly 
involved in the incident that it becomes aware of in a subsequent 
reporting period.
    (iv) If the report is of an incident involving an injury and an 
injured person dies after a manufacturer has reported

[[Page 254]]

the injury to NHTSA, the manufacturer need not submit an updated report 
to NHTSA reflecting that death.
    (g) When a report involving a death is not required. A report on 
incident(s) involving one or more deaths occurring in a foreign country 
that is identified in claim(s) against a manufacturer of motor vehicles 
or motor vehicle equipment involving a vehicle or equipment that is 
identical or substantially similar to equipment that the manufacturer 
has offered for sale in the United States need not be furnished if the 
claim specifically alleges that the death was caused by a possible 
defect in a component other than one that is common to the vehicle or 
equipment that the manufacturer has offered for sale in the United 
States.
    (h) When a report involving a claim or notice is not required. If a 
manufacturer has reported a claim or notice relating to an incident 
involving death or injury, the manufacturer need not:
    (1) Report a claim or notice arising out of the incident by a person 
who was not injured physically, and
    (2) Include in its number of property damage claims a property 
damage claim arising out of the incident.
    (i) Reporting on behalf of other manufacturers. Whenever a 
fabricating manufacturer or importer submits a report on behalf of one 
or more other manufacturers (including a brand name owner), as 
authorized under Sec.  579.3(b) of this part, the submitting 
manufacturer must identify each such other manufacturer. Whenever a 
brand name owner submits a report on its own behalf, it must identify 
the fabricating manufacturer of each separate product on which it is 
reporting.
    (j) Abbreviations. Whenever a manufacturer is required to identify a 
State in which an incident occurred, the manufacturer shall use the two-
letter abbreviations established by the United States Postal Service 
(e.g., AZ for Arizona). Whenever a manufacturer is required to identify 
a foreign country in which an incident occurred, the manufacturer shall 
use the English-language name of the country in non-abbreviated form.
    (k) Claims of confidentiality. If a manufacturer claims that any of 
the information, data, or documents that it submits is entitled to 
confidential treatment, it must make such claim in accordance with part 
512 of this chapter.
    (l) Additional related information that NHTSA may request. In 
addition to information required periodically under this subpart, NHTSA 
may request other information that may help identify a defect related to 
motor vehicle safety.
    (m) Use of the plural. As used in this part, the plural includes the 
singular and the singular includes the plural to bring within the scope 
of reporting that which might otherwise be construed to be without the 
scope.
    (n) Submission of copies of field reports. Copies of field reports 
required under this subpart shall be submitted not later than 15 days 
after reports are due pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 18143, Apr. 15, 2003; 
68 FR 20225, Apr. 24, 2003; 68 FR 35144, 35148, June 11, 2003; 68 FR 
64569, Nov. 14, 2003; 69 FR 57869, Sept. 28, 2004; 70 FR 2023, Jan. 12, 
2005; 72 FR 29444, May 29, 2007]



Sec.  579.29  Manner of reporting.

    (a) Submission of reports. (1) Except as provided in this paragraph, 
each report required under paragraphs (a) through (c) of Sec. Sec.  
579.21 through 579.26 of this part must be submitted to NHTSA's early 
warning data repository identified on NHTSA's Internet homepage 
(www.nhtsa.dot.gov). A manufacturer must use templates provided at the 
early warning website, also identified on NHTSA's homepage, for 
submitting reports. For data files smaller than the size limit of the 
Internet e-mail server of the Department of Transportation, a 
manufacturer may submit a report as an attachment to an e-mail message 
to odi.ewr@nhtsa.dot.gov, using the same templates.
    (2) Each report required under Sec.  579.27 of this part may be 
submitted to NHTSA's early warning data repository as specified in 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section or by manually filling out an 
interactive form on NHTSA's early warning website.
    (b) Submission of documents. A copy of each document required under 
paragraph (d) of Sec. Sec.  579.21 through 579.26 of this part may be 
submitted in digital

[[Page 255]]

form using a graphic compression protocol, approved by NHTSA, to the 
NHTSA data repository, or as an attachment to an e-mail message, as 
specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. Any digital image 
provided by a manufacturer shall be not less than 200 or more than 300 
dpi (dots per inch) resolution. Such documents may also be submitted in 
paper form. Each document shall be identified in accordance with the 
templates provided at NHTSA's early warning Web site, which is 
identified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
    (c) Designation of manufacturer contacts. Not later than 30 days 
prior to the date of its first quarterly submission, each manufacturer 
must provide the names, office telephone numbers, postal and street 
mailing addresses, and electronic mail addresses of two employees (one 
primary and one back-up) whom NHTSA may contact for resolving issues 
that may arise concerning the submission of information and documents 
required by this part.
    (d) Manufacturer reporting identification and password. Not later 
than 30 days prior to the date of its first quarterly submission, each 
manufacturer must request a manufacturer identification number and a 
password.
    (e) Graphic compression protocol. Not later than 30 days prior to 
the date of its first quarterly submission, each manufacturer which 
wishes to submit a copy of a document in digital form, as provided in 
paragraph (b) of this section, must obtain approval from NHTSA for the 
use of such protocol.
    (f) Information and requests submitted under paragraphs (c), (d), 
and (e) of this section shall be provided in writing to the Director, 
Office of Defects Investigation, NHTSA, Attention: Early Warning 
Division (NVS-217), 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590.

[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 35145, June 11, 2003; 
72 FR 32017, June 11, 2007]

    Effective Date Note: At 74 FR 47758, Sept. 17, 2009, Sec.  579.29 
was amended by adding paragraph (a)(3), effective Oct. 19, 2009. For the 
convenience of the user, the added text is set forth as follows:



Sec.  579.29  Manner of reporting.

    (a) * * *
    (3) For each report required under paragraphs (a) through (c) of 
Sec. Sec.  579.21 through 579.26 of this part and submitted in the 
manner provided in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, a manufacturer must 
state the make, model and model year of each motor vehicle or item of 
motor vehicle equipment in terms that are identical to the statement of 
the make, model, model year of each motor vehicle or item of motor 
vehicle equipment provided in the manufacturer's previous report.

                                * * * * *



PART 580_ODOMETER DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS--Table of Contents




Sec.
580.1 Scope.
580.2 Purpose.
580.3 Definitions.
580.4 Security of title documents and power of attorney forms.
580.5 Disclosure of odometer information.
580.6 [Reserved]
580.7 Disclosure of odometer information for leased motor vehicles.
580.8 Odometer disclosure statement retention.
580.9 Odometer record retention for auction companies.
580.10 Application for assistance.
580.11 Petition for approval of alternate disclosure requirements.
580.12 Petition for extension of time.
580.13 Disclosure of odometer information by power of attorney.
580.14 Power of attorney to review title documents and acknowledge 
          disclosure.
580.15 Certification by person exercising powers of attorney.
580.16 Access of transferee to prior title and power of attorney 
          documents.
580.17 Exemptions.

Appendix A to Part 580--Secure Printing Processes and Other Secure 
          processes
Appendix B to Part 580--Disclosure Form for Title
Appendix C to Part 580--Separate Disclosure Form
Appendix D to Part 580--Disclosure Form for Leased Vehicle
Appendix E to Part 580--Power of Attorney Disclosure Form

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 32705; delegation of authority at 49 CFR 
1.50(f) and 501.8(e)(1).

    Source: 53 FR 29476, Aug. 5, 1988, unless otherwise noted.

[[Page 256]]



Sec.  580.1  Scope.

    This part prescribes rules requiring transferors and lessees of 
motor vehicles to make written disclosure to transferees and lessors 
respectively, concerning the odometer mileage and its accuracy as 
directed by sections 408 (a) and (e) of the Motor Vehicle Information 
and Cost Savings Act as amended, 15 U.S.C. 1988 (a) and (e). In 
addition, this part prescribes the rules requiring the retention of 
odometer disclosure statements by motor vehicle dealers, distributors 
and lessors and the retention of certain other information by auction 
companies as directed by sections 408(g) and 414 of the Motor Vehicle 
Information and Cost Savings Act as amended, 15 U.S.C. 1990(d) and 
1988(g).



Sec.  580.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to provide purchasers of motor vehicles 
with odometer information to assist them in determining a vehicle's 
condition and value by making the disclosure of a vehicle's mileage a 
condition of title and by requiring lessees to disclose to their lessors 
the vehicle's mileage at the time the lessors transfer the vehicle. In 
addition, the purpose of this part is to preserve records that are 
needed for the proper investigation of possible violations of the Motor 
Vehicle Information and Cost Savings Act and any subsequent 
prosecutorial, adjudicative or other action.



Sec.  580.3  Definitions.

    All terms defined in sections 2 and 402 of the Motor Vehicle 
Information and Cost Savings Act are used in their statutory meaning. 
Other terms used in this part are defined as follows:
    Lessee means any person, or the agent for any person, to whom a 
motor vehicle has been leased for a term of at least 4 months.
    Lessor means any person, or the agent for any person, who has leased 
5 or more motor vehicles in the past 12 months.
    Mileage means actual distance that a vehicle has traveled.
    Original power of attorney means, for single copy forms, the 
document set forth by secure process which is issued by the State, and, 
for multicopy forms, any and all copies set forth by secure process 
which are issued by the State.
    Secure printing process or other secure process means any process 
which deters and detects counterfeiting and/or unauthorized reproduction 
and allows alterations to be visible to the naked eye.
    Transferee means any person to whom ownership of a motor vehicle is 
transferred, by purchase, gift, or any means other than by the creation 
of a security interest, and any person who, as agent, signs an odometer 
disclosure statement for the transferee.
    Transferor means any person who transfers his ownership of a motor 
vehicle by sale, gift, or any means other than by the creation of a 
security interest, and any person who, as agent, signs an odometer 
disclosure statement for the transferor.

[53 FR 29476, Aug. 5, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 35887, Aug. 30, 1989; 56 
FR 47686, Sept. 20, 1991]



Sec.  580.4  Security of title documents and power of attorney forms.

    Each title shall be set forth by means of a secure printing process 
or other secure process. In addition, power of attorney forms issued 
pursuant to Sec. Sec.  580.13 and 580.14 and documents which are used to 
reassign the title shall be issued by the State and shall be set forth 
by a secure process.

[54 FR 35887, Aug. 30, 1989]



Sec.  580.5  Disclosure of odometer information.

    (a) Each title, at the time it is issued to the transferee, must 
contain the mileage disclosed by the transferor when ownership of the 
vehicle was transferred and contain a space for the information required 
to be disclosed under paragraphs (c), (d), (e) and (f) of this section 
at the time of future transfer.
    (b) Any documents which are used to reassign a title shall contain a 
space for the information required to be disclosed under paragraphs (c), 
(d), (e) and (f) of this section at the time of transfer of ownership.
    (c) In connection with the transfer of ownership of a motor vehicle, 
each transferor shall disclose the mileage to the transferee in writing 
on the title

[[Page 257]]

or, except as noted below, on the document being used to reassign the 
title. In the case of a transferor in whose name the vehicle is titled, 
the transferor shall disclose the mileage on the title, and not on a 
reassignment document. This written disclosure must be signed by the 
transferor, including the printed name. In connection with the transfer 
of ownership of a motor vehicle in which more than one person is a 
transferor, only one transferor need sign the written disclosure. In 
addition to the signature and printed name of the transferor, the 
written disclosure must contain the following information:
    (1) The odometer reading at the time of transfer (not to include 
tenths of miles);
    (2) The date of transfer;
    (3) The transferor's name and current address;
    (4) The transferee's name and current address; and
    (5) The identity of the vehicle, including its make, model, year, 
and body type, and its vehicle identification number.
    (d) In addition to the information provided under paragraph (c) of 
this section, the statement shall refer to the Federal law and shall 
state that failure to complete or providing false information may result 
in fines and/or imprisonment. Reference may also be made to applicable 
State law.
    (e) In addition to the information provided under paragraphs (c) and 
(d) of this section,
    (1) The transferor shall certify that to the best of his knowledge 
the odometer reading reflects the actual mileage, or;
    (2) If the transferor knows that the odometer reading reflects the 
amount of mileage in excess of the designed mechanical odometer limit, 
he shall include a statement to that effect; or
    (3) If the transferor knows that the odometer reading differs from 
the mileage and that the difference is greater than that caused by 
odometer calibration error, he shall include a statement that the 
odometer reading does not reflect the actual mileage, and should not be 
relied upon. This statement shall also include a warning notice to alert 
the transferee that a discrepancy exists between the odometer reading 
and the actual mileage.
    (f) The transferee shall sign the disclosure statement, print his 
name, and return a copy to his transferor.
    (g) If the vehicle has not been titled or if the title does not 
contain a space for the information required, the written disclosure 
shall be executed as a separate document.
    (h) No person shall sign an odometer disclosure statement as both 
the transferor and transferee in the same transaction, unless permitted 
by Sec. Sec.  580.13 or 580.14.

[53 FR 29476, Aug. 5, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 35887, Aug. 30, 1989; 56 
FR 47686, Sept. 20, 1991]



Sec.  580.6  [Reserved]



Sec.  580.7  Disclosure of odometer information for leased motor vehicles.

    (a) Before executing any transfer of ownership document, each lessor 
of a leased motor vehicle shall notify the lessee in writing that the 
lessee is required to provide a written disclosure to the lessor 
regarding the mileage. This notice shall contain a reference to the 
federal law and shall state that failure to complete or providing false 
information may result in fines and/or imprisonment. Reference may also 
be made to applicable State law.
    (b) In connection with the transfer of ownership of the leased motor 
vehicle, the lessee shall furnish to the lessor a written statement 
regarding the mileage of the vehicle. This statement must be signed by 
the lessee and, in addition to the information required by paragraph (a) 
of this section, shall contain the following information:
    (1) The printed name of the person making the disclosure;
    (2) The current odometer reading (not to include tenths of miles);
    (3) The date of the statement;
    (4) The lessee's name and current address;
    (5) The lessor's name and current address;
    (6) The identity of the vehicle, including its make, model, year, 
and body type, and its vehicle identification number;
    (7) The date that the lessor notified the lessee of disclosure 
requirements;

[[Page 258]]

    (8) The date that the completed disclosure statement was received by 
the lessor; and
    (9) The signature of the lessor.
    (c) In addition to the information provided under paragraphs (a) and 
(b) of this section,
    (1) The lessee shall certify that to the best of his knowledge the 
odometer reading reflects the actual mileage; or
    (2) If the lessee knows that the odometer reading reflects the 
amount of mileage in excess of the designed mechanical odometer limit, 
he shall include a statement to that effect; or
    (3) If the lessee knows that the odometer reading differs from the 
mileage and that the difference is greater than that caused by odometer 
calibration error, he shall include a statement that the odometer 
reading is not the actual mileage and should not be relied upon.
    (d) If the lessor transfers the leased vehicle without obtaining 
possession of it, the lessor may indicate on the title the mileage 
disclosed by the lessee under paragraph (b) and (c) of this section, 
unless the lessor has reason to believe that the disclosure by the 
lessee does not reflect the actual mileage of the vehicle.



Sec.  580.8  Odometer disclosure statement retention.

    (a) Dealers and distributors of motor vehicles who are required by 
this part to execute an odometer disclosure statement shall retain for 
five years a photostat, carbon or other facsimile copy of each odometer 
mileage statement which they issue and receive. They shall retain all 
odometer disclosure statements at their primary place of business in an 
order that is appropriate to business requirements and that permits 
systematic retrieval.
    (b) Lessors shall retain, for five years following the date they 
transfer ownership of the leased vehicle, each odometer disclosure 
statement which they receive from a lessee. They shall retain all 
odometer disclosure statements at their primary place of business in an 
order that is appropriate to business requirements and that permits 
systematic retrieval.
    (c) Dealers and distributors of motor vehicles who are granted a 
power of attorney by their transferor pursuant to Sec.  580.13, or by 
their transferee pursuant to Sec.  580.14, shall retain for five years a 
photostat, carbon, or other facsimile copy of each power of attorney 
that they receive. They shall retain all powers of attorney at their 
primary place of business in an order that is appropriate to business 
requirements and that permits systematic retrieval.

[53 FR 29476, Aug. 5, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 35888, Aug. 30, 1989]



Sec.  580.9  Odometer record retention for auction companies.

    Each auction company shall establish and retain at its primary place 
of business in an order that is appropriate to business requirements and 
that permits systematic retrieval, for five years following the date of 
sale of each motor vehicle, the following records:
    (a) The name of the most recent owner (other than the auction 
company);
    (b) The name of the buyer;
    (c) The vehicle identification number; and
    (d) The odometer reading on the date which the auction company took 
possession of the motor vehicle.



Sec.  580.10  Application for assistance.

    (a) A State may apply to NHTSA for assistance in revising its laws 
to comply with the requirements of 408(d) (1) and (2) of the Motor 
Vehicle Information and Cost Savings Act, 15 U.S.C. 1988(d) (1) and (2) 
and Sec. Sec.  580.4 and 580.5 of this part.
    (b) Each application filed under section shall--
    (1) Be written in the English language;
    (2) Be submitted, to the Office of Chief Counsel, National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 
20590;
    (3) Include a copy of current motor vehicle titling and/or 
disclosure requirements in effect in the State; and
    (4) Include a draft of legislation or regulations intended to amend 
or revise current State motor vehicle titling and/or disclosure 
requirements to conform with Federal requirements.
    (c) The agency will respond to the applicant, in writing, and 
provide a list of the Federal statutory and/or regulatory requirements 
that the State

[[Page 259]]

may have failed to include in its proposal and indicate if any sections 
of the proposal appear to conflict with Federal requirements.



Sec.  580.11  Petition for approval of alternate disclosure requirements.

    (a) A State may petition NHTSA for approval of disclosure 
requirements which differ from the disclosure requirements of Sec. Sec.  
580.5, 580.7, or 580.13(f) of this part.
    (b) Each petition filed under this section shall--
    (1) Be written in the English language;
    (2) Be submitted to the Office of Chief Counsel, National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC 
20590;
    (3) Set forth the motor vehicle disclosure requirements in effect in 
the State, including a copy of the applicable State law or regulation; 
and
    (4) Explain how the State motor vehicle disclosure requirements are 
consistent with the purposes of the Motor Vehicle Information and Cost 
Savings Act.
    (c) Notice of the petition and an initial determination pending a 
30-day comment period will be published in the Federal Register. Notice 
of final grant or denial of a petition for approval of alternate motor 
vehicle disclosure requirements will be published in the Federal 
Register. The effect of the grant of a petition is to relieve a State 
from responsibility to conform the State disclosure requirements with 
Sec. Sec.  580.5, 580.7, or 580.13(f), as applicable, for as long as the 
approved alternate disclosure requirements remain in effect in that 
State. The effect of a denial is to require a State to conform to the 
requirements of Sec. Sec.  580.5, 580.7 or 580.13(f), as applicable, of 
this part until such time as the NHTSA approves any alternate motor 
vehicle disclosure requirements.

[53 FR 29476, Aug. 5, 1988, as amended at 56 FR 47686, Sept. 20, 1991]



Sec.  580.12  Petition for extension of time.

    (a) If a State cannot conform its laws to achieve compliance with 
this part by April 29, 1989, the State may petition for an extension of 
time.
    (b) Each petition filed under this section shall--
    (1) Be written in the English language;
    (2) Be submitted, by February 28, 1989, to the Office of Chief 
Counsel, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh 
Street SW., Washington, DC, 20590;
    (3) Set forth a chronological analysis of the efforts the State has 
taken to meet the deadline, the reasons why it did not do so, the length 
of time desired for extension and a description of the steps to be taken 
while the extension is in effect.
    (c) Notice of either the grant or denial of the petition is issued 
to the petitioner and will be published in the Federal Register.
    (d) A petition for a renewal of an extension of time must be filed 
no later than 30 days prior to the termination of the extension of time 
granted by the Agency. A petition for a renewal of an extension of time 
must meet the same requirements as the original petition for an 
extension of time.
    (e) If a petition for a renewal of the extension of time which meets 
the requirements of Sec.  580.12(b) is filed, the extension of time will 
continue until a decision is made on the renewal petition.



Sec.  580.13  Disclosure of odometer information by power of attorney.

    (a) If the transferor's title is physically held by a lienholder, or 
if the transferor to whom the title was issued by the State has lost his 
title and the transferee obtains a duplicate title on behalf of the 
transferor, and if otherwise permitted by State law, the transferor may 
give a power of attorney to his transferee for the purpose of mileage 
disclosure. The power of attorney shall be on a form issued by the State 
to the transferee that is set forth by means of a secure printing 
process or other secure process, and shall contain, in part A, a space 
for the information required to be disclosed under paragraphs (b), (c), 
(d), and (e) of this section. If a State permits the use of a power of 
attorney in the situation described in Sec.  580.14(a), the form must 
also contain, in part B, a space for the information required to be 
disclosed

[[Page 260]]

under Sec.  580.14, and, in part C, a space for the certification 
required to be made under Sec.  580.15.
    (b) In connection with the transfer of ownership of a motor vehicle, 
each transferor to whom a title was issued by the State whose title is 
physically held by a lienholder or whose title has been lost, and who 
elects to give his transferee a power of attorney for the purpose of 
mileage disclosure, must appoint the transferee his attorney-in-fact for 
the purpose of mileage disclosure and disclose the mileage on the power 
of attorney form issued by the State. This written disclosure must be 
signed by the transferor, including the printed name, and contain the 
following information:
    (1) The odometer reading at the time of transfer (not to include 
tenths of miles);
    (2) The date of transfer;
    (3) The transferor's name and current address;
    (4) The transferee's name and current address; and
    (5) The identity of the vehicle, including its make, model year, 
body type and vehicle identification number.
    (c) In addition to the information provided under paragraph (b) of 
this section, the power of attorney form shall refer to the Federal 
odometer law and state that providing false information or the failure 
of the person granted the power of attorney to submit the form to the 
State may result in fines and/or imprisonment. Reference may also be 
made to applicable State law.
    (d) In addition to the information provided under paragraphs (b) and 
(c) of this section:
    (1) The transferor shall certify that to the best of his knowledge 
the odometer reading reflects the actual mileage; or
    (2) If the transferor knows that the odometer reading reflects 
mileage in excess of the designed mechanical odometer limit, he shall 
include a statement to that effect; or
    (3) If the transferor knows that the odometer reading differs from 
the mileage and the difference is greater than that caused by a 
calibration error, he shall include a statement that the odometer 
reading does not reflect the actual mileage and should not be relied 
upon. This statement shall also include a warning notice to alert the 
transferee that a discrepancy exists between the odometer reading and 
the actual mileage.
    (e) The transferee shall sign the power of attorney form, print his 
name, and return a copy of the power of attorney form to the transferor.
    (f) Upon receipt of the transferor's title, the transferee shall 
complete the space for mileage disclosure on the title exactly as the 
mileage was disclosed by the transferor on the power of attorney form. 
The transferee shall submit the original power of attorney form to the 
State that issued it, with a copy of the transferor's title or with the 
actual title when the transferee submits a new title application at the 
same time. The State shall retain the power of attorney form and title 
for three years or a period equal to the State titling record retention 
period, whichever is shorter. If the mileage disclosed on the power of 
attorney form is lower than the mileage appearing on the title, the 
power of attorney is void and the dealer shall not complete the mileage 
disclosure on the title.

[54 FR 35888, Aug. 30, 1989, as amended at 54 FR 40083, Sept. 29, 1989; 
56 FR 47686, Sept. 20, 1991]



Sec.  580.14  Power of attorney to review title documents and 
acknowledge disclosure.

    (a) In circumstances where part A of a secure power of attorney form 
has been used pursuant to Sec.  580.13 of this part, and if otherwise 
permitted by State law, a transferee may give a power of attorney to his 
transferor to review the title and any reassignment documents for 
mileage discrepancies, and if no discrepancies are found, to acknowledge 
disclosure on the title. The power of attorney shall be on part B of the 
form referred to in Sec.  580.13(a), which shall contain a space for the 
information required to be disclosed under paragraphs (b), (c), (d), and 
(e) of this section and, in part C, a space for the certification 
required to be made under Sec.  580.15.
    (b) The power of attorney must include a mileage disclosure from the 
transferor to the transferee and must

[[Page 261]]

be signed by the transferor, including the printed name, and contain the 
following information:
    (1) The odometer reading at the time of transfer (not to include 
tenths of miles);
    (2) The date of transfer;
    (3) The transferor's name and current address;
    (4) The transferee's name and current address; and
    (5) The identity of the vehicle, including its make, model year, 
body type and vehicle identification number.
    (c) In addition to the information provided under paragraph (b) of 
this section, the power of attorney form shall refer to the Federal 
odometer law and state that providing false information or the failure 
of the person granted the power of attorney to submit the form to the 
State may result in fines and/or imprisonment. Reference may also be 
made to applicable State law.
    (d) In addition to the information provided under paragraphs (b) and 
(c) of this section:
    (1) The transferor shall certify that to the best of his knowledge 
the odometer reading reflects the actual mileage;
    (2) If the transferor knows that the odometer reading reflects 
mileage in excess of the designed mechanical odometer limit, he shall 
include a statement to that effect; or
    (3) If the transferor knows that the odometer reading differs from 
the mileage and the difference is greater than that caused by a 
calibration error, he shall include a statement that the odometer 
reading does not reflect the actual mileage and should not be relied 
upon. This statement shall also include a warning notice to alert the 
transferee that a discrepancy exists between the odometer reading and 
the actual mileage.
    (e) The transferee shall sign the power of attorney form, and print 
his name.
    (f) The transferor shall give a copy of the power of attorney form 
to his transferee.

[54 FR 35888, Aug. 30, 1989]



Sec.  580.15  Certification by person exercising powers of attorney.

    (a) A person who exercises a power of attorney under both Sec. Sec.  
580.13 and 580.14 must complete a certification that he has disclosed on 
the title document the mileage as it was provided to him on the power of 
attorney form, and that upon examination of the title and any 
reassignment documents, the mileage disclosure he has made on the title 
pursuant to the power of attorney is greater than that previously stated 
on the title and reassignment documents. This certification shall be 
under part C of the same form as the powers of attorney executed under 
Sec. Sec.  580.13 and 580.14 and shall include:
    (1) The signature and printed name of the person exercising the 
power of attorney;
    (2) The address of the person exercising the power of attorney; and
    (3) The date of the certification.
    (b) If the mileage reflected by the transferor on the power of 
attorney is less than that previously stated on the title and any 
reassignment documents, the power of attorney shall be void.

[54 FR 35889, Aug. 30, 1989]



Sec.  580.16  Access of transferee to prior title and power of 
attorney documents.

    (a) In circumstances in which a power of attorney has been used 
pursuant to Sec.  580.13 of this part, if a subsequent transferee elects 
to return to his transferor to sign the disclosure on the title when the 
transferor obtains the title and does not give his transferor a power of 
attorney to review the title and reassignment documents, upon the 
transferee's request, the transferor shall show to the transferee a copy 
of the power of attorney that he received from his transferor.
    (b) Upon request of a purchaser, a transferor who was granted a 
power of attorney by his transferor and who holds the title to the 
vehicle in his own name, must show to the purchaser the copy of the 
previous owner's title and the power of attorney form.

[54 FR 35889, Aug. 30, 1989]

[[Page 262]]



Sec.  580.17  Exemptions.

    Notwithstanding the requirements of Sec. Sec.  580.5 and 580.7:
    (a) A transferor or a lessee of any of the following motor vehicles 
need not disclose the vehicle's odometer mileage:
    (1) A vehicle having a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, as defined in 
Sec.  571.3 of this title, of more than 16,000 pounds;
    (2) A vehicle that is not self-propelled;
    (3) A vehicle that was manufactured in a model year beginning at 
least ten years before January 1 of the calendar year in which the 
transfer occurs; or

    Example to paragraph (a)(3): For vehicle transfers occurring during 
calendar year 1998, model year 1988 or older vehicles are exempt.

    (4) A vehicle sold directly by the manufacturer to any agency of the 
United States in conformity with contractual specifications.
    (b) A transferor of a new vehicle prior to its first transfer for 
purposes other than resale need not disclose the vehicle's odometer 
mileage.
    (c) A lessor of any of the vehicles listed in paragraph (a) of this 
section need not notify the lessee of any of these vehicles of the 
disclosure requirements of Sec.  580.7.

[53 FR 29476, Aug. 5, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 35888, Aug. 30, 1989. 
Redesignated at 62 FR 47765, Sept. 11, 1997; 63 FR 52632, Oct. 1, 1998]



Sec. Appendix A to Part 580--Secure Printing Processes and Other Secure 
                                Processes

    1. Methods to deter or detect counterfeiting and/or unauthorized 
reproduction.
    (a) Intaglio printing--a printing process utilized in the production 
of bank-notes and other security documents whereby an engraved plate 
meets the paper under extremely high pressure forcing the paper into the 
incisions below the surface of the plate.
    (b) Intaglio Printing With Latent Images--a printing process 
utilized in the production of bank-notes and other security documents 
whereby an engraved plate meets the paper under extremely high pressure 
forcing the paper into the incisions below the surface of the plate. The 
three dimensional nature of intaglio printing creates latent images that 
aid in verification of authenticity and deter counterfeiting.
    (c) High Resolution Printing--a printing process which achieves 
excellent art clarity and detail quality approaching that of the 
intaglio process.
    (d) Micro-line Printing--a reduced line of type that appears to be a 
solid line to the naked eye but contains readable intelligence under 
strong magnification.
    (e) Pantograph Void Feature--wording incorporated into a pantograph 
by varying screen density in the pantograph. The wording will appear 
when attempts are made to photocopy on color copiers.
    (f) Hologram--a defraction foil substrate, produced from a negative 
which was made by splitting a laser beam into two separate beams to 
produce a three dimensional effect.
    (g) Security Paper--paper containing a security watermark and/or a 
security thread.
    2. Methods to allow alterations to be visible to the naked eye.
    (a) Erasure Sensitive Background Inks--a process whereby the text is 
printed in a dark color ink over a fine line erasure-sensitive prismatic 
ink tint.
    (b) Security Lamination--retro-reflective security laminate is 
placed over vital information after it has been entered to allow for 
detection of attempts to alter this information.
    (c) Security Paper--paper which has been chemically treated to 
detect chemical alterations.



         Sec. Appendix B to Part 580--Disclosure Form for Title

                      Odometer Disclosure Statement

    Federal law (and State law, if applicable) requires that you state 
the mileage in connection with the transfer of ownership. Failure to 
complete or providing a false statement may result in fines and/or 
imprisonment.
    I state that the odometer now reads ------ (no tenths) miles and to 
the best of my knowledge that it reflects the actual mileage of the 
vehicle described herein, unless one of the following statements is 
checked.
    --(1) I hereby certify that to the best of my knowledge the odometer 
reading reflects the amount of mileage in excess of its mechanical 
limits.
    --(2) I hereby certify that the odometer reading is NOT the actual 
mileage. WARNING--ODOMETER DISCREPANCY.

________________________________________________________________________

(Transferor's Signature)

________________________________________________________________________

(Transferee's Signature)

________________________________________________________________________

(Printed name)

________________________________________________________________________

(Printed name)


[[Page 263]]


Date of Statement_______________________________________________________

Transferee's Name_______________________________________________________
Transferee's Address____________________________________________________

 (Street)

________________________________________________________________________

(City) (State) (ZIP Code)



          Sec. Appendix C to Part 580--Separate Disclosure Form

                      Odometer Disclosure Statement

    Federal law (and State law, if applicable) requires that you state 
the mileage upon transfer of ownership. Failure to complete or providing 
a false statement may result in fines and/or imprisonment.
    I, ------------ (transferor's name, Print) state that the odometer 
now reads -------- (no tenths) miles and to the best of my knowledge 
that it reflects the actual mileage of the vehicle described below, 
unless one of the following statements is checked.
    --(1) I hereby certify that to the best of my knowledge the odometer 
reading reflects the amount of mileage in excess of its mechanical 
limits.
    --(2) I hereby certify that the odometer reading is NOT the actual 
mileage. WARNING--ODOMETER DISCREPANCY.

Make____________________________________________________________________
Model___________________________________________________________________
Body Type_______________________________________________________________
Vehicle Identification Number___________________________________________
Year____________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
(Transferor's Signature)
________________________________________________________________________
(Printed name)
Transferor's Address____________________________________________________
 (Street)
________________________________________________________________________
 (City) (State) (ZIP Code)
Date of Statement_______________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
(Transferee's Signature)
________________________________________________________________________
(Printed name)
Transferee's Name_______________________________________________________
Transferee's Address____________________________________________________
 (Street)
________________________________________________________________________
 (City) (State) (ZIP Code)



     Sec. Appendix D to Part 580--Disclosure Form for Leased Vehicle

             Odometer Disclosure Statement (Leased Vehicle)

    Federal law (and State law, if applicable) requires that the lessee 
disclose the mileage to the lessor in connection with the transfer of 
ownership. Failure to complete or making a false statement may result in 
fines and/or imprisonment. Complete disclosure form below and return to 
lessor.
    I,------------ (name of person making disclosure, Print) state that 
the odometer now reads -------- (no tenths) miles and to the best of my 
knowledge that it reflects the actual mileage of the vehicle described 
below, unless one of the following statements is checked.
    --(1) I hereby certify that to the best of my knowledge the odometer 
reading reflects the amount of mileage in excess of its mechanical 
limits.
    --(2) I hereby certify that the odometer reading is NOT the actual 
mileage.

Make____________________________________________________________________
Model___________________________________________________________________
Body Type_______________________________________________________________
Vehicle Identification Number___________________________________________
Year____________________________________________________________________
Lessee's Name___________________________________________________________
Lessee's Address________________________________________________________
 (Street)
________________________________________________________________________
 (City) (State) (ZIP Code)
Lessee's Signature______________________________________________________
Date of Statement_______________________________________________________
Lessor's Name___________________________________________________________
Lessor's Address________________________________________________________
 (Street)
________________________________________________________________________
 (City) (State) (ZIP Code)
Date Disclosure Form Sent to Lessee_____________________________________
Date Completed Disclosure Form Received from Lessee_____________________
Lessor's Signature______________________________________________________



     Sec. Appendix E to Part 580--Power of Attorney Disclosure Form

    Warning: This form may be used only when title is physically held by 
lienholder or has been lost. This form must be submitted to the state by 
the person exercising powers of attorney. Failure to do so may result in 
fines and/or imprisonment.
    VEHICLE DESCRIPTION

    Year -------- Make --------------
    Model -------------- Body Type --------------
    Vehicle Identification Number ------------------------

              Part A. Power of Attorney To Disclose Mileage

    Federal law (and State Law, if applicable) requires that you state 
the mileage upon transfer of ownership. Providing a false statement may 
result in fines and/or imprisonment.
I, ------------------------------ (transferor's name, Print) appoint --
---------------------------- (transferee's name, Print) as my attorney-
in-fact, to disclose the mileage, on the title for the vehicle

[[Page 264]]

described above, exactly as stated in my following disclosure.
    I state that the odometer now reads ------------ (no tenths) miles 
and to the best of my knowledge that it reflects the actual mileage 
unless one of the following statements is checked.
    ---- (1) I hereby certify that to the best of my knowledge the 
odometer reading reflect the mileage in excess of its mechanical limits.
    ---- (2) I hereby certify that the odometer reading is NOT the 
actual mileage. WARNING--ODOMETER DISCREPANCY.
________________________________________________________________________
(Transferor's Signature)
________________________________________________________________________
(Printed Name)

Transferor's Address (Street) ------------------------

(City) ------------ (State) ---- (ZIP Code) ----------.

Date of Statement ----------------
________________________________________________________________________
(Transferee's Signature)
________________________________________________________________________
(Printed Name)

Transferee's Name ------------------------

Transferee's Address (Street) ------------------------

(City) ------------ (State) ---- (ZIP Code) ----------.

  Part B. Power of Attorney To Review Title Documents and Acknowledge 
                               Disclosure.

    (Part B is invalid unless Part A has been completed.)
I, ------------------------------ (transferee's name, Print) appoint --
---------------------------- (transferor's name, Print) as my attorney-
in-fact, to sign the mileage disclosure, on the title for the vehicle 
described above, only if the disclosure is exactly as the disclosure 
completed below.
________________________________________________________________________
(Transferee's Signature)
________________________________________________________________________
(Printed Name)

Transferee's Name ------------------------

Transferee's Address (Street) ------------------------

(City) ------------ (State) ---- (ZIP Code) ----------.

    Federal law (and State Law, if applicable) requires that you state 
the mileage upon transfer of ownership. Providing a false statement may 
result in fines and/or imprisonment.

    I, -------------------- (transferor's name, Print) state that the 
odometer now reads ------------ (no tenths) miles and to the best of my 
knowledge that it reflects the actual mileage unless one of the 
following statements is checked.
    ---- (1) I hereby certify that to the best of my knowledge the 
odometer reading reflect the mileage in excess of its mechanical limits.
    ---- (2) I hereby certify that the odometer reading is NOT the 
actual mileage. WARNING--ODOMETER DISCREPANCY.
________________________________________________________________________
(Transferor's Signature)
________________________________________________________________________
(Printed Name)

Transferor's Address (Street) ------------------------

(City) ------------ (State) ---- (ZIP Code) ----------.

Date of Statement ----------------

                          Part C. Certification

    (To Be Completed When parts A and B Have Been Used)

    I, ----------------, (person exercising above powers of attorney, 
Print), hereby certify that the mileage I have disclosed on the title 
document is consistent with that provided to me in the above power of 
attorney. Further, upon examination of the title and any reassignment 
documents for the vehicle described above, the mileage diclosure I have 
made on the title pursuant to the power of attorney is greater than that 
previously stated on the title and reassignment documents. This 
certification is not intended to create, nor does it create any new or 
additional liability under Federal or State law.
________________________________________________________________________
(Signature)
________________________________________________________________________
(Printed Name)

________________________________________________________________________
Address (Street)

(City) ---------------- (State) ---- (ZIP Code) ----------
Date ----------------

[54 FR 9816, Mar. 8, 1989, as amended at 54 FR 35889, Aug. 30, 1989]



PART 581_BUMPER STANDARD--Table of Contents




Sec.
581.1 Scope.
581.2 Purpose.
581.3 Application.
581.4 Definitions.
581.5 Requirements.
581.6 Conditions.
581.7 Test procedures.
581.8 Exemptions.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 32502; 322, 30111, 30115, 30117 and 30166; 
delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.

[[Page 265]]


    Source: 42 FR 24059, May 12, 1977, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  581.1  Scope.

    This standard establishes requirements for the impact resistance of 
vehicles in low speed front and rear collisions.



Sec.  581.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this standard is to reduce physical damage to the 
front and rear ends of a passenger motor vehicle from low speed 
collisions.



Sec.  581.3  Application.

    This standard applies to passenger motor vehicles other than 
multipurpose passenger vehicles and low-speed vehicles as defined in 49 
CFR part 571.3(b).

[63 FR 33217, June 17, 1998]



Sec.  581.4  Definitions.

    All terms defined in 49 U.S.C. 32101 are used as defined therein.
    Bumper face bar means any component of the bumper system that 
contacts the impact ridge of the pendulum test device.

[42 FR 24059, May 12, 1977, as amended at 64 FR 2862, Jan. 19, 1999]



Sec.  581.5  Requirements.

    (a) Each vehicle shall meet the damage criteria of Sec. Sec.  
581.5(c)(1) through 581.5(c)(9) when impacted by a pendulum-type test 
device in accordance with the procedures of Sec.  581.7(b), under the 
conditions of Sec.  581.6, at an impact speed of 1.5 m.p.h., and when 
impacted by a pendulum-type test device in accordance with the 
procedures of Sec.  581.7(a) at 2.5 m.p.h., followed by an impact into a 
fixed collision barrier that is perpendicular to the line of travel of 
the vehicle, while traveling longitudinally forward, then longitudinally 
rearward, under the conditions of Sec.  581.6, at 2.5 m.p.h.
    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) Protective criteria. (1) Each lamp or reflective device except 
license plate lamps shall be free of cracks and shall comply with 
applicable visibility requirements of S5.3.1.1 of Standard No. 108 
(Sec.  571.108 of this chapter). The aim of each headlamp installed on 
the vehicle shall be adjustable to within the beam aim inspection limits 
specified in Table 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J599 AUG97, measured 
with the aiming method appropriate for that headlamp.
    (2) The vehicle's hood, trunk, and doors shall operate in the normal 
manner.
    (3) The vehicle's fuel and cooling systems shall have no leaks or 
constricted fluid passages and all sealing devices and caps shall 
operate in the normal manner.
    (4) The vehicle's exhaust system shall have no leaks or 
constrictions.
    (5) The vehicle's propulsion, suspension, steering, and braking 
systems shall remain in adjustment and shall operate in the normal 
manner.
    (6) A pressure vessel used to absorb impact energy in an exterior 
protection system by the accumulation of gas pressure or hydraulic 
pressure shall not suffer loss of gas or fluid accompanied by separation 
of fragments from the vessel.
    (7) The vehicle shall not touch the test device, except on the 
impact ridge shown in Figures 1 and 2, with a force that exceeds 2000 
pounds on the combined surfaces of Planes A and B of the test device.
    (8) The exterior surfaces shall have no separations of surface 
materials, paint, polymeric coatings, or other covering materials from 
the surface to which they are bonded, and no permanent deviations from 
their original contours 30 minutes after completion of each pendulum and 
barrier impact, except where such damage occurs to the bumper face bar 
and the components and associated fasteners that directly attach the 
bumper face bar to the chassis frame.
    (9) Except as provided in Sec.  581.5(c)(8), there shall be no 
breakage or release of fasteners or joints.

[42 FR 24059, May 12, 1977, as amended at 42 FR 38909, Aug. 1, 1977; 43 
FR 40231, Sept. 11, 1978; 47 FR 21837, May 20, 1982; 64 FR 16360, Apr. 
5, 1999; 64 FR 49092, Sept. 10, 1999]



Sec.  581.6  Conditions.

    The vehicle shall meet the requirements of Sec.  581.5 under the 
following conditions.
    (a) General. (1) The vehicle is at unloaded vehicle weight.

[[Page 266]]

    (2) The front wheels are in the straight ahead position.
    (3) Tires are inflated to the vehicle manufacturer's recommended 
pressure for the specified loading condition.
    (4) Brakes are disengaged and the transmission is in neutral.
    (5) Trailer hitches, license plate brackets, and headlamp washers 
are removed from the vehicle. Running lights, fog lamps, and equipment 
mounted on the bumper face bar are removed from the vehicle if they are 
optional equipment.
    (b) Pendulum test conditions. The following conditions apply to the 
pendulum test procedures of Sec.  581.7 (a) and (b).
    (1) The test device consists of a block with one side contoured as 
specified in Figure 1 and Figure 2 with the impact ridge made of A1S1 
4130 steel hardened to 34 Rockwell ``C.'' The impact ridge and the 
surfaces in Planes A and B of the test device are finished with a 
surface roughness of 32 as specified by SAE Recommended Practice J449A, 
June 1963. From the point of release of the device until the onset of 
rebound, the pendulum suspension system holds Plane A vertical, with the 
arc described by any point on the impact line lying in a vertical plane 
(for Sec.  581.7(a), longitudinal; for Sec.  581.7(b), at an angle of 
30[deg] to a vertical longitudinal plane) and having a constant radius 
of not less than 11 feet.
    (2) With Plane A vertical, the impact line shown in Figures 1 and 2 
is horizontal at the same height as the test device's center of 
percussion.
    (3) The effective impacting mass of the test device is equal to the 
mass of the tested vehicle.
    (4) When impacted by the test device, the vehicle is at rest on a 
level rigid concrete surface.
    (c) Barrier test condition. At the onset of a barrier impact, the 
vehicle's engine is operating at idling speed in accordance with the 
manufacturer's specifications. Vehicle systems that are not necessary to 
the movement of the vehicle are not operating during impact.

(Authority: Sec. 102, Pub. L. 92-513, 86 Stat. 947 (15 U.S.C. 1912); 
secs. 103, 119, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 U.S.C. 1392, 1407); 
delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50 and 501.7)

[42 FR 24059, May 12, 1977, as amended at 42 FR 38909, Aug. 1, 1977; 48 
FR 43331, Sept. 23, 1983]



Sec.  581.7  Test procedures.

    (a) Longitudinal impact test procedures. (1) Impact the vehicle's 
front surface and its rear surface two times each with the impact line 
at any height from 16 to 20 inches, inclusive, in accordance with the 
following procedure.
    (2) For impacts at a height of 20 inches, place the test device 
shown in Figure 1 so that Plane A is vertical and the impact line is 
horizontal at the specified height.
    (3) For impacts at a height between 20 inches and 16 inches, place 
the test device shown in Figure 2 so that Plane A is vertical and the 
impact line is horizontal at a height within the range.
    (4) For each impact, position the test device so that the impact 
line is at least 2 inches apart in vertical direction from its position 
in any prior impact, unless the midpoint of the impact line with respect 
to the vehicle is to be more than 12 inches apart laterally from its 
position in any prior impact.
    (5) For each impact, align the vehicle so that it touches, but does 
not move, the test device, with the vehicle's longitudinal centerline 
perpendicular to the plane that includes Plane A of the test device and 
with the test device inboard of the vehicle corner test positions 
specified in Sec.  581.7(b).
    (6) Move the test device away from the vehicle, then release it to 
impact the vehicle.
    (7) Perform the impacts at intervals of not less than 30 minutes.
    (b) Corner impact test procedure. (1) Impact a front corner and a 
rear corner of the vehicle once each with the impact line at a height of 
20 inches and impact the other front corner and the other rear corner 
once each with the impact line at any height from 16 to 20 inches, 
inclusive, in accordance with the following procedure.
    (2) For an impact at a height of 20 inches, place the test device 
shown in

[[Page 267]]

Figure 1 so that Plane A is vertical and the impact line is horizontal 
at the specified height.
    (3) For an impact at a height between 16 inches and 20 inches, place 
the test device shown in Figure 2 so that Plane A is vertical and the 
impact line is horizontal at a height within the range.
    (4) Align the vehicle so that a vehicle corner touches, but does not 
move, the lateral center of the test device with Plane A of the test 
device forming an angle of 60 degrees with a vertical longitudinal 
plane.
    (5) Move the test device away from the vehicle, then release it to 
impact the vehicle.
    (6) Perform the impact at intervals of not less than 30 minutes.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.197
    

[42 FR 24059, May 12, 1977, as amended at 42 FR 38909, Aug. 1, 1977]



Sec.  581.8  Exemptions.

    A manufacturer of a passenger motor vehicle to which a bumper 
standard issued under this part applies may apply to the Administrator:
    (a) For rulemaking as provided in part 552 of this chapter to exempt 
a class of passenger motor vehicles from all or any part of a bumper 
standard issued under this part on the basis that the class of vehicles 
has been manufactured for a special use and that compliance with the 
standard would unreasonably interfere with the special use of the class 
of vehicle; or
    (b) To exempt a make or model of passenger motor vehicle on the 
basis set forth in paragraph (a) of this section or part 555 of this 
chapter.
    (c) An application filed for exemption on the basis of paragraph (a) 
of this section shall contain the information specified in Sec.  555.5 
of this chapter, and set forth data, views, and arguments in support 
that the vehicle has been manufactured for a special use and that 
compliance with the bumper standard would interfere unreasonably with 
the special use of the vehicle.
    (d) An application filed for exemption under part 555 of this 
chapter shall be filed in accordance with the requirements of that part.
    (e) The NHTSA shall process exemption applications in accordance 
with Sec.  555.7 of this chapter. An exemption granted a manufacturer on 
the basis of paragraph (a) of this section is indefinite in length but 
expires when the manufacturer ceases production of the exempted vehicle, 
or when the exempted vehicle as produced has been so modified from its 
original design that the Administrator decides that it is no longer 
manufactured for the special use upon which the application for its 
exemption was based. The Administrator may terminate an exemption in the

[[Page 268]]

manner set forth in Sec. Sec.  555.8(c) and 555.8(f) of this chapter, 
and for the reasons set forth in Sec.  555.8(d) of this chapter. An 
exempted vehicle shall be labeled in accordance with Sec.  555.9 of this 
chapter. Information relating to an application shall be available to 
the public in the manner specified in Sec.  555.10 of this chapter.

[64 FR 2862, Jan. 19, 1999]



PART 582_INSURANCE COST INFORMATION REGULATION--Table of Contents




Sec.
582.1 Scope.
582.2 Purpose.
582.3 Definitions.
582.4 Requirements.
582.5 Information form.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 32303; delegation of authority at 49 CFR 
1.50(f).

    Source: 40 FR 4918, Feb. 3, 1975, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  582.1  Scope.

    This part requires automobile dealers to make available to 
prospective purchasers information reflecting differences in insurance 
costs for different makes and models of passenger motor vehicles based 
upon differences in damage susceptibility and crashworthiness, pursuant 
to section 201(e) of the Motor Vehicle Information and Cost Savings Act 
(15 U.S.C. 1941(e)), herein ``the Cost Savings Act.''



Sec.  582.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to enable prospective purchasers to 
compare differences in auto insurance costs for the various makes and 
models of passenger motor vehicles, based upon differences in damage 
susceptibility and crashworthiness, and to realize any savings in 
collision insurance resulting from differences in damageability, and any 
savings in medical payment insurance resulting from differences in 
crashworthiness.



Sec.  582.3  Definitions.

    (a) Statutory definitions. All terms used in this part which are 
defined in section 2 of the Cost Savings Act are used as so defined.
    (b) Definitions used in this part. (1) Automobile dealer means any 
person who engages in the retail sale of new automobiles as a trade or 
business.
    (2) Collision insurance means insurance that reimburses the insured 
party for physical damage to his property resulting from automobile 
accidents.
    (3) Insurance cost means the insurance premium rate, as expressed in 
appropriate indices, for collision and medical payment, including 
personal injury protection in no-fault states.
    (4) Medical payment insurance means insurance that reimburses the 
insured party for medical expenses sustained by himself, his family, and 
his passengers in automobile accidents.

[40 FR 4918, Feb. 3, 1975, as amended at 58 FR 12550, Mar. 5, 1993]



Sec.  582.4  Requirements.

    (a) Each automobile dealer shall make available to prospective 
purchasers, without charge, the information specified in Sec.  582.5, at 
each location where he or she offers new vehicles for sale.
    (b) Each automobile dealer shall maintain a sufficient quantity of 
booklets containing the information specified in Sec.  582.5 to assure 
that they are available for retention by prospective purchasers.
    (c) The booklets shall be revised to reflect the updated data 
published by NHTSA each year within 30 days of NHTSA's publication of 
the data in the Federal Register.

[58 FR 12550, Mar. 5, 1993]



Sec.  582.5  Information form.

    The information made available pursuant to Sec.  582.4 shall be 
presented in writing in the English language and in not less than 10-
point type. It shall be presented in the format set forth below, and 
shall include the complete explanatory text and the updated data 
published annually by NHTSA.

[[Page 269]]

                       MARCH [YEAR TO BE INSERTED]

COMPARISON OF DIFFERENCES IN INSURANCE COSTS FOR PASSENGER CARS, STATION 
  WAGONS/PASSENGER VANS, PICKUPS AND UTILITY VEHICLES ON THE BASIS OF 
                          DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY

    The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has 
provided the information in this booklet in compliance with Federal law 
as an aid to consumers considering the purchase of a new vehicle. The 
booklet compares differences in insurance costs for different makes and 
models of passenger cars, station wagons/passenger vans, pickups, and 
utility vehicles on the basis of damage susceptibility. However, it does 
not indicate a vehicle's relative safety.
    The following table contains the best available information 
regarding the effect of damage susceptibility on insurance premiums. It 
was taken from data compiled by the Highway Loss Data Institute (HLDI) 
in its December [YEAR TO BE INSERTED] Insurance Collision Report, and 
reflects the collision loss experience of passenger cars, utility 
vehicles, light trucks, and vans sold in the United States in terms of 
the average loss payment per insured vehicle year for [THREE APPROPRIATE 
YEARS TO BE INSERTED]. NHTSA has not verified the data in this table.
    The table represents vehicles' collision loss experience in relative 
terms, with 100 representing the average for all passenger vehicles. 
Thus, a rating of 122 reflects a collision loss experience that is 22 
percent higher (worse) than average, while a rating of 96 reflects a 
collision loss experience that is 4 percent lower (better) than average. 
The table is not relevant for models that have been substantially 
redesigned for [YEAR TO BE INSERTED], and it does not include 
information about models without enough claim experience.
    Although many insurance companies use the HLDI information to adjust 
the ``base rate'' for the collision portion of their insurance premiums, 
the amount of any such adjustment is usually small. It is unlikely that 
your total premium will vary more than ten percent depending upon the 
collision loss experience of a particular vehicle.
    If you do not purchase collision coverage or your insurance company 
does not use the HLDI information, your premium will not vary at all in 
relation to these rankings.
    In addition, different insurance companies often charge different 
premiums for the same driver and vehicle. Therefore, you should contact 
insurance companies or their agents directly to determine the actual 
premium that you will be charged for insuring a particular vehicle.

    Please Note: In setting insurance premiums, insurance companies 
mainly rely on factors that are not directly related to the vehicle 
itself (except for its value). Rather, they mainly consider driver 
characteristics (such as age, gender, marital status, and driving 
record), the geographic area in which the vehicle is driven, how many 
miles are traveled, and how the vehicle is used. Therefore, to obtain 
complete information about insurance premiums, you should contact 
insurance companies or their agents directly.
    Insurance companies do not generally adjust their premiums on the 
basis of data reflecting the crashworthiness of different vehicles. 
However, some companies adjust their premiums for personal injury 
protection and medical payments coverage if the insured vehicle has 
features that are likely to improve its crashworthiness, such as air 
bags and automatic seat belts.
    Test data relating to vehicle crashworthiness and rollover ratings 
are available from NHTSA's New Car Assessment Program (NCAP). NCAP test 
results demonstrate relative frontal and side crash protection in new 
vehicles, and relative rollover resistance. Information on vehicles that 
NHTSA has tested in the NCAP program can be obtained from http://
www.safercar.gov or by calling NHTSA's toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline 
at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153).

[Insert Table To Be Published Each March by the National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration]

    If you would like more details about the information in this table, 
or wish to obtain the complete Insurance Collision Report, please 
contact HLDI directly, at: Highway Loss Data Institute, 1005 North Glebe 
Road, Arlington, VA 22201, Tel: (703) 247-1600.

[60 FR 15512, Mar. 24, 1995, as amended at 70 FR 35557, June 21, 2005]



PART 583_AUTOMOBILE PARTS CONTENT LABELING--Table of Contents




Sec.
583.1 Scope.
583.2 Purpose.
583.3 Applicability.
583.4 Definitions.
583.5 Label requirements.
583.6 Procedure for determining U.S./Canadian parts content.
583.7 Procedure for determining major foreign sources of passenger motor 
          vehicle equipment.
583.8 Procedure for determining country of origin for engines and 
          transmissions (for purposes of determining the information 
          specified by Sec. Sec.  583.5(a)(4) and 583.5(a)(5) only).

[[Page 270]]

583.9 Attachment and maintenance of label.
583.10 Outside suppliers of passenger motor vehicle equipment.
583.11 Allied suppliers of passenger motor vehicle equipment.
583.12 Suppliers of engines and transmissions.
583.13 Supplier certification and certificates.
583.14 Currency conversion rate.
583.15 Joint ownership.
583.16 Maintenance of records.
583.17 Reporting.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 32304, 49 CFR 1.50, 501.2(f).

    Source: 59 FR 37330, July 21, 1994, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  583.1  Scope.

    This part establishes requirements for the disclosure of information 
relating to the countries of origin of the equipment of new passenger 
motor vehicles.



Sec.  583.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to aid potential purchasers in the 
selection of new passenger motor vehicles by providing them with 
information about the value of the U.S./Canadian and foreign parts 
content of each vehicle, the countries of origin of the engine and 
transmission, and the site of the vehicle's final assembly.



Sec.  583.3  Applicability.

    This part applies to manufacturers of new passenger motor vehicles 
manufactured or imported for sale in the United States, suppliers of 
passenger motor vehicle equipment, and dealers of new passenger motor 
vehicles.



Sec.  583.4  Definitions.

    (a) Statutory terms. The terms allied supplier, carline, country of 
origin, dealer, foreign content, manufacturer, new passenger motor 
vehicle, of U.S./Canadian origin, outside supplier, passenger motor 
vehicle, passenger motor vehicle equipment, percentage (by value), 
State, and value added in the United States and Canada, defined in 49 
U.S.C. 32304(a), are used in accordance with their statutory meanings 
except as further defined in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (b) Other terms and further definitions.
    (1) Administrator means the Administrator of the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration.
    (2) Allied supplier means a supplier of passenger motor vehicle 
equipment that is wholly owned by the manufacturer, or in the case of a 
joint venture vehicle assembly arrangement, any supplier that is wholly 
owned by one member of the joint venture arrangement. A supplier is 
considered to be wholly owned by the manufacturer if a common parent 
company owns both the manufacturer and the supplier, or if a group of 
related companies own both the manufacturer and the supplier and no 
outside interests (interests other than the manufacturer itself or 
companies which own the manufacturer) own the supplier.
    (3) Carline means a name denoting a group of vehicles which has a 
degree of commonality in construction (e.g., body, chassis). Carline 
does not consider any level of decor or opulence and is not generally 
distinguished by such characteristics as roof line, number of doors, 
seats, or windows, except for light duty trucks. Carline is not 
distinguished by country of manufacture, final assembly point, engine 
type, or driveline. Light duty trucks are considered to be different 
carlines than passenger cars. A carline includes all motor vehicles of a 
given nameplate. Special purpose vehicles, vans, and pickup trucks are 
classified as separate carlines.
    (4) Final assembly means all operations involved in the assembly of 
a vehicle, performed at the final assembly point including but not 
limited to assembly of body panels, painting, final chassis assembly, 
trim installation, except engine and transmission fabrication and 
assembly and the fabrication of motor vehicle equipment components 
produced at the same final assembly point using forming processes such 
as stamping, machining or molding processes.
    (5) Final assembly point means the plant, factory, or other place, 
which is a building or series of buildings in close proximity, where a 
new passenger motor vehicle is produced or assembled from passenger 
motor vehicle equipment and from which such vehicle is delivered to a 
dealer or importer in

[[Page 271]]

such a condition that all component parts necessary to the mechanical 
operation of such automobile are included with such vehicle whether or 
not such component parts are permanently installed in or on such 
vehicle. For multi-stage vehicles, the final assembly point is the 
location where the first stage vehicle is assembled.
    (6) Outside supplier means:
    (i) A non-allied supplier of passenger motor vehicle equipment to a 
manufacturer's allied supplier and
    (ii) Anyone other than an allied supplier who ships directly to the 
manufacturer's final assembly point.
    (7) Passenger motor vehicle equipment means any system, subassembly, 
or component received at the final assembly point for installation on, 
or attachment to, such vehicle at the time of its initial shipment by 
the manufacturer to a dealer for sale to an ultimate purchaser. 
Passenger motor vehicle equipment also includes any system, subassembly, 
or component received by an allied supplier from an outside supplier for 
incorporation into equipment supplied by the allied supplier to the 
manufacturer with which it is allied.
    (8) Person means an individual, partnership, corporation, business 
trust, or any organized group of persons.
    (9) Ultimate purchaser means with respect to any new passenger motor 
vehicle, the first person, other than a dealer purchasing in its 
capacity as a dealer, who in good faith purchases such new passenger 
motor vehicle for purposes other than resale.

[59 FR 37330, July 21, 1994, as amended at 64 FR 40780, July 28, 1999]



Sec.  583.5  Label requirements.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (f) and (g) of this section, 
each manufacturer of new passenger motor vehicles shall cause to be 
affixed to each passenger motor vehicle manufactured on or after October 
1, 1994, a label that provides the following information:
    (1) U.S./Canadian parts content. The overall percentage, by value, 
of the passenger motor vehicle equipment that was installed on vehicles 
within the carline of which the vehicle is part, and that originated in 
the United States and/or Canada (the procedure for determining U.S./
Canadian Parts Content is set forth in Sec.  583.6);
    (2) Major sources of foreign parts content. The names of any 
countries other than the United States and Canada which contributed at 
least 15 percent of the average overall percentage, by value, of the 
passenger motor vehicle equipment installed on vehicles within the 
carline of which the vehicle is part, and the percentages attributable 
to each such country (if there are more than two such countries, the 
manufacturer need only provide the information for the two countries 
with the highest percentages; the procedure for determining major 
foreign sources of passenger motor vehicle equipment is set forth in 
Sec.  583.7);
    (3) Final assembly point. The city, state (in the case of vehicles 
assembled in the United States), and country of the final assembly point 
of the passenger motor vehicle;
    (4) Country of origin for the engine. The country of origin of the 
passenger motor vehicle's engine (the procedure for making this country 
of origin determination is set forth in Sec.  583.8);
    (5) Country of origin for the transmission. The country of origin of 
the passenger motor vehicle's transmission (the procedure for making 
this country of origin determination is set forth in Sec.  583.8);
    (6) Explanatory note. A statement which explains that parts content 
does not include final assembly, distribution, or other non-parts costs.
    (b) Except as provided in paragraphs (e), (f) and (g) of this 
section, the label required under paragraph (a) of this section shall 
read as follows, with the specified information inserted in the places 
indicated (except that if there are no major sources of foreign parts 
content, omit the section ``Major Sources of Foreign Parts Content''):

                        Parts Content Information

    For vehicles in this carline:

U.S./Canadian Parts Content: (insert number) %
Major Sources of Foreign Parts Content:
    (Name of country with highest percentage): (insert number) %
    (Name of country with second highest percentage): (insert number) %


[[Page 272]]


    Note: Parts content does not include final assembly, distribution, 
or other non-parts costs.

    For this vehicle:

Final Assembly Point: (city, state, country)
Country of Origin:
Engine: (name of country)
Transmission: (name of country)

    (c) The percentages required to be provided under paragraph (a) of 
this section may be rounded by the manufacturer to the nearest 5 
percent.
    (d) The label required by paragraph (a) of this section shall:
    (1) Be placed in a prominent location on each vehicle where it can 
be read from the exterior of the vehicle with the doors closed, and may 
be either part of the Monroney price information label required by 15 
U.S.C. 1232, part of the fuel economy label required by 15 U.S.C. 2006, 
or a separate label. A separate label may include other consumer 
information.
    (2)(i) Be printed in letters that have a color that contrasts with 
the background of the label; and
    (ii) Have the information required by paragraphs (a)(1) through (5) 
of this section vertically centered on the label in boldface capital 
letters and numerals of 12 point size or larger; and
    (iii) Have the information required by paragraph (a)(6) of this 
section in type that is two points smaller than the information required 
by paragraphs (a)(1) through (5) of this section.
    (3) In the case of a label that is included as part of the Monroney 
price information label or fuel economy label, or a separate label that 
includes other consumer information, be separated from all other 
information on those labels by a solid line that is a minimum of three 
points in width.
    (4) The information required by paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of 
this section shall be immediately preceded by the words, ``PARTS CONTENT 
INFORMATION,'' in boldface, capital letters that are 12 point size or 
larger.
    (e) Carlines assembled in the U.S./Canada and in one or more other 
countries. (1) If a carline is assembled in the U.S. and/or Canada, and 
in one or more other countries, the manufacturer may, at its option, add 
the following additional information at the end of the explanatory note 
specified in (a)(6), with the specified information inserted in the 
places indicated:

    This carline is assembled in the U.S. and/or Canada, and in [insert 
name of each other country]. The U.S./Canadian parts content for the 
portion of the carline assembled in [insert name of country, treating 
the U.S. and Canada together, i.e., U.S./Canada] is [----]%.

    (2) A manufacturer selecting this option shall divide the carline 
for purposes of this additional information into the following portions: 
the portion assembled in the U.S./Canada and the portions assembled in 
each other country.
    (3) A manufacturer selecting this option for a particular carline 
shall provide the specified additional information on the labels of all 
vehicles within the carline, providing the U.S./Canadian content that 
corresponds to the U.S./Canadian content of the manufacturing location 
shown as the final assembly point (with all U.S. and Canadian locations 
considered as a single assembly point) on the label.
    (f) A final stage manufacturer of vehicles assembled in multiple 
stages need not provide the U.S./Canadian Parts Content or Major Foreign 
Sources items of the label otherwise required under paragraphs (a)(1) 
and (2) of this section.
    (g) A manufacturer that produces a total of fewer than 1000 
passenger motor vehicles in a model year need not provide the U.S./
Canadian Parts Content or Major Foreign Sources items of the label 
otherwise required under paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section.
    (h) Requests for information and certifications relevant to 
information on the label. (1) Each manufacturer and allied supplier 
shall request its suppliers to provide directly to it the information 
and certifications specified by this part which are necessary for the 
manufacturer/allied supplier to carry out its responsibilities under 
this part. The information shall be requested sufficiently early to 
enable the manufacturer to meet the timing requirements specified by 
this part.
    (2) For requests made by manufacturers or allied suppliers to 
outside suppliers:

[[Page 273]]

    (i) The requester shall indicate that the request is being made 
pursuant to 49 CFR part 583, and that the regulation is administered by 
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration;
    (ii) The requester shall indicate that 49 CFR part 583 requires 
outside suppliers to provide specified information upon the request of a 
manufacturer or allied supplier to which it supplies passenger motor 
vehicle equipment and that, to the best of the requester's knowledge, 
the outside supplier is required to provide the requested information;
    (iii) If any information other than that required by 49 CFR part 583 
is requested, the requester shall indicate which information is required 
by 49 CFR part 583 and which is not;
    (iv) The requester shall indicate that 49 CFR part 583 specifies 
that while information may be requested by an earlier date, the outside 
supplier is not required to provide the information until the date 
specified by the requester or the date 45 days after receipt of the 
request, whichever is later.
    (i) Carlines assembled in more than one assembly plant. (1) If a 
carline is assembled in more than one assembly plant, the manufacturer 
may, at its option, add the following additional information at the end 
of the explanatory note specified in paragraph (a)(6) of this section, 
with the specified information inserted in the places indicated:

    Two or more assembly plants produce the vehicles in this carline. 
The vehicles assembled at the plant where this vehicle was assembled 
have a U.S./Canadian parts content of [--]%.

    (2) A manufacturer selecting this option shall divide the carline 
for purposes of this additional information into portions representing 
each assembly plant.
    (3) A manufacturer selecting this option for a particular carline 
shall provide the specified additional information on the labels of all 
vehicles within the carline.

[59 FR 37330, July 21, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 14229, Mar. 16, 1995; 
60 FR 47893, Sept. 15, 1995; 64 FR 40780, July 28, 1999]



Sec.  583.6  Procedure for determining U.S./Canadian parts content.

    (a) Each manufacturer, except as specified in Sec.  583.5 (f) and 
(g), shall determine the percentage U.S./Canadian Parts Content for each 
carline on a model year basis. This determination shall be made before 
the beginning of each model year. Items of equipment produced at the 
final assembly point (but not as part of final assembly) are treated in 
the same manner as if they were supplied by an allied supplier. All 
value otherwise added at the final assembly point and beyond, including 
all final assembly costs, is excluded from the calculation of U.S./
Canadian parts content. The country of origin of nuts, bolts, clips, 
screws, pins, braces, gasoline, oil, blackout, phosphate rinse, 
windshield washer fluid, fasteners, tire assembly fluid, rivets, 
adhesives, grommets, and wheel weights, used in final assembly of the 
vehicle, is considered to be the country where final assembly of the 
vehicle takes place.
    (b) Determining the value of items of equipment. (1) For items of 
equipment received at the final assembly point, the value is the price 
paid by the manufacturer for the equipment as delivered to the final 
assembly point.
    (2) For items of equipment produced at the final assembly point (but 
not as part of final assembly), the value is the fair market price that 
a manufacturer of similar size and location would pay a supplier for 
such equipment.
    (3) For items of equipment received at the factory or plant of an 
allied supplier, the value is the price paid by the allied supplier for 
the equipment as delivered to its factory or plant.
    (c) Determining the U.S./Canadian percentage of the value of items 
of equipment. (1) Equipment supplied by an outside supplier to a 
manufacturer or allied supplier is considered:
    (i) 100 percent U.S./Canadian, if 70 percent or more of its value is 
added in the United States and/or Canada; and
    (ii) To otherwise have the actual percent of its value added in the 
United States and/or Canada, rounded to the nearest five percent.
    (2) The extent to which an item of equipment supplied by an allied 
supplier is considered U.S./Canadian is determined by dividing the value 
added

[[Page 274]]

in the United States and/or Canada by the total value of the equipment. 
The resulting number is multiplied by 100 to determine the percentage 
U.S./Canadian content of the equipment.
    (3) In determining the value added in the United States and/or 
Canada of equipment supplied by an allied supplier, any equipment that 
is delivered to the allied supplier by an outside supplier and is 
incorporated into the allied supplier's equipment, is considered:
    (i) 100 percent U.S./Canadian, if at least 70 percent of its value 
is added in the United States and/or Canada; and
    (ii) To otherwise have the actual percent of its value added in the 
United States and/or Canada, rounded to the nearest five percent.
    (4)(i) Value added in the United States and/or Canada by an allied 
supplier or outside supplier includes--
    (A) The value added in the U.S. and/or Canada for materials used by 
the supplier, determined according to (4)(ii) for outside suppliers and 
(4)(iii) for allied suppliers, plus,
    (B) For passenger motor vehicle equipment assembled or produced in 
the U.S. or Canada, the value of the difference between the price paid 
by the manufacturer or allied supplier for the equipment, as delivered 
to its factory or plant, and the total value of the materials in the 
equipment.
    (ii) Outside suppliers of passenger motor vehicle equipment will 
determine the value added in the U.S. and/or Canada for materials in the 
equipment as specified in paragraphs (A) and (B).
    (A)(1) For any material used by the supplier which was produced or 
assembled in the U.S. or Canada, the supplier will subtract from the 
total value of the material any value that was not added in the U.S. 
and/or Canada. The determination of the value that was not added in the 
U.S. and/or Canada shall be a good faith estimate based on information 
that is available to the supplier, e.g., information in its records, 
information it can obtain from its suppliers, the supplier's knowledge 
of manufacturing processes, etc.
    (2) The supplier shall consider the amount of value added and the 
location in which that value was added--
    (i) At each earlier stage, counting from the time of receipt of a 
material by the supplier, back to and including the two closest stages 
each of which represented a substantial transformation into a new and 
different product with a different name, character and use.
    (ii) The value of materials used to produce a product in the 
earliest of these two substantial transformation stages shall be treated 
as value added in the country in which that stage occurred.
    (B) For any material used by the supplier which was imported into 
the United States or Canada from a third country, the value added in the 
United States and/or Canada is presumed to be zero. However, if 
documentation is available to the supplier which identifies value added 
in the United States and/or Canada for that material (determined 
according to the principles set forth in (A), such value added in the 
United States and/or Canada is counted.
    (iii) Allied suppliers of passenger motor vehicle equipment shall 
determine the value that is added in the U.S. and/or Canada for 
materials in the equipment in accordance with (c)(3).
    (iv) For the minor items listed in the Sec.  583.4 definition of 
``passenger motor vehicle equipment'' as being excluded from that term, 
outside and allied suppliers may, to the extent that they incorporate 
such items into their equipment, treat the cost of the minor items as 
value added in the country of assembly.
    (v) For passenger motor vehicle equipment which is imported into the 
territorial boundaries of the United States or Canada from a third 
country, the value added in the United States and/or Canada is presumed 
to be zero. However, if documentation is available to the supplier which 
identifies value added in the United States and/or Canada for that 
equipment (determined according to the principles set forth in the rest 
of (c)(4)), such value added in the United States and/or Canada is 
counted.
    (vi) The payment of duty does not result in value added in the 
United States and/or Canada.
    (5) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(6) of this section, if a 
manufacturer

[[Page 275]]

or allied supplier does not receive information from one or more of its 
suppliers concerning the U.S./Canadian content of particular equipment, 
the U.S./Canadian content of that equipment is considered zero. This 
provision does not affect the obligation of manufacturers and allied 
suppliers to request this information from their suppliers or the 
obligation of the suppliers to provide the information.
    (6) If a manufacturer or allied supplier requests information in a 
timely manner from one or more of its outside suppliers concerning the 
U.S./Canadian content of particular equipment, but does not receive that 
information despite a good faith effort to obtain it, the manufacturer 
or allied supplier may make its own good faith value added 
determinations, subject to the following provisions:
    (i) The manufacturer or allied supplier shall make the same value 
added determinations as would be made by the outside supplier;
    (ii) The manufacturer or allied supplier shall consider the amount 
of value added and the location in which the value was added for all of 
the stages that the outside supplier would be required to consider;
    (iii) The manufacturer or allied supplier may determine that 
particular value is added in the United States and/or Canada only if it 
has a good faith basis to make that determination;
    (iv) A manufacturer and its allied suppliers may, on a combined 
basis, make value added determinations for no more than 10 percent, by 
value, of a carline's total parts content from outside suppliers;
    (v) Value added determinations made by a manufacturer or allied 
supplier under this paragraph shall have the same effect as if they were 
made by the outside supplier;
    (vi) This provision does not affect the obligation of outside 
suppliers to provide the requested information.
    (d) Determination of the U.S./Canadian percentage of the total value 
of a carline's passenger motor vehicle equipment. The percentage of the 
value of a carline's passenger motor vehicle equipment that is U.S./
Canadian is determined by--
    (1) Adding the total value of all of the equipment (regardless of 
country of origin) expected to be installed in that carline during the 
next model year;
    (2) Dividing the value of the U.S./Canadian content of such 
equipment by the amount calculated in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, 
and
    (3) Multiplying the resulting number by 100.
    (e) Alternative calculation procedures. (1) A manufacturer may 
submit a petition to use calculation procedures based on representative 
or statistical sampling, as an alternative to the calculation procedures 
specified in this section to determine U.S./Canadian parts content and 
major sources of foreign parts content.
    (2) Each petition must--
    (i) Be submitted at least 120 days before the manufacturer would use 
the alternative procedure;
    (ii) Be written in the English language;
    (iii) Be submitted in three copies to: Administrator, National 
Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., 
Washington, DC 20590;
    (iv) State the full name and address of the manufacturer;
    (v) Set forth in full the data, views and arguments of the 
manufacturer that would support granting the petition, including--
    (A) the alternative procedure, and
    (B) analysis demonstrating that the alternative procedure will 
produce substantially equivalent results to the procedure set forth in 
this section;
    (vi) Specify and segregate any part of the information and data 
submitted in the petition that is requested to be withheld from public 
disclosure in accordance with part 512 of this chapter (the basic 
alternative procedure and basic supporting analysis must be provided as 
public information, but confidential business information may also be 
used in support of the petition).
    (3) The NHTSA publishes in the Federal Register, affording 
opportunity for comment, a notice of each petition containing the 
information required by this part. A copy of the petition is placed in 
the public docket. However, if NHTSA finds that a petition does not 
contain the information required by this part, it so informs the 
petitioner,

[[Page 276]]

pointing out the areas of insufficiency and stating that the petition 
will not receive further consideration until the required information is 
submitted.
    (4) If the Administrator determines that the petition does not 
contain adequate justification, he or she denies it and notifies the 
petitioner in writing, explaining the reasons for the denial. A copy of 
the letter is placed in the public docket.
    (5) If the Administrator determines that the petition contains 
adequate justification, he or she grants it, and notifies the petitioner 
in writing. A copy of the letter is placed in the public docket.
    (6) The Administrator may attach such conditions as he or she deems 
appropriate to a grant of a petition, which the manufacturer must follow 
in order to use the alternative procedure.

[60 FR 47894, Sept. 15, 1995; as amended at 61 FR 46390, Sept. 3, 1996; 
62 FR 33761, June 23, 1997; 64 FR 40780, July 28, 1999]



Sec.  583.7  Procedure for determining major foreign sources of 
passenger motor vehicle equipment.

    (a) Each manufacturer, except as specified in Sec.  583.5(f) and 
(g), shall determine the countries, if any, which are major foreign 
sources of passenger motor vehicle equipment and the percentages 
attributable to each such country for each carline on a model year 
basis, before the beginning of each model year. The manufacturer need 
only determine this information for the two such countries with the 
highest percentages. Items of equipment produced at the final assembly 
point (but not as part of final assembly) are treated in the same manner 
as if they were supplied by an allied supplier. In making determinations 
under this section, the U.S. and Canada are treated together as if they 
were one (non-foreign) country. The country of origin of nuts, bolts, 
clips, screws, pins, braces, gasoline, oil, blackout, phosphate rinse, 
windshield washer fluid, fasteners, tire assembly fluid, rivets, 
adhesives, grommets, and wheel weights, used in final assembly of the 
vehicle, is considered to be the country where final assembly of the 
vehicle takes place.
    (b) Determining the value of items of equipment. The value of each 
item of equipment is determined in the manner specified in Sec.  
583.6(b).
    (c) Determining the country of origin of items of equipment. (1) 
Except as provided in (c)(2), the country of origin of each item is the 
country which contributes the greatest amount of value added to that 
item (treating the U.S. and Canada together).
    (2) Instead of making country of origin determinations in the manner 
specified in (c)(1), a manufacturer may, at its option, use any other 
methodology that is used for customs purposes (U.S. or foreign), so long 
as a consistent methodology is employed for all items of equipment, and 
the U.S. and Canada are treated together.
    (d) Determination of the percentage of the total value of a 
carline's passenger motor vehicle equipment which is attributable to 
individual countries other than the U.S. and Canada. The percentage of 
the value of a carline's passenger motor vehicle equipment that is 
attributable to each country other than the U.S. and Canada is 
determined on a model year basis by--
    (1) Adding up the total value of all of the passenger motor vehicle 
equipment (regardless of country of origin) expected to be installed in 
that carline during the next model year;
    (2) Adding up the value of such equipment which originated in each 
country other than the U.S. or Canada;
    (3) Dividing the amount calculated in paragraph (d)(2) of this 
section for each country by the amount calculated in paragraph (d)(1) of 
this section, and multiplying each result by 100.
    (e) A country is a major foreign source of passenger motor vehicle 
equipment for a carline only if the country is one other than the U.S. 
or Canada and if 15 or more percent of the total value of the carline's 
passenger motor vehicle equipment is attributable to the country.
    (f) In determining the percentage of the total value of a carline's 
passenger motor vehicle equipment which is attributable to individual 
countries other than the U.S. and Canada, no value which is counted as 
U.S./Canadian parts content is also counted as being

[[Page 277]]

value which originated in a country other than the U.S. or Canada.

[59 FR 37330, July 21, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 47895, Sept. 15, 1995; 
64 FR 40781, July 28, 1999]



Sec.  583.8  Procedure for determining country of origin for engines 
and transmissions (for purposes of determining the information 
specified by Sec. Sec.  583.5(a)(4) and 583.5(a)(5) only).

    (a) Each supplier of an engine or transmission shall determine the 
country of origin once a year for each engine and transmission. The 
origin of engines shall be calculated for engines of the same 
displacement produced at the same plant. The origin for transmissions 
shall be calculated for transmissions of the same type produced at the 
same plant. Transmissions are of the same type if they have the same 
attributes including: Drive line application, number of forward gears, 
controls, and layout. The U.S. and Canada are treated separately in 
making such determination.
    (b) The value of an engine or transmission is determined by first 
adding the prices paid by the manufacturer of the engine/transmission 
for each component comprising the engine/transmission, as delivered to 
the assembly plant of the engine/transmission, and the fair market value 
of each individual part produced at the plant. The assembly and labor 
costs incurred for the final assembly of the engine/transmission are 
then added to determine the value of the engine or transmission.
    (c) Determining the country of origin of components. (1) Except as 
provided in (c)(2), the country of origin of each item of equipment is 
the country which contributes the greatest amount of value added to that 
item (the U.S. and Canada are treated separately).
    (2) Instead of making country of origin determinations in the manner 
specified in (c)(1), a manufacturer may, at its option, use any other 
methodology that is used for customs purposes (U.S. or foreign), so long 
as a consistent methodology is employed for all components.
    (d) Determination of the total value of an engine/transmission which 
is attributable to individual countries. The value of an engine/
transmission that is attributable to each country is determined by 
adding the total value of all of the components installed in that 
engine/transmission which originated in that country. For the country 
where final assembly of the engine/transmission takes place, the 
assembly and labor costs incurred for such final assembly are also 
added.
    (e) The country of origin of each engine and the country of origin 
of each transmission is the country which contributes the greatest 
amount of value added to that item of equipment (the U.S. and Canada are 
treated separately).

[59 FR 37330, July 21, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 47895, Sept. 15, 1995; 
64 FR 40781, July 28, 1999]



Sec.  583.9  Attachment and maintenance of label.

    (a) Attachment of the label. (1) Except as provided in (a)(2), each 
manufacturer shall cause the label required by Sec.  583.5 to be affixed 
to each new passenger motor vehicle before the vehicle is delivered to a 
dealer.
    (2) For vehicles which are delivered to a dealer prior to the 
introduction date for the model in question, each manufacturer shall 
cause the label required by Sec.  583.5 to be affixed to the vehicle 
prior to such introduction date.
    (b) Maintenance of the label. (1) Each dealer shall cause to be 
maintained each label on the new passenger motor vehicles it receives 
until after such time as a vehicle has been sold to a consumer for 
purposes other than resale.
    (2) If the manufacturer of a passenger motor vehicle provides a 
substitute label containing corrected information, the dealer shall 
replace the original label with the substitute label.
    (3) If a label becomes damaged so that the information it contains 
is not legible, the dealer shall replace it with an identical, undamaged 
label.



Sec.  583.10  Outside suppliers of passenger motor vehicle equipment.

    (a) For each unique type of passenger motor vehicle equipment for 
which a

[[Page 278]]

manufacturer or allied supplier requests information, the outside 
supplier shall provide the manufacturer/allied supplier with a 
certificate providing the following information:
    (1) The name and address of the supplier;
    (2) A description of the unique type of equipment;
    (3) The price of the equipment to the manufacturer or allied 
supplier;
    (4) A statement that the equipment has, or does not have, at least 
70 percent of its value added in the United States and Canada, 
determined under Sec.  583.6(c);
    (5) For equipment which has less than 70 percent of its value added 
in the United States and Canada,
    (i) The country of origin of the equipment, determined under Sec.  
583.7(c); and
    (ii) The percent of its value added in the United States and Canada, 
to the nearest 5 percent, determined under Sec.  583.6(c).
    (6) For equipment that may be used in an engine or transmission, the 
country of origin of the equipment, determined under Sec.  583.8(c);
    (7) A certification for the information, pursuant to Sec.  583.13, 
and the date (at least giving the month and year) of the certification.
    (8) A single certificate may cover multiple items of equipment.
    (b) The information and certification required by paragraph (a) of 
this section shall be provided to the manufacturer or allied supplier no 
later than 45 days after receipt of the request, or the date specified 
by the manufacturer/allied supplier, whichever is later. (A manufacturer 
or allied supplier may request that the outside supplier voluntarily 
provide the information and certification at an earlier date.)
    (c)(1) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the 
information provided in the certificate shall be the supplier's best 
estimates of price, content, and country of origin for the unique type 
of equipment expected to be supplied during the 12 month period 
beginning on the first July 1 after receipt of the request. If the 
unique type of equipment supplied by the supplier is expected to vary 
with respect to price, content, and country of origin during that 
period, the supplier shall base its estimates on expected averages for 
these factors.
    (2) The 12 month period specified in (c)(1) may be varied in time 
and length by the manufacturer or allied supplier if it determines that 
the alteration is not likely to result in less accurate information 
being provided to consumers on the label required by this part.
    (d) For outside suppliers of engines and transmissions, the 
information and certification required by this section is in addition to 
that required by Sec.  583.12.

[59 FR 37330, July 21, 1994, as amended at 64 FR 40781, July 28, 1999]



Sec.  583.11  Allied suppliers of passenger motor vehicle equipment.

    (a) For each unique type of passenger motor vehicle equipment which 
an allied supplier supplies to the manufacturer with which it is allied, 
the allied supplier shall provide the manufacturer with a certificate 
providing the following information:
    (1) The name and address of the supplier;
    (2) A description of the unique type of equipment;
    (3) The price of the equipment to the manufacturer;
    (4) The percentage U.S./Canadian content of the equipment, 
determined under Sec.  583.6(c);
    (5) The country of origin of the equipment, determined under Sec.  
583.7(c);
    (6) For equipment that may be used in an engine or transmission, the 
country of origin of the equipment, determined under Sec.  583.8(c);
    (7) A certification for the information, pursuant to Sec.  583.13, 
and the date (at least giving the month and year) of the certification.
    (8) A single certificate may cover multiple items of equipment.
    (b)(1) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, the 
information provided in the certificate shall be the supplier's best 
estimates of price, content, and country of origin for the unique type 
of equipment expected to be supplied during the 12 month period 
beginning on the first July 1 after receipt of the request. If the 
unique type of equipment supplied by the supplier is expected to vary 
with respect to price, content, and country

[[Page 279]]

of origin during that period, the supplier shall base its estimates on 
expected averages for these factors.
    (2) The 12 month period specified in (b)(1) may be varied in time 
and length by the manufacturer if it determines that the alteration is 
not likely to result in less accurate information being provided to 
consumers on the label required by this part.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) For allied suppliers of engines and transmissions, the 
information and certification required by this section is in addition to 
that required by Sec.  583.12.



Sec.  583.12  Suppliers of engines and transmissions.

    (a) For each engine or transmission for which a manufacturer or 
allied supplier requests information, the supplier of such engine or 
transmission shall provide the manufacturer or allied supplier with a 
certificate providing the following information:
    (1) The name and address of the supplier;
    (2) A description of the engine or transmission;
    (3) The country of origin of the engine or transmission, determined 
under Sec.  583.8;
    (4) A certification for the information, pursuant to Sec.  583.13, 
and the date (at least giving the month and year) of the certification.
    (b) The information provided in the certificate shall be the 
supplier's best estimate of country of origin for the unique type of 
engine or transmission. If the unique type of equipment used in the 
engine or transmission is expected to vary with respect to price, 
content, and country of origin during that period, the supplier shall 
base its country of origin determination on expected averages for these 
factors.
    (c) The information and certification required by paragraph (a) of 
this section shall be provided by outside suppliers to the manufacturer 
or allied supplier no later than 45 days after receipt of the request, 
or the date specified by the manufacturer/allied supplier, whichever is 
later. (A manufacturer or allied supplier may request that the outside 
supplier voluntarily provide the information and certification at an 
earlier date.)
    (d) In the event that, during a model year, a supplier of engines or 
transmissions produces an engine of a new displacement or transmission 
of a new type or produces the same engine displacement or transmission 
in a different plant, the supplier shall notify the manufacturer of the 
origin of the new engine or transmission prior to shipment of the first 
engine or transmission that will be installed in a passenger motor 
vehicle intended for public sale.
    (e) A single certificate may cover multiple engines or 
transmissions. If a certificate provided in advance of the delivery of 
an engine or transmission becomes inaccurate because of changed 
circumstances, a corrected certificate shall be provided no later than 
the time of delivery of the engine or transmission.
    (f) For suppliers of engines and transmissions, the information and 
certification required by this section is in addition to that required 
by Sec. Sec.  583.10 and 583.11.



Sec.  583.13  Supplier certification and certificates.

    Each supplier shall certify the information on each certificate 
provided under Sec. Sec.  583.10, 583.11, and 583.12 by including the 
following phrase on the certificate: ``This information is certified in 
accordance with DOT regulations.'' The phrase shall immediately precede 
the other information on the certificate. The certificate may be 
submitted to a manufacturer or allied supplier in any mode (e.g., paper, 
electronic) provided the mode contains all information in the 
certificate.



Sec.  583.14  Currency conversion rate.

    For purposes of calculations of content value under this part, 
manufacturers and suppliers shall calculate exchange rates using the 
methodology set forth in this section.
    (a) Manufacturers. (1) Unless a manufacturer has had a petition 
approved by the Environmental Protection Agency under 40 CFR 600.511-
80(b)(1), for all calculations made by the manufacturer as a basis for 
the information provided on the label required by Sec.  583.5, 
manufacturers shall take the mean of the exchange rates in effect at the 
end of

[[Page 280]]

each quarter set by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for twelve 
calendar quarters prior to and including the calendar quarter ending one 
year prior to the date that the manufacturer submits information for a 
carline under Sec.  583.17.
    (2) A manufacturer that has had a petition approved by the 
Environmental Protection Agency under 40 CFR 600.511-80(b)(1), which 
provides for a different method of determining exchange rates, shall use 
the same method as a basis for the information provided on the label 
required by Sec.  583.5, and shall inform the Administrator of the 
exchange rate method it is using at the time the information required by 
Sec.  583.5 is submitted.
    (b) Suppliers. For all calculations underlying the information 
provided on each certificate required by Sec. Sec.  583.10, 583.11, and 
583.12, suppliers shall take the mean of the exchange rates in effect at 
the end of each quarter set by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for 
twelve calendar quarters prior to and including the calendar quarter 
ending one year prior to the date of such certificate.



Sec.  583.15  Joint ownership.

    (a) A carline jointly owned and/or produced by more than one 
manufacturer shall be attributed to the single manufacturer that markets 
the carline, subject to paragraph (b) of this section.
    (b)(1) The joint owners of a carline may designate, by written 
agreement, the manufacturer of record of that carline.
    (2) The manufacturer of record is responsible for compliance with 
all the manufacturer requirements in this part with respect to the 
jointly owned carline. However, carline determinations must be 
consistent with Sec.  583.4(3).
    (3) A designation under this section of a manufacturer of record is 
effective beginning with the first model year beginning after the 
conclusion of the written agreement, or, if the joint owners so agree in 
writing, with a specified later model year.
    (4) Each manufacturer of record shall send to the Administrator 
written notification of its designation as such not later than 30 days 
after the conclusion of the written agreement, and state the carline of 
which it is considered the manufacturer, the names of the other persons 
which jointly own the carline, and the name of the person, if any, 
formerly considered to be the manufacturer of record.
    (5) The joint owners of a carline may change the manufacturer of 
record for a future model year by concluding a written agreement before 
the beginning of that model year.
    (6) The allied suppliers for the jointly owned carline are the 
suppliers that are wholly owned by any of the manufacturers of the 
jointly owned carline.



Sec.  583.16  Maintenance of records.

    (a) General. Each manufacturer of new passenger motor vehicles and 
each supplier of passenger motor vehicle equipment subject to this part 
shall establish, maintain, and retain in organized and indexed form, 
records as specified in this section. All records, including the 
certificates provided by suppliers, may be stored in any mode provided 
the mode contains all information in the records and certificates.
    (b) Manufacturers. Each manufacturer shall maintain all records 
which provide a basis for the information it provides on the labels 
required by Sec.  583.5, including, but not limited to, certificates 
from suppliers, parts lists, calculations of content, and relevant 
contracts with suppliers. The records shall be maintained for five years 
after December 31 of the model year to which the records relate.
    (c) Suppliers. Each supplier shall maintain all records which form a 
basis for the information it provides on the certificates required by 
Sec. Sec.  583.10, 583.11, and 583.12, including, but not limited to, 
calculations of content, certificates from suppliers, and relevant 
contracts with manufacturers and suppliers. The records shall be 
maintained for six years after December 31 of the calendar year set 
forth in the date of each certificate.



Sec.  583.17  Reporting.

    For each model year, manufacturers shall submit to the Administrator 
3 copies of the information required by Sec.  583.5(a) to be placed on a 
label for each carline. The information for each

[[Page 281]]

carline shall be submitted not later than the date the first vehicle of 
the carline is offered for sale to the ultimate purchaser.



PART 585_PHASE-IN REPORTING REQUIREMENTS--Table of Contents




                            Subpart A_General

Sec.
585.1 Definitions.
585.2 Phase-in reports.
585.3 Vehicles produced by more than one manufacturer.
585.4 Petitions to extend period to file report.

       Subpart B_Advanced Air Bag Phase-in Reporting Requirements

585.11 Scope.
585.12 Purpose.
585.13 Applicability.
585.14 Definitions.
585.15 Reporting requirements.
585.16 Records.

Subpart C_Rear Inboard Lap/Shoulder Belt Phase-in Reporting Requirements

585.21 Scope.
585.22 Purpose.
585.23 Applicability.
585.24 Reporting requirements.
585.25 Records.

 Subpart D_Appendix A	1 of FMVSS No. 208 Phase-in Reporting Requirements

585.31 Scope.
585.32 Purpose.
585.33 Applicability.
585.34 Definitions.
585.35 Response to inquiries.
585.36 Reporting requirements.
585.37 Records.

     Subpart E_Fuel System Integrity Phase-in Reporting Requirements

585.41 Scope.
585.42 Purpose.
585.43 Applicability.
585.44 Response to inquiries.
585.45 Reporting requirements.
585.46 Records.

Subpart F_Tires for Motor Vehicles with a GVWR of 10,000 Pounds or Less 
                     Phase-in Reporting Requirements

585.51 Scope.
585.52 Purpose.
585.53 Applicability.
585.54 Response to inquiries.
585.55 Reporting requirements.
585.56 Records.

      Subpart G_Tire Pressure Monitoring System Phase-in Reporting 
                              Requirements

585.61 Scope.
585.62 Purpose.
585.63 Applicability.
585.64 Definitions.
585.65 Response to inquiries.
585.66 Reporting requirements.
585.67 Records.
585.68 Petition to extend period to file report.

    Subpart H_Side Impact Protection Phase-in Reporting Requirements

585.71 Scope.
585.72 Purpose.
585.73 Applicability.
585.74 Definitions.
585.75 Response to inquiries.
585.76 Reporting requirements.
585.77 Records.

    Subpart I_Electronic Stability Control System Phase-In Reporting 
                              Requirements

585.81 Scope.
585.82 Purpose.
585.83 Applicability.
585.84 Definitions.
585.85 Response to inquiries.
585.86 Reporting requirements.
585.87 Records.
585.88 Petition to extend period to file report.

        Subpart J_Head Restraints Phase-in Reporting Requirements

585.91 Scope.
585.92 Purpose.
585.93 Applicability.
585.94 Definitions.
585.95 Response to inquiries.
585.96 Reporting requirements.
585.97 Records.

     Subpart L_Roof Crush Resistance Phase-in Reporting Requirements

585.111 Scope.
585.112 Purpose.
585.113 Applicability.
585.114 Definitions.
585.115 Response to inquiries.
585.116 Reporting requirements.
585.117 Records.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30117, and 30166; delegation 
of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.

    Source: 69 FR 70916, Dec. 8, 2004, unless otherwise noted.

[[Page 282]]



                            Subpart A_General



Sec.  585.1  Definitions.

    (a) All terms defined in 49 U.S.C. 30102 are used in accordance with 
their statutory meaning.
    (b) The terms bus, gross vehicle weight rating or GVWR, motor 
vehicle, multipurpose passenger vehicle, passenger car, and truck are 
used as defined in Sec.  571.3 of this chapter.
    (c) Production year means the 12-month period between September 1 of 
one year and August 31 of the following year, inclusive, unless 
otherwise specified.



Sec.  585.2  Phase-in reports.

    Each report submitted to NHTSA under this part shall:
    (a) Identify the manufacturer;
    (b) State the full name, title, and address of the official 
responsible for preparing the report;
    (c) Identify the production year being reported on;
    (d) Contain a statement regarding whether or not the manufacturer 
complied with the requirements of the Federal motor vehicle safety 
standard addressed by the report, for the period covered by the report, 
and the basis for that statement;
    (e) Be written in the English language; and
    (f) Be submitted to: Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.



Sec.  585.3  Vehicles produced by more than one manufacturer.

    Each manufacturer whose reporting of information is affected by one 
or more of the express written contracts permitted by a Federal Motor 
Vehicle Safety Standard subject to the reporting requirements of this 
part shall:
    (a) Report the existence of each contract, including the names of 
all parties to the contract and explain how the contract affects the 
report being submitted.
    (b) Report the number of vehicles covered by each contract in each 
production year.



Sec.  585.4  Petitions to extend period to file report.

    A petition for extension of the time to submit a report required 
under this part shall be received not later than 15 days before the 
report is due. The petition shall be submitted to: Administrator, 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., 
Washington, DC 20590. The filing of a petition does not automatically 
extend the time for filing a report. A petition will be granted only if 
the petitioner shows good cause for the extension, and if the extension 
is consistent with the public interest.



       Subpart B_Advanced Air Bag Phase-in Reporting Requirements



Sec.  585.11  Scope.

    This subpart establishes requirements for manufacturers of passenger 
cars and trucks, buses, and multipurpose passenger vehicles with a GVWR 
of 3,855 kg or less and an unloaded vehicle weight of 2,495 kg or less 
to submit reports, and maintain records related to the reports, 
concerning the number and identification of such vehicles that are 
certified as complying with the advanced air bag requirements of 
Standard No. 208, Occupant crash protection (49 CFR 571.208).



Sec.  585.12  Purpose.

    The purpose of these reporting requirements is to aid the National 
Highway Traffic Safety Administration in determining whether a 
manufacturer has complied with the advanced air bag requirements of 
Standard No. 208 during the phase-ins of those requirements.



Sec.  585.13  Applicability.

    This subpart applies to manufacturers of passenger cars and trucks, 
buses, and multipurpose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of 3,855 kg or 
less and an unloaded vehicle weight of 2,495 kg or less. However, this 
subpart does not apply to any manufacturers whose production consists 
exclusively of walk-in vans, vehicles designed to be sold exclusively to 
the U.S. Postal Service, vehicles manufactured in two or more stages, 
and vehicles that are altered

[[Page 283]]

after previously having been certified in accordance with part 567 of 
this chapter. In addition, this subpart does not apply to manufacturers 
whose production of motor vehicles for the United States market is less 
than 5,000 vehicles in a production year.



Sec.  585.14  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart,
    (a) Phase one of the advanced air bag requirements of Standard No. 
208 refers to the requirements set forth in S14.1, S14.2, S14.5.1(a), 
S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, S21, S23, and S25 of Federal Motor 
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 208, 49 CFR 571.208.
    (b) Phase two of the advanced air bag reporting requirements of 
Standard No. 208 refers to the requirements set forth in S14.3, S14.4, 
S14.5.1(b), S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, S21, S23, and S25 of 
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 208, 49 CFR 571.208.
    (c) Phase three of the advanced air bag reporting requirements of 
Standard No. 208 refers to the requirements set forth in S14.6 and S14.7 
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 208, 49 CFR 571.208.
    (d) Vehicles means passenger cars and trucks, buses, and 
multipurpose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of 3,855 kg or less and an 
unloaded vehicle weight of 2,495 kg or less manufactured for sale in the 
United States whose production of motor vehicles for sale in the United 
States is equal to or greater than 5,000 vehicles in a production year, 
and does not mean walk-in vans, vehicles designed to be sold exclusively 
to the U.S. Postal Service, vehicles manufactured in two or more stages, 
and vehicles that are altered after previously having been certified in 
accordance with part 567 of this chapter.

[69 FR 70916, Dec. 8, 2004, as amended at 71 FR 51779, Aug. 31, 2006]



Sec.  585.15  Reporting requirements.

    (a) Advanced credit phase-in reporting requirements. (1) Within 60 
days after the end of production years ending August 31, 2000, August 
31, 2001, August 31, 2002, and August 31, 2003, each manufacturer 
choosing to certify vehicles manufactured during any of those production 
years as complying with phase one of the advanced air bag requirements 
of Standard No. 208 shall submit a report to the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration providing the information specified in 
paragraph (c) of this section and in Sec.  585.2 of this part.
    (2) Within 60 days after the end of the production year ending 
August 31, 2007, each manufacturer choosing to certify vehicles 
manufactured during that production year as complying with phase two of 
the advanced air bag requirements of Standard No. 208 shall submit a 
report to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration providing 
the information specified in paragraph (c) of this section and in Sec.  
585.2 of this part.
    (3) Within 60 days after the end of the production year ending 
August 31, 2009, each manufacturer choosing to certify vehicles 
manufactured during that production year as complying with phase three 
of the advanced air bag requirements of Standard No. 208 shall submit a 
report to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration providing 
the information specified in paragraph (c) of this section and in Sec.  
585.2 of this part.
    (b) Phase-in reporting requirements. (1) Within 60 days after the 
end of the production years ending August 31, 2004, August 31, 2005, and 
August 31, 2006, each manufacturer shall submit a report to the National 
Highway Traffic Safety Administration regarding its compliance with 
phase one of the advanced air bag requirements of Standard No. 208 for 
its vehicles produced in that production year. The report shall provide 
the information specified in paragraph (d) of this section and in Sec.  
585.2 of this part. Each report shall also specify the number of advance 
credit vehicles, if any, which are being applied to the production year 
being reported on.
    (2) Within 60 days after the end of production years ending August 
31, 2008, August 31, 2009, and August 31, 2010, each manufacturer shall 
submit a report to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 
regarding its compliance with phase two of the advanced air bag 
requirements of Standard No. 208 for its vehicles produced in that 
production year. The report shall provide the information specified in 
paragraph (d) of this section and in

[[Page 284]]

Sec.  585.2 of this part. Each report shall also specify the number of 
advance credit vehicles, if any, which are being applied to the 
production year being reported on.
    (3) Within 60 days after the end of the production years ending 
August 31, 2010, August 31, 2011, and August 31, 2012, each manufacturer 
shall submit a report to the National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration regarding its compliance with phase three of the advanced 
air bag requirements of Standard No. 208 for its vehicles produced in 
that production year. The report shall provide the information specified 
in paragraph (d) of this section and in Sec.  585.2 of this part.
    (c) Advanced credit phase-in report content. (1) With respect to the 
reports identified in section 585.15(a)(1), each manufacturer shall 
report for the production year for which the report is filed the number 
of vehicles, by make and model year, that meet the applicable advanced 
air bag requirements of Standard No. 208, and to which advanced air bag 
requirements the vehicles are certified.
    (2) With respect to the report identified in section 585.15(a)(2), 
each manufacturer shall report the number of vehicles, by make and model 
year, that meet the applicable advanced air bag requirements of Standard 
No. 208, and to which the advanced air bag requirements the vehicles are 
certified.
    (3) With respect to the report identified in section 585.15(a)(3), 
each manufacturer shall report the number of vehicles, by make and model 
year, that meet the applicable advanced air bag requirements of Standard 
No. 208, and to which the advanced air bag requirements the vehicles are 
certified.
    (d) Phase-in report content--(1) Basis for phase-in production 
requirements. For production years ending August 31, 2003, August 31, 
2004, August 31, 2005, August 31, 2007, August 31, 2008, August 31, 
2009, August 31, 2010, and August 31, 2011, each manufacturer shall 
provide the number of vehicles manufactured in the current production 
year, or, at the manufacturer's option, for the current production year 
and each of the prior two production years if the manufacturer has 
manufactured vehicles during both of the two production years prior to 
the year for which the report is being submitted.
    (2) Production of complying vehicles. Each manufacturer shall report 
for the production year for which the report is filed the number of 
vehicles, by make and model year, that meet the applicable advanced air 
bag requirements of Standard No. 208, and to which advanced air bag 
requirements the vehicles are certified. Provide this information 
separately for phase two and phase three of the advanced air bag 
reporting requirements.

[69 FR 70916, Dec. 8, 2004, as amended at 71 FR 51779, Aug. 31, 2006; 72 
FR 62142, Nov. 2, 2007]



Sec.  585.16  Records.

    Each manufacturer shall maintain records of the Vehicle 
Identification Number of each vehicle for which information is reported 
under Sec.  585.15(c) until December 31, 2011. Each manufacturer shall 
maintain records of the Vehicle Identification Number of each vehicle 
for which information is reported under Sec.  585.15(d)(2) until 
December 31, 2013.

[72 FR 62142, Nov. 2, 2007]



Subpart C_Rear Inboard Lap/Shoulder Belt Phase-In Reporting Requirements



Sec.  585.21  Scope.

    This subpart establishes requirements for manufacturers of passenger 
cars and for trucks, buses, and multipurpose passenger vehicles with a 
GVWR of 4,536 kg (10,000 lb) or less to submit reports, and maintain 
records related to the reports, concerning the number and identification 
of such vehicles that are certified as complying with the Type 2 seat 
belt requirements for rear seating positions of Standard No. 208, 
Occupant crash protection (49 CFR 571.208).



Sec.  585.22  Purpose.

    The purpose of these reporting requirements is to assist the 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in determining whether a 
manufacturer has complied with the Type 2 seat belt requirements for 
rear seating positions of Standard No. 208.

[[Page 285]]



Sec.  585.23  Applicability.

    This subpart applies to manufacturers of passenger cars and trucks, 
buses, and multipurpose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or 
less. However, this subpart does not apply to any manufacturers whose 
production consists exclusively of walk-in vans, vehicles designed to be 
sold exclusively to the U.S. Postal Service, vehicles manufactured in 
two or more stages, and vehicles that are altered after previously 
having been certified in accordance with part 567 of this chapter. In 
addition, this subpart does not apply to manufacturers that produce 
fewer than 5,000 vehicles annually for sale in the United States.

[72 FR 62142, Nov. 2, 2007]



Sec.  585.24  Reporting requirements.

    (a) Advanced credit phase-in reporting requirements. Within 60 days 
after the end of the production year ending August 31, 2005, each 
manufacturer choosing to certify vehicles manufactured during that 
production year as complying with the Type 2 seat belt for each rear 
designated seating position requirements of Standard No. 208 shall 
submit a report to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 
providing the information specified in paragraph (c) of this section and 
in Sec.  585.2 of this part.
    (b) Phase-in reporting requirements. Within 60 days after the end of 
the production years ending August 31, 2006, and August 31, 2007, each 
manufacturer shall submit a report to the National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration regarding its compliance with the Type 2 seat belt 
for each rear designated seating position requirements of Standard No. 
208 for its vehicles produced in that production year. The report shall 
provide the information specified in paragraph (d) of this section and 
in Sec.  585.2 of this part. Each report shall also specify the number 
of advance credit vehicles, if any, which are being applied to the 
production year being reported on.
    (c) Advanced credit phase-in report content. With respect to the 
reports identified in section 585.24(a), each manufacturer shall report 
for the production year for which the report is filed the number of 
vehicles, by make and model year, that meet the applicable Type 2 seat 
belt for each rear designated seating position requirements of Standard 
No. 208.
    (d) Phase-in report content. (1) Basis for phase-in production 
requirements. For production years ending August 31, 2006, and August 
31, 2007, each manufacturer shall provide the number of vehicles 
manufactured in the current production year, or, at the manufacturer's 
option, for the current production year and each of the prior two 
production years if the manufacturer has manufactured vehicles during 
each production year prior to the year for which the report is being 
submitted.
    (2) Production of complying vehicles. Each manufacturer shall report 
for the production year for which the report is filed the number of 
vehicles, by make and model year, that meet the applicable Type 2 seat 
belt for each rear designated seating position requirements of Standard 
No. 208.



Sec.  585.25  Records.

    Each manufacturer shall maintain records of the Vehicle 
Identification Number of each vehicle for which information is reported 
under Sec.  585.24(c) and (d)(2) until December 31, 2008.



 Subpart D_Appendix A	1 of FMVSS No. 208 Phase-in Reporting Requirements

    Source: 73 FR 66801, Nov. 12, 2008, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  585.31  Scope.

    This part establishes requirements for manufacturers of passenger 
cars, and of trucks, buses and multipurpose passenger vehicles with a 
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 3,856 kilograms (kg) (8,500 pounds 
(lb)) or less, to submit a report, and maintain records related to the 
report, concerning the number of such vehicles that are certified as 
complying with S19, S21, and S23 of FMVSS No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208) when 
using the child restraint systems specified in Appendix A-1 of this 
standard.

[[Page 286]]



Sec.  585.32  Purpose.

    The purpose of these reporting requirements is to assist the 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in determining whether a 
manufacturer has complied with the requirements of Standard No. 208 when 
using the child restraint systems specified in Appendix A-1 of that 
standard.



Sec.  585.33  Applicability.

    This part applies to manufacturers of passenger cars, and of trucks, 
buses and multipurpose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of 3,856 kg (8,500 
lb) or less.



Sec.  585.34  Definitions.

    (a) All terms defined in 49 U.S.C. 30102 are used in their statutory 
meaning.
    (b) Bus, gross vehicle weight rating or GVWR, multipurpose passenger 
vehicle, passenger car, and truck are used as defined in Sec.  571.3 of 
this chapter.
    (c) Production year means the 12-month period between September 1 of 
one year and August 31 of the following year, inclusive.
    (d) Limited line manufacturer means a manufacturer that sells three 
or fewer carlines, as that term is defined in 49 CFR 583.4, in the 
United States during a production year.



Sec.  585.35  Response to inquiries.

    At any time during the production year ending August 31, 2010, each 
manufacturer shall, upon request from the Office of Vehicle Safety 
Compliance, provide information identifying the vehicles (by make, model 
and vehicle identification number) that have been certified as complying 
with the requirements of Standard No. 208 when using the child restraint 
systems specified in Appendix A-1 of that standard. The manufacturer's 
designation of a vehicle as a certified vehicle is irrevocable.



Sec.  585.36  Reporting Requirements.

    (a) Phase-in reporting requirements. Within 60 days after the end of 
the production year ending August 31, 2010, each manufacturer shall 
submit a report to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 
concerning its compliance with requirements of Standard No. 208 when 
using the child restraint systems specified in Appendix A-1 of that 
standard for its vehicles produced in that year. Each report shall 
provide the information specified in paragraph (b) of this section and 
in section 585.2 of this part.
    (b) Phase-in report content--
    (1) Basis for phase-in production goals. Each manufacturer shall 
provide the number of vehicles manufactured in the current production 
year, or, at the manufacturer's option, in each of the three previous 
production years. A new manufacturer that is, for the first time, 
manufacturing passenger cars, trucks, multipurpose passenger vehicles or 
buses for sale in the United States must report the number of passenger 
cars, trucks, multipurpose passenger vehicles or buses manufactured 
during the current production year.
    (2) Production of complying vehicles. Each manufacturer shall report 
on the number of vehicles that meet the requirements of Standard No. 208 
when using the child restraint systems specified in Appendix A-1 of that 
standard.



Sec.  585.37  Records.

    Each manufacturer shall maintain records of the Vehicle 
Identification Number for each vehicle for which information is reported 
under Sec.  585.36 until December 31, 2013.



     Subpart E_Fuel System Integrity Phase-In Reporting Requirements



Sec.  585.41  Scope.

    This subpart establishes requirements for manufacturers of passenger 
cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 
4,536 kg (10,000 lb) or less to respond to NHTSA inquiries, to submit 
reports, and to maintain records related to the reports, concerning the 
number of such vehicles that meet the upgraded requirements of Standard 
No. 301, Fuel systems integrity (49 CFR 571.301).



Sec.  585.42  Purpose.

    The purpose of these requirements is to assist the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration in determining whether a manufacturer has 
complied

[[Page 287]]

with the upgraded requirements of Standard No. 301.



Sec.  585.43  Applicability.

    This subpart applies to manufacturers of passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks and buses with a GVWR of 4,536 
or less. However, this subpart does not apply to manufacturers that 
produce fewer than 5,000 vehicles annually for sale in the United 
States.

[72 FR 62142, Nov. 2, 2007]



Sec.  585.44  Response to inquiries.

    During the production years ending August 31, 2007, August 31, 2008, 
and August 31, 2009, each manufacturer shall, upon request from the 
Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, provide information identifying the 
vehicles (by make, model, and vehicle identification number) that have 
been certified as complying with the requirements of S6.2(b) of Standard 
No. 301. The manufacturer's designation of a vehicle as a certified 
vehicle is irrevocable.



Sec.  585.45  Reporting requirements.

    (a) General reporting requirements. Within 60 days after the end of 
the production years ending August 31, 2007, August 31, 2008 and August 
31, 2009, each manufacturer shall submit a report to the National 
Highway Traffic Safety Administration concerning its compliance with 
S6.2(b) of Standard No. 301 for its passenger cars, multipurpose 
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a GVWR of less than 4,536 kg 
produced in that year. Each report shall provide the information 
specified in paragraph (b) of this section and in section 585.2 of this 
part.
    (b) Report content. (1) Basis for statement of compliance. Each 
manufacturer shall provide the number of passenger cars, multipurpose 
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or less 
manufactured for sale in the United States for each of the three 
previous production years, or, at the manufacturer's option, for the 
previous production year. A new manufacturer that has not previously 
manufactured these vehicles for sale in the United States must report 
the number of such vehicles manufactured during the current production 
year.
    (2) Production. Each manufacturer shall report for the production 
year for which the report is filed the number of passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 4,536 
kg or less that meet S6.2(b) or S6.3(b) of Standard No. 301.



Sec.  585.46  Records.

    Each manufacturer shall maintain records of the Vehicle 
Identification Number for each vehicle for which information is reported 
under Sec.  585.45(b)(2) until December 31, 2010.



Subpart F_Tires for Motor Vehicles with a GVWR of 10,000 Pounds or Less 
                     Phase-In Reporting Requirements



Sec.  585.51  Scope.

    This subpart establishes requirements for manufacturers of new 
pneumatic tires for motor vehicles with a GVWR of 4,536 kg (10,000 lb) 
or less to respond to NHTSA inquiries, to submit reports, and to 
maintain records related to the reports, concerning the number of such 
tires that meet the requirements of Standard No. 139, New pneumatic 
tires for light vehicles (49 CFR 571.139).



Sec.  585.52  Purpose.

    The purpose of these requirements is to assist the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration in determining whether a manufacturer has 
complied with the requirements of Standard No. 139.



Sec.  585.53  Applicability.

    This subpart applies to manufacturers of tires for motor vehicles 
with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or less.



Sec.  585.54  Response to inquiries.

    Each manufacturer shall, upon request from the Office of Vehicle 
Safety Compliance, provide information identifying the tires (by make, 
model, brand and tire identification number) that have been certified as 
complying with the requirements of Standard No. 139. The manufacturer's 
designation of a tire as a certified tire is irrevocable.

[[Page 288]]



Sec.  585.55  Reporting requirements.

    (a) General reporting requirements. Within 60 days after the end of 
the production years ending August 31, 2006 and August 31, 2007, each 
manufacturer shall submit a report to the National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration concerning its compliance with Standard No. 139 
for its tires produced in that year for motor vehicles with a GVWR of 
4,536 kg or less. Each report shall provide the information specified in 
paragraph (b) of this section and in section 585.2 of this part.
    (b) Report content. (1) Basis for statement of compliance. Each 
manufacturer shall provide the number of tires for motor vehicles with a 
GVWR of 4,536 kg or less manufactured for sale in the United States for 
each of the three previous production years, or, at the manufacturer's 
option, for the production year for which the report is filed. A new 
manufacturer that has not previously manufactured these tires for sale 
in the United States shall report the number of such tires manufactured 
during the current production year.
    (2) Production. Each manufacturer shall report for the production 
year for which the report is filed the number of new pneumatic tires for 
motor vehicles with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or less that meet Standard No. 
139.



Sec.  585.56  Records.

    Each manufacturer shall maintain records of the tire identification 
number for each vehicle for which information is reported under Sec.  
585.55(b)(2) until December 31, 2008.



      Subpart G_Tire Pressure Monitoring System Phase-in Reporting 
                              Requirements

    Source: 70 FR 18190, Apr. 8, 2005, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  585.61  Scope.

    This subpart establishes requirements for manufacturers of passenger 
cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross 
vehicle weight rating of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less, except 
those vehicles with dual wheels on an axle, to submit a report, and 
maintain records related to the report, concerning the number of such 
vehicles that meet the requirements of Standard No. 138, Tire pressure 
monitoring systems (49 CFR 571.138).



Sec.  585.62  Purpose.

    The purpose of these reporting requirements is to assist the 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in determining whether a 
manufacturer has complied with Standard No. 138.



Sec.  585.63  Applicability.

    This subpart applies to manufacturers of passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle 
weight rating of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less, except those 
vehicles with dual wheels on an axle. However, this subpart does not 
apply to manufacturers whose production consists exclusively of vehicles 
manufactured in two or more stages, and vehicles that are altered after 
previously having been certified in accordance with part 567 of the 
chapter. In addition, this subpart does not apply to manufacturers whose 
production of motor vehicles for the United States market is less than 
5,000 vehicles in a production year.



Sec.  585.64  Definitions.

    Production year means the 12-month period between September 1 of one 
year and August 31 of the following year, inclusive.



Sec.  585.65  Response to inquiries.

    At any time prior to August 31, 2007, each manufacturer must, upon 
request from the Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, provide 
information identifying the vehicles (by make, model, and vehicle 
identification number) that have been certified as complying with 
Standard No. 138. The manufacturer's designation of a vehicle as a 
certified vehicle is irrevocable. Upon request, the manufacturer also 
must specify whether it intends to utilize either carry-forward or 
carry-backward credits, and the vehicles to which those credits relate.

[[Page 289]]



Sec.  585.66  Reporting requirements.

    (a) General reporting requirements. Within 60 days after the end of 
the production years ending August 31, 2006 and August 31, 2007, each 
manufacturer must submit a report to the National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration concerning its compliance with Standard No. 138 (49 CFR 
571.138) for its passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, 
trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle weight rating of less than 4,536 
kilograms (10,000 pounds) produced in that year. Each report must--
    (1) Identify the manufacturer;
    (2) State the full name, title, and address of the official 
responsible for preparing the report;
    (3) Identify the production year being reported on;
    (4) Contain a statement regarding whether or not the manufacturer 
complied with the requirements of Standard No. 138 (49 CFR 571.138) for 
the period covered by the report and the basis for that statement;
    (5) Provide the information specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section;
    (6) Be written in the English language; and
    (7) Be submitted to: Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
    (b) Report content--(1) Basis for statement of compliance. Each 
manufacturer must provide the number of passenger cars, multipurpose 
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle weight rating 
of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less, except those vehicles with 
dual wheels on an axle, manufactured for sale in the United States for 
each reporting period as follows:
    (i) Period from October 5, 2005 to August 31, 2006. The number shall 
be either the manufacturer's average annual production of vehicles 
manufactured on or after September 1, 2002, and before October 5, 2005, 
or, at the manufacturer's option, it shall be the manufacturer's 
production on or after October 5, 2005 and before September 1, 2006. A 
new manufacturer that has not previously manufactured these vehicles for 
sale in the United States must report the number of such vehicles 
manufactured during the production period on or after October 5, 2005 
and before September 1, 2006.
    (ii) Period from September 1, 2006 to August 31, 2007. The number 
shall be either the manufacturer's average annual production of vehicles 
manufactured on or after September 1, 2003, and before September 1, 
2006, or, at the manufacturer's option, it shall be the manufacturer's 
production on or after September 1, 2006 and before September 1, 2007. A 
new manufacturer that has not previously manufactured these vehicles for 
sale in the United States must report the number of such vehicles 
manufactured during the production period on or after September 1, 2006 
and before September 1, 2007.
    (2) Production. Each manufacturer must report for the production 
period for which the report is filed: the total number of passenger 
cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross 
vehicle weight rating of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less that 
meet Standard No. 138 (49 CFR 571.138).
    (3) Statement regarding compliance. Each manufacturer must provide a 
statement regarding whether or not the manufacturer complied with the 
TPMS requirements as applicable to the period covered by the report, and 
the basis for that statement. This statement must include an explanation 
concerning the use of any carry-forward and/or carry-backward credits.
    (4) Vehicles produced by more than one manufacturer. Each 
manufacturer whose reporting of information is affected by one or more 
of the express written contracts permitted by S7.5.2 of Standard No. 138 
(49 CFR 571.138) must:
    (i) Report the existence of each contract, including the names of 
all parties to the contract, and explain how the contract affects the 
report being submitted.
    (ii) Report the actual number of vehicles covered by each contract.

[70 FR 18190, Apr. 8, 2005, as amended at 70 FR 53101, Sept. 7, 2005]



Sec.  585.67  Records.

    Each manufacturer must maintain records of the Vehicle 
Identification

[[Page 290]]

Number for each vehicle for which information is reported under Sec.  
585.66(b)(2) until December 31, 2009.



Sec.  585.68  Petition to extend period to file report.

    A manufacturer may petition for extension of time to submit a report 
under this Part. A petition will be granted only if the petitioner shows 
good cause for the extension and if the extension is consistent with the 
public interest. The petition must be received not later than 15 days 
before expiration of the time stated in Sec.  585.66(a). The filing of a 
petition does not automatically extend the time for filing a report. The 
petition must be submitted to: Administrator, National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.



    Subpart H_Side Impact Protection Phase-in Reporting Requirements

    Source: 72 FR 51972, Sept. 11, 2007, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  585.71  Scope.

    This part establishes requirements for manufacturers of passenger 
cars, and of trucks, buses and multipurpose passenger vehicles with a 
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 4,536 kilograms (kg) (10,000 
pounds) or less, to submit a report, and maintain records related to the 
report, concerning the number of such vehicles that meet the moving 
deformable barrier test requirements of S7 of Standard No. 214, Side 
impact protection (49 CFR 571.214), and the vehicle-to-pole test 
requirements of S9 of that standard.



Sec.  585.72  Purpose.

    The purpose of these reporting requirements is to assist the 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in determining whether a 
manufacturer has complied with the requirements of Standard No. 214, 
Side Impact Protection (49 CFR 571.214).



Sec.  585.73  Applicability.

    This part applies to manufacturers of passenger cars, and of trucks, 
buses and multipurpose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of 4,536 kg 
(10,000 lb) or less. However, this part does not apply to vehicles 
excluded by S2 and S5 of Standard No. 214 (49 CFR 571.214) from the 
requirements of that standard.



Sec.  585.74  Definitions.

    (a) All terms defined in 49 U.S.C. 30102 are used in their statutory 
meaning.
    (b) Bus, gross vehicle weight rating or GVWR, multipurpose passenger 
vehicle, passenger car, and truck are used as defined in Sec.  571.3 of 
this chapter.
    (c) Production year means the 12-month period between September 1 of 
one year and August 31 of the following year, inclusive.
    (d) Limited line manufacturer means a manufacturer that sells three 
or fewer carlines, as that term is defined in 49 CFR 583.4, in the 
United States during a production year.



Sec.  585.75  Response to inquiries.

    At any time during the production years ending August 31, 2011, 
August 31, 2012, August 31, 2013, and August 31, 2014, each manufacturer 
shall, upon request from the Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, 
provide information identifying the vehicles (by make, model and vehicle 
identification number) that have been certified as complying with the 
moving deformable barrier test with advanced test dummies (S7.2) or the 
vehicles (by make, model and vehicle identification number) that have 
been certified as complying with the vehicle-to-pole test requirements 
(S9.1) of FMVSS No. 214 (49 CFR 571.214). The manufacturer's designation 
of a vehicle as a certified vehicle that meets S7.2 or S9.1 is 
irrevocable.

[73 FR 32485, June 9, 2008]



Sec.  585.76  Reporting requirements.

    (a) Advanced credit phase-in reporting requirements. (1) Within 60 
days after the end of the production years ending August 31, 2008, 
through August 31, 2014, each manufacturer choosing to certify vehicles 
manufactured during any of those production years as complying with the 
upgraded moving deformable barrier (S7.2 of Standard No. 214)(49 CFR 
571.214) or vehicle-to-pole

[[Page 291]]

requirements (S9) of Standard No. 214 shall submit a report to the 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration providing the information 
specified in paragraph (c) of this section and in Sec.  585.2 of this 
part.
    (2) [Reserved]
    (b) Phase-in reporting requirements. Within 60 days after the end of 
each of the production years ending August 31, 2011, August 31, 2012, 
August 31, 2013, and August 31, 2014, each manufacturer shall submit a 
report to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration concerning 
its compliance with the moving deformable barrier requirements of S7 of 
Standard No. 214 and with the vehicle-to-pole requirements of S9 of that 
Standard for its vehicles produced in that year. Each report shall 
provide the information specified in paragraph (c) of this section and 
in section 585.2 of this part.
    (c) Advanced credit phase-in report content--(1) Production of 
complying vehicles. With respect to the reports identified in Sec.  
585.76(a), each manufacturer shall report for the production year for 
which the report is filed the number of vehicles, by make and model 
year: That are certified as meeting the moving deformable barrier test 
requirements of S7.2 of Standard No. 214, Side impact protection (49 CFR 
571.214), and that are certified as meeting the vehicle-to-pole test 
requirements of S9 of Standard No. 214.
    (2) [Reserved]
    (d) Phase-in report content--(1) Basis for phase-in production 
goals. Each manufacturer shall provide the number of vehicles 
manufactured in the current production year, or, at the manufacturer's 
option, in each of the three previous production years. A new 
manufacturer that is, for the first time, manufacturing passenger cars 
for sale in the United States must report the number of passenger cars 
manufactured during the current production year.
    (2) Production of complying vehicles. Each manufacturer shall report 
for the production year being reported on, and each preceding production 
year, to the extent that vehicles produced during the preceding years 
are treated under Standard No. 214 as having been produced during the 
production year being reported on, information on the number of vehicles 
that meet the moving deformable barrier test requirements of S7 of 
Standard No. 214, Side Impact Protection (49 CFR 571.214), and the 
number of vehicles that meet the vehicle-to-pole test requirements of S9 
of that standard.

[72 FR 51972, Sept. 11, 2007, as amended at 73 FR 32485, June 9, 2008]



Sec.  585.77  Records.

    Each manufacturer shall maintain records of the Vehicle 
Identification Number for each vehicle for which information is reported 
under Sec.  585.76 until December 31, 2018.

[73 FR 32485, June 9, 2008]



    Subpart I_Electronic Stability Control System Phase-In Reporting 
                              Requirements

    Source: 72 FR 17316, Apr. 6, 2007, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  585.81  Scope.

    This subpart establishes requirements for manufacturers of passenger 
cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross 
vehicle weight rating of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less to 
submit a report, and maintain records related to the report, concerning 
the number of such vehicles that meet the requirements of Standard No. 
126, Electronic stability control systems (49 CFR 571.126).



Sec.  585.82  Purpose.

    The purpose of these reporting requirements is to assist the 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in determining whether a 
manufacturer has complied with Standard No. 126 (49 CFR 571.126).



Sec.  585.83  Applicability.

    This subpart applies to manufacturers of passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle 
weight rating of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less. However, this 
subpart does not apply to manufacturers whose production

[[Page 292]]

consists exclusively of vehicles manufactured in two or more stages, and 
vehicles that are altered after previously having been certified in 
accordance with part 567 of this chapter. In addition, this subpart does 
not apply to manufacturers whose production of motor vehicles for the 
United States market is less than 5,000 vehicles in a production year.



Sec.  585.84  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart:
    Production year means the 12-month period between September 1 of one 
year and August 31 of the following year, inclusive.



Sec.  585.85  Response to inquiries.

    At any time prior to August 31, 2011, each manufacturer must, upon 
request from the Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, provide 
information identifying the vehicles (by make, model, and vehicle 
identification number) that have been certified as complying with 
Standard No. 126 (49 CFR 571.126). The manufacturer's designation of a 
vehicle as a certified vehicle is irrevocable. Upon request, the 
manufacturer also must specify whether it intends to utilize carry-
forward credits, and the vehicles to which those credits relate.



Sec.  585.86  Reporting requirements.

    (a) General reporting requirements. Within 60 days after the end of 
the production years ending August 31, 2009, August 31, 2010, and August 
31, 2011, each manufacturer must submit a report to the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration concerning its compliance with Standard 
No. 126 (49 CFR 571.126) for its passenger cars, multipurpose passenger 
vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle weight rating of less 
than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) produced in that year. Each report 
must--
    (1) Identify the manufacturer;
    (2) State the full name, title, and address of the official 
responsible for preparing the report;
    (3) Identify the production year being reported on;
    (4) Contain a statement regarding whether or not the manufacturer 
complied with the requirements of Standard No. 126 (49 CFR 571.126) for 
the period covered by the report and the basis for that statement;
    (5) Provide the information specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section;
    (6) Be written in the English language; and
    (7) Be submitted to: Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
    (b) Report content--(1) Basis for statement of compliance. Each 
manufacturer must provide the number of passenger cars, multipurpose 
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle weight rating 
of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less, manufactured for sale in the 
United States for each of the three previous production years, or, at 
the manufacturer's option, for the current production year. A new 
manufacturer that has not previously manufactured these vehicles for 
sale in the United States must report the number of such vehicles 
manufactured during the current production year.
    (2) Production. Each manufacturer must report for the production 
year for which the report is filed: the number of passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle 
weight rating of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less that meet 
Standard No. 126 (49 CFR 571.126).
    (3) Statement regarding compliance. Each manufacturer must provide a 
statement regarding whether or not the manufacturer complied with the 
ESC requirements as applicable to the period covered by the report, and 
the basis for that statement. This statement must include an explanation 
concerning the use of any carry-forward credits.
    (4) Vehicles produced by more than one manufacturer. Each 
manufacturer whose reporting of information is affected by one or more 
of the express written contracts permitted by S8.6.2 of Standard No. 126 
(49 CFR 571.126) must:
    (i) Report the existence of each contract, including the names of 
all parties to the contract, and explain how the contract affects the 
report being submitted.
    (ii) Report the actual number of vehicles covered by each contract.

[[Page 293]]



Sec.  585.87  Records.

    Each manufacturer must maintain records of the Vehicle 
Identification Number for each vehicle for which information is reported 
under Sec.  585.86(b)(2) until December 31, 2013.



Sec.  585.88  Petition to extend period to file report.

    A manufacturer may petition for extension of time to submit a report 
under this Part. A petition will be granted only if the petitioner shows 
good cause for the extension and if the extension is consistent with the 
public interest. The petition must be received not later than 15 days 
before expiration of the time stated in Sec.  585.86(a). The filing of a 
petition does not automatically extend the time for filing a report. The 
petition must be submitted to: Administrator, National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.



        Subpart J_Head Restraints Phase-in Reporting Requirements

    Source: 72 FR 25523, May 4, 2007, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  585.91  Scope.

    This subpart establishes requirements for manufacturers of passenger 
cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks and buses with a GVWR of 
4,536 kg or less to submit a report, and maintain records related to the 
report, concerning the number of vehicles that meet the requirements of 
Standard No. 202a.



Sec.  585.92  Purpose.

    The purpose of these reporting requirements is to assist the 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in determining whether a 
manufacturer has complied with Standard No. 202a.



Sec.  585.93  Applicability.

    This subpart applies to manufacturers of passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks and buses with a GVWR of 4,536 
kg or less. However, it does not apply to manufacturers whose production 
consists exclusively of vehicles that are manufactured in two or more 
stages or that are altered (within the meaning of 49 CFR 567.7) after 
having previously been certified in accordance with part 567 of this 
chapter.



Sec.  585.94  Definitions.

    Production year means the 12-month period between September 1 of one 
year and August 31 of the following year, inclusive.



Sec.  585.95  Response to inquiries.

    (a) Production year ending August 31, 2010. At any time during the 
production year, each manufacturer must, upon request from the Office of 
Vehicle Safety Compliance, provide information identifying the vehicles 
(by make, model and vehicle identification number) that have been 
certified as complying with Sec.  571.202a without regard to any option 
to comply with the standard in Sec.  571.202 or with the European 
regulations referenced in S4.3(a) of Sec.  571.202.
    (b) Production year ending August 31, 2011. At any time during the 
production year, each manufacturer must, upon request from the Office of 
Vehicle Safety Compliance, provide information identifying the vehicles 
(by make, model and vehicle identification number) that have been 
certified as complying with the requirements specified in Sec.  571.202a 
for rear head restraints.



Sec.  585.96  Reporting requirements.

    (a) Production year ending August 31, 2010--(1) General reporting 
requirements. Within 60 days after the end of the production year ending 
August 31, 2010, each manufacturer must submit a report to the National 
Highway Traffic Safety Administration concerning its compliance with the 
head restraint requirements specified in Sec.  571.202a, without regard 
to any option to comply with the standard in Sec.  571.202 or with the 
European regulations referenced in S4.3(a) of Sec.  571.202, for its 
passenger cars, trucks, buses and multipurpose passenger vehicles 
produced in that year. The report must provide the information specified 
in paragraph (2) of this section and in Sec.  585.2 of this part.
    (2) Report content--(i) Basis for phase-in production goals. Each 
manufacturer

[[Page 294]]

must provide the number of passenger cars and multipurpose passenger 
vehicles, trucks and buses with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or less manufactured 
for sale in the United States. The number must be either the 
manufacturer's average annual production of vehicles manufactured on or 
after September 1, 2007 and before September 1, 2010, or, at the 
manufacturer's option, the manufacturer's production on or after 
September 1, 2009 and before September 1, 2010. A new manufacturer that 
has not previously manufactured these vehicles for sale in the United 
States must report the number of such vehicles manufactured during the 
production period beginning on or after September 1, 2009 and before 
September 1, 2010.
    (ii) Production. Each manufacturer must report for the production 
year ending August 31, 2010: The total number of passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle 
weight rating of 4,536 kg or less that meet Sec.  571.202a, without 
regard to any option to comply with the standard in Sec.  571.202 or 
with the European regulations referenced in S4.3(a) of Sec.  571.202.
    (b) Production year ending August 31, 2011--(1) General reporting 
requirements. Within 60 days after the end of the production year ending 
August 31, 2011, each manufacturer must submit a report to the National 
Highway Traffic Safety Administration concerning its compliance with the 
rear head restraint requirements specified in Sec.  571.202a. The report 
must provide the information specified in paragraph (2) of this section 
and in Sec.  585.2 of this part.
    (2) Report content--(i) Basis for phase-in production goals. Each 
manufacturer must provide the number of passenger cars and multipurpose 
passenger vehicles, trucks and buses with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or less 
manufactured for sale in the United States with rear head restraints. 
The number must be either the manufacturer's average annual production 
of vehicles with rear head restraints manufactured on or after September 
1, 2008 and before September 1, 2011, or, at the manufacturer's option, 
the manufacturer's production on or after September 1, 2010 and before 
September 1, 2011. A new manufacturer that has not previously 
manufactured these vehicles for sale in the United States must report 
the number of such vehicles manufactured during the production period on 
or after September 1, 2010 and before September 1, 2011.
    (ii) Production. Each manufacturer must report for the production 
year ending August 31, 2011: The total number of passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle 
weight rating of 4,536 kg or less that meet the rear head restraint 
requirements of Sec.  571.202a.



Sec.  585.97  Records.

    Each manufacturer must maintain records of the Vehicle 
Identification Number for each vehicle for which information is reported 
under Sec.  585.96 until December 31, 2007.



     Subpart L_Roof Crush Resistance Phase-in Reporting Requirements

    Source: 74 FR 22387, May 12, 2009, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  585.111  Scope.

    This subpart establishes requirements for manufacturers of passenger 
cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross 
vehicle weight rating of 2,722 kilograms (6,000 pounds) or less to 
submit a report, and maintain records related to the report, concerning 
the number of such vehicles that meet the requirements of Standard No. 
216a; Roof crush resistance; Upgraded standard (49 CFR 571.216a).



Sec.  585.112  Purpose.

    The purpose of these reporting requirements is to assist the 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in determining whether a 
manufacturer has complied with Standard No. 216a (49 CFR 571.216a).



Sec.  585.113  Applicability.

    This subpart applies to manufacturers of passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle 
weight rating of 2,722 kilograms (6,000 pounds) or less. However, this 
subpart does not apply to manufacturers whose production

[[Page 295]]

consists exclusively of vehicles manufactured in two or more stages, and 
vehicles that are altered after previously having been certified in 
accordance with part 567 of this chapter. In addition, this subpart does 
not apply to manufacturers whose production of motor vehicles for the 
United States market is less than 5,000 vehicles in a production year.



Sec.  585.114  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart:
    Production year means the 12-month period between September 1 of one 
year and August 31 of the following year, inclusive.



Sec.  585.115  Response to inquiries.

    At any time prior to August 31, 2018, each manufacturer must, upon 
request from the Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, provide 
information identifying the vehicles (by make, model, and vehicle 
identification number) that have been certified as complying with 
Standard No. 216a (49 CFR 571.216a). The manufacturer's designation of a 
vehicle as a certified vehicle is irrevocable. Upon request, the 
manufacturer also must specify whether it intends to utilize carry-
forward credits, and the vehicles to which those credits relate.



Sec.  585.116  Reporting requirements.

    (a) General reporting requirements. Within 60 days after the end of 
the production years ending August 31, 2013, August 31, 2014, and August 
31, 2015, each manufacturer must submit a report to the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration concerning its compliance with Standard 
No. 216a (49 CFR 571.216a) for its passenger cars, multipurpose 
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle weight rating 
of less than 2,722 kilograms (6,000 pounds) produced in that year. Each 
report must --
    (1) Identify the manufacturer;
    (2) State the full name, title, and address of the official 
responsible for preparing the report;
    (3) Identify the production year being reported on;
    (4) Contain a statement regarding whether or not the manufacturer 
complied with the requirements of Standard No. 216a (49 CFR 571.216a) 
for the period covered by the report and the basis for that statement;
    (5) Provide the information specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section;
    (6) Be written in the English language; and
    (7) Be submitted to: Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590.
    (b) Report content--(1) Basis for statement of compliance. Each 
manufacturer must provide the number of passenger cars, multipurpose 
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle weight rating 
of 2,722 kilograms (6,000 pounds) or less, manufactured for sale in the 
United States for each of the three previous production years, or, at 
the manufacturer's option, for the current production year. A new 
manufacturer that has not previously manufactured these vehicles for 
sale in the United States must report the number of such vehicles 
manufactured during the current production year.
    (2) Production. Each manufacturer must report for the production 
year for which the report is filed: the number of passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a gross vehicle 
weight rating of 2,722 kilograms (6,000 pounds) or less that meet 
Standard No. 216a (49 CFR 571.216a).
    (3) Statement regarding compliance. Each manufacturer must provide a 
statement regarding whether or not the manufacturer complied with the 
requirements of Standard No. 216a (49 CFR 571.216a) as applicable to the 
period covered by the report, and the basis for that statement. This 
statement must include an explanation concerning the use of any carry-
forward credits.
    (4) Vehicles produced by more than one manufacturer. Each 
manufacturer whose reporting of information is affected by one or more 
of the express written contracts permitted by S8.6.2 of Standard No. 
216a (49 CFR 571.216a) must:
    (i) Report the existence of each contract, including the names of 
all parties to the contract, and explain how the contract affects the 
report being submitted.
    (ii) Report the actual number of vehicles covered by each contract.

[[Page 296]]



Sec.  585.117  Records.

    Each manufacturer must maintain records of the Vehicle 
Identification Number for each vehicle for which information is reported 
under Sec.  585.116(b)(2) until December 31, 2018.

                           PART 586 [RESERVED]



PART 587_DEFORMABLE BARRIERS--Table of Contents




                            Subpart A_General

Sec.
587.1 Scope.
587.2 Purpose.
587.3 Application.

             Subpart B_Side Impact Moving Deformable Barrier

587.4 Definitions.
587.5 Incorporated materials.
587.6 General description.
587.7-587.10 [Reserved]

                   Subpart C_Offset Deformable Barrier

587.11 [Reserved]
587.12 Incorporation by reference.
587.13 General description.
587.14 Deformable face component dimensions and material specifications.
587.15 Verification of aluminum honeycomb crush strength.
587.16 Adhesive bonding procedure.
587.17 Construction.
587.18 Dimensions of fixed rigid barrier.
587.19 Mounting.

Figures to Subpart C

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30117, and 30166; delegation 
of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.

    Source: 55 FR 45779, Oct. 30, 1990, unless otherwise noted.

    Editorial Note: Nomenclature changes to part 587 appear at 69 FR 
18803, Apr. 9, 2004.



                            Subpart A_General



Sec.  587.1  Scope.

    This part describes deformable impact barriers that are to be used 
for testing compliance of motor vehicles with motor vehicle safety 
standards.

[65 FR 17198, Mar. 31, 2000]



Sec.  587.2  Purpose.

    The design and performance criteria specified in this part are 
intended to describe measuring tools with sufficient precision to give 
repetitive and correlative results under similar test conditions and to 
reflect adequately the protective performance of a motor vehicle or item 
of motor vehicle equipment with respect to human occupants



Sec.  587.3  Application.

    This part does not in itself impose duties or liabilities on any 
person. It is a description of tools that are used in compliance tests 
to measure the performance of occupant protection systems required by 
the safety standards that refer to these tools. It is designed to be 
referenced by, and become part of, the test procedures specified in 
motor vehicle safety standards such as Standard No. 208, Occupant Crash 
Protection, and Standard No. 214, Side Impact Protection.

[65 FR 17199, Mar. 31, 2000]



             Subpart B_Side Impact Moving Deformable Barrier



Sec.  587.4  Definitions.

    All terms defined in section 102 of the National Traffic and Motor 
Vehicle Safety Act (15 U.S.C. 1391) are used in their statutory meaning.



Sec.  587.5  Incorporated materials.

    (a) The drawings and specifications referred to in this regulation 
that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by 
reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The 
Director of the Federal Register has approved the materials incorporated 
by reference. For materials subject to change, only the specific version 
approved by the Director of the Federal Register and specified in the 
regulation are incorporated. A notice of any change will be published in 
the Federal Register. As a convenience to the reader, the materials 
incorporated by reference are listed in the Finding Aid Table found at 
the end of this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations.
    (b) The drawings and specifications incorporated in this part by 
reference are available for examination in the general reference section 
of Docket 79-04, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration, Room

[[Page 297]]

5109, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. Copies may be 
obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc., 1111 14th Street, NW., 
Washington, DC 20005, telephone (202) 628-6667 or (202) 408-8789. The 
drawings and specifications are also on file in the reference library of 
the Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records 
Administration, Washington, DC.



Sec.  587.6  General description.

    (a) The moving deformable barrier consists of component parts and 
component assemblies which are described in drawings and specifications 
that are set forth in this Sec.  587.6 of this chapter (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec.  587.5).
    (b) The moving deformable barrier specifications are provided in the 
drawings shown in DSL-1278 through DSL-1287, except DSL-1282, and the 
drawing shown in DSL-1290 (DSL-1278 through DSL-1287, except for DSL-
1282, and DSL-1290 are incorporated by reference; see Sec.  587.5).
    (1) The specifications for the final assembly of the moving 
deformable barrier are provided in the drawings shown in DSL-1278, dated 
June 2002.
    (2) The specifications for the frame assembly of the moving 
deformable barrier are provided in the drawings shown in DSL-1281, dated 
August 20, 1980.
    (3) The specifications for the face of the moving deformable barrier 
are provided in the drawings shown in DSL-1285, dated October 1991, and 
DSL-1286, dated August 20, 1980.
    (4) The specifications for the ballast installation and details 
concerning the ballast plate are provided in drawings shown in DSL-1279 
and DSL-1280, both dated August 20, 1980.
    (5) The specifications for the hub assembly and details concerning 
the brake are provided in drawings shown in DSL-1283, dated October 
1991.
    (6) The specifications for the rear guide assembly are provided in 
drawings shown in DSL-1284, dated August 20, 1980.
    (7) The specifications for the research axle assembly are provided 
in drawings shown in DSL-1287, dated October 1991.
    (8) The specifications for the compliance axle assembly are provided 
in drawings shown in DSL-1290, dated October 1991.
    (c) In configuration 2 (with two cameras and camera mounts, a light 
trap vane, and ballast reduced), the moving deformable barrier 
(crabbable axle), including the impact surface, supporting structure, 
and carriage, weighs 3,015 pounds, has a track width of 74 inches, and 
has a wheelbase of 102 inches.
    (d) In configuration 2, the moving deformable barrier has the 
following center of gravity:

X=44.2 inches rear of front axle
Y=0.3 inches left of longitudinal center line
Z=19.7 inches from ground.

    (e) The moving deformable barrier has the following moment of 
inertia:

Pitch=1669 ft-lb-sec\2\
Roll=375 ft-lb-sec\2\
Yaw=1897 ft-lb-sec\2\

[55 FR 45779, Oct. 30, 1990; 56 FR 47011, Sept. 17, 1991, as amended at 
57 FR 7558, Mar. 3, 1992; 68 FR 44472, July 29, 2003]



Sec. Sec.  587.7-587.10  [Reserved]



                   Subpart C_Offset Deformable Barrier

    Source: 65 FR 17199, Mar. 31, 2000, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  587.11  [Reserved]



Sec.  587.12  Incorporation by reference.

    Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J211/1 
Rev. MAR 95, Instrumentation for Impact Tests-Part 1--Electronic 
Instrumentation, is incorporated by reference in Sec.  587.15 in 
accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. A copy may be 
obtained from SAE at Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 
Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096. A copy of the material may be 
inspected at NHTSA's Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., room 
5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records 
Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this 
material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/
federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.

[[Page 298]]



Sec.  587.13  General description.

    The offset deformable barrier is comprised of two elements: a fixed 
rigid barrier and a deformable face (Figure 1). The fixed rigid barrier 
is adequate to not deflect or displace more than 10 mm during the 
vehicle impact. The deformable face consists of aluminum honeycomb and 
aluminum covering.



Sec.  587.14  Deformable face component dimensions and material 
specifications.

    The dimensions of the deformable face are illustrated in Figure 1 of 
this subpart. The dimensions and materials of the individual components 
are listed separately below. All dimensions allow a tolerance of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) unless otherwise specified.
    (a) Main honeycomb block.
    (1) Dimensions. The main honeycomb block has a height of 650 mm 
(25.6 in) (in the direction of honeycomb ribbon axis), a width of 1,000 
mm (39.4 in), and a depth of 450 mm (17.7 in)(in the direction of 
honeycomb cell axis).
    (2) Material. The main honeycomb block is constructed of the 
following material. The honeycomb is manufactured out of aluminum 3003, 
with a foil thickness of 0.076 mm (0.003 in) 0.004 
mm (0.002 in) a cell size of 19.14 mm (0.75 in), a density of 28.6 kg/
m\3\ (1.78 lb/ft\3\) 2kg/m\3\ (0.25 1b/ft\3\), and 
a crush strength of 0.342 MPa (49.6 psi) + 0%-10%, measured in 
accordance with the certification procedure described in Sec.  587.15.
    (b) Bumper element honeycomb.
    (1) Dimensions. The bumper element honeycomb has a height of 330 mm 
(13 in)(in the direction of honeycomb ribbon axis), a width of 1,000 mm 
(39.4 in), and a depth of 90 mm (3.5 in) (in the direction of honeycomb 
cell axis).
    (2) Material. The bumper element honeycomb is constructed of the 
following material. The honeycomb is manufactured out of aluminum 3003, 
with a foil thickness of 0.076 mm (0.003 in) 0.004 
mm (0.0002 in), a cell size of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) 1 
mm (0.040 in), a density of 82.6 kg/m\3\ (5.15 lb/ft\3\) 3 kg/m\3\ (0.19 lb/ft\3\), and a crush strength of 1.711 
MPa (248 psi) + 0% -10%, measured in accordance with the certification 
procedure described in Sec.  587.14.
    (c) Backing sheet.
    (1) Dimensions. The backing sheet has a height of 800 mm (31.5 in), 
a width of 1,000 mm (39.4 in), and a thickness of 2.0 mm (0.08 in) 
0.1 mm (0.004 in).
    (2) Material. The backing sheet is manufactured out of aluminum 
5251/5052.
    (d) Cladding sheet.
    (1) Dimensions. The cladding sheet of the main honeycomb block has a 
total length of 1,700 mm (66.9 in), a width of 1,000 mm (39.4 in), and a 
thickness of 0.81 mm (0.03 in) 0.07 mm (0.003 in). 
It is shaped as indicated in Figure 1.
    (2) Material. The cladding sheet of the main honeycomb block is 
manufactured out of aluminum 5251/5052.
    (e) Bumper element honeycomb facing sheet.
    (1) Dimensions. The bumper facing sheet has a height of 330 mm (13 
in), a width of 1,000 mm (39.4 in), and a thickness of 0.81 mm (0.03 in) 
0.07 mm (0.003 in).
    (2) Material. The bumper element honeycomb facing sheet is 
manufactured out of aluminum 5251/5052.
    (f) Adhesive. The adhesive used throughout is a two-part 
polyurethane. (such as Ciba-Geigy XB5090/1 resin with XB5304 hardener, 
or equivalent).



Sec.  587.15  Verification of aluminum honeycomb crush strength.

    The following procedure is used to ascertain the crush strength of 
the main honeycomb block and the bumper element honeycomb, as specified 
in Sec. Sec.  587.14(a)(2) and 587.14(b)(2).
    (a) Sample locations. To ensure uniformity of crush strength across 
the whole of the deformable face, 8 samples are taken from 4 locations 
evenly spaced across the honeycomb material. Seven of these 8 samples 
must meet the crush strength requirements when tested in accordance with 
the following sections. The location of the samples depends on the size 
of the honeycomb material being tested. Four samples, each measuring 300 
mm (11.8 in) x 300 mm (11.8 in) x 25 mm (1 in) thick are cut from the 
honeycomb material. (See Figure 2 for how to locate these samples on two 
different sizes of honeycomb material.) Each of these larger samples is 
cut into samples of the size specified in Sec.  587.15(b). Verification 
is based on the testing of two samples

[[Page 299]]

from each of the four locations. The other two samples are retained for 
future verification, if necessary.
    (b) Sample size. Samples of the following size are used for testing. 
The length is 150 mm (5.9 in) 6 mm (0.24 in), the 
width is 150 mm (5.9 in) 6 mm (0.24 in), and the 
thickness is 25 mm (1 in) 2 mm (0.08 in). The 
walls of incomplete cells around the edge of the sample are trimmed as 
follows (See Figure 3). In the width (``W'') direction, the fringes 
(``f'') are no greater than 1.8 mm (0.07 in); in the length (``L'') 
direction, the fringes (``e'') are at least half the length of one 
bonded cell wall (``d'') (in the ribbon direction).
    (c) Area measurement. The length of the sample is measured in three 
locations, 12.7 mm (0.5 in) from each end and in the middle, and 
recorded as L1, L2, and L3 (Figure 3). In the same manner, the width is 
measured and recorded as W1, W2, and W3 (Figure 3). These measurements 
are taken on the centerline of the thickness. The crush area is then 
calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.013

    (d) Crush rate and distance. The sample is crushed at a rate of not 
less than 5.1 mm/min (0.2 in/ min) and not more than 7.6 mm/min (0.29 
in/min). The minimum crush distance is 16.5 mm (0.65 in). Force versus 
deflection data are collected in either analog or digital form for each 
sample tested. If analog data are collected, a means of converting the 
data to digital data must be made available. All digital data are 
collected at a rate consistent with SAE Recommended Practice J211/1 Rev. 
MAR 95 (see Sec.  587.12).
    (e) Crush strength determination. Ignore all data prior to 6.4 mm 
(0.25 in) of crush and after 16.5 mm (0.65 in) of crush. Divide the 
remaining data into three sections or displacement intervals (n = 1, 2, 
3) (see Figure 4) as follows. Interval one is from 6.4-9.7 mm (0.25-0.38 
in) deflection, inclusive. Interval two is from 9.7-13.2 mm (0.38-0.52 
in) deflection, exclusive. Interval three is from 13.2-16.5 mm (0.52-
0.65 in) deflection, inclusive. Find the average for each section as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.014

    where m represents the number of data points measured in each of the 
three intervals. Calculate the crush strength of each section as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.015

    (f) Sample crush strength specification. For a honeycomb sample to 
meet crush strength requirements, the following condition must be met. 
For the 0.342 MPa (49.6 psi) material, the strength must be equal to or 
greater than 0.308 MPa (45 psi) but less than or equal to 0.342 MPa 
(49.6 psi) for all three compression intervals. For the 1.711 MPa (248 
psi) material the strength must be equal to or greater than 1.540 MPa 
(223 psi) but less than or equal to 1.711 MPa (248 psi) for all three 
compression intervals.
    (g) Testing hardware. (1) The hardware used to verify crush strength 
is capable of applying a load of 13.3 kN (3,000 lb), over at least a 
16.5 mm (0.65 in) stroke. The crush rate is constant and known. To 
ensure that the load is applied to the entire sample, the top and bottom 
crush plates are no smaller than 165 mm by 165 mm (6.5 in x 6.5 in). The 
engaging surfaces of the crush plates have a roughness approximately 
equivalent to 60 grit sandpaper. The bottom crush plate is marked to 
ensure that the applied load is centered on the sample.
    (2) The crush plate assemblies have an average angular rigidity 
(about axes normal to the direction of crush) of at least 1017 Nm/deg 
(750 ft-lb/deg), over the range of 0 to 203 Nm (0 to 150 ft-lb) applied 
torque.



Sec.  587.16  Adhesive bonding procedure.

    Immediately before bonding, aluminum sheet surfaces to be bonded are 
thoroughly cleaned using a suitable solvent, such as 1-1-1 
Trichloroethane. This is carried out at least twice and more often if 
required to eliminate grease or dirt deposits. The cleaned surfaces are 
abraded using 120 grit abrasive paper. Metallic/silicon carbide abrasive 
paper is not to be used. The surfaces are thoroughly abraded and

[[Page 300]]

the abrasive paper changed regularly during the process to avoid 
clogging, which could lead to a polishing effect. Following abrading, 
the surfaces are thoroughly cleaned again, as above. In total, the 
surfaces are solvent-cleaned at least four times. All dust and deposits 
left as a result of the abrading process are removed, as these can 
adversely affect bonding. The adhesive is applied to one surface only, 
using a ribbed rubber roller. In cases where honeycomb is to be bonded 
to aluminum sheet, the adhesive is applied to the aluminum sheet only. A 
maximum pressure of 0.5 kg/m\2\ (11.9 lb/ft\2\) is applied evenly over 
the surface, giving a maximum film thickness of 0.5 mm (0.02 in).



Sec.  587.17  Construction.

    (a) The main honeycomb block is bonded to the backing sheet with 
adhesive such that the cell axes are perpendicular to the sheet. The 
cladding sheet is adhesively bonded to the front surface of the main 
honeycomb block. The top and bottom surfaces of the cladding sheet are 
not bonded to the main honeycomb block but are positioned close to it. 
The cladding sheet is adhesively bonded to the backing sheet at the 
mounting flanges. The bumper element honeycomb is adhesively bonded to 
the front of the cladding sheet such that the cell axes are 
perpendicular to the sheet. The bottom of the bumper element honeycomb 
is flush with the bottom surface of the cladding sheet. The bumper 
facing sheet is adhesively bonded to the front of the bumper element 
honeycomb.
    (b) The bumper element honeycomb is divided into three equal 
sections by means of two horizontal slots. These slots are cut through 
the entire depth of the bumper element and extend the whole width of the 
bumper. The slots are cut using a saw; their width is the width of the 
blade used which do not exceed 4.0 mm (0.16 in).
    (c) Clearance holes for mounting the deformable face are drilled in 
the cladding sheet mounting flanges (shown in Figure 5). The holes are 
20 mm (0.79 in) in diameter. Five holes are drilled in the top flange at 
a distance of 40 mm (1.57 in) from the top edge of the flange and five 
holes in the bottom flange at a distance of 40 mm (1.6 in) from the 
bottom edge of the flange. The holes are spaced at 100 mm (3.9 in), 300 
mm (11.8 in), 500 mm (19.7 in), 700 mm (27.5 in), 900 mm (35.4 in) 
horizontally, from either edge of the barrier. All holes are drilled 
within 1 mm (0.04 in) of the nominal distances.



Sec.  587.18  Dimensions of fixed rigid barrier.

    (a) The fixed rigid barrier has a mass of not less than 7 x 10\4\ kg 
(154,324 lb).
    (b) The height of the fixed rigid barrier is at least as high as the 
highest point on the vehicle at the intersection of the vertical 
transverse plane tangent to the forwardmost point of both front tires, 
when the tires are parallel to the longitudinal centerline of the 
vehicle, and the vertical plane through the longitudinal centerline of 
the vehicle.



Sec.  587.19  Mounting.

    (a) The deformable face is rigidly attached to the edge of the fixed 
rigid barrier or to some rigid structure attached thereto. The front of 
the fixed rigid barrier to which the deformable face is attached is flat 
(continuous over the height and width of the face and vertical 1 degree and perpendicular 1 
degree to the axis of the run-up track). The edge of the deformable face 
is aligned with the edge of the fixed rigid barrier appropriate for the 
side of the vehicle to be tested.
    (b) The deformable face is attached to the fixed rigid barrier by 
means of ten bolts, five in the top mounting flange and five in the 
bottom, such that the bottom of the bumper element honeycomb is 200 mm 
(7.8 in) 15 mm (0.6 in) from the ground. These 
bolts are at least 8 mm (0.3 in) in diameter. Steel clamping strips are 
used for both the top and bottom mounting flanges (Figure 1). These 
strips are 60 mm (2.4 in) high and 1000 mm (39.4 in) wide and have 
thickness of at least 3 mm (0.12 in). Five clearance holes of 20 mm (0.8 
in) diameter are drilled in both strips to correspond with those in the 
mounting flange on the deformable face cladding sheet (see Sec.  
586.17(c)).

[[Page 301]]



                  Sec. Figures to Subpart C of Part 587
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.003


[[Page 302]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.004


[[Page 303]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.005


[[Page 304]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.006


[[Page 305]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.007



PART 588_CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS RECORDKEEPING REQUIREMENTS--Table of
Contents




Sec.
588.1 Scope.
588.2 Purpose.
588.3 Applicability.
588.4 Definitions.
588.5 Records.
588.6 Record retention.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30117, and 30166; delegation 
of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.

    Source: 57 FR 41438, Sept. 10, 1992, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  588.1  Scope.

    This part establishes requirements for manufacturers of child 
restraint systems to maintain lists of the names and addresses of child 
restraint owners.



Sec.  588.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to aid manufacturers in contacting the 
owners of child restraints during notification campaigns conducted in 
accordance with 49 CFR part 577, and to aid the National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration in determining whether a manufacturer has met its 
recall responsibilities.

[[Page 306]]



Sec.  588.3  Applicability.

    This part applies to manufacturers of child restraint systems, 
except factory-installed built-in restraints.



Sec.  588.4  Definitions.

    (a) Statutory definitions. All terms defined in section 102 of the 
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act (15 U.S.C. 1391) are used 
in their statutory meaning.
    (b) Motor Vehicle Safety Standard definitions. Unless otherwise 
indicated, all terms used in this part that are defined in the Motor 
Vehicle Safety Standards, part 571 of this subchapter (hereinafter ``the 
Standards''), are used as defined in the Standards.
    (c) Definitions used in this part.
    Child restraint system is used as defined in S4 of 49 CFR 571.213, 
Child Restraint Systems.
    Factory-installed built-in child restraint system is used as defined 
in S4 of 49 CFR 571.213.
    Owners include purchasers.
    Registration form means the form provided with a child restraint 
system in compliance with the requirements of 49 CFR 571.213, and any 
communication from an owner of a child restraint to the manufacturer 
that provides the restraint's model name or number and the owner's name 
and mailing address.



Sec.  588.5  Records.

    Each manufacturer, or manufacturer's designee, shall record and 
maintain records of the owners of child restraint systems who have 
submitted a registration form. The record shall be in a form suitable 
for inspection such as computer information storage devices or card 
files, and shall include the names, mailing addresses, and if collected, 
se-mail addresses of the owners, and the model name or number and date 
of manufacture (month, year) of the owner's child restraint systems.

[70 FR 53579, Sept. 9, 2005]



Sec.  588.6  Record retention.

    Each manufacturer, or manufacturer's designee, shall maintain the 
information specified in Sec.  588.5 of this part for a registered 
restraint system for a period of not less than six years from the date 
of manufacture of that restraint system.

                        PARTS 589	590 [RESERVED]



PART 591_IMPORTATION OF VEHICLES AND EQUIPMENT SUBJECT TO FEDERAL 
SAFETY, BUMPER AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS--Table of Contents




Sec.
591.1 Scope.
591.2 Purpose.
591.3 Applicability.
591.4 Definitions.
591.5 Declarations required for importation.
591.6 Documents accompanying declarations.
591.7 Restrictions on importations.
591.8 Conformance bond and conditions.
591.9 Petitions for remission or mitigation of forfeiture.
591.10 Offer of cash deposits or obligations of the United States in 
          lieu of sureties on bonds.

Appendix A to Part 591--Section 591.5(f) Bond for the Entry of a Single 
          Vehicle
Appendix B to Part 591--Section 591.5(f) Bond for the Entry of More Than 
          a Single Vehicle
Appendix C to Part 591--Power of Attorney and Agreement

    Authority: Pub. L. 100-562, 49 U.S.C. 322(a), 30117, 30141-30147; 
delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.

    Source: 54 FR 40078, Sept. 29, 1989, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  591.1  Scope.

    This part establishes procedures governing the importation of motor 
vehicles and motor vehicle equipment subject to the Federal motor 
vehicle safety, bumper, and theft prevention standards.

[55 FR 11378, Mar. 28, 1990]



Sec.  591.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to ensure that motor vehicles and motor 
vehicle equipment permanently imported into the United States conform 
with theft prevention standards issued under part 541 of this chapter 
and that they conform with, or are brought into conformity with, all 
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standards issued under part 571 
of this chapter and

[[Page 307]]

bumper standards issued under part 581 of this chapter. The purpose of 
this part is also to ensure that nonconforming vehicles and equipment 
items imported on a temporary basis are ultimately either exported or 
abandoned to the United States.

[55 FR 11378, Mar. 28, 1990]



Sec.  591.3  Applicability.

    This part applies to any person offering a motor vehicle or item of 
motor vehicle equipment for importation into the United States.

[55 FR 11378, Mar. 28, 1990]



Sec.  591.4  Definitions.

    All terms used in this part that are defined in 49 U.S.C. 30102, 
32101, 32301, 32502, and 33101 are used as defined in those sections 
except that the term ``model year'' is used as defined in part 593 of 
this chapter.
    Administrator means the Administrator of NHTSA.
    NHTSA means the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of 
the Department of Transportation.
    Dutiable value means entered value, as determined by the Secretary 
of the Treasury.
    Original manufacturer means the entity responsible for the original 
manufacture or assembly of a motor vehicle, and does not include any 
person (other than such entity) who converts the motor vehicle after its 
manufacture to conformance with the Federal motor vehicle safety 
standards.
    Reconstructed motor vehicle means a motor vehicle whose body is less 
than 25 years old and which is mounted on a chassis or frame that is not 
its original chassis or frame and that is less than 25 years old.
    Salvage motor vehicle means a motor vehicle, whether or not 
repaired, which has been:
    (1) Wrecked, destroyed, or damaged, to the extent that the total 
estimated or actual cost of parts and labor to rebuild or reconstruct 
the motor vehicle to its pre-accident condition and for legal operation 
on the streets, roads, or highways, exceeds 75 percent of its retail 
value at the time it was wrecked, destroyed, or damaged; or
    (2) Wrecked, destroyed, or damaged, to which an insurance company 
acquires ownership pursuant to a damage settlement (other than a damage 
settlement in connection with a recovered theft vehicle unless such 
motor vehicle sustained sufficient damage to meet the 75 percent 
threshold specified in the first sentence); or
    (3) Voluntarily designated as such by its owner, without regard to 
the extent of the motor vehicle's damage and repairs.

[54 FR 40078, Sept. 29, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 3747, Feb. 5, 1990; 55 
FR 11378, Mar. 28, 1990; 59 FR 52097, Oct. 14, 1994; 60 FR 57954, Nov. 
24, 1995; 69 FR 52092, Aug. 24, 2004]



Sec.  591.5  Declarations required for importation.

    No person shall import a motor vehicle or item of motor vehicle 
equipment into the United States unless, at the time it is offered for 
importation, its importer files a declaration, in duplicate, which 
declares one of the following:
    (a)(1) The vehicle was not manufactured primarily for use on the 
public roads and thus is not a motor vehicle subject to the Federal 
motor vehicle safety, bumper, and theft prevention standards; or
    (2) The equipment item is not a system, part, or component of a 
motor vehicle and thus is not an item of motor vehicle equipment subject 
to the Federal motor vehicle safety, bumper, and theft prevention 
standards.
    (b) The vehicle or equipment item conforms with all applicable 
safety standards (or the vehicle does not conform solely because readily 
attachable equipment items which will be attached to it before it is 
offered for sale to the first purchases for purposes other than resale 
are not attached), and bumper and theft prevention standards, and bears 
a certification label or tag to that effect permanently affixed by the 
original manufacturer to the vehicle, or by the manufacturer to the 
equipment item or its delivery container, in accordance with, as 
applicable, parts 541, 555, 567, 568, and 581, or 571 (for certain 
equipment items) of this chapter.
    (c) The vehicle or equipment item does not comply with all 
applicable

[[Page 308]]

Federal motor vehicle safety, bumper, and theft prevention standards, 
but is intended solely for export, and the vehicle or equipment item, 
and the outside of the container of the equipment item, if any, bears a 
label or tag to that effect.
    (d) The vehicle does not conform with all applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety, bumper, and theft prevention standards, but the importer 
is eligible to import it because:
    (1) (S)he is a nonresident of the United States and the vehicle is 
registered in a country other than the United States,
    (2) (S)he is temporarily importing the vehicle for personal use for 
a period not to exceed one year, and will not sell it during that time,
    (3) (S)he will export it not later than the end of one year after 
entry, and
    (4) The declaration contains the importer's passport number and 
country of issue.
    (e) The vehicle or equipment item requires further manufacturing 
operations to perform its intended function, other than the addition of 
readily attachable equipment items such as mirrors, wipers, or tire and 
rim assemblies, or minor finishing operations such as painting, and any 
part of such vehicle that is required to be marked by part 541 of this 
chapter is marked in accordance with that part.
    (f) The vehicle does not conform with all applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety and bumper standards (but does conform with all 
applicable Federal theft prevention standards), but the importer is 
eligible to import it because:
    (1) The importer has furnished a bond in an amount equal to 150% of 
the dutiable value of the vehicle, containing the terms and conditions 
specified in section 591.8; and
    (2)(i) The importer has registered with NHTSA pursuant to part 592 
of this chapter, and such registration has not been revoked or 
suspended, and the Administrator has determined pursuant to part 593 of 
this chapter that the model and model year of the vehicle to be imported 
is eligible for importation into the United States; or
    (ii) The importer has executed a contract or other agreement with an 
importer who has registered with NHTSA pursuant to part 592 of this 
chapter and whose registration has not been suspended or revoked; and 
the Administrator has determined pursuant to part 593 of this chapter 
that the model and model year of the vehicle to be imported is eligible 
for importation into the United States; and
    (3) The vehicle is not a salvage motor vehicle or a reconstructed 
motor vehicle.
    (g) (For importations for personal use only) The vehicle was 
certified by its original manufacturer as complying with all applicable 
Canadian motor vehicle safety standards and its original manufacturer 
has informed NHTSA that it complies with all applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety, bumper, and theft prevention standards, or that it 
complies with all such standards except for the labeling requirements of 
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Nos. 101 and 110 or 120, and/or 
the specifications of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 108 
relating to daytime running lamps. The vehicle is not a salvage motor 
vehicle, a repaired salvage motor vehicle, or a reconstructed motor 
vehicle.
    (h) The vehicle does not conform with all applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety, bumper, and theft prevention standards, but the importer 
is eligible to import it because (s)he:
    (1)(i) Is a member of the personnel of a foreign government on 
assignment in the United States, or a member of the Secretariat of a 
public international organization so designated under the International 
Organization Immunities Act, and within the class of persons for whom 
free entry of motor vehicles has been authorized by the Department of 
State;
    (ii) Is importing the motor vehicle on a temporary basis for the 
personal use of the importer, and will register it through the Office of 
Foreign Missions of the Department of State;
    (iii) Will not sell the vehicle to any person in the United States, 
other than a person eligible to import a vehicle under this paragraph; 
and
    (iv) Will obtain from the Office of Foreign Missions of the 
Department of State, before departing the United States at the 
conclusion of a tour of

[[Page 309]]

duty, an ownership title to the vehicle good for export only; or
    (2)(i) Is a member of the armed forces of a foreign country on 
assignment in the United States;
    (ii) Is importing the vehicle on a temporary basis, and for the 
personal use of the importer;
    (iii) Will not sell the vehicle to any person in the United States, 
other than to a person eligible to import a vehicle under this 
subsection; and
    (iv) Will export the vehicle upon departing the United States at the 
conclusion of a tour of duty.
    (i)(1) The vehicle is 25 or more years old.
    (2) The equipment item was manufactured on a date when no applicable 
safety or theft prevention standard was in effect.
    (j)(1) The vehicle or equipment item does not conform with all 
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper standards, but is 
being imported solely for the purpose of:
    (i) Research;
    (ii) Investigations;
    (iii) Show or display;
    (iv) Demonstrations or training; or
    (v) Competitive racing events;
    (2)(i) The importer has received written permission from NHTSA; or
    (ii) The importer is an original manufacturer of motor vehicles (or 
a wholly owned subsidiary thereof) that are certified to comply with all 
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standards; and
    (3) The importer will provide the Administrator with documentary 
proof of export or destruction not later than 30 days following the end 
of the period for which the vehicle has been admitted into the United 
States.
    (k) The equipment item is subject to the theft prevention standard, 
and is marked in accordance with the requirements of part 541 of this 
chapter.

[54 FR 40078, Sept. 29, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 3747, Feb. 5, 1990; 55 
FR 11378, Mar. 28, 1990; 55 FR 17439, Apr. 25, 1990; 57 FR 2047, Jan. 
17, 1992; 57 FR 44703, Sept. 29, 1992; 59 FR 31560, June 20, 1994; 64 FR 
37882, July 14, 1999; 69 FR 52092, Aug. 24, 2004]



Sec.  591.6  Documents accompanying declarations.

    Declarations of eligibility for importation made pursuant to Sec.  
591.5 must be accompanied by the following certification and documents, 
where applicable.
    (a) A declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(a) shall be 
accompanied by a statement substantiating that the vehicle was not 
manufactured for use on the public roads, or that the equipment item was 
not manufactured for use on a motor vehicle or is not an item of motor 
vehicle equipment.
    (b) A declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(e) shall be 
accompanied by:
    (1) (For a motor vehicle) a document meeting the requirements of 
Sec.  568.4 of part 568 of this chapter.
    (2) (For an item of motor vehicle equipment) a written statement 
issued by the manufacturer of the equipment item which states the 
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standard(s) with which the 
equipment item is not in compliance, and which describes the further 
manufacturing required for the equipment item to perform its intended 
function.
    (c) A declaration made pursuant to paragraph (f) of Sec.  591.5, and 
under a bond for the entry of a single vehicle, shall be accompanied by 
a bond in the form shown in appendix A to this part, in an amount equal 
to 150% of the dutiable value of the vehicle, or, if under bond for the 
entry of more than one vehicle, shall be accompanied by a bond in the 
form shown in appendix B to this part and by Customs Form CF 7501, for 
the conformance of the vehicle(s) with all applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety and bumper standards, or, if conformance is not achieved, 
for the delivery of such vehicles to the Secretary of Homeland Security 
for export at no cost to the United Sates, or for its abandonment.
    (d) A declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(f) by an importer who 
is not a Registered Importer shall be accompanied by a copy of the 
contract or other agreement that the importer has with a Registered 
Importer to bring the vehicle into conformance with all applicable 
Federal motor vehicle safety standards.

[[Page 310]]

    (e) A declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(h) shall be 
accompanied by a copy of the importer's official orders, or, if a 
qualifying member of the personnel of a foreign government on assignment 
in the United States, the name of the embassy to which the importer is 
accredited.
    (f) A declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(j) shall be 
accompanied by the following documentation:
    (1) A declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(j)(1)(i), (ii), (iv), 
or (v) and (j)(2)(i) shall be accompanied by a letter from the 
Administrator authorizing importation pursuant to Sec.  591.5(j)(1)(i), 
(ii), (iv), or (v) and (j)(2)(i). Any person seeking to import a motor 
vehicle or motor vehicle equipment pursuant to these sections shall 
submit, in advance of such importation, a written request to the 
Administrator containing a full and complete statement identifying the 
vehicle or equipment, its make, model, model year or date of 
manufacture, VIN if a motor vehicle, and the specific purpose(s) of 
importation. The discussion of purpose(s) shall include a description of 
the use to be made of the vehicle or equipment. If use on the public 
roads is an integral part of the purpose for which the vehicle or 
equipment is imported, the statement shall request permission for use on 
the public roads, describing the purpose which makes such use necessary, 
and stating the estimated period of time during which use of the vehicle 
or equipment on the public roads is necessary. The request shall also 
state the intended means of final disposition, and disposition date, of 
the vehicle or equipment after completion of the purposes for which it 
is imported. The request shall be addressed to Director, Office of 
Vehicle Safety Compliance (NSA-32), National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration, Room 6111, 400 Seventh Street, SW, Washington, DC 20590.
    (2) A declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(j)(1)(iii) and 
(j)(2)(i) shall be accompanied by a letter from the Administrator 
authorizing importation pursuant to Sec.  591.5(j)(1)(iii) and 
(j)(2)(i). Any person seeking to import a motor vehicle or motor vehicle 
equipment pursuant to those sections shall submit, in advance of such 
importation, a written request to the Administrator containing a full 
and complete statement identifying the equipment item or the vehicle and 
its make, model, model year or date of manufacture, VIN, and mileage at 
the time the request is made. The importer's written request to the 
Administrator shall explain why the vehicle or equipment item is of 
historical or technological interest. The importer shall also provide a 
statement that, until the vehicle is not less than 25 years old, (s)he 
shall not sell, or transfer possession of, or title to, the vehicle, and 
shall not license it for use, or operate it on the public roads, except 
under such terms and conditions as the Administrator may authorize. If 
the importer wishes to operate the vehicle on the public roads, the 
request to the Administrator shall include a description of the purposes 
for which (s)he wishes to use it on the public roads, a copy of an 
insurance policy or a contract to acquire an insurance policy, which 
contains as a condition thereof that the vehicle will not accumulate 
mileage of more than 2,500 miles in any 12-month period and a statement 
that the importer shall maintain such policy in effect until the vehicle 
is not less than 25 years old, a statement that the importer will allow 
the Administrator to inspect the vehicle at any time after its 
importation to verify that the accumulated mileage of the vehicle is not 
more than 2,500 miles in any 12-month period, and a statement that the 
vehicle will not be used on the public roads unless it is in compliance 
with the regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency.
    (3) A declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(j)(2)(ii) shall be 
accompanied by the written statement of its importer describing the use 
to be made of the vehicle or equipment item. If use on the public roads 
is an integral part of the purpose for which the vehicle or equipment 
item is imported, the statement shall describe the purpose which makes 
such use necessary, state the estimated period of time during which use 
of the vehicle or equipment item on the public roads is necessary, and 
state the intended means of final disposition (and disposition date) of 
the vehicle or

[[Page 311]]

equipment item after completion of the purpose for which it is imported.

[54 FR 40078, Sept. 29, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 3747, Feb. 5, 1990; 55 
FR 6994, Feb. 28, 1990; 55 FR 11379, Mar. 28, 1990; 57 FR 2047, Jan. 17, 
1992; 57 FR 29043, June 30, 1992; 58 FR 12908, Mar. 8, 1993; 59 FR 
52097, Oct. 14, 1994; 60 FR 57954, Nov. 24, 1995; 64 FR 37883, July 14, 
1999; 69 FR 52092, Aug. 24, 2004]



Sec.  591.7  Restrictions on importations.

    (a) A vehicle or equipment item which has entered the United States 
under a declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(j), and for which a 
Temporary Importation Bond has been provided to the Secretary of the 
Treasury, shall not remain in the United States for a period that 
exceeds 3 years from its date of entry.
    (b) If the importer of a vehicle or equipment item under Sec.  
591.5(j) does not intend to export or destroy the vehicle or equipment 
item not later than 3 years after the date of entry, and intends to pay 
duty to the U.S. Customs Service on such vehicle or equipment item, the 
importer shall request permission in writing from the Administrator for 
the vehicle or equipment item to remain in the United States for an 
additional period of time not to exceed 5 years from the date of entry. 
Such a request must be received not later than 60 days before the date 
that is 3 years after the date of entry. Such vehicle or equipment item 
shall not remain in the United States for a period that exceeds 5 years 
from the date of entry, unless further written permission has been 
obtained from the Administrator.
    (c) An importer of a vehicle which has entered the United States 
under a declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(j)(2)(i) shall not 
sell, or transfer possession of, or title to, the vehicle, and shall not 
license it for use, or operate it on the public roads, except under such 
terms and conditions as the Administrator may authorize in writing. An 
importer of a vehicle which has entered the United States under a 
declaration made pursuant to Sec.  591.5(j)(2)(ii) shall at all times 
retain title to it.
    (d) Any violation of a term or condition imposed by the 
Administrator in a letter authorizing importation for on-road use under 
Sec.  591.5(j), or a change of status under paragraph (e) of this 
section, including a failure to allow inspection upon request to verify 
that the accumulated mileage of the vehicle is not more than 2,500 miles 
in any 12-month period, shall be considered a violation of 49 U.S.C. 
30112(a) for which a civil penalty may be imposed. Such a violation will 
also act to void the authorization and require the exportation of the 
vehicle. With respect to importations under Sec.  591.6(f)(2) or a 
change of status to an importation for show or display as provided under 
paragraph (e) of this section, if the Administrator has reason to 
believe that a violation has occurred, the Administrator may tentatively 
conclude that a term of entry has been violated, but shall make no final 
conclusion until the importer or owner has been afforded an opportunity 
to present data, views, and arguments as to why there is no violation or 
why a penalty should not be imposed.
    (e) If the importer of a vehicle under Sec.  591.5(f)(2)(ii) has 
been notified in writing by the Registered Importer with which it has 
executed a contract or other agreement that the registration of the 
Registered Importer has been suspended (for other than the first time) 
or revoked, pursuant to Sec.  592.7 of this chapter, and that it has not 
affixed a certification label on the vehicle and/or filed a 
certification of conformance with the Administrator as required by Sec.  
592.6 of this chapter, and that it therefore may not release the vehicle 
for the importer, the importer shall execute a contract or other 
agreement with another Registered Importer for the certification of the 
vehicle and submission of the certification of conformance to the 
Administrator. The Administrator shall toll the 120-day period for 
submission of a certification to the Administrator pursuant to Sec.  
592.6(d) of this chapter during the period from the date of the 
Registered Importer's notification to the importer until the date of the 
contract with the substitute Registered Importer.

[54 FR 40078, Sept. 29, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 6994, Feb. 28, 1990; 
57 FR 2047, Jan. 17, 1992; 58 FR 12908, Mar. 8, 1993; 59 FR 31560, June 
20, 1994; 64 FR 37883, July 14, 1999; 69 FR 52092, Aug. 24, 2004]

[[Page 312]]



Sec.  591.8  Conformance bond and conditions.

    (a) The bond required under section 591.6(c) for importation of a 
vehicle not originally manufactured to conform with all applicable 
standards issued under part 571 and part 581 of this chapter shall cover 
only one motor vehicle, and shall be in an amount equal to 150% of the 
dutiable value of the vehicle. However, a registered importer may enter 
vehicles under a bond of a continuing nature that covers an indefinite 
number of motor vehicles 150% of whose total dutiable value at any point 
in time does not exceed $1,000,000.
    (b) The principal on the bond shall be the importer of the vehicle.
    (c) The surety on the bond shall possess a certificate of authority 
to underwrite Federal bonds. (See list of certificated sureties at 54 FR 
27800, June 30, 1989)
    (d) In consideration of the release from the custody of the Bureau 
of Customs and Border Protection, or the withdrawal from a Customs 
bonded warehouse into the commerce of, or for consumption in, the United 
States, of a motor vehicle not originally manufactured to conform to 
applicable standards issued under part 571 and part 581 of this chapter, 
the obligors (principal and surety) shall agree to the following 
conditions of the bond:
    (1) To have such vehicle brought into conformity with all applicable 
standards issued under part 571 and part 581 of this chapter within the 
number of days after the date of entry that the Administrator has 
established for such vehicle (to wit, 120 days);
    (2) In the case of a vehicle imported pursuant to section 591.5(f), 
to file (or if not a Registered Importer, to cause the Registered 
Importer of the vehicle to file) with the Administrator, a certificate 
that the vehicle complies with each Federal motor vehicle safety and 
bumper standard in the year that the vehicle was manufactured and which 
applies in such year to the vehicle; or
    (3) In the case of a Registered Importer, not to release custody of 
the vehicle to any person for license or registration for use on public 
roads, streets, or highways, or license or register the vehicle from the 
date of entry until 30 calendar days after it has certified compliance 
of the vehicle to the Administrator, unless the Administrator has 
notified the principal before 30 calendar days that (s)he has accepted 
the certification, and that the vehicle and bond may be released, except 
that no such release shall be permitted, before or after the 30th 
calendar day, if the principal has received written notice from the 
Administrator that an inspection of the vehicle will be required or that 
there is reason to believe that such certification is false or contains 
a misrepresentation;
    (4) In the case of a Registered Importer, to cause the vehicle to be 
available for inspection, if the principal has received written notice 
from the Administrator that an inspection is required.
    (5) In the case of a Registered Importer, not to release the vehicle 
until the Administrator is satisfied with the certification and any 
modification thereof, if the principal has received written notice from 
the Administrator that there is reason to believe that the certification 
is false or contains a misrepresentation.
    (6) If the principal has received written notice from the 
Administrator that the vehicle has been found not to comply with all 
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper standards, and 
written demand that the vehicle be abandoned to the United States, or 
delivered to the Secretary of Homeland Security for export (at no cost 
to the United States), or to abandon the vehicle to the United States, 
or to deliver the vehicle, or cause the vehicle to be delivered to, the 
custody of the Bureau of Customs and Border Protection at the port of 
entry listed above, or to any other port of entry, and to secure all 
documents necessary for exportation of the vehicle from the United 
States at no cost to the United States, or in default of abandonment or 
redelivery after prior notice by the Administrator to the principal, to 
pay to the Administrator the amount of the bond.
    (e) If the principal defaults on the obligation of paragraph (d)(6) 
of this section, to abandon the vehicle to the United States or to 
redeliver the vehicle to the custody of a District Director of Customs 
and to execute all documents necessary for its exportation,

[[Page 313]]

the obligors shall pay to the Administrator the amount of the bond given 
under the provisions of this section.

[55 FR 11379, Mar. 28, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 31560, June 20, 1994; 
69 FR 52092, Aug. 24, 2004]



Sec.  591.9  Petitions for remission or mitigation of forfeiture.

    (a) After a bond has been forfeited, a principal and/or a surety may 
petition for remission of forfeiture. A principal and/or surety may 
petition for mitigation of forfeiture only if the motor vehicle has been 
imported pursuant to paragraph 591.5(f) and the condition not met 
relates to the compliance of a passenger motor vehicle with part 581 of 
this chapter.
    (b) A petition for remission or mitigation shall:
    (1) Be addressed to the Administrator, identified as either a 
petition for remission or for mitigation, submitted in triplicate, and 
signed by the principal and/or the surety.
    (2) State the make, model, model year, and VIN of the vehicle 
involved, and contain the Customs Entry number under which the vehicle 
entered the United States.
    (3) State the facts and circumstances relied on by the petitioner to 
justify remission or mitigation.
    (4) Be filed within 30 days from the date of the mailing of the 
notice of forfeiture incurred.
    (c) A false statement contained in a petition may subject the 
petitioner to prosecution under the provisions of 18 U.S.C. 1001.
    (d) If the Administrator finds that all conditions of the bond have, 
in fact, been fulfilled, the forfeiture is remitted.
    (e) A decision to mitigate a forfeiture upon condition that a stated 
amount is paid shall be effective for not more than 60 days from the 
date of notice to the petitioner of such decision. If payment of the 
stated amount is not made, or arrangements made for delayed or 
installment payment, the full claim of forfeiture shall be deemed 
applicable. The Administrator shall collect the claim, or, if unable to 
collect the claim within 120 days, shall refer the matter to the 
Department of Justice.

[55 FR 11380, Mar. 28, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 31560, June 20, 1994]



Sec.  591.10  Offer of cash deposits or obligations of the United 
States in lieu of sureties on bonds.

    (a) In lieu of sureties on any bond required under Sec.  591.6(c), 
an importer may offer United States money, United States bonds (except 
for savings bonds), United States certificates of indebtedness, Treasury 
notes, or Treasury bills in an amount equal to the amount of the bond.
    (b) At the time the importer deposits any obligation of the United 
States, other than United States money, with the Administrator, (s)he 
shall deliver a duly executed power of attorney and agreement, in the 
form shown in appendix C to this part, authorizing the Administrator or 
delegate of the Administrator, in case of any default in the performance 
of any of the conditions of the bond, to sell the obligation so 
deposited, and to apply the proceeds of sale, in whole or in part, to 
the satisfaction of any penalties for violations of 49 U.S.C. 30112 and 
49 U.S.C. 32506 arising by reasons of default.
    (c) If the importer deposits money of the United States with the 
Administrator, the Administrator, or delegate of the Administrator, may 
apply the cash, in whole or in part, to the satisfaction of any 
penalties for violations of 49 U.S.C. 30112 and 49 U.S.C. 32506 arising 
by reason of default.

[58 FR 12908, Mar. 8, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 52097, Oct. 14, 1994]



 Sec. Appendix A to Part 591--Section 591.5(f) Bond for the Entry of a 
                             Single Vehicle

                      Department of Transportation

             National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

BOND TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND BUMPER 
                                STANDARDS

(To redeliver vehicle, to produce documents, to perform conditions of 
release such as to bring vehicle into conformance with all applicable 
Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper standards)


[[Page 314]]


    Know All Men by These Presents That (principal's name, mailing 
address which includes city, state, ZIP code, and state of incorporation 
if a corporation), as principal, and (surety's name, mailing address 
which includes city, state, ZIP code and state of incorporation), as 
surety, are held and firmly bound unto the UNITED STATES OF AMERICA in 
the sum of (bond amount in words) dollars ($ (bond amount in numbers)), 
which represents 150% of the entered value of the following described 
motor vehicle, as determined by the Bureau of Customs and Border 
Protection: (make, model, model year, and VIN) for the payment of which 
we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, and assigns (jointly and 
severally), firmly bound by these presents.

WITNESS our hands and seals this------day of------, 20----.

WHEREAS, motor vehicles may be entered under the provisions of 49 U.S.C. 
Chapters 301 and 325; and DOT Form HS-7 ``Declaration;''

WHEREAS, pursuant to 49 CFR part 591, a regulation promulgated under the 
provisions of 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301, the above-bounden principal desires 
to import permanently the motor vehicle described above, which is a 
motor vehicle that was not originally manufactured to conform to the 
Federal motor vehicle safety or bumper standards; and

WHEREAS, pursuant to 49 CFR part 592, a regulation promulgated under the 
provisions of 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301, the above-bounden principal has 
been granted the status of Registered Importer of motor vehicles not 
originally manufactured to conform to the Federal motor vehicle safety 
and bumper standards (or, if not a Registered Importer, has a contract 
with a Registered Importer covering the vehicle described above); and

WHEREAS, pursuant to 49 CFR part 593, a regulation promulgated under 49 
U.S.C. Chapter 301, the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration has decided that the motor vehicle described above 
is eligible for importation into the United States; and

WHEREAS, the motor vehicle described above has been imported at the port 
of ----------, and entered at said port for consumption on entry No.----
--, dated------, 20----;

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT--
    (1) The above-bounden principal (the ``principal''), in 
consideration of the permanent admission into the United States of the 
motor vehicle described above (the ``vehicle''), voluntarily undertakes 
and agrees to have such vehicle brought into conformity with all 
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper standards within a 
reasonable time after such importation, as specified by the 
Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (the 
``Administrator'');
    (2) The principal shall then file, or if not a Registered Importer, 
shall then cause the Registered Importer of the vehicle to file, with 
the Administrator, a certificate that the vehicle complies with each 
Federal motor vehicle safety standard in the year that the vehicle was 
manufactured and which applies in such year to the vehicle, and that the 
vehicle complies with the Federal bumper standard (if applicable);
    (3) The principal, if a Registered Importer, shall not release 
custody of the vehicle to any person for license or registration for use 
on public roads, streets, or highways, or license or register the 
vehicle from the date of entry until 30 calendar days after it has 
certified compliance of the vehicle to the Administrator, unless the 
Administrator notifies the principal before 30 calendar days that (s)he 
has accepted such certification and the vehicle and bond may be 
released, except that no such release shall be permitted, before or 
after the 30th calendar day, if the principal has received written 
notice from the Administrator that an inspection of such vehicle will be 
required, or that there is reason to believe that such certification is 
false or contains a misrepresentation.
    (4) And if the principal has received written notice from the 
Administrator that an inspection is required, the principal shall cause 
the vehicle to be available for inspection, and the vehicle and bond 
shall be promptly released after completion of an inspection showing no 
failure to comply. However, if the inspection shows a failure to comply, 
the vehicle and bond shall not be released until such time as the 
failure to comply ceases to exist;
    (5) And if the principal has received written notice from the 
Administrator that there is reason to believe that the certificate is 
false or contains a misrepresentation, the vehicle or bond shall not be 
released until the Administrator is satisfied with the certification and 
any modification thereof;
    (6) And if the principal has received written notice from the 
Administrator that the vehicle has been found not to comply with all 
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper standards, and 
written demand that the vehicle be abandoned to the United States, or 
delivered to the Secretary of Homeland Security for export (at no cost 
to the United States), the principal shall abandon the vehicle to the 
United States, or shall deliver the vehicle, or cause the vehicle to be 
delivered to, the custody of the Bureau of Customs and Border Protection 
at the port of entry listed above, or any other port of entry, and shall 
execute all documents necessary for exportation of the vehicle from the 
United States, at no cost to the United

[[Page 315]]

States; or in default of abandonment or redelivery after proper notice 
by the Administrator to the principal, the principal shall pay to the 
Administrator the amount of this obligation;
    Then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in 
full force and effect.

Signed, sealed, and delivered in the presence of--

________________________________________________________________________

Name Address
--------------(SEAL)
(Principal)

________________________________________________________________________

Name Address

________________________________________________________________________

Name Address
--------------(SEAL)
(Surety)

________________________________________________________________________

Name Address

                  CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL

    I, ------------ certify that I am the -------- of the corporation 
named as principal in the within bond; that ----------, who signed the 
bond on behalf of the principal, was then -------------- of said 
corporation; that I know his/her signature, and his/her signature 
thereto is genuine; and that said bond was duly signed, sealed, and 
attested for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its 
governing body.
--------------[Corporate Seal]
    To be used when a power of attorney has been filed with NHTSA. May 
be executed by secretary, assistant secretary, or other officer.

[55 FR 11380, Mar. 28, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 52097, Oct. 14, 1994; 
69 FR 52093, Aug. 24, 2004]



  Sec. Appendix B to Part 591--Section 591.5 (f) Bond for the Entry of 
                       More Than a Single Vehicle

                      Department of Transportation

             National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

BOND TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND BUMPER 
                                STANDARDS

(To redeliver vehicles, to produce documents, to perform conditions of 
release such as to bring vehicles into conformance with all applicable 
Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper standards)

    Know All Men by These Presents That (principal's name, mailing 
address which includes city, state, ZIP code, and state of incorporation 
if a corporation), as principal, and (surety's name, mailing address 
which includes city, state, ZIP code and state of incorporation) as 
surety, are held and firmly bound unto the UNITED STATES OF AMERICA in 
the sum of (bond amount in words) dollars ($ (bond amount in numbers)), 
which represents 150% of the entered value of the following described 
motor vehicle, as determined by the Bureau of Customs and Border 
Protection (make, model, model year, and VIN of each vehicle) for the 
payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, and assigns 
(jointly and severally), firmly bound by these presents.

WITNESS our hands and seals this ------ day of ------, 20----.

WHEREAS, motor vehicles may be entered under the provisions of 49 U.S.C. 
Chapters 301 and 325; and DOT Form HS-7 ``Declaration,''

WHEREAS, pursuant to 49 CFR part 591, a regulation promulgated under the 
provisions of 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301, the above-bounden principal desires 
to import permanently the motor vehicles described above, which are 
motor vehicles that were not originally manufactured to conform to the 
Federal motor vehicle safety, or bumper, or theft prevention standards; 
and

WHEREAS, pursuant to 49 CFR part 592, a regulation promulgated under the 
provisions of 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301, the above-bounden principal has 
been granted the status of Registered Importer of motor vehicles not 
originally manufactured to conform to the Federal motor vehicle safety, 
bumper, and theft prevention standards; and

WHEREAS, pursuant to 49 CFR part 593, a regulation promulgated under 49 
U.S.C. Chapter 301, the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration has decided that each motor vehicle described 
above is eligible for importation into the United States; and

WHEREAS, the motor vehicles described above have been imported at the 
port of ------, and entered at said port for consumption on entry No. --
------, dated ------------------ --, 20----;

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT--
    (1) The above-bounden principal (``the principal''), in 
consideration of the permanent admission into the United States of the 
motor vehicles described above, voluntarily undertakes and agrees to 
have such vehicles brought into conformity with all applicable Federal 
motor vehicle safety and bumper standards within a reasonable time after 
such importation, as specified by the Administrator of the National 
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (the ``Administrator'');

[[Page 316]]

    (2) For each vehicle described above (``such vehicle''), the 
principal shall then file, with the Administrator, a certificate that 
such vehicle complies with each Federal motor vehicle safety standard in 
the year that such vehicle was manufactured and which applies in such 
year to such vehicle, and that such vehicle complies with the Federal 
bumper standard (if applicable);
    (3) The principal shall not release custody of any vehicle to any 
person, or license or register the vehicle, from the date of entry until 
30 calendar days after it has certified compliance of such vehicle to 
the Administrator, unless the Administrator notifies the principal 
before 30 days that (s)he has accepted such certification and such 
vehicle and all liability under this bond for such vehicle may be 
released, except that no such release shall be permitted, before or 
after the 30th calendar day, if the principal has received written 
notice from the Administrator that an inspection of such vehicle will be 
required, or that there is reason to believe that such certification is 
false or contains a misrepresentation.
    (4) And if the principal has received written notice from the 
Administrator that an inspection of such vehicle is required, the 
principal shall cause such vehicle to be available for inspection, and 
such vehicle and all liability under this bond for such vehicle shall be 
promptly released after completion of an inspection showing no failure 
to comply. However, if the inspection shows a failure to comply, such 
vehicle and all liability under this bond for such vehicle shall not be 
released until such time as the failure to comply ceases to exist;
    (5) And if the principal has received written notice from the 
Administrator that there is reason to believe that such certificate is 
false or contains a misrepresentation, such vehicle and all liability 
under this bond for such vehicle shall not be released until the 
Administrator is satisfied with such certification and any modification 
thereof;
    (6) And if the principal has received written notice from the 
Administrator that such vehicle has been found not to comply with all 
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper standards, and 
written demand that such vehicle be abandoned to the United States, or 
delivered to the Secretary of Homeland Security for export (at no cost 
to the United States), the principal shall abandon such vehicle to the 
United States, or shall deliver such vehicle, or cause such vehicle to 
be delivered to, the custody of the Bureau of Customs and Border 
Protection at the port of entry listed above, or any other port of 
entry, and shall execute all documents necessary for exportation of such 
vehicle from the United States, at no cost to the United States; or in 
default of abandonment or redelivery after proper notice by the 
Administrator to the principal, the principal shall pay to the 
Administrator an amount equal to 150% of the entered value of such 
vehicle as determined by the Bureau of Customs and Border Protection;
    Then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in 
full force and effect. [At this point the terms agreed upon between the 
principal and surety for termination of the obligation may be entered]
    Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of

________________________________________________________________________

PRINCIPAL: (name and address)

________________________________________________________________________

(Signature) (SEAL)

________________________________________________________________________

(Printed name and title)

________________________________________________________________________

SURETY: (name and address)

________________________________________________________________________

(Signature)

________________________________________________________________________

(Printed name and title)

[60 FR 57954, Nov. 24, 1995, as amended at 69 FR 52093, Aug. 24, 2004]



      Sec. Appendix C to Part 591--Power of Attorney and Agreement

    -------------- does constitute and appoint the Administrator of the 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, United States Department 
of Transportation, or delegate, as attorney for the undersigned, for and 
in the name of the undersigned to collect or to sell, assign, and 
transfer the securities described below as follows:

Title
Matures
Int. Rate
Denom.
Serial 
Coupon/registered

    The securities having been deposited by it as security for the 
performance of the agreements undertaken in a bond with the United 
States, executed on the date of ---------- , ------, the terms and 
conditions of which are incorporated by reference into this power of 
attorney and agreement and made a part hereof. The undersigned agrees 
that in case of any default in the performance of any of the agreements 
the attorney shall have full power to collect the securities or any part 
thereof, or to sell, assign, and transfer the securities or any part 
thereof, or to sell, assign, and transfer the securities of any part 
thereof at public or private sale, without notice, free from any equity 
of redemption and without appraisement or valuation, notice

[[Page 317]]

and right to redeem being waived and to apply the proceeds of the sale 
or collection in whole or in part to the satisfaction of any obligation 
arising by reason of default. The undersigned further agrees that the 
authority granted by this agreement is irrevocable. The undersigned 
ratifies and confirms whatever the attorney shall do by virtue of this 
agreement.
    Witnessed and signed this ---------- day of ----------, ------.

________________________________________________________________________

    Before me, the undersigned, a notary public within and for the 
County of ------------ in the State of ------------, personally appeared 
-------------- and acknowledged the execution of the foregoing power of 
attorney.
    Witness my hand and notarial seal this ---------- day of ----------, 
199--.

[Notarial seal]

Notary Public ----------------

[58 FR 12909, Mar. 8, 1993]



PART 592_REGISTERED IMPORTERS OF VEHICLES NOT ORIGINALLY MANUFACTURED
TO CONFORM TO THE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS--Table of

Contents




Sec.
592.1 Scope.
592.2 Purpose.
592.3 Applicability.
592.4 Definitions.
592.5 Requirements for registration and its maintenance.
592.6 Duties of a registered importer.
592.7 Suspension, revocation, and reinstatement of suspended 
          registration.
592.8 Inspection; release of vehicle and bond.
592.9 Forfeiture of bond.

    Authority: Pub. L. 100-562, 49 U.S.C. 322(a), 30117, 30141-30147; 
delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.

    Source: 54 FR 40090, Sept. 29, 1989, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  592.1  Scope.

    This part establishes procedures under 49 U.S.C. 30141(c) for the 
registration of importers of motor vehicles that were not originally 
manufactured to comply with all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety 
standards. This part also establishes the duties of Registered 
Importers.

[59 FR 52098, Oct. 14, 1994]



Sec.  592.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to provide content and format 
requirements for persons who wish to register with the Administrator as 
importers of motor vehicles not originally manufactured to conform to 
all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standards, to provide 
procedures for the registration f importers and for the suspension, 
revocation and reinstatement of registration, and to set forth the 
duties required of Registered Importers.



Sec.  592.3  Applicability.

    This part applies to any person who wishes to register with the 
Administrator as an importer of nonconforming vehicles, and to any 
person who is registered as an importer.



Sec.  592.4  Definitions.

    All terms in this part that are defined in 49 U.S.C. 30102 and 30125 
are used as defined therein.
    Administrator means the Administrator, National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration.
    Independent insurance company means an entity that is registered 
with any State and authorized by that State to conduct an insurance 
business including the issuance or underwriting of a service insurance 
policy, none of whose affiliates, shareholders, officers, directors, or 
employees, or any person in affinity with such, is employed by, or has a 
financial interest in, or otherwise controls or participates in the 
business of, a Registered Importer to which it issues or underwrites a 
service insurance policy.
    NHTSA means the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
    Principal, with respect to a Registered Importer, means any officer 
of a corporation, a general partner of a partnership, or the sole 
proprietor of a sole proprietorship. The term includes a director of an 
incorporated Registered Importer, and any person whose ownership 
interest in a Registered Importer is 10% or more.
    Registered Importer means any person that the Administrator has 
registered as an importer pursuant to section 592.5(b).
    Safety recall means a notification and remedy campaign conducted 
pursuant

[[Page 318]]

to 49 U.S.C. 30118-30120 to address a noncompliance with a Federal motor 
vehicle safety standard or a defect that relates to motor vehicle 
safety.
    Service insurance policy means any policy issued or underwritten by 
an independent insurance company which covers a specific motor vehicle 
and guarantees that any noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle 
safety standard or defect related to motor vehicle safety determined to 
exist in that vehicle will be remedied without charge to the owner of 
the vehicle.

[54 FR 40090, Sept. 29, 1989, as amended at 59 FR 52098, Oct. 14, 1994; 
69 FR 52094, Aug. 24, 2004]



Sec.  592.5  Requirements for registration and its maintenance.

    (a) Any person wishing to register as an importer of motor vehicles 
not originally manufactured to conform to all applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety standards must file an application which:
    (1) Is headed with the words ``Application for Registration as 
Importer'', and submitted in three copies to: Administrator, National 
Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Room 6115, 400 7th Street SW., 
Washington, DC 20590, Attn: NEF-32 Importer Registration.
    (2) Is written in the English language.
    (3) Sets forth the full name, street address, and title of the 
person preparing the application, and the full name, street address, e-
mail address (if any), and telephone and facsimile machine (if any) 
numbers in the United States of the person for whom application is made 
(the ``applicant'').
    (4) Specifies the form of the applicant's organization (i.e., sole 
proprietorship, partnership, or corporation) and the State under which 
it is organized, and:
    (i) If the applicant is an individual, the application must include 
the full name, street address, and date of birth of the individual.
    (ii) If the applicant is a partnership, the application must include 
the full name, street address, and date of birth of each partner; if one 
or more of the partners is a limited partnership, the application must 
include the names and street addresses of the general partners and 
limited partners; if one or more of the partners is a corporation, the 
application must include the information specified by either paragraph 
(a)(4)(iii) or (iv) of this section, as applicable;
    (iii) If the applicant is a non-public corporation, the application 
must include the full name, street address, and date of birth of each 
officer, director, manager, and person who is authorized to sign 
documents on behalf of the corporation. The application must also 
include the name of any person who owns or controls 10 percent or more 
of the corporation. The applicant must also provide a statement issued 
by the Office of the Secretary of State, or other responsible official 
of the State in which the applicant is incorporated, certifying that the 
applicant is a corporation in good standing;
    (iv) If the applicant is a public corporation, the applicant must 
include a copy of its latest 10-K filing with the Securities and 
Exchange Commission, and provide the name and address of any person who 
is authorized to sign documents on behalf of the corporation;
    (v) Contains a statement that the applicant has never had a 
registration revoked pursuant to Sec.  592.7, nor is it, nor was it, 
directly or indirectly, owned or controlled by, or under common 
ownership or control with, a Registered Importer that has had a 
registration revoked pursuant to Sec.  592.7; and
    (vi) Identifies any shareholder, officer, director, employee, or any 
person in affinity with such, who has been previously affiliated with 
another Registered Importer in any capacity. If any such persons are 
identified, the applicant shall state the name of each such Registered 
Importer and the affiliation of any identified person.
    (5) Includes the following:
    (i) The street address and telephone number in the United States of 
each of its facilities for conformance, storage, and repair that the 
applicant will use to fulfill its duties as a Registered Importer and 
where the applicant will maintain the records it is required by this 
part to keep;
    (ii) The street address that the applicant designates as its mailing 
address (in addition, an applicant may list a

[[Page 319]]

post office box, provided that it is in the same city as the street 
address designated as its mailing address);
    (iii) A copy of the applicant's business license or other similar 
document issued by an appropriate State or local authority, authorizing 
it to do business as an importer, or modifier, or seller of motor 
vehicles, as applicable to the applicant and with respect to each 
facility that the applicant has identified pursuant to paragraph 
(a)(5)(i) of this section, or a statement by the applicant that it has 
made a bona fide inquiry and is not required by such State or local 
authority to have such a license or document;
    (iv) The name of each principal of the applicant whom the applicant 
authorizes to submit conformity certifications to NHTSA and the street 
address of the repair, storage, or conformance facility where each such 
principal will be located; and
    (v) If an applicant is a corporation not organized under the laws of 
a State of the United States, or is a sole proprietorship or partnership 
located outside the United States, the application must be accompanied 
by the applicant's designation of an agent for service of process in the 
form specified by Section 551.45 of this chapter.
    (6) Contains a statement that the applicant has never had a 
registration revoked pursuant to Sec.  592.7, nor is it or was it, 
directly or indirectly, owned or controlled by, or under common 
ownership or control with, a person who has had a registration revoked 
pursuant to Sec.  592.7.
    (7) Contains a certified check payable to the Treasurer of the 
United States, for the amount of the initial annual fee established 
pursuant to part 594 of this chapter.
    (8) Contains a copy of a contract to acquire, effective upon its 
registration as an importer, a prepaid mandatory service insurance 
policy underwritten by an independent insurance company, or a copy of 
such policy, in an amount that equals $2,000 for each motor vehicle for 
which the applicant will furnish a certificate of conformity to the 
Administrator, for the purpose of ensuring that the applicant will be 
able financially to remedy any noncompliance or safety related defect 
determined to exist in any such motor vehicle in accordance with part 
573 and part 577 of this chapter. If the application is accompanied by a 
copy of a contract to acquire such a policy, the applicant shall provide 
NHTSA with a copy of the policy within 10 days after it has been issued 
to the applicant.
    (9) Sets forth in full complete descriptive information, views, and 
arguments sufficient to establish that the applicant:
    (i) Is technically able to modify any nonconforming motor vehicle to 
conform to all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper 
standards, including but not limited to the professional qualifications 
of the applicant and its employees at the time of the application (such 
as whether any such persons have been certified as mechanics), and a 
description of their experience in conforming and repairing vehicles;
    (ii) Owns or leases one or more facilities sufficient in nature and 
size to repair, conform, and store the vehicles for which it provides 
certification of conformance to NHTSA and which it imports and may hold 
pending release of conformance bonds, including a copy of a deed or 
lease evidencing ownership or tenancy for each such facility, still or 
video photographs of each such facility, the street address and 
telephone number of each such facility;
    (iii) Is financially and technically able to provide notification of 
and to remedy a noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety 
standard or a defect related to motor vehicle safety determined to exist 
in the vehicles that it imports and/or for which it provides 
certification of conformity to NHTSA through repair, repurchase or 
replacement of such vehicles; and
    (iv) Is able to acquire and maintain information regarding the 
vehicles that it imported and the names and addresses of owners of the 
vehicles that it imported and/or for which it provided certifications of 
conformity to NHTSA in order to notify such owners when a noncompliance 
or a defect related to motor vehicle safety has been determined to exist 
in such vehicles.
    (10) Segregates and specifies any part of the information and data 
submitted under this part that the applicant

[[Page 320]]

wishes to have withheld from public disclosure in accordance with part 
512 of this chapter.
    (11) Contains the statement: ``I certify that I have read and 
understood the duties of a Registered Importer, as set forth in 49 CFR 
592.6, and that [name of applicant] will fully comply with each such 
duty. I further certify that all the information provided in this 
application is true and correct. I further certify that I understand 
that, in the event the registration for which it is applying is 
suspended or revoked, or lapses, [name of applicant] will remain 
obligated to notify owners and to remedy noncompliances or safety 
related defects, as required by 49 CFR 592.6(j), for each vehicle for 
which it has furnished a certificate of conformity to the 
Administrator.''
    (12) Has the applicant's signature acknowledged by a notary public.
    (b) If the application is incomplete, the Administrator notifies the 
applicant in writing of the information that is needed for the 
application to be complete and advises that no further action will be 
taken on the application until the applicant has furnished all the 
information needed.
    (c) If the Administrator deems it necessary for a determination upon 
the application, NHTSA conducts an inspection of the applicant. 
Subsequent to the inspection, NHTSA calculates the costs attributable to 
such inspection, and notifies the applicant in writing that such costs 
comprise a component of the initial annual fee and must be paid before a 
determination is made upon its application.
    (d) When the application is complete (and, if applicable, when the 
applicant has paid a sum representing the inspection component of the 
initial annual fee), the Administrator reviews the application and 
decides whether the applicant has complied with the requirements 
prescribed in paragraph (a) of this section. The Administrator shall 
base this decision on the application and upon any inspection NHTSA may 
have conducted of the applicant's conformance, storage, and 
recordkeeping facilities and any assessment of the applicant's 
personnel. If the Administrator decides that the applicant complies with 
the requirements, (s)he informs the applicant in writing and issues it a 
Registered Importer Number.
    (e)(1) The Administrator shall deny registration to any applicant 
who (s)he decides does not comply with the requirements of paragraph (a) 
of this section and to an applicant whose previous registration has been 
revoked. The Administrator also may deny registration to an applicant 
that is or was owned or controlled by, or under common ownership or 
control with, or in affinity with, a Registered Importer whose 
registration has been revoked. In determining whether to deny an 
application, the Administrator may consider whether the applicant is 
comprised in whole or in part of relatives, employees, major 
shareholders, partners, or relatives of former partners or major 
shareholders, of a Registered Importer whose registration was revoked.
    (2) If the Administrator denies an application, (s)he informs the 
applicant in writing of the reasons for denial and that the applicant is 
entitled to a refund of that component of the initial annual fee 
representing the remaining costs of administration of the registration 
program, but not those components of the initial annual fee representing 
the costs of processing the application, and, if applicable, the costs 
of conducting an inspection of the applicant's facilities.
    (3) Within 30 days from the date of the denial, the applicant may 
submit a petition for reconsideration. The applicant may submit 
information and/or documentation supporting its request. If the 
Administrator grants registration as a result of the request, (s)he 
notifies the applicant in writing and issues it a Registered Importer 
Number. If the Administrator denies registration, (s)he notifies the 
applicant in writing and refunds that component of the initial annual 
fee representing the remaining costs of administration of the 
registration program, but does not refund those components of the 
initial annual fee representing the costs of processing the application, 
and, if applicable, the costs of conducting an inspection.
    (f) In order to maintain its registration, a Registered Importer 
must file an annual statement. The Registered

[[Page 321]]

Importer must affirm in its annual statement that all information 
provided in its application or pursuant to Sec.  592.6(q), or as may 
have been changed in any notification that it has provided to the 
Administrator in compliance with Sec.  592.6(l), remains correct, and 
that it continues to comply with the requirements for being a Registered 
Importer. The Registered Importer must include with its annual statement 
a current copy of its service insurance policy. Such statement must be 
titled ``Yearly Statement of Registered Importer,'' and must be filed 
not later than September 30 of each year. A Registered Importer must 
also pay any annual fee, and any other fee that is established under 
part 594 of this chapter. An annual fee must be paid not later than 
September 30 of any calendar year for the fiscal year that begins on 
October 1 of that calendar year. The Registered Importer must pay any 
other fee not later than 15 days after the date of the written notice 
from the Administrator.
    (g) A registration granted under this part is not transferable.
    (h) An applicant whose application is pending on September 30, 2004, 
and which has not provided the information required by paragraph (a) of 
this section, as amended, must provide all the information required by 
that subsection before the Administrator will give further consideration 
to the application.

[54 FR 40090, Sept. 29, 1989, as amended at 54 FR 47088, Nov. 9, 1989; 
55 FR 37330, Sept. 11, 1990; 69 FR 52094, Aug. 24, 2004; 70 FR 57801, 
Oct. 4, 2005]



Sec.  592.6  Duties of a registered importer.

    Each Registered Importer must:
    (a) With respect to each motor vehicle that it imports into the 
United States, assure that the Administrator has decided that the 
vehicle is eligible for importation pursuant to part 593 of this 
chapter, prior to such importation. The Registered Importer must also 
bring such vehicle into conformity with all applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety standards prescribed under part 571 of this chapter and 
the bumper standard prescribed under part 581 of this chapter, if 
applicable, and furnish certification to the Administrator pursuant to 
paragraph (e) of this section, within 120 calendar days after such 
entry. For each motor vehicle, the Registered Importer must furnish to 
the Secretary of Homeland Security at the time of importation a bond in 
an amount equal to 150 percent of the dutiable value of the vehicle, as 
determined by the Secretary of Homeland Security, to ensure that such 
vehicle either will be brought into conformity with all applicable 
Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper standards or will be exported 
(at no cost to the United States) by the importer or the Secretary of 
Homeland Security or abandoned to the United States. However, if the 
Registered Importer has procured a continuous entry bond, it must 
furnish the Administrator with such bond, and must furnish the Secretary 
of Homeland Security (acting on behalf of the Administrator) with a 
photocopy of such bond and Customs Form CF 7501 at the time of 
importation of each motor vehicle.
    (b) Establish, maintain, and retain, for 10 years from the date of 
entry, at the facility in the United States it has identified in its 
application pursuant to Sec.  592.5 (a)(5)(i), for each motor vehicle 
for which it furnishes a certificate of conformity, the following 
records, including correspondence and other documents, in hard copy 
format:
    (1) The declaration required by Sec.  591.5 of this chapter.
    (2) All vehicle or equipment purchase or sales orders or agreements, 
conformance agreements between the Registered Importer and persons who 
import motor vehicles for personal use, and correspondence between the 
Registered Importer and the owner or purchaser of the vehicle.
    (3) The make, model, model year, odometer reading, and VIN of each 
vehicle that it imports and the last known name and address of the owner 
or purchaser of the vehicle.
    (4) Records, including photographs and other documents, sufficient 
to identify the vehicle and to substantiate that it has been brought 
into conformity with all Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper 
standards that apply to the vehicle, that the certification label has 
been affixed, and that either the vehicle is not subject to any

[[Page 322]]

safety recalls or that all noncompliances and safety defects covered by 
such recalls were remedied before the submission to the Administrator 
under paragraph (d) of this section. All photographs submitted shall be 
unaltered.
    (5) A copy of the certification submitted to the Administrator 
pursuant to paragraph (d) of this section.
    (6) The number that the issuer has assigned to the service insurance 
policy that will accompany the vehicle and the full corporate or other 
business name of the issuer of the policy, and substantiation that the 
Registered Importer has notified the issuer of the policy that the 
policy has been provided with the vehicle.
    (c) Take possession of the vehicle and perform all modifications 
necessary to conform the vehicle to all Federal motor vehicle safety and 
bumper standards that apply to the vehicle at a facility that it has 
identified to the Administrator pursuant to Sec.  592.5(a)(5)(i), and 
permanently affix to the vehicle at that facility, upon completion of 
conformance modifications and remedy of all noncompliances and defects 
that are the subject of any pending safety recalls, a label that 
identifies the Registered Importer and states that the Registered 
Importer certifies that the vehicle complies with all Federal motor 
vehicle safety and bumper standards that apply to the vehicle, and 
contains all additional information required by Sec.  567.4 of this 
chapter.
    (d) For each motor vehicle, certify to the Administrator:
    (1) Within 120 days of the importation that it has brought the motor 
vehicle into conformity with all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety 
and bumper standards in effect at the time the vehicle was manufactured 
by the fabricating manufacturer. Such certification shall state verbatim 
either that ``I know that the vehicle that I am certifying conforms with 
all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper standards because 
I personally witnessed each modification performed on the vehicle to 
effect compliance,'' or that ``I know that the vehicle I am certifying 
conforms with all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper 
standards because the person who performed the necessary modifications 
to the vehicle is an employee of [RI name] and has provided full 
documentation of the work that I have reviewed, and I am satisfied that 
the vehicle as modified complies.'' The Registered Importer shall also 
certify, as appropriate, that either:
    (i) The vehicle is not required to comply with the parts marking 
requirements of the theft prevention standard (part 541 of this 
chapter); or
    (ii) The vehicle complies with those parts marking requirements as 
manufactured, or as modified prior to importation.
    (2) If the Registered Importer certifies that the vehicle was 
originally manufactured to comply with a standard that does not apply to 
the vehicle or that it has modified the vehicle to conform to such 
standard, or if the certification is incomplete, the Administrator may 
refuse to accept the certification. The Administrator shall refuse to 
accept a certification for a vehicle that has not been determined to be 
eligible for importation under part 593 of this chapter. If the 
Administrator does not accept a submission, (s)he shall return it to the 
Registered Importer. The costs associated with such a return will be 
charged to the Registered Importer. If the Administrator returns the 
submission as described above and the vehicle is eligible for 
importation, the 120-day period specified in paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section continues to run, but the 30-day period specified in paragraph 
(f) of this section does not begin to run until the Administrator has 
accepted the submission. If the vehicle is not eligible for importation, 
the importer must export it from, or abandon it to, the United States. 
If the Registered Importer certifies that it has modified the vehicle to 
bring it into compliance with a standard and has, in fact, not performed 
all required modifications, the Administrator will regard such 
certification as ``knowingly false'' within the meaning of 49 U.S.C. 
30115 and 49 U.S.C. 30141(c)(4)(B).
    (3) The certification must be signed and submitted by a principal of 
the Registered Importer designated in its registration application 
pursuant to Sec.  592.5(a)(5)(iv), with an original hand-

[[Page 323]]

written signature and not with a signature that is stamped or 
mechanically applied.
    (4) The certification to the Administrator must specify the location 
of the facility where the vehicle was conformed, and the location where 
the Administrator may inspect the motor vehicle.
    (5) The certification to the Administrator must state and contain 
substantiation either that the vehicle is not subject to any safety 
recalls as of the time of such certification, or, alternatively, that 
all noncompliances and defects that are the subject of those safety 
recalls have been remedied.
    (6) When a Registered Importer certifies a make, model, and model 
year of a motor vehicle for the first time, its certification must 
include:
    (i) The make, model, model year and date of manufacture, odometer 
reading, VIN that complies with Sec.  565.4(b), (c), and (g) of this 
chapter, and Customs Entry Number,
    (ii) A statement that it has brought the vehicle into conformity 
with all Federal motor vehicle safety and bumper standards that apply to 
the vehicle, and a description, with respect to each standard for which 
modifications were needed, of the modifications performed,
    (iii) A copy of the bond given at the time of entry to ensure 
conformance with the safety and bumper standards,
    (iv) The vehicle's vehicle eligibility number, as stated in appendix 
A to part 593 of this chapter,
    (v) A copy of the HS-7 Declaration form executed at the time of its 
importation if a Customs broker did not make an electronic entry for the 
vehicle with the Bureau of Customs and Border Protection,
    (vi) Unaltered front, side, and rear photographs of the vehicle,
    (vii) Unaltered photographs of the original manufacturer's 
certification label and the certification label of the Registered 
Importer affixed to the vehicle (and, if the vehicle is a motorcycle, a 
photograph or photocopy of the Registered Importer certification label 
before it has been affixed),
    (viii) Unaltered photographs and documentation sufficient to 
demonstrate conformity with all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety 
and bumper standards to which the vehicle was not originally 
manufactured to conform,
    (ix) The policy number of the service insurance policy furnished 
with the vehicle pursuant to paragraph (g) of this section, and the full 
corporate or other business name of the insurer that issued the policy, 
and
    (x) A statement that the submission is the Registered Importer's 
initial certification submission for the make, model, and model year of 
the vehicle covered by the certification.
    (7) Except as specified in this paragraph, a Registered Importer's 
second and subsequent certification submissions for a given make, model, 
and model year vehicle must contain the information required by 
paragraph (d)(6) of this section. If the Registered Importer conformed 
such a vehicle in the same manner as it stated in its initial 
certification submission, it may say so in a subsequent submission and 
it need not provide the description required by paragraph (d)(6)(ii) of 
this section.
    (e) With respect to each motor vehicle that it imports, not take any 
of the following actions until the bond referred to in paragraph (a) of 
this section has been released, unless 30 days have elapsed from the 
date the Administrator receives the Registered Importer's certification 
of compliance of the motor vehicle in accordance with paragraph (d) of 
this section (the 30-day period will be extended if the Administrator 
has made written demand to inspect the motor vehicle):
    (1) Operate the motor vehicle on the public streets, roads, and 
highways for any purpose other than:
    (i) Transportation to and from a franchised dealership of the 
vehicle's original manufacturer for remedying a noncompliance or safety-
related defect; or
    (ii) Mileage accumulation to stabilize the vehicle's catalyst and 
emissions control systems in preparation for pre-certification testing 
to obtain an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) certificate of 
conformity, but only insofar as the vehicle has been imported by an 
Independent Commercial Importer (ICI) who holds a current certificate of 
conformity with the EPA, the ICI has imported the vehicle under an

[[Page 324]]

EPA Declaration form 3520-1 on which Code J is checked, and the EPA has 
granted the ICI written permission to operate the vehicle on public 
roads for that purpose.
    (2) Sell the motor vehicle or offer it for sale;
    (3) Store the motor vehicle on the premises of a motor vehicle 
dealer;
    (4) Title the motor vehicle in a name other than its own, or license 
or register it for use on public streets, roads, or highways; or
    (5) Release custody of the motor vehicle to a person for sale, or 
for license or registration for use on public streets, roads, and 
highways, or for titling in a name other than that of the Registered 
Importer who imported the vehicle.
    (f) Furnish with each motor vehicle for which it furnishes 
certification or information to the Administrator in accordance with 
paragraph (d) of this section, not later than the time it sells the 
vehicle, or releases custody of a vehicle to an owner who has imported 
it for personal use, a service insurance policy written or underwritten 
by an independent insurance company, in the amount of $2,000. The 
Registered Importer shall provide the insurance company with a monthly 
list of the VINs of vehicles covered by the policies of the insurance 
company, and shall retain a copy of each such list in its files.
    (g) Comply with the requirements of part 580 of this chapter, 
Odometer Disclosure Requirements, when the Registered Importer is a 
transferor of a vehicle as defined by Sec.  580.3 of this chapter.
    (h) With respect to any motor vehicle it has imported and for which 
it has furnished a performance bond, deliver such vehicle to the 
Secretary of Homeland Security for export, or abandon it to the United 
States, upon demand by the Administrator, if such vehicle has not been 
brought into conformity with all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety 
and bumper standards within 120 days from entry.
    (i)(1) With respect to any motor vehicle that it has imported or for 
which it has furnished a certificate of conformity or information to the 
Administrator as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, provide 
notification in accordance with part 577 of this chapter and a remedy 
without charge to the vehicle owner, after any notification under part 
573 of this chapter that a vehicle to which such motor vehicle is 
substantially similar contains a defect related to motor vehicle safety 
or fails to conform with an applicable Federal motor vehicle safety 
standard. However, this obligation does not exist if the manufacturer of 
the vehicle or the Registered Importer of such vehicle demonstrates to 
the Administrator that the defect or noncompliance is not present in 
such vehicle, or that the defect or noncompliance was remedied before 
the submission of the certificate or the information to the 
Administrator, or that the original manufacturer of the vehicle will 
provide such notification and remedy.
    (2) If a Registered Importer becomes aware (from whatever source) 
that the manufacturer of a vehicle it has imported will not provide a 
remedy without charge for a defect or noncompliance that has been 
determined to exist in that vehicle, within 30 days thereafter, the 
Registered Importer must inform NHTSA and submit a copy of the 
notification letter that it intends to send to owners of the vehicle(s) 
in question.
    (3) Any notification to vehicle owners sent by a Registered Importer 
must contain the information specified in Sec.  577.5 of this chapter, 
and must include the statement that if the Registered Importer's repair 
facility is more than 50 miles from the owner's mailing address, 
remedial repairs may be performed at no charge at a specific facility 
designated by the Registered Importer that is within 50 miles of the 
owner's mailing address, or, if no such facility is designated, that 
repairs may be performed anywhere, with the cost of parts and labor to 
be reimbursed by the Registered Importer.
    (4) Defect and noncompliance notifications by a Registered Importer 
must conform to the requirements of Sec. Sec.  577.7 and 577.8 of this 
chapter, and are subject to Sec. Sec.  577.9 and 577.10 of this chapter.
    (5) Except as provided in this paragraph, instead of the six 
quarterly reports required by Sec.  573.7(a) of this chapter, the 
Registered Importer must submit to the Administrator two reports

[[Page 325]]

containing the information specified in Sec.  573.7(b)(1) through (4) of 
this chapter. The reports shall cover the periods ending nine and 18 
months after the commencement of the owner notification campaign, and 
must be submitted within 30 days of the end of each period. However, the 
reporting requirements established by this paragraph shall not apply to 
any safety recall that a vehicle manufacturer conducts that includes 
vehicles for which the Registered Importer has submitted the information 
required by paragraph (d) of this section.
    (6) The requirement that the remedy be provided without charge does 
not apply if the motor vehicle was bought by its first purchaser from 
the Registered Importer (or, if imported for personal use, conformed 
pursuant to a contract with the Registered Importer) more than 10 
calendar years before the date the Registered Importer or the original 
manufacturer notifies the Administrator of the noncompliance or safety-
related defect pursuant to part 573 of this chapter.
    (j) In order that the Administrator may determine whether the 
Registered Importer is meeting its statutory responsibilities, allow 
representatives of NHTSA during operating hours, upon demand, and upon 
presentation of credentials, to copy documents, or to inspect, monitor, 
or photograph any of the following:
    (1) Any facility identified by the Registered Importer where any 
vehicle for which a Registered Importer has the responsibility of 
providing a certificate of conformity to the Administrator is being 
modified, repaired, tested, or stored, and any facility where any record 
or other document relating to the modification, repair, testing, or 
storage of these vehicles is kept;
    (2) Any part or aspect of activities relating to the modification, 
repair, testing, or storage of vehicles by the Registered Importer; and
    (3) Any motor vehicle for which the Registered Importer has provided 
a certification of conformity to the Administrator before the 
Administrator releases the conformance bond.
    (k) Provide an annual statement and pay an annual fee as required by 
Sec.  592.5(f).
    (l) Except as noted in this paragraph, notify the Administrator in 
writing of any change that occurs in the information which was submitted 
in its registration application, not later than the 30th calendar day 
after such change. If a Registered Importer intends to use a facility 
that was not identified in its registration application, not later than 
30 days before it begins to use such facility, it must notify the 
Administrator of its intent to use such facility and provide a 
description of the intended use, a copy of the lease or deed evidencing 
the Registered Importer's ownership or tenancy of the facility, and a 
copy of the license or similar document issued by an appropriate state 
or municipal authority stating that the Registered Importer is licensed 
to do business at that facility as an importer and/or modifier and/or 
seller of motor vehicles (or a statement that it has made a bona fide 
inquiry and is not required by state or local law to have such a license 
or permission), and a sufficient number of unaltered photographs of that 
facility to fully depict the Registered Importer's intended use. If a 
Registered Importer intends to change its street address or telephone 
number or discontinue use of a facility that was identified in its 
registration application, it shall notify the Administrator not less 
than 10 days before such change or discontinuance of such use, and 
identify the facility, if any, that will be used instead.
    (m) Assure that at least one full-time employee of the Registered 
Importer is present at at least one of the Registered Importer's 
facilities in the United States during normal business hours.
    (n) Not co-utilize the same employee, or any repair or conformance 
facility, with any other Registered Importer. If a Registered Importer 
co-utilizes the same storage facility with another Registered Importer 
or another entity, the storage area of each Registered Importer must be 
clearly delineated, and the vehicles being stored by each Registered 
Importer may not be mingled with vehicles for which that Registered 
Importer is not responsible.
    (o) Make timely, complete, and accurate responses to any requests by 
the

[[Page 326]]

Administrator for information, whether by general or special order or 
otherwise, to enable the Administrator to decide whether the Registered 
Importer has complied or is complying with 49 U.S.C. Chapters 301 and 
325, and the regulations issued thereunder.
    (p) Pay all fees either by certified check, cashier's check, money 
order, credit card, or Electronic Funds Transfer System made payable to 
the Treasurer of the United States, in accordance with the invoice of 
fees incurred by the Registered Importer in the previous month that is 
provided by the Administrator. All such fees are due and payable not 
later than 15 days from the date of the invoice.
    (q) Not later than November 1, 2004, file with the Administrator all 
information required by Sec.  592.5(a), as amended. If a Registered 
Importer has previously provided any item of information to the 
Administrator in its registration application, annual statement, or 
notification of change, it may incorporate that item by reference in the 
filing required under this subsection, provided that it clearly 
indicates the date, page, and entry of the previously-provided document.

[69 FR 52095, Aug. 24, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 57801, Oct. 4, 2005]



Sec.  592.7  Suspension, revocation, and reinstatement of suspended 
registrations.

    This section specifies the acts and omissions that may result in 
suspensions and revocations of registrations issued to Registered 
Importers by NHTSA, the process for such suspensions and revocations, 
and the provisions applicable to the reinstatement of suspended 
registrations.
    (a) Automatic suspension of a registration. 49 U.S.C. 30141(c)(4)(B) 
explicitly authorizes NHTSA to automatically suspend a registration when 
a Registered Importer does not, in a timely manner, pay a fee required 
by part 594 of this chapter or knowingly files a false or misleading 
certification under 49 U.S.C. 30146. NHTSA also may automatically 
suspend a registration under other circumstances, as specified in 
paragraphs (3), (4) and (5) of this section.
    (1) If the Administrator has not received the annual fee from a 
Registered Importer by the close of business on October 10 of a year, 
or, if October 10 falls on a weekend or holiday, by the next business 
day thereafter, or has not received any other fee owed by a Registered 
Importer within 15 calendar days from the date of the Administrator's 
invoice, the Registered Importer's registration will be automatically 
suspended at the beginning of the next business day. The Administrator 
will promptly notify the Registered Importer in writing of the 
suspension. Such suspension shall remain in effect until reinstated 
pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
    (2) If the Administrator decides that a Registered Importer has 
knowingly filed a false or misleading certification, (s)he shall 
promptly notify the Registered Importer in writing that its registration 
is automatically suspended. The notification shall inform the Registered 
Importer of the facts and conduct upon which the decision is based, and 
the period of suspension (which begins as of the date indicated in the 
Administrator's written notification). The notification shall afford the 
Registered Importer an opportunity to seek reconsideration of the 
decision by presenting data, views, and arguments in writing and/or in 
person, within 30 days. Not later than 30 days after the submission of 
data, views, and arguments, the Administrator, after considering all the 
information available, shall notify the Registered Importer in writing 
of his or her decision on reconsideration. Any suspension issued under 
this paragraph shall remain in effect until reinstated pursuant to 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
    (3) If mail is undeliverable to the Registered Importer at the 
official street address it has provided to the Administrator, or if the 
telephone has been disconnected at the telephone number specified by the 
Registered Importer, the Administrator may automatically suspend the 
Registered Importer's registration. Such suspension shall remain in 
effect until the registration is reinstated pursuant to paragraph (c)(3) 
of this section.
    (4) If a Registered Importer, not later than November 1, 2004, does 
not file

[[Page 327]]

with the Administrator all information required by Sec.  592.5(a), as 
required by Sec.  592.6(q), the Administrator may automatically suspend 
the registration. The Administrator shall promptly notify the Registered 
Importer in writing of the suspension. Such a suspension shall remain in 
effect until the registration is reinstated pursuant to paragraph (c)(4) 
of this section.
    (5) If a Registered Importer releases one or more motor vehicles on 
the basis of a forged or falsified bond release letter, and the 
Administrator has not in fact issued such a letter, the Administrator 
may automatically suspend the registration. The Administrator shall 
promptly notify the Registered Importer in writing of the suspension.
    (6) The Administrator, in his or her sole discretion, may provide 
notice of a proposed automatic suspension or revocation for reasons 
specified in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(5) of this section.
    (7) The notification shall afford the Registered Importer an 
opportunity to seek reconsideration of the decision by presenting data, 
views, and arguments in writing and/or in person, within 30 days of such 
notification, before a decision, as provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section. Not later than 30 days after the submission of data, views, and 
arguments, the Administrator, after considering all the information 
available, shall notify the Registered Importer in writing of his or her 
decision on reconsideration. Any automatic suspension issued under this 
paragraph shall remain in effect until reinstated pursuant to paragraph 
(c)(2) of this section.
    (b) Non-automatic suspension or revocation of a registration. (1) 49 
U.S.C. 30141(c)(4)(A) authorizes NHTSA to revoke or suspend a 
registration if a Registered Importer does not comply with a requirement 
of 49 U.S.C. 30141-30147, or any of 49 U.S.C. 30112, 30115, 30117-30122, 
30125(c), 30127, or 30166, or any regulations issued under these 
sections. These regulations include, but are not limited to, parts 567, 
568, 573, 577, 591, 593, and 594 of this chapter.
    (2) When the Administrator has reason to believe that a Registered 
Importer has violated one or more of the statutes or regulations cited 
in paragraph (b)(1) of this section and that suspension or revocation 
would be an appropriate sanction under the circumstances, (s)he shall 
notify the Registered Importer in writing of the facts giving rise to 
the allegation of a violation and the proposed length of a suspension, 
if applicable, or revocation. The notice shall afford the Registered 
Importer an opportunity to present data, views, and arguments, in 
writing and/or in person, within 30 days of the date of the notice, as 
to whether the violation occurred, why the registration ought not to be 
suspended or revoked, or whether the suspension should be shorter than 
proposed. If the Administrator decides, on the basis of the available 
information, that the Registered Importer has violated a statute or 
regulation, the Administrator may suspend or revoke the registration. 
The Administrator shall notify the Registered Importer in writing of the 
decision, including the reasons for it. A suspension or revocation is 
effective as of the date of the Administrator's written notification 
unless another date is specified therein. The Administrator shall state 
the period of any suspension in the notice to the Registered Importer. 
There shall be no opportunity to seek reconsideration of a decision 
issued under this paragraph.
    (c) Reinstatement of suspended registrations. (1) When a 
registration has been suspended under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, 
the Administrator will reinstate the registration when all fees owing 
are paid by wire transfer or certified check from a bank in the United 
States, together with a sum representing 10 percent of the amount of the 
fees that were not timely paid.
    (2) When a registration has been suspended under paragraph (a)(2) or 
(a)(5) of this section, the registration will be reinstated after the 
expiration of the period of suspension specified by the Administrator, 
or such earlier date as the Administrator may subsequently decide is 
appropriate.
    (3) When a registration has been suspended under paragraph (a)(3) of 
this section, the registration will be reinstated when the Administrator 
decides that the Registered Importer has provided a street address to 
which mail to

[[Page 328]]

it is deliverable and a telephone number in its name that is in service.
    (4) When a registration has been suspended under paragraph (a)(4) of 
this section, the registration will be reinstated when the Administrator 
decides that the Registered Importer has provided all relevant 
documentation and information required by Sec.  592.6(q).
    (5) When a registration has been suspended under paragraph (b) of 
this section, the registration will be reinstated after the expiration 
of the period of suspension specified by the Administrator, or such 
earlier date as the Administrator may subsequently decide is 
appropriate.
    (6) When a suspended registration has been reinstated, NHTSA shall 
notify the Bureau of Customs and Border Protection promptly.
    (7) If a Registered Importer imports a motor vehicle on or after the 
date that its registration is suspended and before the date that the 
suspension ends, the Administrator may extend the suspension period by 
one day for each day that the Registered Importer has imported a motor 
vehicle during the time that its registration has been suspended.
    (d) Effect of suspension or revocation. (1) If a Registered 
Importer's registration is suspended or revoked, as of the date of 
suspension or revocation the entity will not be considered a Registered 
Importer, will not have the rights and authorities appertaining thereto, 
and must cease importing, and will not be allowed to import, vehicles 
for resale. The Registered Importer will not be refunded any annual or 
other fees it has paid for the fiscal year in which its registration is 
revoked. The Administrator shall notify the Bureau of Customs and Border 
Protection of any suspension or revocation of a registration not later 
than the first business day after such action is taken.
    (2) With respect to any vehicle for which it has not affixed a 
certification label and submitted a certificate of conformity to the 
Administrator under Sec.  592.6(d) at the time it is notified that its 
registration has been suspended or revoked, the Registered Importer must 
affix a certification label and submit a certificate of conformity 
within 120 days from the date of entry.
    (3) When a registration has been revoked or suspended, the 
Registered Importer must export within 30 days of the effective date of 
the suspension or revocation all vehicles that it imported to which it 
has not affixed a certification label and furnished a certificate of 
conformity to the Administrator pursuant to Sec.  592.6(d).
    (4) With respect to any vehicle imported pursuant to Sec.  
591.5(f)(2)(ii) of this chapter that the Registered Importer has agreed 
to bring into compliance with all applicable standards and for which it 
has not certified and furnished a certificate of conformity to the 
Administrator, the Registered Importer must immediately notify the owner 
of the vehicle in writing that its registration has been suspended or 
revoked.
    (e) Continuing obligations. A Registered Importer whose registration 
is suspended or revoked remains obligated under Sec.  592.6(i) to notify 
owners and to remedy noncompliances or safety related defects for each 
vehicle for which it has furnished a certificate of conformity to the 
Administrator.

[69 FR 52098, Aug. 24, 2004]



Sec.  592.8  Inspection; release of vehicle and bond.

    (a) With respect to any motor vehicle for which it must provide a 
certificate of conformity to the Administrator as required by Sec.  
592.6(d), a Registered Importer shall not obtain title, licensing, or 
registration of the motor vehicle for use on the public roads, or 
release custody of it for such titling, licensing, or registration, 
except in accordance with the provisions of this section.
    (b) When conformance modifications to a motor vehicle have been 
completed, a Registered Importer shall submit the certification required 
by Sec.  592.6(d) to the Administrator. In certifying a vehicle that the 
Administrator has determined to be substantially similar to one that has 
been certified by its original manufacturer for sale in the United 
States, the Registered Importer may rely on any certification by the 
original manufacturer with respect to identical safety features if it 
also certifies that any modification that it undertook did not affect 
the compliance of such safety features. Each submission shall be mailed 
by certified

[[Page 329]]

mail, return receipt requested, or by private carriers such as Federal 
Express, to: Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration, Room 6115, 400 7th Street SW., Washington, DC, 20590, 
Attn: NEF-32, or be submitted electronically by FAX (202-366-1024), or 
in person. Each submission shall identify the location where the vehicle 
will be stored and is available for inspection, pending NHTSA action 
upon the submission.
    (c) Before the end of the 30th calendar day after receiving a 
complete certification under Sec.  592.6(d), the Administrator may 
notify the Registered Importer in writing that an inspection of the 
vehicle is required to verify the certification. Written notice includes 
a proposed inspection date, which is as soon as practicable. If 
inspection of the vehicle indicates that the vehicle has been properly 
certified, at the conclusion of the inspection the Registered Importer 
is provided an instrument of release. If inspection of the vehicle shows 
that the vehicle has not been properly certified, the Registered 
Importer shall either make the modifications necessary to substantiate 
its certification, and provide a new certification for the standard(s) 
in the manner provided for in paragraph (b) of this section, or deliver 
the vehicle to the Secretary of the Treasury for export, or abandon it 
to the United States. Before the end of the 30th calendar day after 
receipt of new certification, the Administrator may require a further 
inspection in accordance with the provisions of this subsection.
    (d) The Administrator may by written notice request the Registered 
Importer to verify its certification of a motor vehicle before the end 
of the 30th calendar day after the date the Administrator receives a 
complete certification under Sec.  592.6(d). If the basis for such 
request is that the certification is false or contains a 
misrepresentation, the Registered Importer shall be afforded an 
opportunity to present written data, views, and arguments as to why the 
certification is not false or misleading or does not contain a 
misrepresentation. The Administrator may require an inspection pursuant 
to paragraph (c) of this section. The motor vehicle and performance bond 
involved shall not be released unless the Administrator is satisfied 
with the certification.
    (e) If the Registered Importer has received no written notice from 
the Administrator by the end of the 30th calendar day after it has 
furnished a complete certification under section 592.6(d) of this 
chapter, the Registered Importer may release the vehicle from custody, 
sell or offer it for sale, or have it titled, licensed, or registered 
for use on the public roads.
    (f) If the Administrator accepts a certification without requiring 
an inspection, (s)he notifies the Registered Importer in writing, and 
provides a copy to the importer of record. Such notification shall be 
provided not later than the 25th calendar day after the Administrator 
has received such certification.
    (g) Release of the performance bond shall constitute acceptance of 
certification or completion of inspection of the vehicle concerned, but 
shall not preclude a subsequent decision by the Administrator pursuant 
to 49 U.S.C. 30118 that the vehicle fails to conform to any applicable 
Federal motor vehicle safety standard.

[54 FR 40090, Sept. 29, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37330, Sept. 11, 1990; 
59 FR 52098, Oct. 14, 1994; 69 FR 52100, Aug. 24, 2004]



Sec.  592.9  Forfeiture of bond.

    A Registered Importer is required by Sec.  591.6 of this chapter to 
furnish a bond with respect to each motor vehicle that it imports. The 
conditions of the bond are set forth in Sec.  591.8 of this chapter. 
Failure to fulfill any one of these conditions may result in forfeiture 
of the bond. A bond may be forfeited if the Registered Importer:
    (a) Fails to bring the motor vehicle covered by the bond into 
compliance with all applicable standards issued under part 571 and part 
581 of this chapter within 120 days from the date of entry;
    (b) Fails to file with the Administrator a certificate that the 
motor vehicle complies with each Federal motor vehicle safety, bumper, 
and theft prevention standard in effect at the time the vehicle was 
manufactured and which applies to the vehicle;

[[Page 330]]

    (c) Fails to cause a motor vehicle to be available for inspection if 
it has received written notice from the Administrator that an inspection 
is required;
    (d) Releases the motor vehicle before the Administrator accepts the 
certification and any modification thereof, if it has received written 
notice from the Administrator that there is reason to believe that the 
certification is false or contains a misrepresentation;
    (e) Before the bond is released, releases custody of the motor 
vehicle to any person for license or registration for use on public 
roads, streets, and highways, or licenses or registers the vehicle, 
including titling the vehicle in the name of another person, unless 30 
calendar days have elapsed after the Registered Importer has filed a 
complete certification under Sec.  592.6(d), and the Registered Importer 
has not received written notice pursuant to paragraph (a)(3) or (a)(4) 
of this section. For purposes of this part, a vehicle is deemed to be 
released from custody if it is not located at a duly identified facility 
of the Registered Importer and the Registered Importer has not notified 
the Administrator in writing of the vehicle's location or, if written 
notice has been provided, if the Administrator is unable to inspect the 
vehicle, or if the Registered Importer has transferred title to any 
other person regardless of the vehicle's location; or
    (f) Fails to deliver the vehicle, or cause it to be delivered, to 
the custody of the Bureau of Customs and Border Protection at any port 
of entry, for export or abandonment to the United States, and to execute 
all documents necessary to accomplish such purposes, if the 
Administrator has furnished it written notice that the vehicle has been 
found not to comply with all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety 
standards along with a demand that the vehicle be delivered for export 
or abandoned to the United States.

[69 FR 52100, Aug. 24, 2004]



PART 593_DETERMINATIONS THAT A VEHICLE NOT ORIGINALLY MANUFACTURED TO 
CONFORM TO THE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IS ELIGIBLE FOR 

IMPORTATION--Table of Contents




Sec.
593.1 Scope.
593.2 Purpose.
593.3 Applicability.
593.4 Definitions.
593.5 Petitions for eligibility determinations.
593.6 Basis for petition.
593.7 Processing of petitions.
593.8 Determinations on the agency's initiative.
593.9 Effect of affirmative determinations; lists.
593.10 Availability for public inspection.

Appendix A to Part 593--List of Vehicles Determined To Be Eligible for 
          Importation

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322 and 30141(b); delegation of authority at 49 
CFR 1.50.

    Source: 54 FR 40099, Sept. 29, 1989, unless otherwise noted.



Sec.  593.1  Scope.

    This part establishes procedures under section 108(c) of the 
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act, as amended (15 U.S.C. 
1397(c)), for making determinations whether a vehicle that was not 
originally manufactured to conform with all applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety standards, and is not otherwise eligible for importation 
under part 591 of this chapter, may be imported into the United States 
because it can be modified to meet the Federal standards.



Sec.  593.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to provide content and format 
requirements for any Registered Importer and manufacturer who wishes to 
petition the Administrator for a determination that a vehicle not 
originally manufactured to conform to all applicable Federal motor 
vehicle safety standards is eligible to be imported into the United 
States because it can be modified to meet the standards. The purpose of 
this part is also to specify procedures under which the Administrator 
makes eligibility determinations pursuant to

[[Page 331]]

those petitions as well as eligibility determinations on the agency's 
initiative.



Sec.  593.3  Applicability.

    This part applies to a motor vehicle that was not originally 
manufactured and certified by its original manufacturer to conform with 
all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standards and that is 
offered for importation into the United States.



Sec.  593.4  Definitions.

    All terms in this part that are defined in section 102 of the 
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act (15 U.S.C. 1391) are used 
as defined therein.
    Administrator means the Administrator of the National Highway 
Traffic Safety Administration.
    Model year means the year used by a manufacturer to designate a 
discrete vehicle model irrespective of the calendar year in which the 
vehicle was actually produced, or the model year as designated by the 
vehicle's country of origin, or, if neither the manufacturer nor the 
country of origin has made such a designation, the calendar year that 
begins on September 1 and ends on August 31 of the next calendar year.
    NHTSA means the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
    Registered Importer means any person who has been granted registered 
importer status by the Administrator pursuant to paragraph 592.5(b) of 
this chapter, and whose registration has not been revoked.



Sec.  593.5  Petitions for eligibility determinations.

    (a) A manufacturer or Registered Importer may petition the 
Administrator for a determination that a vehicle that does not comply 
with all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standards is eligible 
for importation, either
    (1) On the basis that the vehicle:
    (i) Is substantially similar to a vehicle which was originally 
manufactured for importation into and sale in the United States and 
which bore a certification affixed by its manufacturer pursuant to part 
567 of this chapter, and
    (ii) Is capable of being readily modified to conform to all 
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standards; or
    (2) On the basis that the vehicle has safety features that comply 
with or are capable of being modified to comply with all applicable 
Federal motor vehicle safety standards.
    (b) Each petition filed under this part must--
    (1) Be written in the English language;
    (2) Be headed with the words ``Petition for Import Eligibility 
Determination'' and submitted in three copies to: Administrator, 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Room 6115, 400 7th 
Street SW., Washington, DC 20590, Attn: NEF-32 Import Eligibility 
Determinations;
    (3) State the full name and address of the petitioner.
    (4) If the petitioner is a Registered Importer, include the 
Registered Importer Number assigned by NHTSA pursuant to part 592 of 
this chapter.
    (5) Set forth the basis for the petition and the information 
required by Sec.  593.6 (a) or (b), as appropriate;
    (6) Specify any part of the information and data submitted which 
petitioner requests be withheld from public disclosure in accordance 
with part 512 of this chapter; and
    (7) Submit a certified check payable to the Treasurer of the United 
States, for the amount of the vehicle eligibility petition fee 
established pursuant to part 594 of this chapter.
    (c) The knowing and willful submission of false, fictitious or 
fraudulent information may subject the petitioner to the criminal 
penalties of 18 U.S.C. 1001.

[54 FR 40099, Sept. 29, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37330, Sept. 11, 1990]



Sec.  593.6  Basis for petition.

    (a) If the basis for the petition is that the vehicle is 
substantially similar to a vehicle which was originally manufactured for 
importation into and sale in the United States, and which was certified 
by its manufacturer pursuant to part 567 of this chapter, and that it is 
capable of being readily modified to conform to all applicable Federal

[[Page 332]]

motor vehicle safety standards, the petitioner shall provide the 
following information:
    (1) Identification of the original manufacturer, model, and model 
year of the vehicle for which a determination is sought.
    (2) Identification of the original manufacturer, model, and model 
year of the vehicle which the petitioner believes to be substantially 
similar to that for which a determination is sought.
    (3) Substantiation that the manufacturer of the vehicle identified 
by the petitioner under paragraph (a)(2) of this section originally 
manufactured it for importation into and sale in the United States, and 
affixed a label to it certifying that it complied with all applicable 
Federal motor vehicle safety standards.
    (4) Data, views and arguments demonstrating that the vehicle 
identified by the petitioner under paragraph (a)(1) of this section is 
substantially similar to the vehicle identified by the petitioner under 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
    (5) With respect to each Federal motor vehicle safety standard that 
applied to the vehicle identified by the petitioner under paragraph 
(a)(2) of this section, data, views, and arguments demonstrating that 
the vehicle identified by the petitioner under paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section either was originally manufactured to conform to such standard, 
or is capable of being readily modified to conform to such standard.
    (b) If the basis of the petition is that the vehicle's safety 
features comply with or are capable of being modified to comply with all 
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standards, the petitioner shall 
provide the following information:
    (1) Identification of the model and model year of the vehicle for 
which a determination is sought.
    (2) With respect to each Federal motor vehicle safety standard that 
would have applied to such vehicle had it been originally manufactured 
for importation into and sale in the United States, data, views, and 
arguments demonstrating that the vehicle has safety features that comply 
with or are capable of being modified to conform with such standard. The 
latter demonstration shall include a showing that after such 
modifications, the features will conform with such standard.



Sec.  593.7  Processing of petitions.

    (a) NHTSA will review each petition for sufficiency under Sec. Sec.  
593.5 and 593.6. If the petition does not contain all the information 
required by this part, NHTSA notifies the petitioner, pointing out the 
areas of insufficiency, and stating that the petition will not receive 
further consideration until the required information is provided. If the 
additional information is not provided within the time specified by 
NHTSA in its notification, NHTSA may dismiss the petition as incomplete, 
and so notify the petitioner. When the petition is complete, its 
processing continues.
    (b) NHTSA publishes in the Federal Register, affording opportunity 
for comment, a notice of each petition containing the information 
required by this part.
    (c) No public hearing, argument, or other formal proceeding is held 
on a petition filed under this part.
    (d) If the Administrator is unable to determine that the vehicle in 
a petition submitted under Sec.  593.6(a) is one that is substantially 
similar, or (if it is substantially similar) is capable of being readily 
modified to meet the standards, (s)he notifies the petitioner, and 
offers the petitioner the opportunity to supplement the petition by 
providing the information required for a petition submitted under 
paragraph 593.6(b).
    (e) If the Administrator determines that the petition does not 
clearly demonstrate that the vehicle model is eligible for importation, 
(s)he denies it and notifies the petitioner in writing. (S)he also 
publishes in the Federal Register a notice of denial and the reasons for 
it. A notice of denial also states that the Administrator will not 
consider a new petition covering the model that is the subject of the 
denial until at least 3 months from the date of the notice of denial. 
There is no administrative reconsideration available for petition 
denials.
    (f) If the Administrator determines that the petition clearly 
demonstrates that the vehicle model is eligible for

[[Page 333]]

importation, (s)he grants it and notifies the petitioner. (S)he also 
publishes in the Federal Register a notice of grant and the reasons for 
it.

[54 FR 40099, Sept. 29, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37330, Sept. 11, 1990]



Sec.  593.8  Determinations on the agency's initiative.

    (a) The Administrator may make a determination of eligibility on his 
or her own initiative. The agency publishes in the Federal Register, 
affording opportunity for comment, a notice containing the information 
available to the agency (other than confidential information) relevant 
to the basis upon which eligibility may be determined.
    (b) No public hearing, argument, or other formal proceeding is held 
upon a notice published under this section.
    (c) The Administrator publishes a second notice in the Federal 
Register in which (s)he announces his or her determination whether the 
vehicle is eligible or ineligible for importation, and states the 
reasons for the determination. A notice of ineligibility also announces 
that no further determination for the same model of motor vehicle will 
be made for at least 3 months following the date of publication of the 
notice. There is no administrative reconsideration available for a 
decision of ineligibility.



Sec.  593.9  Effect of affirmative determinations; lists.

    (a) A notice of grant is sufficient authority for the importation by 
persons other than the petitioner of any vehicle of the same model 
specified in the grant.
    (b) The Administrator publishes annually in the Federal Register a 
list of determinations made under Sec. 593.7, and Sec. 593.8.



Sec.  593.10  Availability for public inspection.

    (a) Except as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, 
information relevant to a determination under this part, including a 
petition and supporting data, and the grant or denial of the petition or 
the making of a determination on the Administrator's initiative, is 
available for public inspection in the Docket Section, Room 5109, 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh St., SW., 
Washington, DC 20590. Copies of available information may be obtained, 
as provided in part 7 of this chapter.
    (b) Except for release of confidential information authorized under 
part 512 of this chapter, information made available for inspection 
under paragraph (a) of this section does not include information for 
which confidentiality has been requested and granted in accordance with 
part 512 of this chapter, and 5 U.S.C. 552(b). To the extent that a 
petition contains material relating to the methodology by which the 
petitioner intends to achieve conformance with a specific standard, the 
petitioner may request confidential treatment of such material on the 
grounds that it contains a trade secret or confidential information in 
accordance with part 512 of this chapter.



Sec. Appendix A to Part 593--List of Vehicles Determined To Be Eligible 
                             for Importation

    (a) Each vehicle on the following list is preceded by a vehicle 
eligibility number. The importer of a vehicle admissible under any 
eligibility decision must enter that number on the HS-7 Declaration Form 
accompanying entry to indicate that the vehicle is eligible for 
importation.
    (1) ``VSA'' eligibility numbers are assigned to all vehicles that 
are decided to be eligible for importation on the initiative of the 
Administrator under Sec. 593.8.
    (2) ``VSP'' eligibility numbers are assigned to vehicles that are 
decided to be eligible under Sec. 593.7(f), based on a petition from a 
manufacturer or registered importer submitted under Sec. 593.5(a)(1), 
which establishes that a substantially similar U.S.-certified vehicle 
exists.
    (3) ``VCP'' eligibility numbers are assigned to vehicles that are 
decided to be eligible under Sec. 593.7(f), based on a petition from a 
manufacturer or registered importer submitted under Sec. 593.5(a)(2), 
which establishes that the vehicle has safety features that comply with, 
or are capable of being altered to comply with, all applicable FMVSS.
    (b) Vehicles for which eligibility decisions have been made are 
listed alphabetically, first by make and then by model.
    (c) All hyphens used in the Model Year column mean ``through'' (for 
example, ``1988-1990'' means ``1988 through 1990'').
    (d) The initials ``MC'' used in the Make column mean ``Motorcycle.''
    (e) The initials ``SWB'' used in the Model Type column mean ``Short 
Wheel Base.''

[[Page 334]]

    (f) The initials ``LWB'' used in the Model Type column mean ``Long 
Wheel Base.''
    (g) For vehicles with a European country of origin, the term ``Model 
Year'' ordinarily means calendar year in which the vehicle was produced.
    (h) All vehicles are left-hand-drive (LHD) vehicles unless noted as 
RHD. The initials ``RHD'' used in the Model Type column mean ``Right-
Hand-Drive.''

 Vehicles Certified by Their Original Manufacturer as Complying With All
           Applicable Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
VSA-80.......................  (a) All passenger cars less than 25 years
                                old that were manufactured before
                                September 1, 1989;
                               (b) All passenger cars manufactured on or
                                after September 1, 1989, and before
                                September 1, 1996, that, as originally
                                manufactured, are equipped with an
                                automatic restraint system that complies
                                with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
                                Standard (FMVSS) No. 208;
                               (c) All passenger cars manufactured on or
                                after September 1, 1996, and before
                                September 1, 2002, that, as originally
                                manufactured, are equipped with an
                                automatic restraint system that complies
                                with FMVSS No. 208, and that comply with
                                FMVSS No. 214;
                               (d) All passenger cars manufactured on or
                                after September 1, 2002, and before
                                September 1, 2007, that, as originally
                                manufactured, are equipped with an
                                automatic restraint system that complies
                                with FMVSS No. 208, and that comply with
                                FMVSS Nos. 201, 214, 225, and 401;
                               (e) All passenger cars manufactured on or
                                after September 1, 2007, and before
                                September 1, 2008, that, as originally
                                manufactured, comply with FMVSS Nos.
                                110, 118, 138, 201, 208, 213, 214, 225,
                                and 401;
                               (f) All passenger cars manufactured on or
                                after September 1, 2008 and before
                                September 1, 2011 that, as originally
                                manufactured, comply with FMVSS Nos.
                                110, 118, 138, 201, 202a, 206, 208, 213,
                                214, 225, and 401;
                               (g) All passenger cars manufactured on or
                                after September 1, 2011 and before
                                September 1, 2012 that, as originally
                                manufactured, comply with FMVSS Nos.
                                110, 118, 126, 138, 201, 202a, 206, 208,
                                213, 214, 225, and 401.
VSA-81.......................  (a) All multipurpose passenger vehicles,
                                trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 4,536
                                kg (10,000 lb) or less that are less
                                than 25 years old and that were
                                manufactured before September 1, 1991;
                               (b) All multipurpose passenger vehicles,
                                trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 4,536
                                kg (10,000 lb) or less that were
                                manufactured on and after September 1,
                                1991, and before September 1, 1993 and
                                that, as originally manufactured, comply
                                with FMVSS Nos. 202 and 208;
                               (c) All multipurpose passenger vehicles,
                                trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 4,536
                                kg (10,000 lb) or less that were
                                manufactured on or after September 1,
                                1993, and before September 1, 1998, and
                                that, as originally manufactured, comply
                                with FMVSS Nos. 202, 208, and 216;
                               (d) All multipurpose passenger vehicles,
                                trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 4,536
                                kg (10,000 lb) or less that were
                                manufactured on or after September 1,
                                1998, and before September 1, 2002, and
                                that, as originally manufactured, comply
                                with FMVSS Nos. 202, 208, 214, and 216;
                               (e) All multipurpose passenger vehicles,
                                trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 4,536
                                kg (10,000 lb) or less that were
                                manufactured on or after September 1,
                                2002, and before September 1, 2007, and
                                that, as originally manufactured, comply
                                with FMVSS Nos. 201, 202, 208, 214, and
                                216, and, insofar as it is applicable,
                                with FMVSS No. 225;
                               (f) All multipurpose passenger vehicles,
                                trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 4,536
                                kg (10,000 lb) or less manufactured on
                                or after September 1, 2007 and before
                                September 1, 2008, that, as originally
                                manufactured, comply with FMVSS Nos.
                                110, 118, 201, 202, 208, 213, 214, and
                                216, and insofar as they are applicable,
                                with FMVSS Nos. 138 and 225;

[[Page 335]]

 
                               (g) All multipurpose passenger vehicles,
                                trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 4,536
                                kg (10,000 lb) or less manufactured on
                                or after September 1, 2008 and before
                                September 1, 2011, that, as originally
                                manufactured, comply with FMVSS Nos.
                                110, 118, 201, 202a, 206, 208, 213, 214,
                                and 216, and insofar as they are
                                applicable, with FMVSS Nos. 138 and 225;
                               (h) All multipurpose passenger vehicles,
                                trucks, and buses with a GVWR of 4,536
                                kg (10,000 lb) or less manufactured on
                                or after September 1, 2011 and before
                                September 1, 2012, that, as originally
                                manufactured, comply with FMVSS Nos.
                                110, 118, 126, 201, 202a, 206, 208, 213,
                                214, and 216, and insofar as they are
                                applicable, with FMVSS Nos. 138 and 225.
VSA-82.......................  All multipurpose passenger vehicles,
                                trucks, and buses with a GVWR greater
                                than 4,536 kg (10,000 lb) that are less
                                than 25 years old.
VSA-83.......................  All trailers and motorcycles less than 25
                                years old.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                            Vehicles Manufactured for Other Than the Canadian Market
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                             Model
             Make                   Model type(s)            Body           year(s)      VSP      VSA      VCP
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acura.........................  Legend...............  ................          1988       51  .......
Acura.........................  Legend...............  ................          1989       77  .......
Acura.........................  Legend...............  ................     1990-1992      305  .......
Alfa Romeo....................  164..................  ................          1989      196  .......
Alfa Romeo....................  164..................  ................          1991       76  .......
Alfa Romeo....................  164..................  ................          1994      156  .......
Alfa Romeo....................  GTV..................  ................          1985      124  .......
Alfa Romeo....................  Spider...............  ................          1987       70  .......
Alfa Romeo....................  Spyder...............  ................          1992      503  .......
Alpina........................  B12 5.0 Sedan........  ................     1988-1994  .......  .......       41
Aston Martin..................  Vanquish.............  ................     2002-2004      430  .......
Audi..........................  80...................  ................     1988-1989      223  .......
Audi..........................  100..................  ................          1989       93  .......
Audi..........................  100..................  ................          1993      244  .......
Audi..........................  100..................  ................     1990-1992      317  .......
Audi..........................  200 Quattro..........  ................          1985      160  .......
Audi..........................  A4...................  ................     1996-2000      352  .......
Audi..........................  A4, RS4, S4..........  8D..............     2000-2001      400  .......
Audi..........................  A6...................  ................     1998-1999      332  .......
Audi..........................  A8...................  ................          2000      424  .......
Audi..........................  A8...................  ................     1997-2000      337  .......
Audi..........................  A8 Avant Quattro.....  ................          1996      238  .......
Audi..........................  RS6 & RS Avant.......  ................          2003      443  .......
Audi..........................  S6...................  ................          1996      428  .......
Audi..........................  S8...................  ................          2000      424  .......
Audi..........................  TT...................  ................     2000-2001      364  .......
Bentley.......................  Arnage (manufactured   ................          2001      473  .......
                                 1/1/01-12/31/01).
Bentley.......................  Azure (LHD & RHD)....  ................          1998      485  .......
Bimota (MC)...................  DB4..................  ................          2000      397  .......
Bimota (MC)...................  SB8..................  ................     1999-2000      397  .......
BMW...........................  316..................  ................          1986       25  .......
BMW...........................  3 Series.............  ................          1998      462  .......
BMW...........................  3 Series.............  ................          1999      379  .......
BMW...........................  3 Series.............  ................          2000      356  .......  .......
BMW...........................  3 Series.............  ................          2001      379  .......
BMW...........................  3 Series.............  ................     1995-1997      248  .......
BMW...........................  3 Series.............  ................     2003-2004      487  .......
BMW...........................  318i, 318iA..........  ................          1986  .......       23
BMW...........................  318i, 318iA..........  ................     1984-1985  .......       23
BMW...........................  318i, 318iA..........  ................     1987-1989  .......       23
BMW...........................  320, 320i, 320iA.....  ................     1984-1985  .......       16
BMW...........................  320i.................  ................     1990-1991      283  .......
BMW...........................  323i.................  ................     1984-1985  .......       67
BMW...........................  325, 325i, 325iA,      ................     1985-1986  .......       30
                                 325E.
BMW...........................  325e, 325eA..........                       1984-1987  .......       24
BMW...........................  325i.................  ................          1991       96  .......
BMW...........................  325i.................  ................     1992-1996      197  .......
BMW...........................  325i, 325iA..........  ................     1987-1989  .......       30
BMW...........................  325iS, 325iSA........  ................     1987-1989  .......       31

[[Page 336]]

 
BMW...........................  325iX................  ................          1990      205  .......
BMW...........................  325iX, 325iXA........  ................     1988-1989  .......       33
BMW...........................  5 Series.............  ................          2000      345  .......
BMW...........................  5 Series.............  ................     1990-1995      194  .......
BMW...........................  5 Series.............  ................     1995-1997      249  .......
BMW...........................  5 Series.............  ................     1998-1999      314  .......
BMW...........................  5 Series.............  ................     2000-2002      414  .......
BMW...........................  5 Series.............  ................     2003-2004      450  .......
BMW...........................  518i.................  ................          1986        4  .......
BMW...........................  520iA................  ................          1989        9  .......
BMW...........................  524tdA...............  ................     1985-1986  .......       26
BMW...........................  525i.................  ................          1989        5  .......
BMW...........................  528e, 528eA..........  ................     1984-1988  .......       21
BMW...........................  528i, 528iA..........  ................          1984  .......       20
BMW...........................  533i, 533iA..........  ................          1984  .......       22
BMW...........................  535i, 535iA..........  ................     1985-1989  .......       25
BMW...........................  633CSi, 630CSiA......  ................          1984  .......       18
BMW...........................  635, 635CSi, 635CSiA.  ................          1984  .......       27
BMW...........................  635CSi, 635CSiA......  ................     1985-1989  .......       27
BMW...........................  7 Series.............  ................          1992      232  .......
BMW...........................  7 Series.............  ................     1990-1991      299  .......
BMW...........................  7 Series.............  ................     1993-1994      299  .......
BMW...........................  7 Series.............  ................     1995-1999      313  .......
BMW...........................  7 Series.............  ................     1999-2001      366  .......
BMW...........................  728, 728i............  ................     1984-1985  .......       70
BMW...........................  728i.................  ................          1986       14  .......
BMW...........................  730iA................  ................          1988        6  .......
BMW...........................  732i.................  ................          1984  .......       72
BMW...........................  733i, 733iA..........  ................          1984  .......       19
BMW...........................  735, 735i, 735iA.....  ................          1984  .......       28
BMW...........................  735i, 735iA..........  ................     1985-1989  .......       28
BMW...........................  745i.................  ................     1984-1986  .......       73
BMW...........................  8 Series.............  ................     1991-1995      361  .......
BMW...........................  850 Series...........  ................          1997      396  .......
BMW...........................  850i.................  ................          1990       10  .......
BMW...........................  All other passenger    ................     1984-1989  .......       78
                                 car models except
                                 those in the M1 and
                                 Z1 series.
BMW...........................  L7...................  ................     1986-1987  .......       29
BMW...........................  M3...................  ................     1988-1989  .......       35
BMW...........................  M3 (manufactured       ................          2006      520  .......
                                 prior to 9/1/06).
BMW...........................  M5...................  ................          1988  .......       34
BMW...........................  M6...................  ................     1987-1988  .......       32
BMW...........................  X5 (manufactured 1/1/  ................     2003-2004      459  .......
                                 03-12/31/04).
BMW...........................  Z3...................  ................     1996-1998      260  .......
BMW...........................  Z3 (European market).  ................          1999      483  .......
BMW...........................  Z8...................  ................          2002      406  .......
BMW...........................  Z8...................  ................     2000-2001      350  .......
BMW (MC)......................  C1...................  ................     2000-2003  .......  .......       40
BMW (MC)......................  K1...................  ................     1990-1993      228  .......
BMW (MC)......................  K100.................  ................     1984-1992      285  .......
BMW (MC)......................  K1100, K1200.........  ................     1993-1998      303  .......
BMW (MC)......................  K75..................  ................          1996  .......  .......       36
BMW (MC)......................  K75S.................  ................     1987-1995      229  .......
BMW (MC)......................  R1100................  ................     1994-1997      231  .......
BMW (MC)......................  R1100................  ................     1998-2001      368  .......
BMW (MC)......................  R1100RS..............  ................          1994      177  .......
BMW (MC)......................  R1150GS..............  ................          2000      453  .......
BMW (MC)......................  R1200C...............  ................     1998-2001      359  .......
BMW (MC)......................  R80, R100............  ................     1986-1995      295  .......
Buell (MC)....................  All Models...........  ................     1995-2002      399  .......
Cadillac......................  DeVille..............  ................     1994-1999      300  .......
Cadillac......................  DeVille (manufactured  ................          2000      448  .......
                                 8/1/99-12/31/00).
Cadillac......................  Seville..............  ................          1991      375  .......
Cagiva........................  Gran Canyon 900        ................          1999      444  .......
                                 motorcycle.
Carrocerias...................  Cimarron trailer.....  ................     2006-2007  .......  .......       37
Chevrolet.....................  400SS................  ................          1995      150  .......
Chevrolet.....................  Astro Van............  ................          1997      298  .......
Chevrolet.....................  Blazer...............  ................          1986      405  .......
Chevrolet.....................  Blazer (plant code of  ................          1997      349  .......
                                 ``K'' or ``2'' in
                                 the 11th position of
                                 the VIN).
Chevrolet.....................  Blazer (plant code of  ................          2001      461  .......
                                 ``K'' or ``2'' in
                                 the 11th position of
                                 the VIN).

[[Page 337]]

 
Chevrolet.....................  Camaro...............  ................          1999      435  .......
Chevrolet.....................  Cavalier.............  ................          1997      369  .......
Chevrolet.....................  Corvette.............  ................          1992      365  .......
Chevrolet.....................  Corvette Coupe.......  ................          1999      419  .......
Chevrolet.....................  Suburban.............  ................     1989-1991      242  .......
Chevrolet.....................  Tahoe................  ................          2000      504  .......
Chevrolet.....................  Tahoe................  ................          2001      501  .......
Chevrolet.....................  Trailblazer            ................          2007      514  .......
                                 (manufactured prior
                                 to 9/1/07 for sale
                                 in the Kuwaiti
                                 market).
Chrysler......................  Daytona..............  ................          1992      344  .......
Chrysler......................  Grand Voyager........  ................          1998      373  .......
Chrysler......................  LHS (Mexican market).  ................          1996      276  .......
Chrysler......................  Shadow (Middle         ................          1989      216  .......
                                 Eastern market).
Chrysler......................  Town and Country.....  ................          1993      273  .......
Citroen.......................  XM...................  ................     1990-1992  .......  .......        1
Daimler.......................  Limousine (LHD & RHD)  ................          1985       12  .......
Dodge.........................  Ram..................  ................     1994-1995      135  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  748..................  ................     1999-2003      421  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  851..................  ................          1988      498  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  888..................  ................          1993      500  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  900..................  ................          2001      452  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  916..................  ................     1999-2003      421  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  600SS................  ................     1992-1996      241  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  748 Biposto..........  ................     1996-1997      220  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  900SS................  ................     1991-1996      201  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  996 Biposto..........  ................     1999-2001      475  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  996R.................  ................     2001-2002      398  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  Monster 600..........  ................          2001      407  .......
Ducati (MC)...................  ST4S.................  ................     1999-2005      474  .......
Eagle.........................  Vision...............  ................          1994      323  .......
Ferrari.......................  360..................  ................          2001      376  .......
Ferrari.......................  456..................  ................          1995      256  .......
Ferrari.......................  550..................  ................          2001      377  .......
Ferrari.......................  575..................  ................     2002-2003      415  .......
Ferrari.......................  599 (manufactured      ................          2006      518  .......
                                 prior to 9/1/06).
Ferrari.......................  575..................  ................     2004-2005      507  .......
Ferrari.......................  208, 208 Turbo (all    ................     1984-1988  .......       76
                                 models).
Ferrari.......................  308 (all models).....  ................     1984-1985  .......       36
Ferrari.......................  328 (all models).....  ................          1985  .......       37
Ferrari.......................  328 (all models).....  ................     1988-1989  .......       37
Ferrari.......................  328 GTS..............  ................     1986-1987  .......       37
Ferrari.......................  348 TB...............  ................          1992       86  .......
Ferrari.......................  348 TS..........